CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Group 1 Elements (Alkali Metals) Introduction

All the alkali metals have one valence electron ( ns¹ ) outside the noble gas core. The loosely held s -electronin the outermost valence shell makes them the most electropositive metals.

  • To get the stable electronic configurations of noble gases, they readily lose the valence electron to generate the monovalent (M+) ions. Hence, they are never found in a free state but in the combined state of nature.
  • Since the last electron enters ns -orbital, these are called s -block elements.
  • Since all these elements have similar valence shells or outer electronic configurations, all the alkali metals exhibit a striking resemblance in their physical and chemical properties and they are placed in a definite group (Gr-1).
  • Lithium shows some abnormal behavior as its electronic configuration is slightly different from the rest of the members of Gr-1 and also because of its extremely small atomic and ionic radii.

Again, lithium shows some similarities with magnesium present in the group- 2 of the third period

Electronic configuration of alkali metals: 

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Electronic Configuration Of Alkali Metals

Occurrence Of Alkali Metals

  • Since the alkali metals are highly reactive, they do not exist in a free state. In nature, they mostly occur as compounds like halides, oxides, silicates, borates, and nitrates.
  • According to abundance, lithium is placed at the 35th position. It mainly occurs in nature in the tire form of silicates,
  • For example: Spodumene: LiAl(SiO3)2 and Lepidolite: Li2Al2(SiO3)3(F, OH)2
  • Sodium and potassium are respectively placed at 7th and 8th position in order of their abundance. Sea water is a major source of NaCl and KCl.
  • Sodium is abundantly present in the form of rock salt (NaCl). Other important minerals are Chile salt petre: NaNO3, borax: Na2B4O7.10H2O, mirabilite: Na2SO4, and trona: Na2CO3-NaHCO3-2H2O.
  • Important ores of potassium are sylvite: KCl, carnallite: KCl-MgCl2-6H2O, and feldspar: (K2O-Al2O3-6SiO2).
  • Rubidium and cesium are much less abundant than lithium. Radioactive francium does not occur appreciably in nature. It is obtained from the radioactive decay of actinium
  • 227Ac 89223Fr87  +4HeIts longest-lived isotope 223Fr87  has a half¬life period of only 21 minutes.
  • Since most of the compounds of alkali metals are water soluble, they are found in adequate amounts in seawater.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes Chapter 10 S Block Elements

General Trends In Atomic And Physical Flv Properties Of Alkali Metals

The alkali metals show regular trends in their physical and chemical properties with an increase in atomic number. Some important atomic and physical properties of alkali metals are given in the following table:

Atomic and physical properties of alkali metals:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Atomic And Physical Properties Of Alkali Metals

General trends in different atomic and physical properties of alkali metals and their explanations:

1. Atomic and ionic radii 

The atomic and ionic radii of alkali metals are the largest in their respective periods and these values further increase on moving down the group from Li to Cs.

Atomic and ionic radii  Explanation:

On moving from left to right in a period, the number of electronic shells remains the same but the nuclear charge increases with each succeeding element Thus, the valence shell electrons experience a greater pull towards the nucleus and this results in successive decreases in atomic and ionic radii with an increase in atomic number

  • Thus, the atomic and ionic radii of alkali metals are the largest in their respective periods.
  • On moving down the group, a new electronic shell is ) added to each element and the nuclear charge increases with an increase in atomic number.
  • The addition of an electronic shell tends to increase the size of the atom but the increase in nuclear charge tends to decrease the atomic radii by attracting the electron cloud inward. Thus, the two factors oppose each other.
  • However, the increase in the number of shells increases the screening effect of the inner electrons on the outermost s -electron and as the screening effect is, quite large, it overcomes the contractive effect of the increased nuclear charge.
  • The net result is an increase in atomic and ionic radii down the group from Li to Cs.

2. Ionization enthalpy

The first ionization enthalpies of alkali metals are the lowest in their respective periods. Explanation: Since the alkali metal atoms are largest in their respective periods, their outermost electrons being far away from the nucleus experience less force of attraction and hence, can be removed easily.

1. Ionization enthalpy of group-1 alkali metals decreases down the group.

Explanation:

Since the alkali metal atoms are largest in their respective periods, their outermost electrons being far away from the nucleus experience less force of attraction and hence, can be removed easily.

2. Ionisation enthalpy7 of group-1 alkali metals decreases down the group

Explanation:

On moving down the group from Li to Cs, the distance of the valence s-electron from the nucleus progressively increases due to the addition of a new shell with each succeeding element With an increase in the number of inner shells, the screening effects progressively increase and as a result, the effective nuclear charge experienced by the valence electron progressively decreases and hence, the ionization enthalpies decrease down the group.

3. The second ionization enthalpies of alkali metals are very high.

Explanation:

The monovalent cation formed by the removal of an electron from the alkali metal atom has a very stable noble gas configuration,

For example – 

  1. Li+: 1s2 or [He], Na+: 1s22s22p
  2. [Ne], k+: 1s22s22p63s23p6 or [Ar] etc.

Removal of another electron from the monovalent ion having a stable noble gas configuration is very difficult and requires a huge amount of energy. For this reason, the second ionization enthalpies of alkali metals are very high.

3. Hydration of ions, hydrated radii, and hydration enthalpy

The salts of alkali metals are generally ionic and are soluble in water because the cations get hydrated in water to form hydrated cations: M+ + aq —> [M(aq)]+.

1. The degree of hydration of ions and the hydrated radii decrease as we move down the group

Explanation:

The smaller the cation, the greater its degree of hydration. Since ionic radii increase down the group, the degree of hydration decreases, and consequently, the radii of die-hydrated ions decrease from Li+ to Cs+.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Hydrated Ions

2. The order of mobilities of die alkali metal ions in aqueous solution is: Li+ < Na+ < K+ < Rb+ < Cs+

Explanation:

Smaller ions are more easily hydrated. As Li+ is the smallest ion among the given ions, it is most easily hydrated and has the least ionic mobility in an aqueous solution whereas Cs+ is the largest and is least hydrated. So its mobility is die highest.

3. Ionic conductance of the hydrated ions increases from [Li(m7)]+ to [Cs(aq)]+.

Explanation:

The ionic conductance of these hydrated ions increases from [Li(aq)]+ to [Cs(ag)]+ because die size decreases and mobility increases in this order. Hydration of ions is an exothermic process. The energy released when 1 gram-mol of an ion undergoes hydration is called hydration energy or hydration enthalpy,

4. Hydration enthalpy of alkali metal ions decreases from Li+ to Cs+.

Explanation:

The hydration enthalpy of an ion depends upon the ratio of charge to radius (q: r). Since the radii of alkali metal ions increase down the group, the hydration enthalpies decrease from Li+ to Cs+. Li+ ion has the maximum degree of hydration and for this reason, most of the lithium salts are found to be hydrated

For example: LiCl-2H2O, LiClO4-3H2O etc.

4. Oxidation State

Alkali metals exhibit a +1 oxidation state in their compounds and it remains restricted in a +1 state only.

Oxidation State Explanation: 

Alkali metals have low ionization enthalpies and by losing their valence s -electrons they acquire the stable electronic configurations of the nearest noble gases. Thus, they have a strong tendency to form M+ ions and exhibit a +1 oxidation state in their compounds.

The second ionization enthalpies required to pull out another electron from M+ ions having very unstable noble gas electronic configuration are very high indeed and are not available under the conditions of chemical bond formation. Hence,v the alkali metals do not form M2+ ions, i.e. their oxidation state remains restricted to +1 state.

5. Metallic character

The elements of this group are typical metals that are soft (can be easily cut with a knife) and light. When freshly cut, they are silvery white but on exposure to air, they turn tarnished. The metallic character, which refers to the level of reactivity of a metal, increases on moving down the group.

Metallic character Explanation:

As the ionization enthalpy decreases down the group,  the tendency to lose the valence electron increases, and consequently, the metallic character increases.

6. Photoelectric effect

Alkali metals (except Li) exhibit a photoelectric effect. The emission of electrons from the surface of a metal exposed to electromagnetic radiations of suitable wavelength is called the photoelectric effect.

S Block Elements Class 11 NCERT Notes

Photoelectric effect Explanation:

Due to low ionization enthalpies, the alkali metals exhibit a photoelectric effect. It is to be noted that lithium having the highest ionisation enthalpy does not exhibit a photoelectric effect. Cesium having the lowest ionisation enthalpy possesses the highest tendency to exhibit a photoelectric effect.

Potassium anti-cesium, rather than lithium is used in photoelectric cells:

The ionization enthalpies of potassium and cesium are much lower than that of lithium. For this reason, these two metals on exposure to light easily emit electrons from their surface but lithium does not. Hence, potassium and cesium rather than lithium are used in photoelectric cells.

7. Electronegativity

The alkali metals have low electronegativity which further decreases down the group.

Electronegativity Explanation:

The alkali metals having ns¹ electronic configuration preferably show electron releasing tendency rather than electron accepting. Thus, they have low electronegativities. Since the atomic sizes increase down the group, the tendency of atoms to hold their valence electrons decreases down the group, and consequently, electronegativity decreases down the group.

8. Conductivity

Alkali metals are good conductors of heat and electricity.

Conductivity Explanation:

Due to the presence of loosely bound valence electrons (ns¹) which are free to move throughout the metal structure, the alkali metals are good conductors of heat and electricity.

9. Melting and boiling points 

Melting and boiling points: Melting and boiling points of alkali metals are low and decrease down tire group.

Melting and boiling point Explanation:

The cohesive energy that binds the atoms in the crystal lattices of these metals is relatively low (weak metallic bonding) due to the presence of only one valence electron (ns¹) which can take part in bonding. Hence, their melting and boiling points are low. These further decrease down the group as the strength of the metallic bonds and cohesive energy decrease with increasing atomic size.

10. Nature of bonds formed

Alkali metals form ionic compounds and the ionic character of compounds increases down the group from Li to Cs.

Nature of bonds formed Explanation:

For low ionization enthalpies, alkali metals readily form monovalent cations by losing their valence electrons. As ionization enthalpies decrease down the group, the ionic character of the compounds increases down the group.

11. Density

The densities of alkali metals are quite low and increase down the group from Li to Cs.

Density Explanation:

Due to their large atomic size and weak metallic bond, alkali metals have low density. Both the atomic volume and the atomic mass increase down the group but the corresponding increase in atomic mass is not balanced by the increase in atomic volume. As a result, the densities of alkali metals increase down the group. However, the density of K is less than that of Na because the atomic size and atomic volume of potassium are quite higher than that of sodium. As a result, the ratio of mass/ volume decreases.

Li is the lightest metal having a density of 0.53 g. cm-3. It cannot be preserved in kerosene because it floats over it. Generally kept wrapped in paraffin wax.

12. Flame coloration

Alkali metals or their salts on heating in the flame of the bunsen burner, impart characteristic colors and they can be easily identified from the color of the flame

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Flame Colouration

Flame coloration Explanation:

Ionization enthalpies of alkali metals are not much higher. Thus, when an alkali metal or its salt (especially chloride due to its more volatile nature) is heated in a Bunsen burner flame, the electrons in the valence shell get excited and jump to higher energy levels by absorbing energy. When the excited electron drops back to its ground state, the emitted radiation falls in the visible region and as a result, alkali metals or their salts impart color to the flame.

Alkali metals can be detected by flame tests and can be estimated by flame photometry or atomic absorption spectroscopy.

13. Softness

Alkali metals are soft (can be cut easily with die help of a knife) and their softness increases down the group.

Softness Explanation:

The softness of alkali metals is due to their low cohesive energy and weak metallic bonding. Further, on moving down the group, the strength of metallic bonding decreases due to an increase in atomic size and as a result, the softness of the metals increases down the group.

Chemical Properties Of Alkali Metals

Alkali metals are highly reactive. Such reactivity may be attributed to their large atomic size, low ionization enthalpies, and low heats of atomization. –

Action of air and moisture

Alkali metals, being highly reactive, react readily with atmospheric oxygen to form oxides. These oxides further react with moisture to form hydroxides which in turn produce carbonates by reacting with atmospheric CO2

Metal oxides also react with CO2 to form carbonates.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Action Of Air And Moisture

These metals lose their glossiness and become tarnished due to the formation of carbonate layers on their surface. To protect from atmospheric oxygen and moisture, these metals are always stored in inert hydrocarbon solvents such as kerosene, petroleum ether, etc.

Reaction with oxygen

When the alkali metals are heated with oxygen or excess air, they form different types of oxides depending upon the nature of the metal involved. Lithium mainly forms monoxide (Li2O), sodium forms peroxide (Na2O2), and the other alkali metals (K, Rb, and Cs) mainly form superoxides having the general formula MO2. The temperature required for the reaction decreases down the group from Li to Cs.

4Li + O2 → 2Li2 O2 (Lithium monoxide)

2Na + O2 → Na2O2 (Sodium peroxide)

M +O2 → MO2 (Superoxide) [here, M = K, Rb, Cs]

 Oxygen Explanation

A smaller cation can stabilize a smaller anion while a larger cation can stabilize a larger anion. If both the ions are similar in size, the coordination number will be high and this results in higher lattice energy.

A cation having a weak positive electric field can stabilize an anion having a weak negative electric field. Li ion and oxide ion (O2-) have small ionic radii and high charge densities. Hence, these small ions combine to form a very’ stable lattice of Li2O.

Sodium forms peroxide (Na2O2) but potassium forms superoxide (KO2), even though the peroxide ion,  CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Peroxide is larger in size than the superoxide ion, CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements SuperoxideThis can be explained in terms of charge densities. Due to the bigger size

Na+ ion has a weaker positive field around It and therefore it can stabilise peroxide Ion which also has a weaker negative field around it. Thus, Na+ forms peroxide. K+ ion is still bigger in size and the magnitude of the positive field around it is much weaker so it can’t stabilize superoxide ion which also has a much weaker negative field around it. Hence, K forms superoxide.

According to valence bond theory, two O-atoms in superoxide ion (O2) are attached by a 2- 2-electron bond (common covalent bond) and a 2-electron bond. As the unpaired electron is present in the 2-electron bond, the superoxide ion is paramagnetic and all tire superoxides are colored (LiO2 and NaO2 are yellow, KO2 & CsO2 are orange, RbO2 is brown).

According to MO theory, there is an unpaired electron in one of the n antibonding orbitals and because of this, the superoxide ion is paramagnetic. The electronic configuration of O2

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Paramagnetic In Nature Of Electronic Configuration

O2 ion present in common oxides [For example,  Li2O, NaO2etc.) and the 02~ ion in peroxides (For example,  Na2O2), contain no unpaired electron and for this reason, these are diamagnetic and colorless.

Reaction with water

The alkali metals having high negative reduction potentials (E°) can act as a better-reducing agent than hydrogen. Hence, they react with water to form water-soluble hydroxides and liberate hydrogen gas.

2M + 2H2O → 2MOH + H2T [M = alkali metal]

Reactivity with water increases down the group as the electropositive character of the metals increases clown the group. Lithium decomposes water slowly. Sodium reacts with water vigorously. K, Rb, and Cs react with water explosively and the evolved hydrogen gas catches fire.

Alkali metals also react with compounds containing acidic H-atoms

For example:  halogen halides (HX), alcohols (ROH), acetylene HC=CH, etc., to form their corresponding salts and H2

2Na + 2HX → 2NaX  (Sodium halide) + H2

Li + 2C2H5OH → 2 C2 H5 OLi (Lithium ethoxide) + H2

2Na + 2HC=CH →  2NaC = CH (Sodium acetylide)+ H2

The standard electrode potential of Li is most negative while that of sodium is least negative i.e., in the reaction with water, Li releases a greater amount of heat than sodium. Despite that, Li reacts less vigorously with water than Na. j This can be explained concerning chemical kinetics. Na has a low melting point and the heat of the reaction is sufficient j to melt it. Molten metal spreads out and exposes a relatively large surface to water and as a result, it reacts with water 1 readily and violently. On the other hand, the melting point of Li is much higher and the heat of the reaction is not sufficient to melt it. Hence, its surface area does not increase and it reacts slowly with water.

NCERT Solutions Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 10 S Block Elements

Reaction with dihydrogen

All alkali metals react with dihydrogen at about 673 K (Li at 1073 K) to form colorless, crystalline hydrides (MH). These hydrides have a high melting point.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Reaction With Dihydrogen

1. The reactivity of the alkali metals towards dihydrogen decreases down the group.

Explanation:

As the size of the metal cation increases down the group, the lattice energy of the hydrides decreases down the group. Consequently, the reactivity of the alkali metals towards hydrogen decreases down the group,

2. The ionic character of the alkali metal hydrides increases from Li to Cs.

Explanation:

Since the ionization enthalpy of alkali metals decreases down the group, the tendency to form cations as well as the ionic character of the hydrides increases.

Reaction with halogens

All alkali metals react vigorously with halogens to form crystalline halide compounds having the general formula MX. Lithium halides are covalent due to the very high polarising power of the Li+ ion. Halides of other alkali metals are ionic in nature’

⇒ \(2 \mathrm{M}+\mathrm{X}_2 \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{M}^{+} \mathrm{X}^{-}\) ( X = F, Cl, Br or I)

The reactivity of the alkali metals towards a particular halogen increases down the group.  Due to a decrease in ionization enthalpies or an increase in the electropositive character of the metals down the group, the reactivity increases down the group.

The reactivity of halogens towards a particular alkali metal decreases in the order:

F2> Cl2 > Br2 > I2

Reducing nature

The alkali metals act as strong reducing agents because of their low ionization enthalpies. Since the ionization enthalpies decrease on moving down the group, therefore, in the free state the reducing power also increases in the same order, i.e., Li  < Na < K < Rb < Cs.

The tendency of a metal to lose an electron in solution is measured by its standard electrode potential (E°). The alkali metals have low values (higher negative values) of E° and so they have a strong tendency to lose electrons and can act as strong reducing agents. Lithium, although, has the highest ionization enthalpy, is the strongest reducing agent in solution (E° = -3.04 V). On the other hand, Na is the weakest reducing agent and the reducing character increases from Na to Cs, i.e., Na < K < Rb < Cs.

Explanation of anomalous behavior of lithium

The anomalous behavior of lithium can be explained because the ionization enthalpy is the property of an isolated atom in the gaseous state while the standard electrode potential is concerned when the metal atom goes into solution.

The ionization enthalpy involves the change:

M(g) → M++(g) + e, while the standard electrode potential involves the change: M(s) → M+(aq) + e.

The latter change occurs in three steps as follows:

  1. M(s)→ M(g) – sublimation enthalpy
  2. M(g)→ M+(g) + e – ionisation enthalpy
  3. M+ (g) + H9O → M+(aq) + hydration enthalpy

The overall tendency for the change depends on the net effect of these three steps. Among the alkali metal cations, Li+ ion has the maximum tendency to get hydrated due to its very small size. The high hydration enthalpy compensates the energy required in the first two steps to a large extent and the overall energy required to convert M(s) to M+ (aq) is minimum for lithium.

Thus, small size and high hydration enthalpy are responsible for the strong reducing character of lithium.

The solution in liquid ammonia

Alkali metals dissolve in liquid ammonia to give highly conducting deep blue solutions which are highly reducing and paramagnetic. As the concentration increases (> 3M), the color of the solution changes to copper-bronze. These concentrated solutions are diamagnetic.

Solution in liquid ammonia Explanation:

1. When an alkali metal is dissolved in liquid v ammonia, ammoniated cations, and ammoniated electrons are formed as shown below:

M + (x+ y)NH3 →  [M(NH3)x]+ (Ammoniated cation) + [e(NH3)y](Ammoniated electron)

2. The blue color of these solutions is due to the excitation of the free ammoniated electrons to higher energy levels by absorbing energy corresponding to the red region of visible light.  The transmitted light is blue which imparts a blue color to the solutions.

3. With the increase in the concentration of the alkali metal, the formation of clusters of metal ions starts and because of this, at a much higher concentration (> 3M) the solutions possess metallic luster and attain the color of copper-bronze.

4. These blue solutions are highly conducting because of the presence of ammoniated electrons and ammoniated cations but the conductivity decreases with increasing concentration as the ammoniated cations get attached to the free unpaired electrons.

5. These blue solutions are paramagnetic due to the presence of unpaired electrons. However, tire paramagnetism decreases with increasing concentration due to the association of ammoniated electrons to yield diamagnetic species.

6. The free ammoniated electrons make these solutions very powerful reducing agents.

7. These solutions when kept, form metal amides and release H2. However, these solutions can be stored in anhydrous conditions in the absence of impurities like Fe, Pt, Zn, etc.

M+(am) + e(am) + NH3(l)→ MNH2(am) + ½H2(g)

Where ‘am’ stands for ‘solution in ammonia

2M + 2NH3→ 2MNH2 (metal amide)+ H2

Extraction of alkali metals

Alkali metals cannot be extracted by applying common processes used for the extraction of other metals.

Alkali metals Explanation:

  • The alkali metals are strong reducing agents. Hence, they cannot be extracted by reduction of their oxides or other compounds.
  • Since they are highly electropositive, the method of displacing them from their salts by any other element is not possible.
  • The aqueous solution of their salts cannot be used for extraction by electrolytic method because hydrogen, instead of the alkali metal is discharged at the cathode (discharge potentials of alkali metals are much higher).
  • However, by using Hg as a cathode, the alkali metals can be deposited but in that case, the alkali metals readily combine with mercury to form amalgams from which the recovery of metals becomes quite difficult.
  • The electrolysis of their fused salts (usually chlorides) is the only successful method for their extraction, Another metal . ‘ chloride is generally added to lower its fusion temperature

General Characteristics Of The Compounds Of Alkali Metals

The compounds of alkali metals are predominantly ionic. Some of the general characteristics of these compounds are described below.

1. Oxides and hydroxides

1. Typical oxides or monoxides of alkali metals

For example: Li2O and Na2O are white ionic solids and basic. These oxides react with water to form strong alkalis (MOH).

Example:  Na2O + HO → 2NaOH

2. All peroxides are strong oxidizing agents. They react with water or acid to give hydrogen peroxide (H2O2) and the corresponding metal hydroxide. Na2O2 is widely used as an oxidizing agent in inorganic chemistry.

M2O2 + 2H2O →  2MOH + H2O2

Example: Na2O2 + 2H2O2→ 2NaOH + H2O2

3. Superoxides are stronger oxidizing agents than peroxides and react with water or acid to give both H2O2 and O2 along with metal hydroxide.

2MO2 + 2H2O→  2MOIH + H2O2+ O2

Example: 2KO2 + 2H2O2 →2KOH + H2O2 + O2

The alkali metal hydroxides (MOH) are all white crystalline solids and corrosive. They are the strongest of all bases and readily dissolve in water. Due to excess hydration, a large amount of heat is released. These hydroxides are thermally stable except Li OH. The basic strength of alkali metal hydroxides increases on moving down the group from Li to Cs.

Explanation:

The ionization enthalpies of alkali metals decrease on moving down the group and this causes a weakening of the bond between the alkali metal and the hydroxyl group (M —OH). This results in an increase in the concentration of hydroxyl ions in the solution, i.e.,  the basic character of the solution increases on moving down the group.

Thus, the basic strength of the hydroxides follows the order:

CsOH > RbOH > KOH > NaOH > LiOH

2. Halides

The alkali metal halides can be prepared by combining metals directly with halogens or by reacting appropriate oxides, hydroxides or carbonates with aqueous halogen acids (HX).

2M + X→  2MX ; M2 O + 2HX↓ 2MX + H2 O

MOH + HX→ MX + H2 O

M2 CO3+ 2HX→ 2MX + HO2 + CO2

The enthalpy of formation (ΔH°f) of alkali metal halides is highly negative. For a given metal, AHj values decrease from fluoride to iodide. These halides are colorless crystalline solids having high melting and boiling points.

1. The melting point of halides of a particular alkali metal decreases as:

Fluoride > Chloride > Bromide > Iodide.

Explanation:

For a particular alkali metal ion, the lattice enthalpies decrease as the size of the halide ion increases.

Lattice enthalpies of NaP, NaCl, Nalir, and Nal are 893, 770,730, and 685 kJ. mol-1 respectively, A.s the lattice enthalpy decreases, the energy required to break the crystal lattice decreases, and consequently, the melting points decrease. Thus, the melting points of NaF, NaCl, NaBr, and Nal are found to be 1201K, 10IMK, 1028 K, and 944 K respectively.

2. For a particular halide ion, the melting point of IJX is less than that of

NaX and thereafter the melting points decrease on moving down the group from Na to Cs.

Explanation:

The melting point of LiCl (887K) is less than that of NaCl (I084K), because LiCl is covalent (for smaller atomic size of Li compared to that of Na), but NaCl is ionic. Thereafter, the order of melting point is:

NaCl(1084K)>KCl(1039K)>RbCI(988K)>CsCl(925K) This is observed because the lattice enthalpies decrease as the size of the alkali metal atom increases.

3. Solubilities of the alkali metal halides (except fluorides) decrease on moving down the group since the decrease in hydration enthalpy is more than the corresponding decrease in the lattice enthalpy.

For example, the difference in lattice enthalpy between NaCl and KCl is 67kJ. mol-1 whereas the difference in hydration enthalpy between Na+ and K+ ion is 76 kj -mol-1 Thus, KCl is relatively less soluble in water compared to NaCl.

Explanation:

The solubility of a salt in water depends on its lattice enthalpy as well as its hydration enthalpy. In general, if hydration enthalpy > lattice enthalpy, the salt dissolves in water but if the hydration enthalpy < lattice enthalpy, the salt does not dissolve.

Further, the extent of hydration depends on the ionic size. The smaller the size of the ion, the more it will get hydrated and the greater will be its hydration enthalpy. LiF, for example, is almost insoluble in water because of its higher lattice enthalpy (-1005 kJ . mol-1 ).

On the other hand, the low solubility of Csl in water is due to smaller hydration enthalpies of the two large ions [-276(Cs+)-305(I) = -581 kJ.-mol-1]. o Due to the smaller size and relatively higher electronegativity of Li, lithium halides except LiF are predo¬minantly covalent and hence, are soluble in organic solvents such as acetone, alcohol, ethyl acetate etc.

In contrast, sodium chloride, being ionic, is insoluble in organic solvents.

3. Soils of oxoacids

Alkali metals react with c to acids such as carbonic acid (H2CO3), nitric acid (HNO3), sulphuric acid (H8SO4), etc., to form corresponding salts and release H2. Due to the high polarising power and lattice energy of small Li ions, lithium salts behave abnormally.

4. Nature of carbonates and bicarbonates

All alkali metals form carbonates of the type M2CO3. Since the alkali metals are highly electropositive, their carbonates are remarkably stable up to l000°C above which they first melt and then decompose to form oxides. These salts are readily soluble in water. As electropositive character increases down the group, the stability of carbonates increases in the same order:

Cs2CO3 > Rb2CO3 > K2CO3 > Na2CO3 > Li2CO3

Li2CO3 is insoluble in water and unstable towards heat. It decomposes readily to give Li2O and CO2.

Explanation:

1. The very small L ion exerts a strong polarising power on the large carbonate (CO32-) ion and distorts the electron cloud of its nearby oxygen atom.

This results in the weakening of the C—O bond and the strengthening of the Li — O bond. This eventually facilitates the decomposition of Li2CO3 leading to the formation of Li2O and CO2. %

2. The crystal lattice formed by a smaller Li+ ion with a smaller O2 ion is more stable than that 2  formed by a larger CO3 ion and a smaller Li+ ion. This also favors the decomposition of Li2CO3

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Li Exerts A Strong Polarising Power On The Large Carbonate

3. The aqueous solution of carbonates is alkaline. This is because carbonates being the salts of strong bases and weak acids (H2CO3) undergo hydrolysis.

M2CO3 + 2H2O  ⇌  2MOH (strong base) + H2CO3 (weak acid)

4. Bicarbonates or hydrogen carbonates (MHCO3) of the alkali metals except LiHCO3 are obtained in the solid state. These bicarbonates are soluble in water and stable towards heat. On strong heating, all the bicarbonates undergo decomposition to yield carbonates with the evolution of carbon dioxide.

2MHCO3 (heat)→ M2CO3 + CO2 + H2O

As the electropositive character of the metals increases down the group from Li to Cs, the stability of the bicarbonates increases in the same order.

5. Nature of nitrates

The alkali metal nitrates (MNO3) are prepared by the action of HNO3 on the corresponding carbonates or hydroxides. They are ionic crystalline solids having low melting points and are highly soluble in water. On strong heating, they (except LiNO3 ) decompose into nitrites and at higher temperatures oxides.

S Block Elements Chapter 10 NCERT Notes

For example:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Nitrites And At High Temperatures

LiNO3 decomposes readily on heating to give

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Decomposes Readily An Heating

6. Nature of sulphates

The alkali metals form sulfates of the type M2SO4. All the sulfates except Li2SO4 are soluble in water. The sulfates when fused with charcoal, form sulphides.

M2SO4.+ 4C→  M2 S + 4CO

Sulfates of alkali metals form double salts with the sulfates of trivalent metals like Fe, Al, Cr, etc. These double salts crystallize with a large number of water molecules to form alum. A typical example is potassium aluminum

[K2SO4→ Al2(SO4)3 -24H2O].

Lithium sulfate (Li2SO4) is not known to form alum.

Anomalous Behaviour Of Lithium (Li) And Similarity Between Li And Mg

Although lithium, the first element of group 1, exhibits most of the characteristic properties of this group, yet it differs from other members of this group in several respects.

Reasons for anomalous behavior of lithium

  1. Both Li- atom and Li+ ion have very small sizes.
  2. Much higher polarising power of very small Li+ ion results in increased Points of difference between lithium and other alkali metals covalent character of its compounds.
  3. Lithium has the lowest electropositive character, the highest ionization enthalpy, and the highest electronegativity compared to the rest of the members.
  4. Non-availability of d -d-orbital in its valence (outermost) shell.
  5. Strong intermetallic bonding (cohesive force) due to its small size. On the other hand, lithium shows a diagonal relationship with magnesium

Points of difference between lithium and other alkali metals:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Atomic Difference Between Lithium And Other Alkali Metals

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Atomic Difference Between Lithium And Other Alkali Metals.

Reasons for the similarities between lithium & magnesium:

Lithium exhibits a diagonal relationship with the 3rd-period group-2 element, magnesium. Reasons for the similarities between lithium and magnesium

  • The atomic as well as ionic radii of Li and Mg are almost the same (Li+ = 76 pm and Mg2+ = 72 pm).
  • Both lithium and magnesium have almost similar electronegativities (Li = 0.98 and Mg = 1.2).

Similarities between lithium and magnesium:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Atomic Similarities Between Lithium And Magnesium

Uses Of Alkali Metals

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Uses Of Alkali Metals

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Uses Of Alkali Metals.

Preparation, Properties, And Uses Of Some Important Compounds Of Sodium

1. Sodium carbonate (washing soda), (Na2CO3-10H2O)

1. Manufacture: Ammonia-soda or Solvay process

Sodium carbonate is commonly known as washing soda. It is generally manufactured by the Solvay process or ammonia-soda process.

Principle: When carbon dioxide is passed through an aqueous solution of NaCl (brine, 28% NaCl solution) saturated with ammonia, sodium bicarbonate is formed.

NH3 + CO2 + H2O > NH4HCO3

NH4HCO3 + NaCl  ⇌ NaHCO3 + NH4Cl

Due to the common ion effect of Na+ ion, sodium bicarbonate so formed gets precipitated. Such removal of solid NaHCO3 shifts the reaction more and more towards the right. This results in a greater yield of NaHCO3.  In this way, a nearly two-thirds portion of NaCl is converted into NaHCO3. The precipitated NaHCO3 is then filtered off, dried, and heated at 150°C to get sodium carbonate.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Heated On Sodium Carbonate

Evolved CO2 is reused to saturate the ammoniated brine.

Raw materials:

  1. Brine solution (28% aqueous solution of NaCl),
  2. Limestone or calcium carbonate (CaCO3) it is the source of CO2 and
  3. Ammonia.

2. Description of the process

Preparation of ammoniated brine: 

1. This process is carried out in the absorption tower made of iron

2.  From an overhead tank, brine is allowed to trickle down slowly along the tower and ammonia gas from the ammonia recovery tower which is mixed with a small amount of CO2 is allowed to pass through a tube situated near the bottom of the tower. As a result, the brine solution gets saturated with ammonia while calcium chloride and magnesium chloride are present as impurities in commercial.

3. Sodium chloride gets precipitated as their corresponding insoluble carbonates.

2NH3 + CO3 + H2O → (NH4)2CO3

CaCl2 + (NH4)CO3 → 2NH4Cl + CaCO3

MgCl2 + (NH4)2CO3 → 2NH4Cl + MgCO3

4. The ammoniated brine is then filtered to remove the precipitated calcium and magnesium carbonates and the filtrate thus obtained is passed into the carbonation tower.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Manufacture Of Sodium Carbonate

Carbonation of ammoniated brine:

1. This operation is carried out in a long cast iron tower (carbonation or Solvay tower). The tower is fitted with several horizontal plates.

2. The ammoniated brine solution is trickled down from the top of the tower while CO2 gas from the lime kiln is introduced into the tower under high pressure through a pipe fitted at the base of the tower.

3. In this way, CO2 comes in contact with the descending stream of ammoniated brine and they react with each other to form ammonium bicarbonate which subsequently combines with NaCl to produce sodium bicarbonate and ammonium chloride.

NH3 + CO2 + H2O →  NH4HCO3

NaCl + NH4HCO3 →  NaHCO3↓ + NH4Cl

Separation of sodium bicarbonate:

1. The solution coming out of the carbonation tower contains crystals of NaHCO3. These are separated by passing the solution through vacuum filters.

2. The separated sodium bicar¬bonate is washed with water to remove any sodium or ammonium chloride that may adhere to it and then dried.

3. The filtrate containing NH4Cl and a small amount of NH4HCO3 is taken to the ammonia recovery tower where it comes in contact with Ca(OH)2.

Calcination:

When the dry NaHCO3 is heated strongly in a furnace at 180°C, it decomposes to form anhydrous Na2CO3. It is called soda ash. It is nearly 99.5 % pure.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Calcination

Evolved CO2 is reused in the carbonation tower or absorption tower

Recovery of ammonia:

The filtrate from the carbonation tower which contains ammonium chloride and a little ammonium bicarbonate is made to flow down the ammonia recovery tower. NH4HCO3 is decomposed by the heat of steam and NH4Cl reacts with calcium hydroxide to form ammonia, carbon dioxide, and CaCl2. The mixture of NH3 and CO2 is used for tire saturation of brine while calcium chloride is obtained as a by-product.

1.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Recovery Of Ammonia

2.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Recovery Of Ammonia.

Potassium carbonate (K2CO3) cannot be prepared by the Soh’ay process. This is because unlike sodium bicarbonate, potassium bicarbonate (KHCO3) which is fairly soluble in water does not get precipitated when CO2 is passed through the ammoniated solution of KCl.

 Properties of Sodium carbonate: 

1. State:

Sodium carbonate is available either as anhydrous salt or as hydrated salt. The hydrated salts are white crystalline substances and are mainly of two types

  1. Decahydrate (Na2CO3-10H2O) and
  2. Monohydrate (Na2CO2-H2O).

The decahydrate is also called washing soda. The anhydrous salt commonly known as soda ash, is a white powder. When sodium carbonate is crystallized from water, the decahydrate is obtained as white transparent crystals. These crystals are efflorescent. When exposed to air for a long time, crystals of decahydrate partially lose their water of crystallization and is converted to monohydrate, a powdery substance which is known as crystal carbonate.

⇒ \(\mathrm{Na}_2 \mathrm{CO}_3 \cdot 10 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Na}_2 \mathrm{CO}_3 \cdot \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}+9 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

2. Action of heat:

When the decahydrate is heated up to 100°C, it slowly loses nine molecules of water of crystallization and gets converted into monohydrate. When the monohydrate is heated above 100°C, the anhydrous salt (Na2CO3) is produced as a white powder which melts at high temperatures but never undergoes decomposition.

1.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Action Of Heat

2.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Action Of Heat.

Anhydrous Na2CO3 or soda ash melts at higher temperatures (melting point 852°C) but does not decompose. It turns to monohydrate when kept in the air.

3. Hydrolysis:

It dissolves in water with the evolution of a considerable amount of heat. Being a salt of a weak acid (HCO3) and a strong base (NaOH), it undergoes hydrolysis in water to give an alkaline solution.

⇒\(\mathrm{Na}_2 \mathrm{CO}_3+2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \rightleftharpoons 2\left[\mathrm{Na}^{+}+\mathrm{OH}^{-}\right]+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{CO}_3\)

4. Reaction with acid:

At ordinary temperature, Na2CO3 reacts with dilute mineral acids to form the corresponding sodium salts and water along with the evolution of CO2

Na2CO3 + 2HCl→2NaCl + CO2↑ + H2O

Na2CO3 + 2CH3COOH→2CH3COONa + CO2↑ + H2O

Reaction with slaked lime: When a solution of Na2CO3 is heated with slaked lime (milk of lime) at 80°C, sodium hydroxide with insoluble calcium carbonate is obtained.

Na2CO3  + Ca(OH)2 → CaCO3↓+ 2NaOH

Uses of sodium carbonate:

  • Sodium carbonate is mainly used for softening hard water and for washing clothes.
  • It is used in fire extinguishers.
  • It is largely used in the manufacture of soap, glass, borax, and caustic soda.
  • It is used in the paper, paint, and textile industries.
  • A mixture of Na2CO3 and K2CO3 is used as a fusion mixture.
  • It is used as an important laboratory reagent both in qualitative and quantitative analysis.

2. Sodium bicarbonate or sodium hydrogen carbonate (baking soda), NaHCO3

Preparation of sodium bicarbonate:

Sodium hydrogen carbonate is obtained as the intermediate product in the Solvay process of manufacturing sodium carbonate.

It can also be prepared by passing CO2 through a saturated solution of sodium carbonate. Being less soluble, the white crystals of sodium hydrogen carbonate can be filtered out and dried at room temperature.

Na2CO3 + H2O+ CO2 ⇌ 2NaHCO3

Properties of sodium bicarbonate:

1. State: It is a white crystalline solid and is sparingly soluble in cold water. It is also stable in air.

2. Hydrolysis: Being a salt of weak acid (H2CO3) and strong base (NaOH), it hydrolyses to give a faintly alkaline solution.

NaHCO3 + H2O ⇌  [Na+ + OH] + H2CO3

3. Action of heat: On heating, it decomposes to form CO2, water, and sodium carbonate.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Sodium Bicarbonate Of Action Of Heat

4. Reaction with acids: At ordinary temperature, it reacts with mineral acids to form CO2, water, and the sodium salt of the acid:

NaHCO3 + HCl→ NaCl + CO2 ↑ + H2O

Uses of sodium bicarbonate:

  • It is used as an antacid (known as soda bi-carb). It is also used as a mild antiseptic for skin infections.
  • It is the chief ingredient of ‘baking powder’ which is used in preparing breads, biscuits, cakes etc.
  • It is used in the preparation of soft drinks like soda- water, lemonades, etc.
  • It is also used in fire extinguishers.

3. Sodium hydroxide (caustic soda), NaOH

Manufacture of sodium hydroxide:

Sodium hydroxide is industrially prepared by the electrolysis of an aqueous solution of NaCl (brine) in a specially designed cell called the Castner-Kellner cell or mercury cathode cell.

Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 10 S Block Elements Notes PDF

Sodium hydroxide Principle:

When a brine solution is electrolyzed in a cell using a mercury cathode and graphite anode, metallic sodium discharged at the cathode combines with mercury to form sodium amalgam. Now, electrolysis of slightly alkaline water in the cell using sodium amalgam as anode and iron rod as cathode produces NaOH. The reaction between sodium amalgam and water also produces NaOH.

Sodium hydroxide  Procedure:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Castner Kellner Cell For The Manufacture Of NaoH

1.  The cell consists of a large rectangular iron tank divided into three compartments by two slate partitions which do not touch the bottom of the tank but remain suspended in mercury placed in the grooves

2. The graphite anodes are fixed in the two outer compartments and the cathode which consists of several iron rods is fitted in the central compartment.

3. The layer of mercury at the bottom serves as an intermediate electrode as a cathode in the outer compartment and as an anode in the central compartment by induction.

4. The brine solution is taken in the two outer compartments and a very dilute NaOH solution is taken in the central compartment.

5. The mercury layer is made to flow from one compartment to another by rocking the cell with the help of an eccentric wheel.  On passing electric current, the following reactions take place in the outer and central compartments.

6. In the outer compartment, NaCl undergoes electrolysis. Cl2 gas formed at the anode comes out from the outlet tube while sodium liberated at the cathode combines with mercury to form sodium amalgam.

NaCl → Na++ Cl ; H2 O → H+ + OH

  • At cathode: Na+ + e →Na; Na + Hg→ Na/Hg
  • At anode,: Cl→ Cl + e; Cl + Cl→ Cl2

7. In the central compartment, sodium amalgam (Na/Hg) acts as an anode by induction.

⇒ \(\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \rightarrow \mathrm{H}^{+}+\mathrm{OH}^{-}, \mathrm{NaOH} \rightarrow \mathrm{Na}^{+}+\mathrm{OH}^{-}\)

  • At cathode: \(\mathrm{H}^{+}+e \longrightarrow \mathrm{H} ; \mathrm{H}+\mathrm{H} \longrightarrow \mathrm{H}_2 \uparrow\)
  • At anode: \(\mathrm{Na} / \mathrm{Hg} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Na}^{+}+e+\mathrm{Hg}\)

Net reaction: \(2 \mathrm{Na} / \mathrm{Hg}+2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} \rightarrow 2\left(\mathrm{Na}^{+}+\mathrm{OH}^{+}\right)+2 \mathrm{Hg}+\mathrm{H}_2 \uparrow\)

The concentration of NaOH in the central compartment gradually increases with the progress of electrolysis and when it becomes 20%, the solution is withdrawn, evaporated and converted into pellets or flakes of NaOH.

Properties of sodium hydroxide:

1. State: It is a white, crystalline hygroscopic solid having a melting point of 318°C.

2. Solubility: It dissolves in water with the evolution of heat, giving a strong alkaline solution. It also dissolves in alcohol.

3. Hygroscopic and corrosive nature:

The crystals of NaOH are deliquescent (hygroscopic). When exposed to air they absorb moisture from air and dissolve in the absorbed water. Moist caustic soda generally absorbs CO2 from air to form sodium carbonate which forms a coating over the surface of the material. As Na2CO3 is non-hygroscopic, wet sodium hydroxide becomes dry again.

⇒ \(2 \mathrm{NaOH}+\mathrm{CO}_2 \rightarrow \mathrm{Na}_2 \mathrm{CO}_3+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

It is corrosive. When its concentrated solution comes in contact with the skin it produces a burning sensation. It breaks down the proteins of the skin and because of this property, it is commonly called caustic soda,

4. Reaction with acids, acidic oxides, and amphoteric oxides: Being a strong alkali, it reacts with acids, acidic oxides, and amphoteric oxides to form corresponding salts.

NaOH + HCl→ NaCl +H2O

2NaOH + SO2→ Na2SO3 +H2O

Al2O3 + 2NaOH →2NaAlO2 (Sodium aluminate) + H2O

ZnO + 2NaOH → Na2ZnO2 (Sodium zincate) + H2O

Uses of sodium hydroxide:

It is used

  • In the manufacture of soap, paper, artificial silk, dyes, and several chemicals
  • In the refining of [etroleum and vegetable oil,
  • In the purification of bauxite,
  • As a cleaning agent for greasy machines and metal NItoots,
  • As a laboratory reagent etc.

4. Sodium chloride (common salt), NaCI

Preparation of sodium chloride:

  • The main source of sodium chloride Is seawater which contains 2.7-2,9% of the salt by mass. In tropical countries like India, common salt is generally obtained by the evaporation of seawater.
  • Crude sodium chloride obtained by this process contains calcium sulfate (CaSO.), sodium sulfate (Na2SO4), calcium chloride (CaCl2), magnesium chloride (MgCl2), etc as impurities.
  • Since MgCI2 and CaCl2 are deliquescent (absorb moisture from the air), impure common salt gets wet in the rainy season.
  • For purification, a saturated solution of crude NaCI is prepared and the insoluble impurities are removed by filtration.
  • The filtrate is then saturated with hydrogen chloride gas and crystals of pure NaCI separate out due to the common ion effect.
  • Chlorides of Ca and Hg being more soluble remain dissolved in the solution. NaCI can also be prepared from rock salt.

Properties of sodium chloride:

  • NaCI is a white crystalline solid that melts at 1081K.
  • 36 g of NaCI is soluble in 100g of water at 373K. However, solubility does not increase much with an increase in temperature.

Uses of sodium chloride:

  • It is used as common salt or table salt for domestic purposes.
  • It is used in the manufacture of sodium, caustic soda (NaOH), chlorine, washing soda, sodium peroxide, sodium sulfate, etc.
  • It is used in soap industry, in softening hard water, in freezing mixtures, and for regenerating ion exchange resins.

Biological Importance Of Sodium And Potassium

Sodium and potassium ions are the most common cations present in biological fluids. A person weighing 70kg contains about 90g of Na and 170g of K along with 5g of Fe and 0.06 g of Cu.

The daily requirement of Na and K for the human body is about 2 g each.

  1. The Na+ ions are mainly found outside the cells, in blood plasma, and in the interstitial fluid that surrounds the cells. These ions take part in the transmission of nerve signals, in regulating the flow of water across the cell membranes, and in the transportation of various amino acids and sugars into the cells.
  2.  K+ ions are the most abundant cations in the cell fluids, where they activate a variety of enzymes, and promote the oxidation of glucose into ATP (adenosine triphosphate), and Na+ ions promote the transmission of nerve signals.
  3. The Na+ and K+ ions differ considerably in concentration on the opposite sides of the cell membrane. In blood plasma, for example, the concentrations of Na+ and K+ ions are 143 million-L-1 and 5 million-L-1 respectively.
  4. Within the blood cells, however, the concentrations of these ions are 10 millimol-L-1 and 105 millimol-L-1 respectively.
  5. The activities in a nerve cell depend upon the sodium-potassium ion gradient. These ionic gradients are maintained by an ion transport mechanism that operates the active inclusion of K+ ions and active exclusion of Na+ ions across the cell membrane.
  6. The transportation of ions requires energy which is obtained by hydrolysis of ATP. The hydrolysis of one ATP molecule to ADP provides enough energy to move three Na+ ions out of the cell two K+ ions and one H+ ion back into the cell.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Group-2 Elements (Alkaline Earth Metals) Introduction

The outermost shell of these elements contains two electrons and the penultimate shell contains eight electrons except forthe first member beryllium which contains two electrons.0 Since the last electron enters the ns orbital, these are also called s-block elements.

Their outermost electronic configuration may be represented as ns², where n- 2 to 7. Due to their similarity in electronic configuration, they are placed in the same group (Group- 2) of the periodic table and closely resemble each other in physical and chemical properties. Two valence electrons are always involved together giving rise to uniform bivalency of the elements.

Beryllium shows some abnormal properties as its electronic configuration is slightly different from the rest of the members. The main reason is that both the beryllium atom and Be2+ ion are extremely small. Beryllium also shows some similarities with aluminum of group 13. Like alkali metals, the compounds of these metals are also predominantly ionic. The electronic configurations of alkaline earth metals are given in the following table

Electronic configuration of alkaline earth metals

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Electronic Configuration Of Alkaline Earth Metals

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry S Block Elements Summary

Occurrence Of Alkaline Earth Metals

Due to low ionization enthalpies and high electropositive character, the alkaline earth metals are chemically very reactive and hence, do not occur in the free state but are widely distributed in nature as silicates, carbonates, sulfates, and phosphates.

  • Relative abundance of Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, and Ra in the earth’s crust is 2, 27640, 46600, 384, 390, and 1.3 x 10-6 ppm respectively. 0 Beryllium, the fifty-first most abundant element by mass in the earth’s crust, is found as silicate minerals like beryl (Be3Al2Si6O18) and phenacite (Be2SiO4).
  • Magnesium, the sixth most abundant element is found as carbonate, sulphate, and silicate. Its two important minerals are magnesite (MgCO3) and dolomite [MgCO3.CaCO3].
  • It is also found in seawater at 0.13% as MgCl2 and MgSO4.
  • Calcium, the fifth most abundant element by mass found in the earth’s crust, occurs mainly as CaCO3 in the form of limestone, marble and chalk. Its other important minerals are fluorspar (CaF2), fluorapatite, [3Ca3(PO4)2-CaF3], gypsum (CaSO4-2H2O) anhydride, (CaSO4).
  • Strontium and barium are respectively the fifteenth and sixteenth most abundant element. Strontium occurs principally as the mineral celestite (SrSO4) and strontianite (SrCO3) while barium occurs mainly as the mineral barytes (BaSO4).
  • Radium is radioactive and extremely scarce. It occurs in very small amounts (1 gin 7 ton) in pitchblende as the decay product of uranium.

General Trends In Atomic And Physical Properties Of Alkaline Earth Metals

The alkaline earth metals show regular trends in their physical and chemical properties with an increase in atomic number. Some important atomic and physical properties of alkaline earth metals are given in the

Atomic and physical properties of alkaline earth metals:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Atomic And Physical Properties Of Alkaline Earth Metals

General trends in different atomic and physical properties of alkali metals and their explanations

1. Atomic and ionic radii

The atomic and ionic radii of alkaline earth metals are fairly large but smaller than those of the corresponding alkali metals and these increase on moving down a group.

Atomic and ionic radii Explanation:

The electrons of alkaline earth metals having a higher nuclear charge are more strongly attracted towards the nucleus.  On moving down the group, the atomic as well as ionic radii increase. The addition of new shells and the increasing screening effect jointly overcome the effect of increasing nuclear charge down the group

2. Ionization enthalpy

1. The first and second ionization enthalpies of alkaline earth metals are quite low and decrease down the group from Be to Ra

Explanation:

The low ionization enthalpies of alkaline earth metals are due to their smaller nuclear charge and larger atomic size (compared to the other succeeding elements of the same period) which result in weaker forces of attraction between valence electrons (ns2) and nucleus. On moving down the group, atomic size increases and the screening effect of the inner shell electrons also increases

Since the alkali metal atoms are largest in their respective periods, their outermost electrons being far away from the nucleus experience less force of attraction and hence, can be removed easily. These two effects jointly overcome the effect of increasing nuclear charge down the group. Thus, first and second ionization enthalpies decrease down the group.

2. The first ionization enthalpies of alkaline earth metals are higher than those of the corresponding alkali metals but their second ionization enthalpies are lower than those of the corresponding alkali metals.

Explanation:

The alkaline earth metals have higher values of first ionization enthalpy than those of the corresponding alkali metals because they have smaller size and higher nuclear charge which result in stronger forces of attraction between the valence electrons and the nucleus.

The second ionization enthalpy values of alkaline earth metals are much lower than those of the corresponding alkali metals because the loss of the second electron from an alkaline earth metal cation (M+) leads to the attainment of a stable noble gas configuration (ns2np6) while the loss of the second electron from an alkali metal cation (M+) causes loss ofits stable noble gas configuration

Example:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Nobel Gas Configuration

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Nobel Gas Configuration.

3. Electropositive or metallic character

The alkaline earth metals are highly electropositive and possess high metallic character. However, they are less electropositive than the alkali metals. Their electropositive or metallic character increases on moving down the group.

Electropositive Explanation:

  • Due to their relatively low ionization enthalpies, alkaline earth metals have a strong tendency to lose both valence electrons to form dipositive ions. Thus, they exhibit high electropositive or metallic character.
  • As their atoms have smaller sizes and higher ionization enthalpies compared to those of the corresponding alkali metals, their tendency to lose valence electrons is less than that of alkali metals. Hence, alkaline earth metals have less electropositive or metallic character as compared to tine alkali metals.
  • On moving down the group from Be to Ra, ionization enthalpies decrease due to an increase in atomic radii. Therefore, the tendency to lose electrons increases and so does the electropositive character

4. Hydration enthalpy

Hydration enthalpies of alkaline earth metal ions are much greater than that of the alkali metal ions & decrease down the group from Be2+ to Ba2+

Be2+ > Mg2+ > Ca2+ > Sr2+ > Ba2+

Hydration enthalpy Explanation:

Due to the smaller size of alkaline earth metal ions, their hydration enthalpies are much greater than those of the alkali metal ions. Therefore, the compounds of alkaline earth metals are found to be more extensively hydrated than those of alkali metals. Magnesium chloride and calcium chloride, for example, exist as hexahydrates (MgCl2-6H2O and CaCl2-6H2O) while sodium chloride and potassium chloride do not form such hydrates.

The ionic conductance of hydrated alkaline earth metal ions increases from [Be(H2O)x]2+ to [Ba(HO)2x]2+ due to a decrease in the extent of hydration. The hydration enthalpy of an ion is directly proportional to its charge/radius ratio {q/r). On moving down a group, the radii of the alkaline earth metals increase. As a result, the hydration enthalpies of these metals decrease.

5. Oxidation State

Alkaline earth metals exhibit an oxidation in their compounds. Although the second date of +2 in their compounds. Although the second ionization enthalpy of these elements is nearly double that of the first ionization enthalpy, yet they exist as divalent ions (M2+) in most of their compounds.

NCERT Solutions for S Block Elements Class 11 Chemistry

Oxidation State Explanation:

1. The divalent ions (M2+) of alkaline earth metals have stable noble gas configurations. Thus, M2+ ion is more stable than M+ ion.

M ([Noble gas] ns2) → M2+ [Noble gas] + 2e

2. Due to greater charge and smaller size, the divalent cations lead to the formation of very stable lattices, and hence, a huge amount of energy is released. The high lattice enthalpy easily compensates for the high second ionization enthalpy.

3. Divalent cations for their smaller size get hydrated in water to a greater extent and the energy thus released (hydration enthalpy) is large enough to compensate for the second ionization enthalpy

The ΔHi(3) values of alkaline earth metals are very high because the electron now has to be removed from the stable noble gas configuration. For this reason, the alkaline earth metals do not exhibit an oxidation state of more than +2.

6. Melting & boiling points

Alkaline earth metals have higher melting & boiling points than that of alkali metals. However, on moving down the group, no regular trend is observed.

Melting & boiling points Explanation: 

  • Due to their smaller size, the atoms of alkaline earth metals form a more close-packed crystal lattice. Moreover, alkaline earth metals have two electrons in their valence shell whereas alkali metals have only one.
  • The larger number of valence electrons leads to the formation of stronger metallic bonds.
  • No regular trend in melting and boiling point is observed down the group because the atoms adopt different crystal structures.

7. Nature of bonds formed:

Like alkali metals, alkaline earth metals predominantly form ionic compounds. However, these are less ionic than the corresponding alkali metal compounds. Beryllium, the first member of this group, is an exception as its compounds are covalent. Magnesium also tends to form covalent compounds to some extent. On moving down the group, the tendency to form ionic compounds increases.

Nature of bonds formed Explanation:

Alkaline earth metals form ionic compounds because they have low ionization enthalpies. Their compounds, however, are less ionic because their ionization enthalpies are higher than those of the corres¬ ponding alkali metals. Due to its much smaller size and much higher ionization enthalpy, beryllium forms compounds that are predominantly covalent. Down the group, the tendency to form ionic compounds increases because ionization enthalpy decreases.

8. Density and hardness

The alkaline earth metals are denser and harder than the corresponding alkali metals. However, on moving down the group, no regular trend is observed. It initially decreases from Be to Ca and then increases from Ca to Ba.

Density and hardness Explanation:

The extent of cohesive energy determines the density and hardness of metals and this depends on the number of electrons involved in metallic bonding and the size of the atom. In alkali metals, one electron per atom (the valence electron) is involved in metallic bonding while in alkaline earth metals, two electrons per atom (the valence electrons) are involved. Moreover, the atoms of alkaline earth metals are heavier and smaller in size.

Therefore, the extent of cohesive energy is relatively higher in the case of alkaline earth metals & consequently, the atoms in alkaline earth metals are packed more closely in their lattices. Cohesive energy decreases from Be to Ca due to a gradual increase in size while it is found to increase from Ca to Ba due to the formation of different crystal lattices.

9. Conductivity

The Gr-2 metals are good conductors of heat and electricity.

Conductivity Explanation:

Due to the presence of two loosely bound valence electrons (per atom) which can move freely throughout the crystal lattice, the alkaline earth metals are good conductors of heat and electricity.

10. Flame coloration

When the alkaline earth metals and their salts, except beryllium and magnesium, are heated in the flame of a bunsen burner, they impart characteristic color to the flame.

These colors are as follows:

  • Ca: Brickred
  • Ba: Apple green
  • Sr & Ra: Crimson red

Flame coloration Explanation:

  • When the alkaline earth metals or their salts are put into a flame, the electrons of their valence shell absorb energy and get excited to higher energy levels.
  • When they drop back to the ground state, the absorbed energy is emitted in the form of visible light having characteristic wavelengths.
  • Depending upon the wavelength of light emitted, different colors are imparted to the burner flame.
  • Due to their smaller size, the valence electrons in Be and Mg are too strongly bound to get excited by the energy available from the flame. Therefore, they do not impart any color to the flame.

Alkaline earth metals (except Be and Mg) can easily be identified by flame test in qualitative analysis. Further, they can be estimated by flame photometry or atomic absorption spectroscopy.

11. Magnetic property

The alkaline earth metals and their salts are diamagnetic.

Magnetic property Explanation:

Since the divalent ions (M2+) of alkaline earth metals have noble gas configurations with no unpaired electrons, their salts are diamagnetic. The metals are also diamagnetic as all the orbitals are filled up with paired electrons.

Chemical Properties Of Alkaline Earth Metals (Group-2 Metals)

Due to their low ionization enthalpies and high electropositive character, alkaline earth metals have a strong tendency to lose their valence electrons. Therefore, they are highly reactive and do not exist in the free state in nature.

1. Reducing nature

The alkaline earth metals are strong reducing agents. However, they are weaker reducing agents than alkali metals. Again, like alkali metals, their reducing strength increases down the group.

Reducing nature Explanation:

The alkaline earth metals except Be, have a fairly strong tendency to lose two valence electrons to form dipositive ions (M→ M2+  2e) i.e. they possess low ionization enthalpies and hence, they are strong reducing agents.

This is indicated by their high negative values of reduction potentials (E°). Their reducing strength, however, is less than the alkali metals as their atomization enthalpies and ionization enthalpies are relatively higher. Reducing strength increases on moving down the group as their ionization enthalpies decrease & electrode potentials become progressively more negative from Be to Ba.

2. Action of air

  • Being fairly reactive, the alkaline earth metals are oxidized by the oxygen of the air and get tarnished due to the formation of a fine layer of oxide on their surface. With increasing atomic numbers, the effect of air on the metals gradually increases.
  • Be and Mg being less reactive are not much affected by air. Ca and Sr get easily tarnished in air while Ba readily burns when exposed to air. Hence, Ca, Ba, and Sr are usually stored in paraffin.

3. Reaction with oxygen

Alkaline earth metals burn in oxygen to form oxides. Be, Mg, and Ca form monoxides while Sr and Ba form peroxides when they react with oxygen. This is because larger cation stabilizes a larger anion and hence the tendency to form peroxide increases as the size of the metal ion increases

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Reaction With Oxygen (M = Be, Mg or Ca)

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Reaction With Oxygen. (M = Ba, Sr)

4. Reaction with water

  • Alkaline earth metals except beryllium react with water to form the corresponding hydroxides along with the liberation of H2 gas.
  • Beryllium having the lowest negative standard electrodepotential (E° of Be2+/Be = -1.97V) among all

The group-2 metals is the least electropositive and hence, do not react with water or steam even at red hot conditions.

Ca, Sr, and Ba have relatively higher negative standard electrode potentials similar to those of the corresponding Gr-1 metals and hence, react even with cold water.

Mg has an intermediate value of E° and does not react with cold water but decomposes in boiling water.

M + 2H2O→M(OH)2 + H2↑ (M = Mg, Ca; Sr or Ba)

Thus, the reactivity of the alkaline earth metals towards water increases on moving down the group. However, they are less reactive towards water as compared to the corresponding alkali metals.

5. Reaction with nitrogen

1. All alkaline earth metals burn in nitrogen to form nitrides of the type M3N2. However, Li forms Li3N.

3M + N2 →M2N2 (M = Be, Mg, Ca, Sr and Ba)

2.  The ease of formation of nitrides decreases from Be to Ba. Since N2 molecule is very stable, it requires very high energy to form nitride ions (N3-). This large amount of energy is supplied from the lattice enthalpy evolved when crystalline solids containing ions with high charges (M2+ and N3-) are formed.

Be3N2 is volatile because it is covalent. Other nitrides of this group are not volatile as they are ionic crystalline solids.

6. Reaction with halogens

The alkaline earth metals directly combine with halogens at higher temperatures to form halides having the general formula, MX2

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Reaction With Halogens

Halides can also be obtained by the action of halogen acids on metals, their oxides, hydroxides, or carbonates

M + 2HX→ MX2 + H2; MO + 2HX→MX2 + H2O

M(OH)2 + 2HX→MX2 + 2H2O

MCO3 + 2HX→MX2 + CO2 + H2O

BeCl2 is, however, conveniently prepared by heating BeO with Cl2 in the presence of charcoal at 1073K

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Conveniently Prepared By Heating In The Presence Of Charcoal

7. Reaction with hydrogen:

All the elements of group-2 except Be, form metal hydrides of the general formula MH2 when heated with hydrogen

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Reaction With Hydrogen

Beryllium hydride can be prepared indirectly by reducing beryllium chloride with lithium aluminum hydride.

2BeCl2 + LiAlH4→ 2BeH2 + LiCl + AlCl3

Both beryllium hydride (BeH2) and magnesium hydride (MgH2) are covalent compounds. In these molecules, both Be and Mg have four electrons in their valence shell. Therefore, these molecules are electron deficient. To make up for their electron deficiency, these two compounds exist as polymers, (BeH2)n and (MgH2)n in which each Be or Mg -atom forms four three-centre two-electron (3c-2e) bonds or hydrogen bridge bonds or banana bonds.

The structure of polymeric beryllium hydride is shown below:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Structure Of Polymeric Berylium Hydride

CaH2, SrH2, and BaH2 are ionic compounds in which a hydride ion (H) exists as an anion. Calcium hydride (CaH2 ) which is also called hydrolith is used for the production of H2 by the action of HaO on it.

8. Reaction with carbon

When the alkaline earth metals except for Be, are heated with carbon in an electric furnace or when their oxides are heated with carbon, carbides of the type MC2 are obtained. These carbides are also called acetylides (containing discrete C2 ions) as on hydrolysis they form acetylene.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Reaction With Carbon

(M = Mg, Ca, Sr or Ba)

At much higher temperatures ( ~ 1700°C), beryllium reacts with carbon to form Be2C. This carbide is called methanide (containing discrete C4- ion) as on hydrolysis it produces methane. On heating, MgC2 forms Mg2C3, which is called allylide (containing discrete C34- ion) as hydrolysis yields allylene (methyl acetylene).

CaC2 + 2H2O → HC≡ CH + Ca(OH)2

Be2C + 4H2O →  2Be(OH)2 + CH4

Mg2C3+ 4H2O →  CH3C ≡ CH + 2Mg(OH)2

When calcium carbide (CaC2), an important chemical intermediate, is heated in an electric furnace with atmospheric nitrogen at 1375K, it produces calcium cyanamide (CaNCN).

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Calcium Carbide

The mixture of CaNCN and carbon is called nitrolim. It is used as a slow-acting nitrogen fertilizer as it undergoes very slow hydrolysis and evolves NH3 gas for a long period.

CaC2 + 3H2O → CaCO3 + 2NH3

9. Reaction with acids

The alkaline earth metals react with dilute acids to form the corresponding salt with the liberation of H2 gas.

M + H2SO4 → MSO4 + H2↑ (M = Be, Mg, Ca, Sr or Ba)

Beryllium is the only group-2 metal which reacts with alkali to form H2 and beryllate salt.

Be + 2NaOH + 2H2O → Na2 [Be(OH)4] (Sodium beryllate)+ H2

This is observed due to the diagonal relationship between aluminum and beryllium.

10. Solutions in liquid ammonia

Like alkali metals, alkaline earth metals dissolve in ammonia to give deep blue-colored solutions containing ammoniated cations and ammoniated electrons.

M + (x+ 2y)NH3 → [M(NH3)x]2+ + 2[e(NH3)y ]

Evaporation of ammonia from these solutions leads to the formation of hexammoniates M(NH3)6 which slowly decompose to yield the corresponding metal amides, M(NH2)2 and H2

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Solutions In Liquid Ammonia

11. Tendency to form complexes

The group-2 elements tend to form stable complexes and it is found to be greater than that of alkali metals because their ions have smaller size and higher charge. The tendency to form complexes decreases down the group and this is due to the decrease in ion-dipole interaction with increasing size of the metal ion. Be and Mg have the maximum tendency to form complexes.

Examples of two stable complexes of Be and Mg are \(\left[\mathrm{BeF}_4\right]^{2-}\&\left[\mathrm{Mg}\left(\mathrm{NH}_3\right)_6\right]^{2+}\) respectively

  1. Complexation of Ca2+ by EDTA and polyphosphates plays an important role in the removal of the metal in water softening.
  2.  In chlorophyll, the complex formed by the combination of Mg and the tetrapyrrole system (porphyrin) is very crucial in photosynthesis.

12. Extraction of alkaline earth metals

Like alkali metals, alkaline earth metals are also very reactive and strong reducing agents. So they cannot be extracted by ordinary chemical reduction methods. These metals also cannot be prepared by electrolysis of aqueous solutions of their salts because in that case, hydrogen is discharged at the cathode instead of the metal which has a much higher discharge potential. However, electrolysis can be carried out using a Hg-cathode, but in that case, recovery of the metal from amalgam becomes difficult. These metals are best isolated by electrolysis of their fused salts, usually chlorides.

S Block Elements Class 11 Important Topics

General Characteristics Of The Compounds Of Alkaline Earth Metals

Compounds of group-2 elements are predominantly ionic but are less ionic than the corresponding compounds of group 1 elements and this is due to their increased nuclear charge and smaller size. The general characteristics of some of the compounds of alkaline earth metals are discussed below.

1. Oxides of alkaline earth metals

1. Crystal structure:

Except for BeO (covalent solid), the oxides of the remaining alkaline earth metals are crystalline ionic solids and possess a rock-salt (NaCl) structure with coordination number 6. BeO though covalent, is an extremely hard solid because of its polymeric nature. BeO possesses a covalent lattice with coordination number 4. Both BeO and MgO have several properties that make them useful as refractory materials (for lining furnaces).

These properties are:

  • They have high melting points (BeO-2500°C and MgO – 2800°C),
  • They have very low vapor pressures,
  • They are good conductors of heat, O they are chemically inert and
  • They can act as electrical insulators.

2. Stability:

Due to much higher lattice enthalpies, the oxides are very stable towards heat. The lattice enthalpies decrease with an increase in the size of the metal ion.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Stability Of Higher Lattice Enthalpies

3. Basic character:

Beryllium oxide, BeO reacts with both acids and alkalis, i.e., it is amphoteric while the oxides of other group-2 metals are basic.

BeO + 2HCl→BeCl2 + H2O

BeO + 2NaOH → Na2 BeO2 (Sodium beryllate) + H2O

The basic strength of the oxides increases on moving down the group.

BeO (Amphoteric) < MgO (Weakly basic) < CaO (Basic ) < SrO, BaO( Strongly basic)

4. Reaction with water:

All these oxides except BeO and MgO, react with water to form sparingly soluble hydroxides. These reactions are exothermic.

MO + H2O→M(OH)2 + heat, M = Ca, Sr or Ba

2. Hydroxides

1. Basic character:

All the alkaline earth metal hydroxides are basic except Be(OH)2 which is amphotericin nature. Their basic strength increases on moving from Be(OH)2 to Ba(OH)2

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Hydroxides

The alkaline earth metal hydroxides are, however, less basic than the alkali metal hydroxides.

Basic character Explanation:

Due to low ionization enthalpies of the alkaline earth metals, the M — O bond present in their hydroxides is weak and breaks up easily to give OHions. For this reason, their hydroxides exhibit basic character. On moving down the group, the tendency of the M — OH bond to break heterolytically increases because ionisation enthalpies decrease and consequently, the basic character of the hydroxides increases.

Due to larger ionic sizes and lower ionization enthalpies of alkali metals, the M — OH bonds in their hydroxides are still weaker than those in alkaline earth metal hydroxides. Thus, the alkali metal hydroxides are more basic than the alkaline earth metal hydroxides.

2. Solubility in water:

Hydroxides of alkaline earth metals are less soluble in water than the hydroxides of alkali metals. Again, the solubility of these hydroxides increases markedly on moving down the group

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Solubility In Water

Solubility in water Explanation:

On moving down the group, both the lattice enthalpy and the hydration enthalpy decrease with increasing ionic size. However, the lattice enthalpy decreases more rapidly than the hydration enthalpy, and consequently, their solubility increases down the group.

3. Thermal stability:

The alkaline earth metal hydroxides decompose on heating to give the metal oxide and water.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Sulphates Of Thermal Stability

Thermal stability Explanation:

Thermal stability of these hydroxides increases down the group as the polarising power of the M2+ ion and the lattice enthalpy of the oxide formed decreases with increasing ionic size down the group.

3. Halides

  • Due to the high polarising power of the Be2+ ion, beryllium halides have a covalent nature having low melting points.
  • All other alkaline earth metal halides are ionic and their ionic character increases as the size of the metal ion (M2+) increases down the group. These ionic halides are non-volatile solids having high melting points.
  • Due to its covalent nature, beryllium halides are sparingly soluble in water but readily soluble in organic solvents. The halides of other group-2 alkaline earth metals are readily soluble in water.
  • Except for BeCl2, all other anhydrous halides of the alkaline earth metals are hygroscopic in nature and form hydrates.
  • For example: MgCl2-6H2O, CaCl2-6H2O, SrCl2-2H2O and BaCl2-2H2O
  • The tendency to form hydrate decreases down the group. Thus, anhydrous calcium chloride is used as a dehydrating agent in the laboratory.
  • The dehydration of the hydrated chlorides, bromides, and iodides of Ca, Sr, and Ba can be achieved by heating. However, the corresponding hydrated halides of Be and Mg on heating suffer hydrolysis.
  • BeF2 is highly soluble in water due to the much higher hydration enthalpy of the very small Be2+ ion.
  • All other fluorides (MgF2 > CaF2, SrF2, and BaF2 ) are almost insoluble in water because their lattice enthalpies are higher than their hydration enthalpies.
  • Except for BeCl2 and MgCl2, all other alkaline earth metal chlorides impart characteristic color to a flame.
  • For example: CaCl2: is brick red, SrCl2:  Is crimson red, BaCl2: Is grassy green, etc.

Structure of BeCl2 In the solid state, beryllium chloride has a polymeric chain structure with chlorine bridges as given below:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Beryllium Chloride

Which are bonded by two covalent bonds while the other two by coordinate bonds. The Be -atoms in (BeCl2)n sp³ -hybridized.

In the vapor phase, BeCl2 exists as a chlorine-bridged dimer which dissociates into linear triatomic monomer at about 1200K. In the dimer, Be is sp² -hybridized while in the monomeric is sp² -hybridized

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Monomer And Dimer

CaF2 an industrially important compound, is the main source of both F2 and HF

CaF2 + H2SO4→ 2HF + CaSO4

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Electrolysis

  • CaF2 is also used for making prisms and cell windows for spectrophotometers, an important instrument used in the spectroscopic analysis of compounds.
  • In cold countries, CaCl2 is Used for treating ice on roads, because 30% eutectic mixture of CaCl2 +H2O freezes at  – 55%C.

4. Salts of Oxoacids

Trends in the properties of some salts of group-2 elements are discussed below

1. Carbonates:

Solubility in water:

The carbonates of the alkaline earth metals are practically insoluble in water. Their solubilities decrease on moving down the group. BeCO3 is sparingly soluble in water while BaCO3 is insoluble in water.

Solubility in water Explanation:

On moving down the group, lattice enthalpy of carbonates remains almost unchanged” (the size of the metal ion is much smaller compared to CO32-  ion) but hydration enthalpies of cations (M2+) decrease. Consequently, the solubilities of carbonates decrease down the group.

The extremely low solubility of alkaline earth metal carbonates in water is very important in the precipitation of Ba2+, Sr2+, and Ca2+ ions as their carbonates, in Gr-IV qualitative analysis of basic radicals.

Thermal stability: Carbonates of gr.-2 metals decompose on heating to give metal oxide and carbon dioxide

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Salts Of Oxoacids Of Thermal Stability

Thermal stability of the carbonates increases down the group with increasing cationic size

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Thermal Stability Of Carbonates

Thermal stability Explanation:

The trend can be explained in terms of the stability of the monomeric is sp –hybridized. of the resulting metal oxides. With increasing stability of  Cl the metal oxide, the carbonate becomes more unstable BeCl2 [monomer] towards heat. The stability of metal oxides decreases down the group due to a decrease in lattice enthalpy with increasing cationic (M2+) size. Hence, the stability of the carbonates towards heat increases down the group.

2. Bicarbonates:

The bicarbonates of alkaline earth metals do not exist in the solid state but are found in solutions. When such solutions are heated, bicarbonates decompose to form carbonates with the evolution of CO2

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Bicarbonates

3. Sulfates

1. Solubilityin water:

The sulfates of alkaline earth metals are relatively less soluble in water than the corresponding sulfates of alkali metals. Further, their solubilities decrease down the group. For example, BeSO4 and MgSO4 are more soluble in water, CaSO4 is less soluble in water and SrSO4, BaSO4, and RaSO4 are practically insoluble in water.

Solubilityin water Explanation:

On moving down the group, the hydration enthalpies decrease with increasing cationic size but the lattice enthalpy remains almost unchanged because the anion, SO4 is much larger as compared to the metal ions (M2+). For this reason, the solubilities of sulfates decrease down the group.

2. Thermal stability: The alkaline earth metal sulfates white solids which dissociate on heating to give the metal oxides and sulfur trioxide.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Sulphates Of Thermal Stability

The thermal stability of the sulfates increases down the group due to an increase in ionic character. This is due to a decrease in the polarising power of the metal ions with increasing ionic size. It becomes evident from the dissociation temperatures of the sulfates given below

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Thermal Stability Of Sulphates

4. Nitrates

Nitrates of alkaline earth metals are prepared by heating corresponding metal carbonate with dilute HNO3

MCO + 2HNO3→ M(NO3) + H2 O + CO2 (M = Be, Mg, Ca, Sr or Ba)

Magnesium nitrate crystallizes as Mg(NO3)2. 6H2O whereas barium nitrate crystallizes as an anhydrous salt. This again shows that the tendency to form hydrates decreases with increasing ionic size and decreasing hydration enthalpy as we move down the group. Upon heating, all nitrates decompose to give the corresponding oxides with the evolution of NO2 and O2.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Nitrates Decompose To Give Corresponding Oxides

The nitrates of all these metals are soluble in water. Beryllium is unusual for the fact that it forms a basic nitrate in addition to the normal salt.

1.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Basic Beryllium Nitrate

2.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Basic Beryllium Nitrate.

Anomalous Behaviour Of Be And Similarities Between Be And Al

Beryllium, the first member of group 2, shows some anomalous behavior, i.e.,it differs from the rest of the members of its family.

Reasons for anomalous behavior of beryllium:

  • The extremely small size of the Be atom and Be2+ ion,
  • Much higher polarising power of Be2+ ion,
  • Higher ionization enthalpy and electronegativity as compared to the other members, absence of vacant d -d-orbitals in its valence shell.
  • Again, beryllium resembles its diagonally placed element aluminum, the second typical element of group 13 and period 3, in several properties

Difference between beryllium and other alkaline earth metals

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Difference Between Beryllium And Other Alkaline Earth Metals

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Difference Between Beryllium And Other Alkaline Earth Metals.

Reasons for the similarities between beryllium and aluminum:

  • They have approximately the same polarising power. The polarising power of Be2+ is 0.064, while that of Al3+is 0.060.0
  • The standard electrode potentials of Be and A1 are much closer i.e. Be2+/Be = -1.85V and Al3++/Al = -1.66V.0
  • The electronegativity of both the elements i.e., beryllium and aluminum are the same (1.5in the Pauling scale).

Similarities between beryllium and aluminium:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Atomic Difference Between Beryllium And Aluminium

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Atomic Difference Between Beryllium And Aluminium.

Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 10 S Block Elements Overview

Uses Of Alkaline Earth Metals

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Uses Of Alkaline Earth Metals

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 10 S Block Elements Uses Of Alkaline Earth Metals.

  • and different milk products.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Group-13 Elements (Boron Family) Introduction

The valence shell electronic configuration of the elements of group-13 is ns²np¹ where n = 2-6.  It becomes clear from the electronic configurations that boron (B) and aluminium (Al) have noble gas cores, gallium (Ga) and indium (In) have noble gas cores plus 10 d-electrons and thallium (Tl) have noble gas cores plus 14 F -electrons and 10 d-electrons. Thus electronic configuration of the elements of group 13 is more complex compared to those of groups and 2.

This difference in electronic configuration affects the chemistry of the elements of this group.

Electronic configuration of group 13 – elements:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Element Electronic Configuration Of Group 13 Elements

Occurrence Of Group-13 Elements

1. The elements present in group 13 of the periodic table are boron (B), aluminium (Al), gallium (Ga), indium (In) and thallium (Tl). Except for horon, which is a non-metal, all other elements of this group are metals. The non-metallic character of boron is due to its small atomic size, high ionization enthalpy and comparatively high electronegativity.

2. Boron is a fairly rare element which occurs to a very small extent (0.0001% by mass) in the earth’s crust Natural boron consists of two isotopes: 10B (19%) and 11B (81%). Boron does not occur in a free state as it is highly reactive. It occurs mainly as orthoboric acid & as minerals like

Borax –  Na2(B4O5(OH4).8H2O -8H2O

Kernite – Na2(B4O5(OH4).2H2O

Colemanite – Na2(B3O4(OH3)2.2H2O

3. Aluminium is the most abundant metal, and the third most abundant element (8.3%by mass) in the earth’s crust after oxygen (45.5%) and silicon (27.7%). The important minerals of aluminium are:

Bauxite – (Al2O3 – 2H2O)

Cryolite -(Na3AlF6)

Orthoclase (feldspar) – KAlSi3O8

Mica (Muscovite)-  KAl 2(AlSi3O10)(F, OH)2 etc.

4. Gallium, indium and thallium are quite less abundant and occur in traces in sulphide minerals.

5. The highest concentration of Ga (0.1-1%) is found in a rare mineral known as germanite (a sulphide complex of Zn, Cu, Ge and As).

6. Traces of and Tl are available in sulphide ores of zinc and lead respectively

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements

General Trends In Atomic And Physical Properties Of Group-13 Elements

Some important atomic and physical properties of group-13 most elements are given in the following table

Some atomic and physical properties of group-13 elements:

Atomic And Physical Properties Of Group 13 Elements

Trends in different atomic and physical properties of group-13 elements with explanations:

Atomic and ionic radii

1. Atomic and ionic radii of group-13 elements are smaller as compared to the corresponding elements of group-2.

Atomic and ionic radii Explanation 1:

On moving from left to right in the periodic table, i.e., on moving from group-2 to group-13in a given period, the magnitude of nuclear charge increases but the new electron is added to the same shell. Since the electrons in the same shell do not screen each other and the effective nuclear charge increases, the outermost electrons experience greater nuclear charge and are pulled more strongly towards the nucleus. As a result, atomic size decreases. The same is true in the case of ionic radius.

2. On moving down the group, both atomic and ionic radii are expected to increase due to the addition of new electronic shells. However, the observed atomic radius of Ga = 135pm is slightly lesser than that of Al = 143pm.

Atomic and ionic radii Explanation 2:

On moving from Al (Z = 13) to Ga (Z = 31), the d-orbitals are filled by electrons. Since the d-orbitals are larger, these intervening electrons in d-orbitals do not screen the nucleus effectively. As a result, the effective nuclear charge experienced by the electrons in Ga is greater than that experienced by the electrons in Al. Hence, the atomic radius of Ga is slightly less than that of Al. The Ionic radii, however, increase regularly on moving down the group

Ionisation enthalpy

1. First ionisation enthalpies (ΔiH1) of group-13 elements are lower than the corresponding elements ofgroup-2.

Ionisation enthalpy Explanation 1:

  • The first electron, in the case of group-13 elements (ns²np¹), is to be removed from a p-orbital, while in the case of group-2 elements, it is to be removed from an s-orbital.
  • Due to greater penetration of the s-orbital, the s-electron is nearer to the nucleus and is more tightly held by the nucleus than a p-electron of the same principal shell.
  • The removal of the s-electron requires a greater amount of energy compared to p- the electron and because of this, the values of first ionisation enthalpies (ΔiHi) of the elements of group-13 are low as compared to the corresponding elements of group-2.
  • The second and third ionisation enthalpies of these elements are, however, quite high because the second and third electrons are to be removed from ns-orbital.

2. On moving down the group from B to Al, the first ionisation enthalpy, (Aÿ) decreases sharply. However, the value of (ΔiH1) of Ga is slightly higher than that ofAl, while that ofTl is much higher than that of.

Ionisation enthalpy Explanation 2:

1. The sharp decrease in (ΔiH1) value from B to Al is expected because an increase in atomic size and screening effect (caused by to addition of a new shell) outweighs the effect of ‘increased nuclear charge.

2. The element Ga has ten 3d-electrons which do not screen as  N, much as s- and p-electrons. Therefore, due to poor shielding of 3d-electrons, the effective nuclear charge acting on Ga is slightly higher than that on Al.  Due to this, the (ΔiH1) value of Ga is slightly higher than that of Al, even though a new shell has been added on going from Al to Ga.

3. The same explanation can be offered on going from Into Tl. Tl has fourteen 4 f-electrons having a very poor screening effect and because of this, there occurs an unexpected increase in tyre effective nuclear charge, for which (ΔiH1) of Tl becomes much higher than that of In.

4. The order of (ΔiH1) values of group-13 elements is B > Al < Ga > In < Tl. However, this trend is not observed in the (ΔiH2) and (ΔiH3) values of these elements and this is because once the outermost p-electron is removed, it is not easy to remove the second and third electrons due to a large increase in effective nuclear charge. As expected, the first three ionisation enthalpies of these elements follow the order: ΔiH1< ΔiH2 < ΔiH3

Oxidation states

The atoms of group-13 elements have three valence electrons, two in the s -s-subshell and one in the p -subshell. Therefore, it becomes clear from their electronic configurations that +3 is expected to be the most common oxidation state of these elements. Therefore, the group oxidation state of the group-13 element is +3.

Due to the small size of the boron, the sum of its first three ionisation enthalpies is very high. Therefore, it cannot lose its valence electrons to form B3+ ion rather it forms covalent bonds with other atoms, for example, BH3 or B2H6.

The sum of the first three ionisation enthalpies of Al is much lower than that of B so, it can form an Al3+ ion, for example, AlCl3. Al is a highly electropositive metal.

B and Al exhibit only a +3 oxidation state but Ga, In and Tl show a +3 as well as a +1 oxidation state and on moving down the group the stability of the +3 oxidation state decreases while that of the +1 oxidation state progressively increases.

The stability of the +1 oxidation state follows the order:

Al < Ga <In < Tl. In the case of Tl, the +1 oxidation state is very much more stable than the +3 oxidation state.

Oxidation states Explanation:

The stability of the +1 oxidation state that increases down the group can be explained in terms of the inert pair effect. On moving down the group, the tendency of electrons of the valence shell to participate in bond formation decreases due to poor shielding of these electrons from the attraction of the nucleus by the intervening d- and f- electrons.

This reluctance or inertness ofthe s-electrons to participate in bond formation is called the inert pair effect. Since the magnitude of this effect increases down the group, the +1 oxidation state becomes more and more stable down the group as compared to the +3 oxidation state. The inert pair effect is maximum in the case of Tl and therefore, it shows mainly a +1 oxidation state. Due to lesser stability, Tl3+ salts act as strong oxidising agents. This is evident from its electrode potential data:

Tl3+(aq) + 2e → Tl+(aq);E° = +1.25V

The inert pair effect may also be explained by the fact that as the size of the atom increases from Al to Tl, the energy required to unpair the ns² -electrons is not compensated by the energy released due to the formation of two additional bonds.

Electropositive and metallic character

The elements of group- 13 are less electropositive or metallic as compared to the elements of group 2. On moving down the group, the electropositive character of the elements first increases from B to Al and then decreases from Al to Tl.

Electropositive and metallic Explanation:

1. Elements of group-13 are smaller in size and the sum of the three ionisation enthalpies ΔiH1+ ΔiH2 + ΔiH3 needed to form M3+ ions is much higher than the sum of two ionisation enthalpies, ΔiH1+ ΔiH2 < ΔiH3 for the corresponding bigger-sized elements belonging to alkaline earth metals needed to form M2+ ions. For this reason, the elements of group 13 are less electropositive than the elements of group 2.

2. Boron has the highest sum of the first three ionisation enthalpies among the elements of group 13. Because of this, it has very little tendency to lose electrons and hence it is the least electropositive among group-13 elements. It is a non-metal and a poor conductor of electricity.

3. On moving from B to Al, the sum of the first three ionisation enthalpies decreases considerably (6887 to 5137kJ-mol-1 ) due to an increase in atomic size and hence, Al has a much higher tendency to lose electrons, i.e., Al is sufficiently electropositive. All is a metal and a good conductor of electricity.

4. Because of the increasingly poor shielding effect of 3d -electrons in Ga, 4d -electrons in and 4 f-electrons in Tl, the effective nuclear charge gradually increases and as a consequence, they exhibit lesser electropositive and metallic character.

Density

Because of smaller atomic and ionic radii, the elements of group 13 have a higher density as compared to the elements of group 2. On moving down the group, density increases.

Density Explanation:

On moving down the group, the density of these elements increases because the extent of the increase in atomic mass is greater than the extent of the increase in atomic size.0 On moving from B to Tl, both atomic mass and no. of electrons in the inner d- and f- subshell increases. Due to the lower shielding effect of d-and f— electrons, the effective nuclear charge increases from B to Tl. As a result, from B to Tl, the atomic size does not increase much.

P Block Elements Class 11 NCERT Notes

Melting and boiling points

Elements of group 13 do not show a regular trend in their melting points. The melting points decrease from B to Ga and then increase from Ga to Tl.

Melting and boiling points Explanation:

This irregular trend is probably due to unusual crystal structures of B and Ga. The much higher melting point of B is due to its giant covalent polymeric crystal structure consisting of icosahedral units with B-atoms at all 12 corners and each B-atom is bonded to five equidistant neighbours resulting in much stronger attractive forces. In contrast, Ga consists of discrete Ga2 molecules so its melting point is exceptionally low (303K). However, the boiling points of these elements decrease regularly on moving down the group.

Gallium remains liquid over a vast range of temperatures and no other low-melting metal can compare with it. Molten Ga begins to boil only when heated to a temperature of 2276K. Due to this unusual property, gallium is used in thermometers required for measuring very high temperatures (>1000°C).

Electronegativity

Elements of group-13 are more electronegative than the elements of group-1 (alkali metals) and group-2 (alkaline earth metals). On moving down the group, the electronegativity first decreases from B to Al and then increases marginally.

Electronegativity Explanation:

  •  Because of the smaller atomic size and higher nuclear charge, the electronegativities of group-13 elements are higher than the corresponding elements of group-1 and 2.0 On moving down the group from B to Al, the atomic size increases considerably and as a result, the attraction of the nucleus for the electrons decreases and hence the electronegativity decreases.
  • On moving from Al to Tl, the atomic size increases but at the same time effective nuclear charge increases due to poor shielding of the inner d and f-electrons. As a result, the attractive force of the nucleus for the electrons increases and hence the electronegativity increases

Chemical Elements Properties Of Group-13

The members of group-13 elements have three electrons in their valence shells. Except for the last member Tl, all other members use these electrons to form three bonds and thus exhibit an oxidation state of +3. In the +3 oxidation state, the members of the boron family are expected to form covalent bonds for the following reasons:

  • Small size and high charge (+3) cause high polarisation of the anions leading to the formation of covalent bonds.
  • The large value of the sum of the first three ionisation enthalpies, ΔiH1 + ΔiH2 + ΔiH3 of these elements also suggests that the bonds will be largely covalent.
  • The difference in electronegativity between the elements
    of group 13 and those ofthe higher groups is not very high.

This fact also agrees with the formation of covalent bonds. Because of its small size and high ionisation enthalpies, it is not possible for boron to form B3+ ions by losing its three valence electrons.

Therefore, 113 Boron does not form ionic compounds. It always forms covalent compounds by showing its valence electrons. The sum of the first three ionisation enthalpies, ΔiH1 + ΔiH2 + ΔiH3 is also higher but less than that of B. So A1 also has a strong tendency to form covalent compounds,

Example:  AlCl3 , AlBr3 and AlCl3. Like Al, compounds of the rest of the members such as GaCl3, In Cl3 etc. are covalent when anhydrous.

However, all the members except B form metal ions in solution. This change from covalent to ionic nature may be explained by the fact that in aqueous solutions these ions undergo hydration and the amount of hydration enthalpy exceeds the ionisation enthalpy.

Ga, In and TI show two oxidation states of +1 and +3 due to the inert pair effect. The compounds in the +1 oxidation state are more ionic than the compounds in the +3 oxidation state. In a trivalent state, the number of electrons in the valence shell of the central atom in a molecule of these elements is only six (two electrons less than the octet) and therefore, such electron-deficient molecules behave as Lewis acids. For example, BCl3 (Lewis acid) readily accepts an unshared pair of electrons from ammonia (Lewis base) to form the adduct, BCl3-NH3.

Reaction with dioxygen or air

1. All the members of group 13 react with dioxygen at higher temperatures to form trioxides of the general formula M2O3. T1 forms both T1203 and some amount of Tl2O

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reaction With Dioxygen

The reaction of Al with 02 is known as a thermite reaction which is highly exothermic (AH0 =-1670kJ mol-1 ). A very strong affinity of Al for oxygen is used in the extraction of other metals from their oxides (thermite process). For example, Mn and Cr can be extracted from Mn3O4 and Cr2O3 respectively by this process.

2. The reactivity of group-13 elements towards dioxygen increases on moving down the group. Pure crystalline boron is almost unreactive towards air at ordinary temperature. Al does not react with dry air.

However, it gets tarnished readily in moist air even at ordinary temperatures due to the formation of a thin oxide (Al2O3) layer on the surface which prevents the metal
from further reaction. When amorphous boron and aluminium metal are heated in air, they form boron trioxide and aluminium trioxide (Al2O3) respectively.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Aluminium Trioxide

Ga and In are not affected by air but T1 forms an oxide on
its surface in the presence of air.

3. B and Al react with dinitrogen at high temperatures to form
the corresponding nitrides.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Nitrides

Ga, In and T1 do not react with N2 to form the corresponding nitrides.

Boron nitride is a white slippery solid which melts under pressure at 3246K. It is chemically inert towards the air, oxygen, hydrogen, chlorine, etc. even on heating. The total number of valence electrons of one B and one N- -atom is equal to the number of valence electrons of two C-atoms.

Therefore, the structure of boron nitride is almost the same as that of graphite having a layer lattice. In each layer, alternate B and N-atoms (both sp2 -hybridised) form
a planar hexagon. The layers are stacked over one another in such a way that the N-atom of one layer is directly over the B-atom of another layer. Because of its structural similarity with graphite, boron nitride is also called inorganic graphite.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Structure Of Boron Nitride

When boron nitride is heated at 1800°C under very high pressure, it gets converted to a cubic form comparable to diamond. This extremely hard variety known as borazon is used for cutting diamonds.

The acid-base character of oxides and hydroxides:

1. Trioxides of the elements of the boron family react with water to form their corresponding hydroxides.

M2O3 + 3H2O→  2M(OH)3

2. The nature of these oxides and hydroxides changes on moving down the group. Both B203 and B(OH)3 are weakly acidic. They dissolve in alkali to form metal borates.

B2O3 + 2NaOH → 2NaBO2(sodium metaborate) + H2O

B(OH)3 + 3NaOH → Na3BO3(sodium borate) + 3H2O

Aluminium oxide and hydroxide are amphoteric. Both of them dissolve in alkalies as well as acids.

1. Al2O3(s) + 3H2SO4(s)→ Al2(SO4)3(aq) + 3H2O(l)

2.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Sodium Aluminate

Similarly, Al(OH)3(s) + NaOH(s)→Na[Al(OH)4](aq)

Al(OH)3(aq) + 3HCl(aq)→ AlCl3(aq) + 3H2O(l)

The oxide and hydroxide of Ga are also amphoteric while those of In and TI are basic.

Therefore, the basic character of oxides and hydroxides increases down the group

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Hydroxides Increases

3. Thallium forms two types of hydroxides:

Thallic hydroxide [Tl(OH)3] and thallous hydroxide (TlOH). Al(OH)3 is insoluble in H20 but TlOH is soluble and is a
strong base like alkali metal hydroxides.

Thallium Explanation:

On moving down the group, the magnitude of ionisation enthalpy decreases. As a result, the strength of the M— O bond also decreases and therefore, its cleavage becomes progressively easier resulting in the increased basic strength down the group

An extremely hard crystalline form of aluminium oxide called corrundum is used as an abrasive. It can be made by heating amorphous aluminium oxide at about 2000K. Aluminium forms a series of mixed oxides with other j metals, some of them occurring naturally as semi-precious stones. These include ruby (Cr3+) and blue sapphire
(CO2+, Fe2+, Tl4+).

Reaction with hydrogen

1.  Group-13 elements form hydrides of the type MH3. The members of the boron family do not combine directly with hydrogen. However, several hydrides are known
which can be prepared indirectly. Boron forms several stable covalent hydrides which are collectively called boranes.

The two most important types of boranes are as follows:

  1. Boraness with general formula BnHn+4 are called nido-boranes 
    • Examples: Diborane (B2H6) pentaborane-9 (B5H9).
  2. Boranes with the general formula BnHn+6 are called arachnoid-boranes
    • Examples:  Tetraborane (B4H10), and pentaborane-11 (B5H11).

2. The simplest hydride is diborane (B2H6) which is prepared by the reaction of BF3 with lithium hydride industrially.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Lithium Hydride

3. The other members of group 13 also form several hydrides which are polymeric,

Example:

(AlH1)n, (GaH3)n, (InH3)n

The stability of these hydrides decreases down the group and thallium hydride is quite unstable. Boron, aluminium and gallium also form complex anionic hydrides such as NaBH4 (sodium borohydride), LiAlH4 (lithium aluminium hydride) and LiGaH4 (lithium gallium hydride). These complex hydrides act as powerful reducing agents

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Hydrides As Power Full Reducing Agents

4. The hydrides are weak Lewis acids and readily form adducts with strong Lewis bases to form compounds of the type MH3:B (B = base).

For example, AlH3:NMe3, GaH3:NMe3 etc.

NMe3 + AlH3→[Me3N:→AlH3]

Reaction With Acids And Alkalies

The action of acids:

1. Boron remains inert in the presence of non-oxidising acids such as HCl. However, it undergoes oxidation by strong oxidising acids such as a mixture of hot concentrated H2SO4 and HNO3 (2: 1) to form boric acid (H3BO3) at very high temperatures.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Boric Acids

2.  The remaining elements of this group react with both oxidising and non-oxidising acids. For example, Al dissolves in dilute HCl and liberates dihydrogen.

2Al(s) + 6HCl(aq)→ 2Al3+(a<7) + 6Cr(a<jr) + 3H2(g)

3. Concentrated nitric acid renders aluminium passive by forming a protective layer of its oxide (AlO3) on the surface ofthe metal. Thus aluminium vessels can be used
to store concentrated HNO3.

2Al + 6HNO3→Al2O3+ 6NO2 + 2H2O

Ga, In and TI react with dilute acids to liberate H2

Action of alkalies:

1. When boron is fused with alkalies (NaOH or KOH) at a temperature greater than 775K, it forms borates and liberates dihydrogen

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Borates And Liberates Dihydrogen

2. Boron dissolves in a fused mixture of Na2CO3 and NaNO3 at 1123K to produce borate and nitrite salt and liberate carbon dioxide.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Borate And Nitrite Salt And Liberates Carbon Dioxide

Al and Ga also react with aqueous alkalies with the evolution of dihydrogen

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Aqueous Alkalies With The Evolution Of Dihydrogen

In and TI does not react with alkalis.

Reaction with halogens

Elements of group-13 react with halogens at high temperatures to produce trihalides ofthe general formula, MX3. However, thallium (III) iodide does not exist.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reaction With Halogens

Trihalides of boron:

Due to its small atomic size and high ionisation enthalpy, boron forms covalent trihalides

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Structure Of Boron Trihalides

BX3. BF3 is a gas, BCl3 and BBr3 are liquids and BI3 is a solid. All these are trigonal planar molecules in which the central B -atom is sp² -hybridised. The three unpaired electrons of p -orbitals of three halogen atoms overlap with the three sp² -orbitals of boron to form three sp²-p, B—X cr -bonds. The unhybridised empty p-orbital remains perpendicular to the plane of the molecule.

Since there are only six electrons in the valence shell of the central boron atom in boron trihalides, they can accept two more electrons to acquire a stable octet, i.e., boron trihalides can behave as Lewis acids.

NCERT Solutions Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 11 P Block Elements

The Lewis acid character, however, decreases in the order:

BI3 > BBr3 > BCl3 > BF3

Explanation: This order of relative Lewis acid strength of boron trihalides, is just the reverse of what may be expected based on the electronegativities of the
halogen atoms can well be explained based on the tendency of the halogen atom to donate its lone pair of electrons to the boron atom through pn-pn back bonding.

Since the vacant 2p -orbital of B and the 2p-orbital of Fatom containing a lone pair of electrons are equal in size, therefore, the tendency of the F -atom to donate the unshared
pair by pπ-pπ back bonding is maximum. BF3 can well be represented as a resonance hybrid of four resonating structures. As a result of resonance involving pn-pn back bonding, the electron density on the boron atom increases effectively and so its strength as a Lewis acid decreases considerably.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Resonance Of Boron Trihalides

As the size ofthe halogen atom increases on going from Cl to I, the extent of overlap between the 2p -orbital of boron and a large p -orbital of halogen (3p of Cl, 4p of Br and 5p of I] decreases. As a consequence, the electron deficiency of boron increases and thus, the Lewis acid strength decreases on going from BF3 to BI3.

Halides of aluminium:

The halides of aluminium in the vapour state as well as in an inert solvent such as benzene exist ns dimers.

For example, Al2Cl3 exists as Al2Cl3.

Halides of aluminium Explanation:

In AlCl3, there are six electrons (two electrons less than tyre octet) around the central Al-atom. In the dimeric structure, each Al completes its octet by accepting a lone
pair of electrons from the Cl-atom of another AlCl3 molecule. The dimeric form exists lit vapour state at < 473K.

However, at higher temperatures, it dissociates to trigonal planar AlCl3 molecule. In polar solvents such as water, the dimer dissociates and it is the high hydration enthalpy which helps this dissociation leading to the formation of Al3+ ion

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Dimeric Structure Of Aluminium Chloride

Al2Clg + 6H2O ⇌ 2[Al(H2O)6]3+(aq) + 6Cl(aq)

Therefore, anhydrous AlCl3 is covalent but, hydrated aluminium chloride is ionic. Some important points of distinction between boron and
the other members of its family (especially the next member Al) are discussed in the given table. Anomalous properties of boron

Unlike aluminium halides, boron halides exist as monomers and this is because the boron atom is so small that it cannot accommodate four large-sized halogen atoms around it.

Boron

  • Boron is the first member of group 13 of the periodic table. There are three electrons in its valence shell (ls²2s²2p¹).
  • It exhibits anomalous behaviour and differs from the other members of its family. The reasons behind its exceptional behaviour can be attributed to the
  • Exceptionally small atomic size as compared to other elements of its group,
  • Much higher ionisation enthalpy and absence of d orbitals in its outermost or valence shell. Boron forms electron-deficient compounds which act as Lewis acids

Anomalous behaviour of boron:

Some important points of distinction between boron and the other members of its family (especially the next member Al) are discussed in the given table

Anomalous properties of boron:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Anomalous Properties Of Boron

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Anomalous Properties Of Boron.

1. Occurrence

Boron does not exist in a free state in nature. It is always found in the combined state as boric acid and borates. Boron occurs in two isotopic forms, 10B (19%) and 11B (81%). Its abundance in the earth’s crust is very low (about 0.001%)

Important minerals of boron:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Important Minerals Of Boron

Boron may be obtained from the jets of steam which erupt from the volcano as boric acid and also from the water of the hot spring of Tuscany in small amounts as boric acid.

2. Properties of boron

Boron Physical properties:

1. Boron is an extremely hard solid (next to diamond) having a much higher melting point (2450K) and this is because of its three-dimensional network structure. Its boiling point is 3923 K.

2. Boron exists in two allotropic forms namely:

  1. Amorphous,
  2. Crystalline.

Crystalline boron is of three types:

  1. α – Rhombohedral
  2. β – Rhombohedral and
  3. ϒ – Tetragonal.

The building units of all these forms are B12 icosahedral units with 20 faces and boron atoms at all the 12 comers or vertices.

The melting and boiling point of boron is 2450K and 3923K respectively. The reason behind such high melting and boiling points is attributed to very strong attractive forces among the B12 units as well as its closely packed stable crystal structure.

Chemical properties of crystalline boron

  • Crystalline boron is chemically very inert. It is not oxidised even when heated with oxygen Crystalline boron is not attacked by HCl or HF. It is not affected by various oxidising acids such as shot and cone. HNO3, H2SO4 etc.
  • When it is fused with Na2O2 or Na2CO3 and KNO3 at high temperatures, sodium borate (Na3BO3) is obtained.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Crystalline Boron

Chemical properties of amorphous boron

1. Reaction with air:

When amorphous boron is heated in air at 700°C, it bums with a red flame and undergoes oxidation to form boron trioxide. Boron nitride is also formed by its reaction with N2 gas of air

4B + 3O2 → 2B2O3; 2B + N2 → 2BN

2. Reaction with strong alkali:

When amorphous boron is fused with NaOH or KOH at a temperature greater than 773K, it forms borate salts and liberates H2 gas

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Strong Alkali

3. Reaction with oxidising adds:

Boron is not affected by non-oxidising acids such as hydrochloric add. However, it reacts with oxidising adds like cone. H2SO4 and HNO3 form boric add.

3H2SO4 + 2B → 2H2BO2 + 3SO2

6HNO3 + 2B→2H3BO3 + 6NO2

4. Reaction with halogens:

Boron bums in fluorine gas to form boron trifluoride. Boron reacts with chlorine at high temperatures to form boron trichloride

2B + 3F2→ 2BF3 ;2B + 3Cl2→2BCl3

An aqueous solution of BC13 is addicting because it undergoes hydrolysis to form a mixture of HCl and boric acid.

BCl3+ 3H2O →  3HCl + H3BO3

5. Reaction with metals (oxidising property):

The binary compounds of boron with elements having electronegativity lower than boron itself (For example: Metal) are called borides. When boron is heated with a metal at high temperature in an electric arc furnace, borides are obtained (B acts as an oxidant). Borides are hard, inert and have special properties

3Mg + 2B→ Mg3B2; 3Ca + 2B→ Ca3 B2

6. Reaction with carbon:

When boron is heated with carbon having comparable size and electronegativity at high temperatures in an electric arc furnace, very hard covalent boron carbide (B4C) is obtained. It is even harder than diamonds. It is used as an abrasive. 4B + C→ B4C It can also be prepared by reducing B2O3with coke at high temperature (2500°C) in an electric furnace

2B3O3 → B4C + 6CO↑

Reducing property: When boron is heated strongly with SiO2 and CO2, it reduces these oxides to give Si and C respectively.

2B2O3 + 7C →  B4C + 6CO↑

7. Reducing property:

When boron is heated strongly with SiO2 and CO2, it reduces these oxides to give Si and C respectively.

8. Reaction with water: Red hot boron reduces steam to yield B2O3 and dihydrogen

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reaction With Water

Uses of boron

  • Boron, an extremely hard refractory solid with a high melting point, low density and very low electrical conductivity, finds many applications which are as follows:
  • Boron fibres having enormous tensile strength are used in making bullet-proof vests and as reinforcement materials in space shuttles and aircraft.
  • Because of the high tendency of isotopes to absorb neutrons, metal borides are used in nuclear reactors as protective shields and control rods.
  • It is used in the steel industry (instead of using expensive metals like Mo, Cr and W) for manufacturing special types of hard steel
  • Its compounds such as borax and boric add are used for making heat-resistant glass (i.e., p a mild antiseptic.
  • Boron compounds are used as rocket fuels because of their high energy/mass ratio.
  • Boron carbide (B4C) is used as an abrasive for polishing or grinding.
  • Boron is used as a semiconductor for making electronic devices glass), glass-wool and gÿre glass
  • An aqueous solution of orthoboric acid is used as

Some P Block Elements Chapter 11 NCERT Notes

Some Important Compounds Of Boron

1. Borax, Na2B4O7.10H2O or Na2[B4O5(OH)4] 8H2O

Borax or sodium tetraborate decahydrate which occurs naturally as tincal (sugar) in certain dried-up lakes is the most important compound of boron. Borax contains the tetranuclear units

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Structure Of Borax

Therefore, its correct formula is Na2[B4O5(OH)4]-8H2O.

Borax Preparation

1. From tincal:

Naturally occurring borax or tincal, which contains about 50% borax is boiled with water, concentrated and then filtered to remove insoluble impurities. The filtrate is then concentrated and cooled when crystals of borax separate.

2. From colemanite:

Finely powdered mineral, colemanite (Ca2 B6O11) is boiled with sodium carbonate solution and CaCO3, Na2B4O7 and NaBO2 are obtained

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Colemanite

Precipitate of CaCO3 is filtered off and the filtrate is then concentrated and cooled to get the crystals of borax. A current of CO2 is passed through the mother liquor when sodium metaborate presentient gets converted into borax

4NaBO2 + CO2→ Na2B4O7(Borax) + Na2CO3

3. From boric acid:

Borax may also be obtained by neutralising boric acid with sodium carbonate. Crystals of Na2B4O7.10H2O separate on cooling.

4H3BO3 + Na2CO3 →  Na2B4O7 + 6H2O + CO2

Borax Physical properties:

  1. It is a white crystalline solid.
  2. It is less soluble in cold water but more soluble in hot water.
  3. When ordinary borax is recrystallised from water at a higher temperature (≈60°C), crystals of sodium tetraborate pentahydrate (Na2B4O7.5H2O) separate. This is called ‘goldsmith’s sugar.

Borax Chemical properties

1. Nature of aqueous solution:

The aqueous solution of borax is alkaline in nature and this is because borax undergoes hydrolysis to form the strong alkali, NaOH and the weak acid, boric acid. It acts as a buffer.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Nature Of Aqueous Solution

As the aqueous solution of borax is alkaline, it can be titrated against an acid using an orange indicator

Na2B4O7 + 2HCl + 5H2O→ 4H3BO3 + 2NaCl

When phenolphthalein is added to an aqueous solution of borax, the solution becomes pink in colour. However, when glycerol (a polyhydroxy compound) is added to the solution, it becomes colourless again.

Aqueous solution Explanation:

Since the aqueous solution of borax is alkaline in nature, it becomes pink when phenolphthalein is added to it. When glycerol is added to that solution, it combines with B(OH)4 and removes it from the equilibrium by forming a stable chelate complex. As a consequence, the equilibrium shifts to the right making boric acid a strong acid. Because of the increased concentration of H+ ions, complete neutralisation of OH ions occurs and the solution becomes colourless again.

H3BO3 + H2O  ⇌  H+ B(OH)4; Ka = 6 × 10-10

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Glycerol And Stable Chelate Complex

2. Reaction with caustic soda:

When a calculated amount of NaOH is added to borax, sodium metaborate is obtained.

Na2B4O7 + 2NaOH→4NaBO2 + H2O

Reaction with sulphuric acid: When a calculated quantity of concentrated sulphuric acid is added to a hot concentrated solution of borax, boric acid is produced

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reaction With Sulphuric Acid

3. Reaction with ethanol and sulphuric acid:

When borax is heated with ethanol and concentrated H2SO4, vapours of triethyl borate are formed which on ignition bum with a green-edged flame.

Na2B4O7+ H2SO4 + 5H2O →  Na2SO4 + 4H3BO3

H3BO3 + 3C2H5OH→B(OC2H5)3 (Triethyl borate)+  3H2O

This reaction is used as a test for the detection of borate ion (BO3-3) in qualitative analysis.

4. Action of heat:

When borax is heated strongly in the flame of a Bunsen burner, it loses its water of crystallisation and swells up to form a puffy mass. On further heating, the

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Borax Heat Strongly

mass turns into a transparent liquid which Nolldllics to form a bead that consists of sodium metaborate (NaBO2) and boric anhydride (B2O3)

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Sodium Metaborate And Boric Anhydride

Preparation til boron from borax

A hot and concentrated solution of borax reacts with concentrated H2SO4 to form I boric acid (H3BO3). Boric added when heated tit high temperature, successively dissociates to form boron d ioxide, (B2O3). Boron trioxide when heated with Mg-powdor produces boron.

Na2B4O7 + H2SO4+ 5H2O→Na2SO4 + 4HaBO3

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Preparation Of Boron From Borax

Borax bead test

The borax bead test is very Important In a qualitative analysis for the detection of coloured metal ions like Cu2+, Ni2+, Co2+, Cr2+ etc.

  • At first, a hot platinum loop is touched with borax and then heated in a Bunsen burner’s flame.
  • Borax at first swells up and finally melts to form a colourless bead in the loop.
  • The hot loop is touched with the salt under investigation and heated at first in the oxidising flame and then in the reducing flame.
  • The metal ion is identified from the colour of the bead. This test is called the borax bead test.

Borax Bead Test:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Borax Bead Test

Reactions:

1. Metallic compounds undergo decomposition on heating to form metallic oxides.

2M(NO3)2 → 2MO + 4NO2 + O2

2MSO4 → 2MO + 2SO2 + O2

(M = Cu, Fe, Co, Ni, Mn, Cr)

2. The basic metallic oxides dissolve in the acidic diborane trioxide(BO) of the borax bead and form coloured metal metaborate salts

MO + BoO3 → M(BO2)2

3. Copper Iron and other metallic salts form -ic metaborate in oxidising flame and -metaborates in reducing flame

Examples:

1. Reactions with copper salt:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reaction With Copper Salt

In oxidising flame, cupric metaborate (blue) is formed

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Copper Salt In Oxidising Flame

In reducing flame cuprous metaborate is formed

1.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Copper Salt In Reducing Flame

2.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Copper Salt In Reducing Flame.

2. Reactions with iron salt:

In oxidising flame, ferric metaborate (yellow) is formed

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reaction With Iron Salt In Oxidising Flame

In reducing flame ferrous metaborate (green) is formed

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reaction With Iron Salt In Reducing Flame

3. Reactions with cobalt salt: Both in oxidising and reducing flame, cobalt metaborate (blue) is formed

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reaction With Cobalt Salt

As the oxidation states of Co (+2) and Cr (+3) remain unchanged, the colour of the bead obtained from them is the same for both reducing and oxidising flame.

Uses of borax

Borax is used:

  • In the manufacture of heat-resistant borosilicate (pyrex) glass,
  • For preparing medicinal soaps,
  • As a flux in soldering metals.
  • In the candle industry as a stiffening agent,
  • In softening water
  • For the borax bead test,
  • In the manufacture of perborate
  • Na2(OH)2B(O — O)2B(OH)2 6H2O, is an important cleansing and bleaching agent used in washing powders.

Orthoboric acid or boric acid, H2BO3o r B(OH)3

The trivial name of orthoboric acid is boric acid

Orthoboric acid Preparation:

1. From colemanite:

Sulphur dioxide is passed through a hot concentrated solution of the mineral cole, Win’ll the resulting solution is concentrated and cooled, and crystals of boric add separate out. Calcium bisulphite being highly soluble In water remains dissolved In the mother liquor.

Ca2 B6O11  (Colemanite)+ 4SO2 + 11H2 O →  2Ca(HSO3)2 (Calcium bisulphite)+ 6H3BO3 ( Boric acid)

2. From borax:

When a hot concentrated solution of borax is treated with hydrochloric acid or sulphuric acid, boric acid Is obtained. The resulting solution is concentrated and then cooled when crystals of boric acid separate out

Na2B4O7 + 2HCl + 5H2O →4H3BO3 + 2NaCI

Na2B4O7 + H2SO4 + 5H2O → 4H3BO3 + Na2SO4

3. From boron compounds by hydrolysis:

Certain boron compounds such as halides, hydrides and nitrides on boiling with water (hydrolysis) produce boric add.

BCI2 + 3H2O → H3BO3+ 3HCl

B2H6(dlborane) + 6H2O→2H3BO3 + 6H2

BN(boron nitride) + 3H2O→ H3BO3 + NH3

Orthoboric acid’s Physical properties

  • It Is a white needle-like crystalline solid with a soft soapy touch.
  • It Is sparingly soluble in cold water but highly soluble in hot water.
  • It Is steam volatile.

Orthoboric acid Chemical properties

1. Addle nature:

It Is a very weak monobasic acid (Ka = 6 × 10-10). It does not donate protons like most protonic acids. In fact, due to the small size of B and the presence of only six electrons Its valence shell B(OH)3 behaves as a Lewis acid and accepts a pair of electrons from OH” Ion water thereby releasing a proton.

H(OH)3 + 2H2O ⇌  [B(OH)4]+ H3O+

B(OH)3 behaves as a very weak acid (pKa  = 9.2) because it only partially reacts with water to form [B(OH)4]and H3O+ Ions. So, B(OH)3 or H3BO3 cannot be titrated satisfactorily with NaOH solution because no sharp end point Is obtained.

If some polyhydroxy compound such as glycerol, mannitol or catechol is added to the titration mixture, then boric acid behaves as a strong monobasic add.  This occurs due to the Removal of [B(OH)4] Ion from the equilibrium mixture by the formation of a stable complex with the polyhydroxy compound.

It can then be titrated with NaOH solution and the endpoint can be detected using phenolphthalein as an indicator. ‘

2. Action of heats:

When orthoboric acid is heated, it loses molecules of water in three stages at different temperatures thus forming different products

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Action Of Heat

3. Reaction with ethyl alcohol:

Boric acid reacts with ethyl alcohol In the presence of concentrated sulphuric acid to form triethyl borate

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reaction With Ethyl Alcohol

Vapours of triethyl borate burn with a green-edged flame. This test is used for detecting boric acid in qualitative analysis.

It is to be noted that this test can also be performed without using H2SO4 However, for detecting borate ions, the presence of H2SO4 is required. Therefore, boric acid and borate ions can be distinguished by this test.

4. Reaction with fluoride salt:

Boric acid reacts with fluoride salt in the presence of concentrated H2SO4 to form volatile boron trifluoride (BF3). This compound burns with a green-edged flame.

2H3BO3 + 3CaF2 + 3 H2SO4 → 3CaSO4 + 2BF3 + 6H2O

5. Reaction with ammonium bi fluoride:

When boric acid is heated with ammonium bi fluoride, no residue is obtained because all the resulting compounds are gaseous

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reaction With Ammonium Bifluoride

B2O33(s) + 6NH4BF4(S)→  8BF3(G) + 6NH3(g) + 3H2O(g)

6. Reaction with potassium fluoride:

When the aqueous solutions of two acidic compounds, boric acid and potassium fluoride (KHF2) are mixed, an alkaline solution is obtained due to the formation of potassium tetrafluoroborate (KBF4) and potassium hydroxide (KOH).

B(OH)3+ 2KHF2→  KBF4 + KOH + 2H2O

Being a Lewis acid, B(OH)3 has a strong tendency to combine with relatively smaller (F) ions to form fluoroborate ion (BF) and for this reason, this unbelievable reaction takes place.

Uses of boric acid

Boric acid is used

  • As a mild antiseptic for washing eyes under the name Boric lotion
  • In the manufacture of heat-resistant borosilicate glass,
  • As a preservative for milk and foodstuffs,
  • In the manufacture of enamels and glazes for pottery.

Structure Of boric acid:

The shining white crystals of boric acid contain B(OH)3 units linked by H -bonds in infinite layers of nearly hexagonal symmetry. Since the adjacent layers in the boric acid crystal are held together with weak attractive forces, one layer can easily slide over the other and hence, boric acid is soft and slippery touch.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Structure Of Boric Acid

Diborane, B2H6

Boron hydrides are binary compounds of B and H. Although boron does not combine directly with hydrogen, several boron hydrides collectively called boranes, (in analogy with alkanes) are known. Depending upon their general formulae, these hydrides

Can be divided into several categories of which the following two are the most important:

  1. Nido-boranes: General formula: \(\mathrm{B}_n \mathrm{H}_{n+4} \text {, example} \mathrm{B}_2 \mathrm{H}_6\) (diborane), B5H9 (pentaborane-9), B6H10 (hexaborane- 10), B8H12(octaborane-12),B10H14 (decaborane-14) etc. 
  2. Arachno-boranes: General formula: \(\mathrm{B}_n \mathrm{H}_{n+6} \text {, example }\) B5H14 (pentaborane-11), BgH12 (hexa-borane-12), BgH14(octaborane-14) etc. The mostimportant hydride ofboron is diborane (B2Hg).

Preparation of diborane

1. Laboratory preparation:

Diborane is prepared by the oxidation of sodium borohydride (NaBH4) with I2 in a diglyme solution.

Diglyme is a polyether whose formula is CH3OCH2CH2OCH2CH2OCH3

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Diglyme

2. From boron trifluoride etherate:

It may be prepared by the reduction of boron trifluoride etherate with lithium aluminium hydride (LiAlH4) in diethyl ether or sodium borohydride (NaBH4) in diglyme

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Boron Trifluoride Etherate

3. Industrial preparation:

On an industrial scale, diborane is prepared by reducing BF3 with LiH or NaH. 450K

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Industrial Preparation

Diborane Physical properties

Diborane is a colourless, foul-smelling, highly toxic gas having a boiling point of 180K.

Diborane Chemical properties

1.  Thermal stability:

It is stable only at low temperatures. When it is heated at 373-523K in a sealed tube, several higher boranes are obtained

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Thermal Stability
However, by controlling the temperature, pressure and reaction time, various individual boranes can be prepared.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Various Individual Boranes

2. Combustibility:

When it is exposed to air, it spontaneously catches fire because of the strong affinity of boron towards oxygen. This reaction forming boric anhydride and water is highly exothermic.

B2H6 + 3O2 →B2O3 + 3H2O; ΔH = – 1976 kJ -mol-1

The higher boranes also spontaneously in the air.

3. Hydrolysis:

It undergoes ready hydrolysis to produce boric acid.

B2H6(g) + 6H2O(aq)→2H3BO3(aq) + 6H2(g)↑

It reacts with methanol to form trimethyl borate.

B2H6 + 6CH3OH → 2B(OCH3)3 + 6H2

4. Reaction with Lewis bases:

When diborane is treated with Lewis base, it undergoes cleavage to form monoborane which then reacts with Lewis base to form an adduct.

B2H6 + 2NMe3→ 2BH3-NMe3; B2H6 + 2CO → 2BH3-CO

5. Reaction with ammonia:

When diborane is treated with ammonia, an additional compound is formed. The compound on further heating at about 473 K decomposes to give a volatile compound called borazine (or borazole).

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reaction With Ammonia

Borazine is isosteric (i.e., the same number of atoms) and isoelectronic (i.e., the same number of electrons) with benzene and its structure is similar to that of benzene. Like benzene, all the atoms in borazine are sp² -hybridised. The n -n-bonding of borazine is dative and it arises due to sideways overlapping of filled p-orbitals of N and empty p-orbitals of B. Because of its similarity with benzene, borazine is also called inorganic benzene.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Borazine And Inorganic Benzene

Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Notes PDF

6. Formation of complex borohydrides:

Diborane reacts with several metal hydrides to form borohydrides containing tetrahedral [BH4]_ ion.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Complex Borohydrides

Both sodium and lithium borohydrides are used as very good reducing agents in the synthesis of organic compounds in the laboratory. These two compounds may also be used as starting material for the preparation of other borohydride compounds.

7. Reaction with alkalis:

Diborane dissolves in strong alkalies such as NaOH or KOH solution to form metaborates and H2 gas.

B2H6 + 2KOH + 2H2O→ 2KBO2 + 6H2(Potassium Metaborate)↑

8. Reaction with halogen acids:

Diborane reacts with halogen acids to form halodiborancs and hydrogen gas. The order of reactivity of halogen acids is: HI > HBr > HCl

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reaction With Halogen Acids

9. Reaction with halogens:

Diborane reacts with halogens to form corresponding halodiboranes. The order of reactivity of halogens is Cl2 > Br2 > I2. Thus, chlorine reacts with diborane explosively at room temperature, bromine reacts rapidly at 373 K but iodine reacts slowly at higher temperatures

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reaction With Halogens Of Chlorodiborane

Uses of diborane:

  1. Diborane is used in the preparation of several borohydrides such as LiBH4 NaBH4, etc.
  2. It is used as a reducing agent in organic synthesis.
  3. It is also used as a fuel for supersonic rockets.

Structure Of diborane, B2H6:

The structure and bonding of diborane seem to be very interesting. In the excited state, the B atom has the electronic configuration 2s¹2px¹ 2py¹ and therefore, it has only three electrons available for sharing. Now, 14 electrons (for six B—H and one B—B bond) are required if boron forms all conventional covalent bonds in ethane (C2H6)

But there are only 12 electrons (six from two B atoms and six from six H-atoms). Thus, the molecule is short of two electrons and its structure can not be similar to that of ethane (C2H6)

Based on electron diffraction study:

  • Diborane has a bridged structure as given in There are two types of hydrogen atoms in this bridged structure. The two boron atoms and four terminal hydrogen atoms (shown by thick lines) lie in the same plane, while the remaining two hydrogen atoms (shown by dotted lines) lying above and below the plane form bridges and these are called bridge hydrogen atoms.
  • The two B-H-B bridges lie in a plane which is nearly perpendicular to the plane containing the terminal B—H bonds.
  • There are two bonds in the diborane molecule:
    1. The four terminal B—H bonds are normal covalent bonds, each Being formed by sharing a pair of electrons between boron and hydrogen atoms. These are quite strong bonds and called two-centre electron pair bonds or two-centre two-electron bonds (2c-2e bonds),
    2. The two bridge bonds B …. H……B are quite different from the normal electron pair bonds. Each bridge H-atom is bonded to two boron atoms by sharing only one pair of electrons.
  • Such bridge bonds are called three centre electron pair bonds or three centres two-electron bonds (3c-2e bonds). Three-centre electron pair bonds or three-centre two-electron bonds are very weak bonds and are often called banana bonds as they resemble bananas in shape.
  • Molecules like diborane (B2H6) which do not have a sufficient number of electrons to form normal covalent bonds are called electron-deficient molecules.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Structure Of Diborane

Based on hybridisation:

Boron atoms (excited state electronic configuration: 2s¹2px¹ 2py¹ in diborane undergo sp³ -hybridisation.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Hybridisation

1. The two half-filled sp³ -hybrid orbitals of each boron atom overlap with the half-filled orbitals of hydrogen atoms to form normal covalent bonds.

2. The third half-filled hybrid orbital of one of the two boron atoms and the vacant orbital of the remaining boron atom overlap simultaneously with the half-filled Is -orbital of a hydrogen atom to form a B……H….B bridge bond

3. This bond involves three atoms (two boron atoms and one hydrogen atom) and contains only two electrons because one overlapping orbital of boron is empty. Hence, this B–‘H-‘-B bond is called three centre electron pair (3c-2e) bonds. Because of its typical shape resembling a banana, it is also called a banana bond

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Structure Of Diborane Showing Overlapping Of Orbitals

Aluminium

Aluminium, the second member of the boron family (group-13), is the most abundant metallic element in the earth’s crust. It is found in a variety of aluminosilicate compounds such as clay, mica and feldspar. The only ore of aluminium from which the metallic aluminium can be extracted profitably (in industry) is bauxite. Bauxite is hydrated aluminium oxide whose molecular formula is Al2O3-2H2O

Aluminium Physical properties:

  • Aluminium is a bluish-white metal with a brilliant lustre. But aluminium easily gets tarnished by the formation of a thin layer of oxide on the surface.
  • It is a light metal whose density is 2.73g-cm-1. Aluminium possesses high tensile strength, yet it is malleable and ductile.

Aluminium is a very good conductor of heat and electricity.

Aluminium Chemical properties:

It is not as reactive as its high negative electrode potential (E° = -1.66V) would imply and this is because there is a very thin layer of oxide on its surface.

1. Action of air:

Al remains unaffected in dry air but in the presence of moist air, a thin film of oxide is formed over its surface. Hence, the metallic of disappears. When burnt in oxygen it produces brilliant light.

4Al + 3O2 → 2Al2 O3+ 772 kcal

The reaction is highly exothermic and the heat evolved is used for the reduction of oxides of Cr, Fe, Mn etc. (known as the thermite process).

2. Action of water: Aluminium decomposes boiling water thereby evolving hydrogen gas.

2Al + 6H2O→2Al(OH)3 + 3H2

3. The action of non-metals:

Besides oxygen, aluminium reacts with other non-metals such as nitrogen, sulphur and halogens to form nitride, sulphide and halides respectively

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Actions Of Non Metals

4. Action of acids:

It dissolves both in dilute and concentrated hydrochloric acid and dilute sulphuric acid along with the evolution of hydrogen gas.

2Al + 6HCl→ 2AlCl3 + 3H2

2Al + 3H2SO4→Al2(SO4)3 + 3H3

The reaction with dilute sulphuric acid is very slow probably due to the insolubility of tyre oxide film over the metal in the acid. Hot and concentrated sulphuric acid dissolves aluminium with the evolution of sulphur dioxide (SO2) gas.

2Al + 6H2SO4→Al2(SO4)3 + 3SO2 + 6H2O

Dilute and concentrated nitric acid have no action on aluminium and this is due to the formation of an impenetrable oxide layer on its surface. Nitric acid may, therefore, be kept in the aluminium vessel.

5. Action of alkalis:

Aluminium dissolves in hot and cone. NaOH or KOH solutions form sodium aluminate with the evolution of hydrogen gas.

2Al + 2NaOH +2H2O → 2NaAlO(Sodium aluminate) (Soluble) +  3H2

Aluminium reacts with hot and concentrated sodium carbonate (Na2C03) solution to form sodium aluminate, carbon dioxide and hydrogen.

2Al + Na2CO2 + 3H2O  → 2NaAlO2 (Sodium aluminate) (Soluble) + CO2 + 3H2

Uses of aluminium:

  • Aluminium alloys (duralumin: Al, Mg, Cu and magnalium: Al, Mg) are light and strong and thus, are used in the construction of aircraft, ships and cars.
  • It is a better conductor than copper and is used for making electric power cables.
  • It is used for making doors, windows, building panels, mobile homes and household utensils.
  • Finely divided Al powder is used in preparing aluminium paint and as an ingredient in solid fuels in rockets.
  • Aluminium foils are used In wrapping soaps, cigarettes and confectioneries.
  • Al is used to extract metals such as Cr, Mn etc., from their ores (thermite process).
  • A mixture of ammonium nitrate and Al dust (ammonal) is used to make bombs and crackers.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Some P Block Elements Summary

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Group-14 Elements (Carbon Family)

  1. The valence shell electronic configuration of the elements of group 14 is ns²np², where n = 2-6.
  2. It becomes clear from these electronic configurations (given in the table below) that carbon and silicon have noble gas cores, germanium and tin have noble gas plus 10 d-electron cores and lead has noble gas cores in addition to 14/ and lOd -electron cores.
  3. Thus, the electronic configurations of group-14 elements are similar to that of group-13 elements. However, they contain one more p-electron as compared to group-13 elements.

Electronic configurations of a group of  elements

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Element Electronic Configuration Of Group Of Elements

Occurrence Of Group-14 Elements

1. The members of group 14 are carbon (C), silicon (Si), germanium (Ge), tin (Sn) and lead (Pb).

2. Carbon is the seventeenth most abundant element by mass in the earth’s crust It is widely distributed in nature in free as well as in combined states. In a free state, it occurs in coal, graphite and diamond. These are the main allotropes of carbon.

Carbon in the form of coal and coke is used mainly as fuel. In a combined state, it is present widely as metal carbonates, hydrocarbons (petroleum), carbohydrates and carbon dioxide (0.03%) in the air. Gases like propane and butane are the major constituents of LPG.

Moreover, the main constituent of all organic compounds is carbon. Two stable isotopes of carbon are present in nature namely 6C12 and 6C13 Another isotope of carbon (6C14) is radioactive. The age of antique articles is determined by the ratio of 6C12 and 6C14 present in them. This process is called radiocarbon dating.

3. Silicon is the second (about 27.7% by mass) most abundant element (next to oxygen) in the earth’s crust and is present in the form of silica and silicates. Germanium occurs only in traces (1.5 ppm). Both germanium and silicon in very pure form find applications as semiconductors.

4. The natural abundance of tin and lead is very low (2 and 13 ppm respectively). The principal ore of tin is tinstone or cassiterite (Sn02) and that of lead is galena (PbS). Both tin and lead form several alloys. Tin is also used for tin plating while some lead-containing compounds are used as the constituents of paints.

5. The first two elements of this group, carbon and silicon are non-metals, germanium is a semi-metal (metalloid) while tin and lead are metals

General Trends In Atomic And Physical

Properties Of Group 14 Elements

Some important physical and chemical properties of group-14 elements are given in the following table. The trend in properties may be largely understood from their electronic configurations. The effect of inadequate shielding by d – and f- electrons is prominent in the case of Ge and Pb.

Some atomic and physical properties of group-14 elements

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Physical Properties Of Group 14 Elements

Trends in various atomic and physical properties of group -14 elements and their explanation

1. Atomic radii

  1. The atomic radii of group-14 elements are smaller than the corresponding elements of group-13.

Atomic radii  Explanation 1:

On moving from a group-13 to a group-14 element within the same period, the magnitude of nuclear charge increases. As a result, the outermost electrons experience greater nuclear charge and are pulled more strongly towards the nucleus. Consequently, the atomic radius decreases.

2. On moving down the group, the atomic radii of the group- 14 elements increase regularly.

Atomic radii  Explanation 2:

The increase in atomic radii down the group is due to the addition of new electron shells. However, the increase in atomic radii from Si to Pb is small and this is because the effective nuclear charge somewhat increases due to ineffective shielding ofthe intervening d and /-electrons.

2. Ionisation enthalpy

1. First ionisation enthalpies of group-14 elements are higher than those of corresponding members of group-13.

Ionisation enthalpy Explanation 1:

This is because of the greater nuclear charge and smaller atomic size of group-14 elements as compared to the corresponding members of group-13.

2. In group 14, ionisation enthalpy decreases from C to Sn and then increases from Sn to Pb. The overall order is

Ionisation enthalpy Explanation 2:

Because of the increase in atomic size and the screening effect of inner electrons which outweigh the impact of increased nuclear charge, the ionisation enthalpies decrease down the group from C to Sn. However, a small increase in ionisation enthalpy from Sn to Pb is because the effect of increased nuclear charge (82-50 = 32 units), in this case, outweighs the inadequate shielding effect of intervening d and /-electrons.

3. Electropositive or metallic character

The group-14 elements are less electropositive and hence less metallic than the elements of group-13. Again, on moving down the group, the metallic character increases from C to Pb.

Electropositive Explanation:

The less electropositive character of group-14 elements is due to the smaller size of their atoms and higher ionisation enthalpies as compared to those of the corresponding group-13 elements. On moving down the group, the electropositive character increases as the size of the atom increases and ionisation enthalpy decreases.

4. Electronegativity

Because of the smaller size, the elements of group 14 are more electronegative than the corresponding elements of group 13. Values of electronegativity, however, do not decrease regularly down the group.

Carbon is the most electronegative element (2.5) while the remaining elements possess almost die same value (1.8 to 1.9) because of poor shielding by d -and f-electrons.

5. Melting and boiling points

The elements of group 14 have higher melting and boiling points as compared to the corresponding elements of group 13.

This is because the atoms of group-14 elements form a greater number of covalent bonds (four) with each other as compared to group-13 elements (which form only three bonds) and hence there exist strong binding forces between their atoms both in the solid as well as in the liquid states. Further, the melting and boiling points decrease down the group due to an increase in atomic size and consequent decrease in the interatomic forces of attraction. However, the melting point of Pb is higher than that of Sn.

6. Catenation

The self-inking property of the elements by which their atoms mutually combine to form long open chains (straight or branched) and rings of different sizes is called catenation. Carbon has the maximum tendency to catenate and because of this carbon forms a vast number of organic compounds. The catenation property of group- 14 elements follows the order: C>>Si > Ge = Sn. Lead does not exhibit the property of catenation.

Catenation Explanation:

The tendency of an element to undergo catenation increases with an increase in the strength of the M—M bond, where M represents an atom of the given element. As the size of the carbon atom is very small, the C—C bond is quite strong and the formation of this bond is thermodynamically very favourable.

However, on moving down the group, the atomic size increases and the strength of the bond decreases and consequently, the tendency to exhibit the property of catenation decreases

C —C (348 kj-mol-1) > Si—Si  (297kJ-mol-1) > Ge —Ge  (260kJ-mol-1)> Sn—Sn (240kJ-mol-1)

7. Oxidation state

1. Carbon and silicon exhibit a +4 oxidation state. Due to the inert pair effect, the other three elements ofthe group (Ge, Sn and Pb) show +2 and +4 oxidation states. This is due to the weak shielding effect of- and- electrons.

2. On moving down the group from Ge to Pb, the number of d- and f- electrons increases due to which the inert pair effect increases gradually. As a result, the stability of the +4 oxidation state decreases. The increasing order of the +2 oxidation state is Ge < Sn < Pb. Lead is most stable at +2 oxidation state.

3. The compounds in which the group-14 elements are in a +4 oxidation state, are covalent since the charge on the element is high and its size is small. However, those compounds in which the oxidation state is +2, are ionic, since the charge of the element is small and its size is large. For example, SnCl2 is ionic whereas SnCl4 is a covalent liquid. On moving down the group, the tendency of forming covalent compounds decreases and that of forming ionic compounds increases.

8. Multiple bonding

Carbon, the first member of the carbon family, forms multiple bonds with carbon (C=C, C ≡ C), oxygen (C=O) and nitrogen (C=N, C≡ N ) and this occurs because of comparable sizes and energies of overlapping orbitals (2p ). However, Si and other members possess p -orbitals having comparatively bigger sizes and higher energies (3/7, 4p, 5p etc.) as compared to that of carbon.

Therefore, sideways overlap is not effective and consequently, multiple bonding does not take place. However, in some compounds, silicon becomes involved in multiple bonds with oxygen and nitrogen atoms and these are called pn-in bonds.

Example:

This can be illustrated by the structure of trisilylamlne, N(SiH3)3. The central N-atom of this molecule is sp² – hybridised. It is, therefore, a trigonal planar molecule. A lone pair of electrons present in the 2p -orbital of the N-atom becomes involved in sideways overlap with the vacant 3d orbitals of Si leading to the formation of pπ-dπ back-bonding (shown by dotted lines). Since the availability of the unshared pair of electrons on N (engaged in pn-dn backbonding) is reduced, the compound becomes weakly basic.

The central N-atom of trimethylamine, N(CH3)3, on the other hand, is sp3 -hybridised. The three hybrid orbitals are involved in the formation of cr -bonds with three carbon atoms and the unshared electron pair exists in the fourth sp³ -hybrid orbital. Carbon does not possess any low-energy vacant d -d-orbital suitable for -bonding. Therefore, the shape of the molecule is pyramidal. Since the availability of the unshared electron pair on N is much higher, the molecule is strongly basic

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Multiple Bonding Of Pyramidal

NCERT Solutions for P Block Elements Class 11 Chemistry

Chemical Properties Of Carbon Family

1. Nature of compounds

1. The general valence shell electronic configuration of the elements of the carbon family is ns²np². This indicates that their atoms have four valence electrons.

2. Compounds of these elements are normallynotionicin nature as the formation of both M4+ and M4- ions require a large amount of energy, thus making it unfavourable.

3. Compounds formed by the elements of this family are generally covalent, in which they complete their octets by sharing valence electrons with atoms of other elements.

4. Carbon and silicon exhibit a +4 oxidation state. The remaining three elements of this group, i.e., Ge, Sn and Pb, however, exhibit +4 as well as +2 oxidation states. This is due to the inert pair effect arising out of poor shielding of valence s -electrons by intervening d – or f-electrons.

5. As the number of d or f-electrons increases down the group from Ge to Pb, the inert pair effect becomes gradually more prominent. As a result, the stability of the +4 oxidation state decreases and the +2 oxidation state increases.

The stability of the +2 oxidation state follows the order:

1. Ge < Sn < Pb. Lead is most stable in the +2 oxidation state. vii] The compounds of group-14 elements in which these elements exhibit a +4 oxidation state are expected to be covalent because of their extremely high charge. However, the compound in which these elements exhibit an oxidation state of +2 is expected to be ionic because of its large size and a small charge

2. SnCl2, for example, is anionic compound while SnCl4 is a covalent compound. Again, on moving down the group, the tendency of the elements to form covalent compounds decreases whereas the tendency to form ionic compounds increases

3. Since carbon has no d -d-orbital, it cannot expand its valence shell and hence its maximum covalency or coordination number is four. However, due to the availability of vacant d -d-orbitals, Si, Ge, Sn and Pb can form hexa-coordinated complexes by increasing their coordination number from 4 to 6. For example, [SiF6]2-, [GeF6]2-, [Sn(OH)6]2-, [PbCl6]2-etc

2. Trends in oxidising and reducing properties

1. Because of the inert pair effect, elements like Ge, Sn and Pb exhibit +2 and +4 oxidation states. Therefore, these elements in the +2 oxidation state act as reducing agents (M→ M4++2e) while in the +4 oxidation state, they act as oxidation agents (M4++2e →M2+).

2.  The +4 oxidation state of get is most stable followed by Sn and Pb. It thus follows that in group -14, Ge(2) salts are the strongest reducing agents followed by Sn(2) salts. However, germanium is much less abundant in nature than tin and therefore, Sn(II) salts such as SnCl2 are largely used as reducing agents.

For example:

⇒  \(2 \mathrm{FeCl}_3+\mathrm{SnCl}_2\rightarrow 2 \mathrm{FeCl}_2+\mathrm{SnCl}_4 \)

⇒  \(2 \mathrm{HgCl}_2+\mathrm{SnCl}_2\rightarrow \mathrm{Hg}_2 \mathrm{Cl}_2+\mathrm{SnCl}_4 \)

⇒ \(\mathrm{Hg}_2 \mathrm{Cl}_2+\mathrm{SnCl}_2\rightarrow 2 \mathrm{Hg}+\mathrm{SnCl}_4\)

3. The +2 oxidation state of Pb is most stable followed by Sn and Ge. Therefore, Pb(IV) salts such as lead tetraacetate, Pb(OCOCH3)4 and Pb02 are largely used as oxidising agents.

For example:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Ethylene Glycol

Pb02 + 4HC1 (cone.)- PbCl2 + Cl2 + 2H20

Formation of oxides

When the elements of group 14 are heated in oxygen,

They form two types of oxides:

  1. Monoxides of the formula MO and
  2. Dioxides ofthe formula MO.

Lead also forms another oxide called trialled tetraoxide or red lead (Pb304) which can be obtained by heating litharge (PbO) more than O2 or air at 673 K

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Formations Of Oxides

The acid-base character of the oxides:

1.  The oxides of these elements in higher oxidation states are generally more acidic than those in lower oxidation states.

2. Again, the acidic character of the oxides decreases on moving down the group. The dioxides such as CO2 and SiO2 are acidic, GeO2 is less acidic than SiO2 while SnO2 and PbO2 are amphoteric. Being acidic, the dioxides of mC, Si and Ge react only with bases.

CO2 + 2NaOH→Na2CO3+ H2O

CO2 + Ca(OH)2→CaCO3 + H2O

SiO2 + 2NaOH→Na2SiO3 + H2O

GeO2+ 2NaOH→Na2GeO3 + H2O

3. Being amphoteric, the dioxides of Sn and Pb react with both acids and bases

SnO2+ 2NaOH→Na2SnO3 (Sodium stannate)+ H2O

SnO2 + 4HCl→ SnCl4 + 2H2O

PbO2 + 2NaOH→Na2PbO3 (Sodium plumbate)+ H2O

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Atmospheric Nature

4. Among the monoxides of these elements, CO is neutral, GeO is acidic while SnO and PbO are amphoteric.

Oxidising and reducing the power of oxides:

1. Among the monoxides of group-14 elements, CO is the strongest reducing agent because the +4 oxidation state is the most stable for carbon. CO is used in the extraction of many metals from their oxides.

For example:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Oxidising And Reducing Power Of Oxides

2. Among the dioxides of group-14 elements, Pb02 is the strongest oxidising agent because of the inert pair effect. It oxidises HC1 to Cl2 and reacts with concentrated H2S04 or HN03 to liberate dioxygen.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Among The Dioxides Of Group 14 Elements

3. Formation of halides

The elements of group-14 combine with halogens to form halides of the formula MX4 and MX2 (X = F, Cl, Br or I). All the elements of this except carbon react directly with halogens under suitable conditions.

Tetrahalides ofgroup-14 elements:

1. All the elements of this group form tetrahalides of the formula MX4.

2. These tetrahalides are mostly covalent. The central atom of these halides is sp3 -hybridised and the molecules are tetrahedral shape. Thein two exceptions are SnF4 and PbF4 which are more.

3. IoThe ionic character and thermal stability of these halides decrease with an increase in n atomicnumbatomic number of halogen atoms. Example:

PbCl4 is a stable compound but PbBr4 is an unstable compound while Pbl4 is not known. Because of the strong oxidising power of Pb(+4) and the strong reducing power of I, Pbl4 does not exist. The unstable nature of PbBr4 is because Pb(+4) is strongly oxidising and Br is weakly reducing.In both the cases, the halide ion(I or Br ) reduces Pb4+ to Pb2+ (Pb4+ + 2X→Pb2++ X2)

Then on-existence of Pbl4 can be explained alternatively as follows— The amount of energy released by the initial formation ofthe Pb—I bond is not sufficient to unpair 6s² electrons and excite one of them to 6p -orbital to have four unpaired electrons around the Pb-atom

4.  Carbon tetrachloride (CCl4) does notundergo hydrolysis. However, the tetrahalides of other elements undergo ready hydrolysis. For example:

SiCl4 + 4H2O→Si(OH)4 + 4HCl

SnCl4+ 2H2O→SnO2 + 4HCI

Explanation:

That CCl4 does not undergo hydrolysis can be explained by the fact that carbon having no vacant d -d-orbital cannot expand its coordination number beyond 4. However, silicon can undergo ready hydrolysis because it can expand its octet (i.e., coordination number beyond four) due to the availability ofvacant d -orbitals. reaction

CCl4+ 2H2O → Noreaction

SiCl4 + 4H2O → Si(OH)4 (Silicic acid) + 4HCl

The reaction proceeds through the following steps:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reaction Proceeds Through The Following Steps

  1. In the first step, a lone pair of electrons from the oxygen atom of the H20 molecule is donated to an empty d -d-orbital of Si, forming a five-coordinate intermediate which has a trigonal bipyramidal shape.
  2. In the second step, the intermediate loses a molecule of HCl and in this way, one Cl-atom of SiCl4 is displaced by one OH group.
  3. The remaining three Cl-atoms are displaced successively by OH groups yielding silicic acid.

5. Since carbon has no vacant d -orbitals in its valence shell, its tetrahalides do not form complexes. However, tetrahalides of other elements of this group form complexes due to the availability of vacant d -d-orbitals in their valence shells. These can, therefore, increase their coordination number up to six.

In other words, the tetrahalides of carbon do not act as Lewis acids but the tetrahalides of the other elements act as strong Lewis acids. The tetrahalides of Si, Ge, Sn and Pb, for example, can form hexahalo complexes like [SiF6]2-_, [GeF6]2-, [SnCl6]2-_ and[PbCl6]2- with corresponding halide ions.

SiF4+ 2HF→H2SiF6 (hydrofluorosilicic acid) (or hexafluorosilicic acid)

SnCl4 + 2Cl→SnCl2-6 [Hexachlorostannate (IV) ion]

Dihalldes of group-14 elements:

All the elements of group-14 except carbon and silicon form dihalides of the formula MX2. On moving down the group, the stability of these dihalides increases steadily due to the inert pair effect, i.e., the stability follows the order:

GeX2<<SnX2 < PbX2

Anomalous Behaviour Of Carbon

Carbon, die first member of group 14, differs from the remaining members of its family in many properties.

Reasons for anomalous behaviour of carbon: 

  1. Its atomic size is exceptionally small.
  2. It has higher ionisation enthalpy and electronegativity.
  3. It has no vacant dorbital in its valence shell.
  4. It tends to form multiple bonds

Anomalous properties of carbon:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Anomalous Properties Of Carbon

Allotropic Forms Of Carbon

The phenomenon of the existence of an element in two or more forms having different physical but similar chemical properties i? called allotropy and the different forms are called allotropes.

Carbon exists in several allotropic forms which may be classified as:

  1. Crystalline and
  2. Amorphous.

The four crystalline allotropic forms of carbon are:

  1. Diamond
  2. Graphite,
  3. Fullerene
  4. Carbon nanotubes.

The four amorphous allotropic forms of carbon are:

  1. Charcoal
  2. Soot or lamp black
  3. Coke and
  4. Gas carbon.

Amorphous carbon is not pure and remains mixed with various elements and compounds. Finer X-ray studies have shown that the amorphous varieties of carbon are composed of very minute crystalline units like graphite which are distributed throughout their masses in a most disordered fashion.

A synopsis of various allotropes of carbon is given in the following chart:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements A Synopsis Of Various Is Allotropes Of Carbon

Crystalline Carbon Diamond

Diamond is a very precious substance which is availablein South Africa, New South Wales, Brazil, the Ural mountains and at Golconda in India. Two varieties of natural diamonds are available. One is the lustrous and colourless (or slightly coloured) variety which is generally used as precious gem¬ stones and the other is the black or deep-coloured opaque variety, known as the carbonado robot.

The weight of precious diamond is expressed in carats (1 carat = 200mg).

Some well-known diamonds are:

Cullinan (3032 carats), Kohinoor (present weight 106 carats), Pitt (136.25 carats), Regent (193 carats), Orloff (193 carats) and Great Mogul (186 carats). Diamond can also be prepared artificially but because of high cost and poor quality is seldom made artificially

Diamond Physical properties

  1. Diamond is transparent, lustrous and crystalline. It may be colourless or slightly yellow coloured although some black or dark coloured varieties are also available.
  2. It is the hardest naturally occurring substance known and it has a very high melting point (3843 K).
  3. It is the heaviest among all the allotropic forms of carbon; its density is 3.51 gem-3
  4. Diamond has a very high refractive index (2.417) and thus light passing through it, suffers total internal reflection innumerable times. For this reason, diamonds appear to be extremely bright and lustrous.
  5. It is transparent to X-rays and this property helps to distinguish a real diamond from an artificial one (made of glass).
  6. Diamond is a non-conductor of electricity but good conductor of heat

Chemical properties:

At ordinary temperatures, diamond is chemically inert. It does not react with acids, alkalies, chlorine, potassium chlorate etc. However, it reacts with certain substances at much higher temperatures.

1. It is oxidised by oxygen at 800-900°C to produce pure carbon dioxide:

C + O2 → CO2

2. Diamond is converted into graphite in the absence ofair at much higher temperatures

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Element C Diamond And C Graphite

Molten diamond can be converted into graphite by applying heat but graphite cannot be converted into diamond by heating to a very high temperature. The change is, therefore, unidirectional and this is because graphite is thermodynamically more stable than diamond. This type of allotropy is known as monotropy.

3. When a diamond is reacted with molten sodium carbonate, sodium monoxide and carbon monoxide are produced

C + Na2CO3 → Na2O+2CO

4. It undergoes oxidation by fluorine at 700°C to form carbon tetrafluoride

C+ 2F2→ CF4

5. At about 250°C, diamond gets oxidised by a mixture of K2Cr2O7 and concentrated sulphuric acid (i.e., chromic acid) to CO2

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Sulphuric Acids

6. Diamond reacts with sulphur vapour at 1000°C to form carbon disulphide: C + 2S→ CS2

Structure of diamond:

1. In diamond, each C-atom is sp³ – hybridised and linked to four other C-atoms tetrahedrally by covalent bonds.

2. The value of each C—C—C bond angle is 109°28′ and each C —C bond distance is 1.54Å

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Structure Of Diamond

3. An innumerable number of such tetrahedral units are linked together to form a three-dimensional giant molecule containing very strong bonds extended in all directions. Because of such a three-dimensional network of strong covalent bonds, diamond is extremely hard.

4. Since a huge amount of thermal energy is required to break a large number of strong covalent bonds, its melting point is very high.

5. All 4 valence electrons of each sp3 -hybridised C-atom in diamond crystal participate in forming covalent bonds and there is no free electron on any carbon atom. Thus, a diamond is an anon-conductor of electricity. vi] Diamond has the highest known thermal conductivity because its structure distributes thermal motion in three dimensions very effectively.

6. Unlike graphite in which the C-atoms are arranged in different distant layers, the C-atoms in diamond are placed at a covalent bond distance (1.54A). Because of this, the density of diamond is higher than that of graphite

Diamond Uses:

  1. Because of its transparency, dazzling lustre and beauty, diamond is extensively used as precious gemstone.
  2. Because of its extreme hardness, it is used for cutting glass, polishing hard surfaces and drilling purposes. Black or dark-coloured diamonds are generally used for this purpose.

Graphite

Graphite is available as minerals in Sri Lanka, Mexico, Italy, California (U.S.A), Siberia, Korea, Spain and India. The word graphite originates from the Greek word ‘graph’ which

Preparation of artificial graphite: Acheson process:

  • In this process, coke dust mixed with silica is heated to a temperature of 3000-3500°C with the help of electrodes in an electric furnace made of fire bricks for 25-30 hours.
  • The mixture is kept covered by sand.
  • In the first stage of the reaction, silica reacts with carbon to form silicon carbide (SiC) and carbon monoxide (CO).
  • Silicon carbide thus formed decomposes to yield graphite and silicon. Q
  • At higher temperatures, silicon, on being vapourised, escapes from the furnace and graphite is left.

SiO2 + 3C→ SiC + 2CO↑; SiC→Si + C [graphite]

Graphite Physical Properties 

  1. Graphite is a dark greyish-coloured opaque, soft and slippery crystalline substance possessing metallic lustre.
  2. It is lighter (density 2.25 g-cm-3 ) than diamond.
  3. It is a good conductor of heat and electricity.

Graphite Chemical properties

1. Graphite is more reactive than diamond

2. When graphite is heated in air at 700°C, it is oxidised to carbon dioxide:

C + O→CO2

3. At 500°C, fluorine reacts with graphite to produce carbon tetrafluoride (CF4). The compound is a non-conductor of electricity. It is also called graphite fluoride.

4. Graphite is not attacked by dilute acid or alkali. However, when it is subjected to react with molten sodium carbonate, carbon monoxide is formed.

5. Graphite is oxidised to carbon dioxide with a mixture of K2Cr2O. and concentrated H2SO4 (chromic acid).

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Chromic Acid

6. When graphite is heated in the presence of a mixture of cones. nitric acid and sulphuric acid containing a small amount of potassium chlorate, greenish-yellow-coloured solid graphitic acid (CnH4O5) is obtained. Its exact structural formula is not known yet. Graphite can be identified by this test (diamond does not respond to this test).

7. On complete combustion, graphite produces mellitic acid
[C6(COOH)6].

Structure of graphite

1. Each carbon atom in graphite is sp2 -sp2-hybridised and is linked to three other carbon atoms directly in the same plane forming a network of planar hexagons and these two-dimensional layers exist in different parallel planes.

2. In each layer, the C—C bond length is 1.42Å and the distance between two adjacent layers is 3.35Åwhich is greater than the C—C covalent bond distance. So, the layers are supposed to be held together by relatively weak van der Waals forces of attraction

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Structure Of Graphite

Some P Block Elements Class 11 Important Topics

3. As the distance between two parallel layers is sufficiently large, graphite is less dense than diamond.

4.  Since the layers are weakly held together, on application of pressure, one layer easily slides over the other. Thus, graphite is found to be soft and lubricating

5. In the formation of hexagons in a layer of graphite, only three of its four valence electrons are used to form three sigma bonds (Csp²-Csp²). The remaining electrons of each carbon atom present in an unhybridised p -p-orbital are utilised to form n -n-bonds.

6. The n -n-electrons are mobile and can move freely through the graphite crystal. Because of the presence of free mobile electrons, graphite is a good conductor of electricity and heat.

7. Of all the crystalline allotropes of carbon, graphite is thermodynamically the most stable one. Its standard enthalpy of formation (AfH°) is taken as zero.

Graphite Uses:

  • Graphite is largely used for lining and making electrodes for electric furnaces.
  • When mixed with oil and water, graphite is used as a lubricant in machinery.
  • It finds use in making crucibles resistant to high temperatures.
  • By mixing with desired quantities ofwax or clay, graphite is used for making cores of lead pencils
  • Graphite is used as a moderator in nuclear reactors

Fullerenes

Fullerenes or Buckminsterfullerene (named after the famous American designer of the geodesic dome, Robert Buckminster Fuller) is the latest allotrope of carbon discovered in 1985 collectively by three scientists namely R. E. Smalley, R. F. Curl and H. W. Kroto. It is a crystalline allotrope of carbon in which the carbon atoms exist in a cluster form. It is also known to be the purest form of carbon because, unlike diamond and graphite does not have surface bonds that are to be attracted by other atoms.

Structure of fullerenes C60:

Fullerenes are expressed by the general formula Cn, where n is an even number between 30-600, for example, C60, C70, C80….etc.

All these are cage-like spheroidal molecules having polyhedral geometry containing pentagonal and hexagonal planes. Number of hexagons in a C„ molecule =(n/2- 10),

Example:

In fullerene C60 molecule, number ofhexagons =(60/2-10) = 20. Structure of fullerene C60; The C60 molecule consists of twenty-six-membered rings and twelve five-membered rings of sp² -hybridised carbon atoms fused into each other

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Buckminsterfullerene

Each carbon atom forms three or -bonds with the other three carbon atoms and the remaining electron on each carbon is involved in the formation of the n -bond and as a result, the system is expected to be aromatic. However, it is not aromatic because the molecule is not planar and it does not have (4n + 2) electrons.

It is a non¬ aromatic system. This fusion pattern provides a marvellous symmetry to the structure in which the fused ring system bends around and closes to form a soccer ball-shaped molecule (“buckyball”). Of all the fullerenes, C60 is the most stable one.

Structure of fuUerene C70:

The molecule acquires the shape ofa rugby ball. It consists of twelve five-membered rings and twenty-five six-membered rings and their arrangement is the same as that of a C60 molecule.

C70 Preparation:

  • The preparation of fullerenes involves heating of graphite in an electric arc in the presence of an inert gas such as He or Ar.
  • A sooty material is recovered which consists mainly of C60 with a small amount of C70 and traces of other with an even number of C atoms up to 350 and above.
  • The C60 and C70 fullerenes can further be separated from the sooty material by extraction with benzene or toluene followed by chromatographic separation using alumina (Al2O3) as the adsorbent.
  • In Russia, America, Canada and New Zealand C60 and C70 fullerenes are isolated from natural sources. Fullerenes of this type are formed by the red giant star Antares.

Properties and applications: 

  • Fullerenes are solids with high melting points.
  • Being covalent, they are soluble in organic solvents.
  • They react with alkali metals to form solid compounds such as K3C60. This compound acts as a superconductor even at temperatures of the order of 10-40K.
  • Because of their spherical shapes, they exhibit wonderful lubricating property

Carbon Nanotubes

Carbon nanotubes are crystalline allotropes of carbon with cylindrical nanostructure. This allotrope was discovered by Sumio Iijima (Japan) in 1991. A carbon nanotube consists of a two-dimensional array of hexagonal rings of carbon just as in a layer of graphite or a chicken wire.

The layer is then rolled. into a cylinder and capped at each end with half of a C60  fullerene

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Carbon Nanotubes

Properties and applications: 

The nanotubes are approximately 50000 times thinner than a human hair. These are very tough, about 100 times as strong as steel. They are electrically conducting along the length of the tube.

These cylindrical carbon molecules having unusual properties are valuable for nanotechnology, electronics, optics and other fields of material science and technology. They are also being used as probe tips for the analysis of DNA and proteins by atomic force microscopy (AFM). Many other applications have been envisioned for them as well, including molecular-size test tubes or capsules for drug delivery

Amorphous Carbon Charcoal

Vegetable charcoal

  1. Wood charcoal: When wood is subjected to destructive distillation in an iron retort, the volatile organic compounds present escape and the residue left in the retort is called wood charcoal.
  2. Sugar charcoal: It can be prepared by heating pure sugar in a closed vessel or by eliminating water from sugar by reacting it with concentrated sulphuric acid

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Sugar Charcoal

Animal charcoal

1. Bone charcoal:

  • Small pieces of animal bones are treated with superheated steam to remove the adhering fat and marrow.
  • The dried bones are then subjected to destructive distillation in an iron retort when volatile substances are distilled out and a black residue containing carbon and about 90% impurities like calcium phosphate and calcium carbonate are left behind.
  • This is known as bone black or bone charcoal. These impurities are removed by dissolving the black material in dilute HCl.
  • The insoluble deep black powder thus obtained is almost pure charcoal and is called ivory black.

2. Blood charcoal:

  • Charcoal obtained by destructive distillation of blood is known as blood charcoal.

Charcoal Physical properties

Charcoal is black, soft and porous. It is a bad conductor of heat and electricity. Its specific gravity lies between 1.4 and 1.9. But because of its porosity, air enters in its pores.

  • As a result, its specific gravity gets reduced to 0.2 and hence charcoal floats on water. When porous charcoal b freed from entrapped air, it can retain any other ga In its pores, This phenomenon is known as adsorption.
  • The adsorbed gas escapes on heating and is much more reactive than the ordinary gas.

Activated charcoal:

Activated charcoal has high adsorption power as compared to ordinary charcoal.

Activated charcoal Preparation:

When the charcoal obtained by destructive distillation of coconut shell is heated to about 800-900°C in a limited supply of air or steam, activated charcoal is obtained.0 besides this, activated charcoal may also be obtained by the destructive distillation of sawdust soaked In aqueous solution of ZnCl2or MgCl,

Activated charcoal Properties:

Activated charcoal is not only a good adsorbent for gases but it also has the power of decoloursing a coloured substance and absorbing the taste of a substance. Moreover, a catalyst accelerates the rates of many chemical reactions.

Charcoal Chemical properties

1. At higher temperatures, charcoal burns in air or oxygen to form C02 gas. However, in a limited supply of oxygen, it’s combustion produces carbon monoxide.

C +O2 → CO2; 2C + O→2CO

2. Charcoal forms different compounds with sulphur, nitrogen and hydrogen at high temperatures.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Carbon Disulphide

2C + N2 → (CN) (Cyanogen)

2C + H2 → C2H2 (Acetylene)

In the first reaction, two solids (C and S) react together to form a liquid (carbon disulphide

3. Charcoal combines with heated Ca, Al, Fe etc. to form their corresponding carbides.

Ca + 2C→CaC2; 3Fe + C→Fe3C; 4Al + 3C→Al4C3

4. When a mixture of silica (SiO2) and coke dust is heated at 1500’2000°Cin an electric furnace, silicon carbide (SiC) is formed. It is a black, bright and very hard solid. It is known as carborundum which is used for polishing metals

SiO2 +3C → SiC+2CO

5. When steam is passed over white-hot charcoal or coke, a mixture containing equal volumes of CO and H2, called water gas is produced

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Water gas

6. Reducingproperty: Charcoal is a good reducing agent.

At higher temperatures, various metal oxides are reduced by charcoal to their corresponding metals.

CuO + C→ Cu + CO; PbO + C→ Pb + CO

Fe2O3 + 3C→2Fe + 3CO

At higher temperatures, charcoal reduces carbon dioxide to CO and sodium sulphate to sodium sulphide.

CO2 + C→2CO;

⇒ \(\mathrm{Na}_2 \stackrel{+6}{\mathrm{~S}} \mathrm{O}_4+4 \stackrel{0}{\mathrm{C}} \rightarrow \mathrm{Na}_2S{ }^{-2}+4 \stackrel{+2}{\mathrm{~C}} \mathrm{O}\)

Charcoal in the burning condition is oxidised by concentrated nitric acid or sulphuric acid to CO2

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Nitric Acid Or Sulphuric Acid

Charcoal Uses: 

  • Wood charcoal is used as fuel and as a reducing agent in the extraction of metals.
  • It is used in decolourising sugar syrup and refining oils, fats, glycerine etc.
  • It is used in the treatment of drinking water as it adsorbs excess chlorine after chlorination.
  • It is used in gas masks as it adsorbs poisonous gases.
  • It is also used for preparing gunpowder and black paint (Black Japan).

Lamp Black or carbon black

When organic liquids rich in carbon such as kerosene, petrol, turpentine oil, benzene etc. are subjected to bum in controlled air, a black sooty smoke is produced. This smoke on condensation in a cold container forms soot. This soot is called lamp black or carbon black. It may also be obtained when natural gas (methane) is subjected to albumin-controlled air. It is the purest form of all the amorphous allotropes of carbon.

Lamp Black Properties:

It is amorphous, black and non-conductor of heat and electricity.

Lamp Black Uses:

It is used in the preparation of printing ink, shoe polish and black paints

Coke and gas carbon

When anthracite coal (96% carbon) is subjected to destructive distillation, the solid residue left in the iron retort is called coke. At higher temperatures (1000 -1200°C), hard coke is called coke. At higher temperatures (1000 -1200°C), hard coke is obtained whereas at 600-650°C, we get soft coke. The black hard dense residue deposited on the relatively cooler upper part Qf returns as gas carbon. it possesses thermal water gas is produced. and electrical conductivity and electrical conductivity.

Coke Uses:

  • Hard coke is used as fuel and as a reducing agent for domestic fuel
  • Gas carbon is widely used as electrodes in batteries, arc lights and during electrolysis.

All the allotropic modifications of carbon consist of the same element:

When a fixed weight of a pure allotropic form of carbon is heated in a long hard combustion tube in the presence of pure oxygen, CO2 and CO are produced.

CuO, kept in the tube, converts CO into CO2. CO2 so obtained is absorbed in a previously weighed potash bulb attached to the exit end of the tube. An increase in the weight of the bulb increases the amount of CO2 formed.

When the experiment is performed separately with the same fixed weight of any other allotrope, the same amount of CO2 is obtained in each case. This experiment, thus, proves that the different allotropes consist ofthe same element, i.e., carbon.

Carbon Monoxide

Laboratory preparation:

1.  In the laboratory, carbon monoxide is prepared by dehydrating formic acid or oxalic acid after heating with concentrated sulphuric acid.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Oxalic Acid After Heatingh Concentrated Sulphuric Acid

2. When potassium ferrocyanide is heated with an excess of cone, sulphuric acid, pure carbon monoxide is obtained

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Pure Carbon Monoxide

CO cannot be fired by concentrated sulphuric acid:

Concentrated sulphuric acid is a strong oxidising agent. Thus when CO ( a reducing agent )is passed through concentrated H2SO4, it is oxidised by sulphuric acid to CO2

Other methods of preparation

From carbon:

When steam is passed over red hot coke, water gas or synthesis gas (CO + H2) is obtained. CO is separated from the mixture by liquefaction.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Red Hot Coke Water Gas Or Synthesis Gas

When air is passed over hot coke, producer gas (CO + N2) is formed. CO is separated by liquefaction

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Produce Gas

From carbon dioxide:

When CO2 is passed over red hot carbon, zinc, Iron etc., it is reduced to CO.

CO2 + C→2CO; CO2 + Zn→CO + ZnO

CO2+ Fe→FeO + CO

From metal oxides:

Carbon reduces die oxides of zinc, lead or iron to produce CO.

ZnO + C→ Zn + CO; Fe2O3+ 3C→2Fe + 3CO

From nickel tetracarbonyl:

Pure CO is obtained when nickel tetracarbonyl vapour is heated above 150°C

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Nickel Tetracarbonyl

Carbon monoxide Physical properties:

1. Carbon monoxide is a colourless, tasteless, odourless gas which is lighter than air.

2. It is slightly soluble in water. It is a neutral oxide.

3. It is a highly poisonous gas. If only a volume of CO is present in 10,000 volumes of air, then that air is considered to be poisonous. Carbon monoxide molecule.

4.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Carbon Monoxide with a lone pair of electrons on carbon combined with Fe-atom present in the haemoglobin of the blood to form a very stable complex compound named carboxyhaemoglobin.

5. Hb + CO → HbCO; (Hb =Haemoglobin) As CO is almost 100 times more rigidly bonded to Fe-atom than O2, O2 can no longer combine with haemoglobin.

6. In other words, haemoglobin fails to act as an oxygen-carrier. As a consequence, the body tissues become slackened due to lack of ofoxygen ultimately causing death

7. In case of CO poisoning, the patient should immediately be taken to an open area and artificial respiration with carbogen (a mixture of oxygen and 5-10% CO2) should be started.

Carbon monoxide Chemical properties:

1. Combustion:

Carbon monoxide is itself a combustible gas but does not support combustion. It burns in the air with a blue flame and is oxidised to C02. Because of the evolution of a large amount of heat, CO is used as fuel.

2CO + O2 → 2CO2 + 135.2 kcal

The two important fuels containing carbon monoxide are water gas and producer gas. Water gas contains 50% of H2, 40% of CO, 5% of CO2 and 5% of CH4 and N2 while producer gas contains 25% of CO, 4% of CO2,70% of N2 and traces of H2, CH4 and O2

2. Reducing property:

Carbon monoxide is a powerful reducing agent. The oxidation number of carbonin CO is +2 and the highest oxidation number of carbon is +4. So, CO tends to be oxidised and behaves as a strong reducing agent. Various metal oxides are reduced by CO to the corresponding metal.

CuO + CO→Cu + CO2; PbO + CO→Pb + CO2

ZnO + CO→Zn + CO2; Fe2O3 + 3CO→2Fe + 3CO2

At 90°C, CO reduces iodine pentoxide (I2O5) to give violet-coloured iodine. This reaction is called the Ditte reaction.

I2O5 + 5CO→I2 + 5CO2

3. Reaction with sodium hydroxide:

Being a neutral oxide CO does not react with alkali or base under ordinary conditions. But at 200°C and under high pressure, it reacts with caustic soda solution to yield sodium formate.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Sodium Hydroxide

4. Absorption of CO:

When CO is passed through an ammoniacal or acidified cuprous chloride solution, it gets absorbed in that solution to give a white crystalline addition compound as a precipitate. CO can be separated from a gas mixture by this process.

Cu2Cl2 + 2CO + 4H2O→2[CuCl.CO. 2H2O]↓

The addition compound evolves CO on heating.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Evolves CO On Heating

5. Formation of addition compounds:

1. In the presence of sunlight, CO combines direedy with chlorine gas to form carbonyl chloride or phosgene gas. It is a colourless poisonous gas:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements A Colourless Poisonous Gas

2. CO reacts with sulphur vapour to produce carbonyl sulphide.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Carbonyl Sulphide

3. Combines with many transition metals to form metal carbonyl compounds. For example, CO reacts with nickel powder at 30-40°C under ordinary pressure to form nickel tetracarbonyl. Again, at 200°C and 100 atmosphere pressure, CO reacts with freshly reduced iron to form pentacarbonyl.

Ni + 4CO→Ni(CO)4; Fe + 5CO→Fe(CO)5

4. Formation of organic compounds:

Hydrogen reacts with CO at 350°C in the presence of Ni or Pt catalyst to yield methane. If the reaction is carried out at 300°C and 200 atmospheric pressure in the presence of ZnO and Cr2O3 catalyst, methyl alcohol is produced. The oxidation number of carbon in CO decreases from +2 to -4 in methane and to -2 in methyl alcohol.

Therefore, in these two cases, CO exhibits its oxidising property.

⇒ \(\stackrel{+2}{\mathrm{CO}}+3 \mathrm{H}_2 \rightarrow \stackrel{-4}{\mathrm{CH}_4}+\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O} ; \stackrel{+2}{\mathrm{CO}}+2 \mathrm{H}_2 \rightarrow \stackrel{-2}{\mathrm{CH}_3^{-}}\mathrm{OH}\)

Identification of carbon monoxide:

1. Carbon monoxide burns in air with a blue flame and the gaseous product turns lime water milky [H2 also burns with a blue flame but in this case, steam is formed which turns white anhydrous copper sulphate blue.]

2. CO is completely absorbed by the Cu2Cl2 solution in a cone. hydrochloric acid or ammonium hydroxide and as a result, a white crystalline addition compound is precipitated.

3. When a filter paper soaked with a solution of platinum or palladium chloride is held in CO gas, the paper turns pink-green or black due to the reduction ofthe metal salts.

PtCl2 + CO + H2O→Pt + CO2 ((pink-green))+ 2HCl

PdCl2 + CO + H2O→Pd + CO2 ((black))+ 2HCl

4. When CO gas is passed through an ammoniacal AgN03 solution, the solution becomes brown

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Passed Through Ammonical Solution

5.  When a dilute solution of blood shaken with CO, is subjected to spectroscopic analysis, the observed band in the spectrum indicates the presence of CO. The presence of traces of the air can be detected by this experiment.

6. The presence of a very small amount of CO in the air can be detected with the help of a halamite tube or colour detector tube. When air containing CO is introduced into this tube I2 O5 present in the tube reacts with CO to liberate I2

Because of the violet colour of evolved I2, colour of the tube changes and the presence of COin air is indicated

I2O5 + 5CO→I2  (Ditte reaction)+ 5CO2

Structure of carbon monoxide:

Both the carbon and the oxygen atoms in a CO molecule are sp -hybridised. One of the sp -hybrid orbital of each atom is used to form a C —O cr -bond while the other sp -orbital ofeach contains a lone pair of electrons. The two unhybridised 2p -orbitals of each atom are involved in the formation of two pn-pn bonds. In terms of resonance, the CO molecule can be best represented as a resonance hybrid of the following two I resonance structures(1 and 2 ).

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Resonance Hybrid

The resonance structure (1) is relatively more stable because of the fulfilment of the octet of both atoms.

Uses Of carbon monoxide: 

  • CO is used as fuel in the form of producer gas or water gas.
  • It is used as a reducing agent in the extraction of metals.
  • It is used for the preparation of pure nickel by Mond’s process.
  • It is used for the
  • Preparation of methanol, methane, formic acid and synthetic petrol (Fischer-Tropsch process).

Preparation of pure nickel:

Ni(CO)4 is prepared by the reaction between impure nickel and carbon monoxide. Ni(CO)4 is then allowed to decompose by heating to 1.50°C to get pure nickel.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Preparation Of Pure Nickel

Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Overview

Carbon Dioxide

Carbon Dioxide Laboratory preparation:

At ordinary temperature, CO2 is prepared in the laboratory by the action of dilute HCl on calcium carbonate (CaCO3) or marble.

CaCO3 + 2HCl→CaCl2 + CO2↑ + H2O

The gas is collected in the gas jar by the upward displacement of air, as it is 1.5 times heavier than air. Carbon dioxide thus produced contains a small amount of HCl and water vapour. The gas is then passed successively through NaHCO3  solution and cone, sulphuric acid to remove HCl vapour and water vapour respectively.

Dilute sulphuric acid cannot be used for the preparation of CO2  from marble or limestone:

This is because sulphuric acid reacts with CaCO3 to produce insoluble; CaSO4  which forms a layer of CaCO3. This insoluble layer prevents CaCO3  from reacting with the acid and as a result, the evolution of CO2 ceases within a very short time

CaCO3 + H2SO4→CaSO4+ CO2 + H2O

On the other hand, when dilute hydrochloric acid is, used, highly soluble calcium chloride (CaCl2) is formed. So, the reaction proceeds without any interruption

CO2 can be prepared by the action of dilute H2SO4 on Na2CO3:

The salt, Na2SO4 produced soluble in water or dilute H2SO4

Na2CO3 + H2SO4→Na2SO4 + CO2 + H2O

At ordinary temperatures, CO2 is highly soluble in water. Therefore, it is not collected by the downward displacement of water. The solubility of COz in hot water is very low and hence it can be collected over hot

Other methods of preparation:

1. From carbonate salts:

Except for alkali metal carbonates, all other carbonates undergo thermal decomposition to produce CO2 and the oxides ofthe corresponding metals.

BaCO3 decomposes only at very high temperatures.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Carbonates Salts

Calcium carbonate or limestone is thermally decomposed (1000°C) for the preparation of carbon dioxide on a commercial scale.

2. From bicarbonate salts:

Bicarbonates of all the elements decompose on heating with the evolution of CO2

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Bicarbonate Salts

3. From fermentation:

A large amount of CO2 is obtained as a by-product during the manufacture of ethyl alcohol by fermentation of sugar

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements From Fermentation

4. From water gas:

Water gas is industrially prepared by passing steam through a bed of white-hot coke at about 100°C. C + H2O→CO + H2. When a mixture of water gas and excess steam is passed over (Fe2O3+ Cr2O3) catalyst heated at 400°C, CO is oxidised to CO2

(CO + H2) + H2O→CO2 + 2H2

The gaseous product is then passed through a solution of potassium carbonate when CO2 is completely absorbed and KHC03 is formed. H2 and unconverted CO pass out. When the resulting KHC03 solution is boiled, CO2 is obtained.

K2CO2+ CO2 + H2O→2KHCO3

Carbon Dioxide Physical properties

1. Carbon dioxide is a colourless, odourless and tasteless gas having slightly acidic properties.

2. CO2 is 1.5 times heavier than air. So, this gas often accumulates in abandoned wells or pits and because of this, severe breathing problems are caused in such places.

3. By the application of pressure (nearly 40 atmospheric pressure and a temperature < 40°C), CO2 can be easily liquefied. When liquid CO2 is allowed to vaporise rapidly by releasing the pressure, it further gets cooled down and freezes like ice. This is called dry ice or cardice.

4. When solid carbon dioxide is allowed to evaporate at atmospheric pressure, it gets converted into the vapour state without passing through the intermediate liquid state. Therefore, unlike ordinary ice, it does not wet the surface of the substance and because of this, it is called dry ice.

5. It is highly soluble in water (1.7 cm3 of CO2 dissolves in 1 cm3 of water). The solubility increases with an increase in pressure. Aerated waters such as soda water, lemonade etc. contain CO2 under pressure. When the cork of the bottle of aerated water is opened, the pressure is released and excess CO2 escapes in the form of bubbles. Its solubility in water, however, decreases with a temperature rise.

Carbon Dioxide Chemical properties

1. Combustion:

Carbon dioxide is neither combustible nor helps in combustion. When it (heavier than air) falls on a binning substance, it removes air from the surface of the substance and thereby the substance can no longer remain in contact with air. As a result, the fire is extinguished. A burning jute stick when inserted into a jar of CO2, extinguishes.

However, when a burning Mgribbon or metallic sodium is inserted into a CO2 jar, it continues to bum with the separation of black carbon.

⇒ \(\stackrel{+4}{\mathrm{C}} \mathrm{O}_2+2 \stackrel{0}{\mathrm{Mg}} \rightarrow 2 \stackrel{+2}{\mathrm{MgO}}+\stackrel{0}{\mathrm{C}} ; \stackrel{+4}{\mathrm{C}} \mathrm{O}_2+4 \stackrel{0}{\mathrm{Na}} \rightarrow 2 \stackrel{+1}{\mathrm{Na}}_2 \mathrm{O}+\stackrel{0}{\mathrm{C}}\)

During the burning of such metals, the temperature, due to the liberation of a large amount of heat, is so high that CO2 decomposes into carbon and O2 and it is the oxygen which helps in the burning ofthe metals.

In these reactions, CO2 acts as an oxidising agent and itself gets reduced to carbon. These reactions prove the existence of carbon in C02. It is to be noted that the oxidation number of carbon in CO2 is +4 and this is its highest state of oxidation.

Thus, there is no possibility of an increase in its oxidation number, i.e., CO2 cannot be further oxidised. That is why CO2 cannot exhibit any reducing property. For the same basic reason, C02 is not combustible [CO, on the other hand, is combustible because in this case, the oxidation number of carbon may increase from +2 to +4 ].

2. Acidic property:

Carbon dioxide is an acidic oxide. It dissolves in water forming an unstable dibasic acid called carbonic acid (H2CO3). CO2 is, therefore, regarded as the anhydride of carbonic acid.

CO3+H2O→H2CO3

H2CO3 is known only in solution and when the solution is heated, CO2 is evolved out The solution turns blue litmus red but it cannot change the colour of methyl orange.

H2CO3 forms two types of salts, bicarbonates (HCO3 ) and carbonates (CO2-3). Being an acidic oxide, CO2 combines directly with strongly basic oxides such as CaO, Na2O etc. to form their corresponding salts.

CaO + CO2→CaCO3; Na2O + CO2→Na2CO3

Reaction with alkali:

When CO2 is passed through a strong alkaline solution of NaOH, a carbonate salt is first formed. If the passage of CO2 is continued for a long time, white crystals of sparingly soluble sodium bicarbonate are precipitated. The bicarbonate salt decomposes on heating to form carbonate salt, CO2 and water.

2NaOH + CO2→Na2CO2 + H2O

Na2CO3 + CO2 + H2O→ 2NaHCO2

Rection with lime water:

When CO2 is passed through lime water, the solution becomes milky due to the formation of white insoluble calcium carbonate. However, when excess CO2 gas is passed through this milky solution, its milkiness disappears as insoluble calcium carbonate gets converted into soluble calcium bicarbonate

Ca(OH)2 + CO2→CaCO3↓ (white) +H2O

CaCO3+ CO2 + H2O→Ca(HCO3)2 (soluble)

On heating, calcium bicarbonate decomposes to form calcium carbonate, CO2 and water and as a result, the clear solution becomes milky again.

Ca(HCO3)2→CaCO3↓ + CO2 + H2O

Manufacture of sodium carbonate:

When CO2 gas is passed through a concentrated solution of sodium chloride (brine) saturated with ammonia at 30-40°C, white crystals of sodium bicarbonate are precipitated. The reaction occurs in two stages

NH3 + CO2 + H2O ⇌ (NH4)2CO3

CaSO4 + (NH4)2CO3→CaCO3↓ + (NH4)2SO4

Sodium carbonate is prepared by thermal decomposition of sodium bicarbonate. The Solvay process for the manufacture of sodium carbonate is based on this reaction.

Production of ammonium sulphate:

This is carried out by passing CO, and NH3 gases through a slurry of powdered gypsum (CaSO4,2H2O) in water. At first, NH3 and CO2 react together in the presence of water to form ammonium carbonate. It then reacts with calcium sulphate (gypsum) to form calcium carbonate and ammonium sulphate by double decomposition.

2NH3 + CO2 + H2O ⇌  (NH4)2CO3

CaSO4 + (NH4)2CO3→CaCO3 + (NH4)2SO4

The nitrogenous fertiliser ammonium sulphate is manufactured by using this reaction. In this process, (NH4)2SO4 is produced without using H2SO4

Production of urea:

At 200-210°C and 150 atm pressure, CO2 reacts with ammonia to produce urea.

CO2 + 2NH3 ⇌(Ammonium carbamate) NH4 COONH2 ⇌(Urea) CO(NH2 )2 + H2 O

The important fertiliser, urea is manufactured on a large scale by using this reaction.

Photosynthesis:

Plants absorb atmospheric carbon dioxide. In the presence of chlorophyll and sunlight, the absorbed CO2 combines with water (absorbed from the soil) to form glucose, water and oxygen. This process is called photosynthesis. In this process, CO2 is reduced to carbohydrates by water

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Photosynthesis

Reduction of CO2 :

When CO2 is passed over heated C, Fe, Zn etc., it is reduced to CO

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reduction Of Carbondioxide

Identification of carbon dioxide:

  • It extinguishes a burning stick.
  • Lime water becomes turbid when CO2 is passed through it. When excess CO2 is passed through it, the turbidity disappears but when that clear solution is boiled, the turbidity reappears.

N2gas also extinguishes burning sticks but it does not turn the water milky. Again, SO2 gas also turns lime water milky but unlike CO2, it reacts with an acidified solution of potassium dichromate and changes the colour of the solution from orange to green

Uses Of carbon dioxide:

1. CO2 is used in the manufacture of sodium carbonate by the Solvay process and also for the manufacture of fertilisers such as urea, ammonium sulphate etc.

2. CO2 is used in fire extinguishers.  It finds extensive use in the preparation of aerated waters such as soda water, lemonade etc… And baking powder.

3. Solid carbon dioxide i.e., dry ice is used as a refrigerant under the commercial name drikold. Dry ice is also used for making cold baths in the laboratory by mixing it with some volatile organic solvents. It is extensively used as a coolant for preserving perishable articles in the food industry, for curing local burns and for surgical operations of sores.

4. Supercritical CO2 is used as a. solvent to extract organic compounds from their natural sources, for example, caffeine from coffee beans, perfumes from flowers etc.

5. It is used under the name carbogen (a mixture of 95% O2 and 5% CO2) for the artificial respiration of patients suffering from pneumonia and affected by poisonous gases (CO poisoning).

Liquid CO2 is used as a substitute for chlorofluorocarbons in aerosol propellants.

Fife extinguisher:

It is a specially designed metallic pressure vessel having a nozzle at one end. A glass bottle containing dilute sulphuric acid is placed inside it and the remaining portion of the vessel is filled with a concentrated solution of sodium bicarbonate. When required, the glass bottle can be broken by pressing a knob fitted with the vessel at the other end. When the glass bottle is broken, the add comes in contact with sodium bicarbonate solution and reacts to yield copious C02 gas. The gas, ejected under high pressure through the nozzle, falls on the burning substance and as aresult, the fire gets extinguished

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Fire Extinguisher

Na2CO3 + H2SO4→Na2SO4 + CO2↑ + H2O

Baking powder:

The baking powder is used. Fire extinguisher in the preparation of bread consists of a dry mixture of potassium hydrogen tartrate, NaHCO3, tartaric acid and -starch. When this mixture comes in contact with water present in the bread, a chemical reaction leading to the formation of CO2 occurs. The resulting CO2 gas evolved in the form of bubbles making the bread porous and soft. Moreover, NaHC03 and tartaric acid also produce C02 on thermal decomposition

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Baking Powder

Structure of carbon dioxide:

In a CO2 molecule, the carbon atom is sp -hybridised whereas the oxygen atoms are sp² – hybridised. Carbon forms two cr -bonds and two pπ- pπ bonds with two oxygen atoms. The shape of the carbon dioxide molecule is, therefore, linear. The molecule is symmetrical (the two bond moments cancel each other) and hence, it is non-polar. The C —O bond length is 1.15Å. CO2 can be represented as a resonance hybrid of the following three structures:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Resonance Hybrid Of Three Structures

Compounds Of Silicon

1. Silicon tetrachloride (SiCI4 )

Silicon tetrachloride Preparation:

Silicon tetrachloride is prepared by heating either silicon or silicon carbide with chlorine

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Silicon Tetrachloride

Silicon tetrachloride Properties and uses:

1. Physical state:  It is a volatile liquid (boiling point: 330.5 K).

2. Hydrolysis:

SiCl4 undergoes ready hydrolysis to produce silicic acid, Si(OH)4 which on further heating undergoes partial dehydration to yield silica gel (SiO2  xH2O).

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Silica Gel

Silica gel is an amorphous and very porous solid which contains about 4% of water. It is used as an adsorbent in column chromatography and as a catalyst in the petroleum industry. When the hydrolysis of SiCl4 is carried out at a much higher temperature, finely powdered silica Is obtained instead of silicic acid

P Block Elements Higher Temperature Of Finely Powdered Silica Of Intsead Of Silicic Acid

The finely powdered silica thus obtained is used as a thixotropic agent (which reduces viscosity temporarily) in polyester, epoxy paints and resins and as an inert filler in silicon rubber.

3.  Reduction: Reduction of SiCl4 with H2 gas gives silicon

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reduction Of Silicon

Ultrapure silicon used for making transistors, computer chips and solar cells is prepared by this method.

4. Reaction with silicon:

When a mixture of SiCl4 and Si is pyrolysed, a series of perhalosilanes of the general formula, Sin Cl2n+ 2 where n = 2-6, are obtained.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Reaction With Silicon

Chains of perhaloslianes are longer than those of silanes and this is due to the formation of pπ-dπ bonding between a lone pair of electrons present on Cl and the empty d-orbitals of Si

2. Silicones

Silicones e Definition:

The synthetic organosilicon polymers containing repeating R2SiO units held by Si — O — Si linkages are known as silicones The general formula of these compounds is (R2SiO)n where R = methyl or aryl group. Commercial silicones are generally methyl derivatives and in some cases phenyl derivatives.

Silicones Preparation

Hydrolysis of dichlorodimethylsilane (obtained by the reaction between methyl chloride and silicon in the presence of Cu as catalyst) followed by polymerisation involving intramolecular dehydration yields straight chain polymers, i.e., silicones.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Silicone

P Block Elements Class 11 Notes PDF

The length of the polymer can be controlled by the reaction of dimethylsiianol with chlorotrimethylsilane. This blocks the terminal end ofthe polymer as follows—

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Terminal End Of The Polymer

Silicones Properties:

  • Silicones containing short chains are oily liquids; those with medium chains are viscous oils, greases and jellies and those with long chains are rubber-like solids.
  • They are stable to heat and are also resistant to oxidation, i.e., they are very inert.
  • They are water repellents (hydrophobic) & good electrical insulators.

Silicones Uses:

  • Silicones are used for making water-proof cloth and paper.
  • These are used as electrical insulators.
  • Silicon oils are used in high-temperature baths and vacuum pumps.
  • Silicon rubbers are very useful as they can retain their elasticity over a wide range of temperatures.
  • These are mixed with paints and enamels to make them resistant to the effects of sunlight, high temperatures and chemicals.
  • These are used for preparing vaseline-like greases which are used as lubricants in aeroplanes

3. Silicates

Silicates Definition:

Silicates are compounds in which the anions present are either discrete SiO44- tetrahedral units or several such units joined together by corners, i.e., by sharing one oxygen atom but never by sharing edges The negative charge on the silicate structure is neutralised by positively charged metal ions.

Classification Of silicates:

Depending upon the number of comers (0, 1, 2, 3 or 4) of SiO44- tetrahedral unit shared with another tetrahedral unit through oxygen atoms, silicates are following six types:

1. Orthosllicates:

These are simple silicates which contain discrete SiO44- tetrahedrons. Some examples are—zircon: Zr2[SiO4] , forsterite: Mg2[SiO4] , willemite: Zn2[SiO4] and phenacite: Be2[SiO4]

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Ortho Silicate

2. Pyroslllcates:

When two SiO44- – tetrahedra share one corner (i.e., one oxygen atom), Si2O76-anion is formed. Silicates containing discrete Si2O units are called pyrosilicates.

The common examples of phyllosilicates are:

  1. Thortveitite: Sc2[Si2O7] and
  2. Hemimorphite: Zn4(OH)2[Si2O7]-H2O

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Pyrosllicute Anion

3. Ring or cyclic silicates:

When two O-atoms per tetrahedron are shared to form closed rings, structures with the general formula, (SiO3)n2n-– are obtained. The silicates containing these anions are called cyclic silicates.

Some common examples are :

  1. Wollastonite: Ca3[Si3O9] (containing the cyclic ion,  Si3O96-  and
  2. Beryl: Be3Al2[Si6O18] (containing the cycle ion, [Si6O18]-12

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Ring Cyclic Silicates

4. Chain silicates:

If two oxygen atoms of each tetrahedral unit are so shared that a linear single-strand chain of the general formula, (SiO3)2 is formed, then the silicates containing these anions are called chain silicates.

Minerals of this type are called pyroxene and these include:

  1. Enstatite: Mg2[(SiO3)2],
  2. Diopside: CaMg[(SiO3)2] and s
  3. Spodumene: LiAl[(SiO3)2].

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Chain Silicates

P Block Elements Class 11 NCERT Notes

On the other hand, those chain silicates, containing double chain are called amphiboles. Here, two chains are attached through the O-atom. These silicates contain (Si4O11)n 6- ions. Minerals of asbestos are most commonly known as amphiboles.

For example: Crocidolite or blue asbestos [Na2Fe5(OH)2(Si4O11)2], amosite or brown asbestos [(Mg, Fe)(OH)2(Si4O11)2

Asbestos is heat and fire-resistant and thus is used as a shed for houses. Fine asbestos fibres, on entering the lungs cause asbestosis which can even result in lung cancer.

5. Sheet silicates:

Sharing of three comers i.e., three O-atoms of each tetrahedron results in the formation of an infinite two-dimensional sheet structure of the formula (Si4O5)n 2n-. Silicates containing these anions are called sheet silicates.

Some of the common examples are:

  1. Kaolinite: [Al2(OH)4Si2O5] and
  2. Alc: [Mg3(OH)2Si4O10] .

Clay also belongs to this class containing (Si2O6) 2-– anions

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 11 Some P Block Elements Sheet Silicates

Three-dimensional silicates:

If all the four comers i.e., all the four O-atoms of each tetrahedron are shared with other tetrahedra, a three-dimensional network structure is obtained. These have a general formula, (SiO2)n. Some common examples are quartz, tridymite and cristobalite

When a few silicon atoms in a three-dimensional network of SiO2 are replaced by Al3+ions, the overall structure thus obtained carries a negative charge and is called aluminosilicate. Cations such as Na+, K+ or Ca2+ balance the negative charge. Such three-dimensional aluminosilicates are called zeolites.

A common example is natrolite:

Na2[Al2Si3O18]-2H2O. Feldspars and ultramarines are two other types of three-dimensional aluminosilicates.

Many open channels of molecular levels are present in the structure of the zeolites. Depending on the shape and size of these open channels, ions or molecules of different shapes and sizes are adsorbed by the zeolites. Thus, zeolites are used as molecular sieves for separating molecules of different sizes.

Other two types of three-dimensional aluminosilicates are:

  1. Feldspar example: Orthoclase, KAlSi3O8) and
  2. Ultramarine example: Ultramarine blue, Na8(AlSiO4)6S2 )

NCERT Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Short Question And Answers

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Short Question And Answers

Question 1. The hydrolysis of n-propyl magnesium bromide and another alkyl magnesium bromide may obtain propane. Write the name and structure of that alkylmagnesium bromide.
Answer:

Propane can be obtained by hydrolysis of isopropyl magnesium bromide (Me2CHMgBr)

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Magnesium Bromide

Question 2. When a concentrated aqueous sodium formate solution is used in Kolbe’s electrolysis method, no alkane is obtained—why?
Answer:

In Koibe’s electrolysis method, two— R groups of two RCOONa molecules combine to form the alkane, and R— R and two CO2 molecules are obtained from two COONa groups. As, there is no alkyl group in the salt, sodium formate (HCOONa), no alkane is formed on electrolysis of its concentrated aqueous solution.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Concentrated Aqueous Solution

Question 3. Prepare 2,2-dimethylpropane by Corey-House synthesis.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 And 2 Dimethylpropane

Question 4. How will you convert: \(\left(\mathrm{CH}_3\right)_2 \mathrm{CHBr} \longrightarrow \mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{CHDCH}_3\)
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Mg And Dry Ether Heated

NCERT Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Short Questions

Question 5. Identify RI and R’l in the following reaction \(\mathrm{RI}+\mathrm{R}^{\prime} \mathrm{I} →{\mathrm{Na} / \text { ether }} \text { Butane + Propane + Ethane }\). What is the role of ether in this case?
Answer:

When the Wurtz reaction is carried out with a mixture of HI and R’l, two hydrocarbons with an even number of carbon atoms (R— R and R’—R’) and one hydrocarbon with an odd number of carbon atoms (R—R’) are formed. Among the formed alkanes, butane (CH3CH2CH2CH3) and ethane (CH3CH3) are respectively R— R and R’—R’ whereas, propane (CH3CH2CH2) is R — R’.

So, it is evident that R is an alkyl group containing two carbon atoms, i.e., ethyl group (CH3CH2 — ) and Rr is a one carbon atom-containing alkyl group, i.e., methyl group (—CH3). Therefore, RI is ethyl iodide (CH3CH2I) and R’l is methyl iodide (CH3I). The role ofether in this case is that it acts as a solvent.

Question 6. How will you convert methyl bromide to (1) methane and (2) ethane in one step?
Answer:

1.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Methyl Bromide

2.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Methyl Bromide And Ethane

Question 7. Arrange the following compounds in order of their increasing stability and explain the reason: 2-butene, propene, 2-methyl but-2-ene
Answer:

The order of increasing stability of the given alkenes is— propene < 2-butene < 2-methyl but-2-ene

The number of hypercoagulable hydrogen in propene, 2-butene, and 2-methylbut-2-ene molecules are 3, 6, and 12 respectively. With an increase in several hypercoagulable hydrogens, stability due to the hyperconjugation effect of the molecules increases.

Question 8. Between the position and chain isomer of but-1ene, which exhibits geometrical isomerism and why?
Answer:

Position isomer of but-1-ene is but-2-ene (CH3CH=CHCH3) and chain isomer of but-1-ene is 2-methylpropene [(CH3)2C=CH2] . In a molecule of but-2-ene, different groups are attached to the C-atom which is linked to the double bond.

So, but-2-ene exhibits geometrical isomerism. On the other hand, in a molecule of 2-methylpropene, two similar atoms (H-atom) are attached to the C-atom linked to the double bond. So, 2-methylpropene does not exhibit geometrical isomerism.

Question 9. Write the structures of the two alkenes obtained when 2-butanol is heated with excess ofconcentrated H2SO4. Which is obtained predominantly?
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Stability Due To Hyperconjugation

Stability due to hyperconjugation is higher in the case of but-2-ene compared to that it is obtained predominantly.

Question 10.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify A Reaction
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify A Reaction Answer

Question 11. Identify the compounds obtained on heating (CH3)4NOHO
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Trimethyl Amine

Compounds formed: trimethyl amine and methyl alcohol.

Question 12. What is the major product formed in the reaction between CH2=CH—NMe3Ie and HI? Write its structure.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Anti Markowinkoff Product

Question 13. What happens when a mixture of ethylene and O2 gas is passed through a solution of PdCI2 in the presence of CuCl2  at high pressure and 50°C?
Answer:

When a mixture of ethylene and O2  gas is passed through a PdCl2  solution in the presence of CuCl2  at high pressure and 50°C, acetaldehyde is formed as the product.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Acetaldehyde Is Formed

Question 14. Write the IUPAC names of the following compounds:

  1. HC=C-CH(CH3)2
  2. CH3-C=C-C(CH3)3

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons IUPAC NAme Of 3 Methylbut 1 yne

IUPAC name: 3 – Methylpent-1-yen

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 4 And 4 Dimethylpent 2 yne

IUPAC name: 4,4-dimethyl pent-2-yen

Question 15. C = C bond length is shorter than C and C —C —why?
Answer:

The σ -bond In C≡C is formed due to the overlapping of two small sp -hybridized orbitals. In C—C, the σ -bond is formed due to the overlapping of two bigger sp² -hybridized orbitals whereas in C — C.

The σ –bond is formed due to the overlapping of two even bigger sp³ -hybridized orbitals. Again, the multiplicity of the bond between two atoms increases, and the atoms come closer to each other leading to a decrease in bond length. So, bond length follows the order: C=C < C=C < C— C.

Question 16. Write structures and IUPAC names of the alkynes having molecular formula C5H8.
Answer:

Structures and IUPAC names of the alkynes having molecular formula C5Hn are-

⇒ \(\stackrel{5}{\mathrm{C}} \mathrm{H}_3 \stackrel{4}{\mathrm{C}} \mathrm{H}_2 \stackrel{3}{\mathrm{C}} \mathrm{H}_2 \stackrel{2}{\mathrm{C}} \equiv \stackrel{1}{\mathrm{C}} \mathrm{H} \quad \text { (Pent-1-one) }\)

⇒ \(\stackrel{5}{\mathrm{C}} \mathrm{H}_3 \stackrel{4}{\mathrm{C}} \mathrm{H}_2 \stackrel{3}{\mathrm{C}} \equiv \stackrel{2}{\mathrm{C}} \stackrel{1}{\mathrm{C}} \mathrm{H}_3 \quad \text { (Pent-2-one) }\) Δ

Question 17. What happens when the ethanolic solution of 1,1,2,2-tetrabromoethane is heated with zinc dust?
Answer:

When the ethanolic solution of 1,1,2,2-tetrabromoethane is heated with Zn dust, acetylene is formed as the product.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 1 And 1 And 2 And 2 Tetrabromoethane

Question 18. What happens when the gas obtained by the action of water on calcium carbide is passed through an ammoniacal AgNO3 Solution? Identify the solution through which acetylene gas is passed to form a red precipitate.
Answer:

Acetylene is formed by die action of water on calcium carbide. When acetylene gas is passed through ammoniacal silver nitrate solution, a white precipitate of silver acetylide (Ag2C2) is obtained.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Pewsipitate Of Silver Acetylide

Question 19. Which gas is used in carbide lamps or Hawker’s lamps? How does the gas produce a bright illuminating flame in the lamp?
Answer:

Acetylene gas is used in carbide lamps or Hawker’s lamps for producing bright illuminating flame. The percentage of carbon in acetylene is greater than in saturated hydrocarbons having the same number of carbon atoms.

As a result, incomplete combustion of acetylene gas takes place and the heated carbon particles thus formed produce Hluminating flame and bright light.

Hydrocarbons Class 11 Short Question and Answers NCERT

Question 20. What is Lindlar’s catalyst? Mention its use.
Answer:

Use of Lindlar’s catalyst:

This catalyst is used to add 1 molecule H2 i.e., for partial hydrogenation of an alkyne. As cis-hydrogenation takes place in this case, a cis-alkene can be prepared from a non-terminal alkyne by using this catalyst.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Use Of Lindlars Catalyst

Question 21. Which out of ethylene & acetylene is more acidic and why?
Answer:

The greater the s -the character of a hybridized carbon atom, the greater will be its electronegativity. The s -character of sp hybridized carbon atom of acetylene is greater than that of the sp² -hybridised carbon atom of ethylene.

So the electronegativity of the carbon atom of acetylene (CH=CH) is greater than the carbon atom of ethylene (CH2=CH2).

The tendency of the H -atom attached to the more electro¬ negative carbon atom to be removed as a proton (H+) is relatively higher. So, the acidity of ethylene is less than that of acetylene, i.e., acetylene is more acidic than ethylene.

Question 22. How will you convert ethyne into ethanol?
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ethanol

Question 23. Which out of ethyne and propyne is more acidic and why?
Answer:

In ethyne (HC=CH), there are two terminal hydrogen atoms whereas, in propyne (CH3C=CH) there is only one. Apart from this, one electron-donating —CH3 group is attached to the carbon atom present on the other side of the triple bond in the propyne molecule.

This decreases the acidity of the alkynyl hydrogen atom. So, ethyne is more acidic than propyne.

Question 24. How will you distinguish between but-1-yne and but-2-yne?
Answer:

But-1-yne (CH3CH2C=CH) being a terminal alkyne reacts with a solution of ammoniacal stiver nitrate (AgNO3) to form a white precipitate of silver 1-butynide.

However, but-2-yne (CH3C=CCH3) being a non-terminal alkyne does not undergo this type of reaction. So, but-1-one and but-2-one can be distinguished by observing the result of the above-mentioned test using ammoniacal stiver nitrate solution.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ammonical Silver Nitrate Solution

Question 25. How will you convert propylene into propylene?
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Propyne

Question 26. What is the expected shape ofa benzene molecule in the absence of resonance?
Answer:

In the absence of resonance, benzene will be considered as the compound, 1,3,5-cyclohexatriene. The structure of this hypothetical compound is—

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 1 And 3 And 5 Cyclohexatriene

The structure will be such because each carbon-carbon bond length will be unequal. As, C=C is shorter than C—C, the structure of the molecule will appear as an irregular hexagon instead ofa regular one.

Question 27. Write structures of two aromatic ions in which there is a p-orbital containing 2 electrons and the other in which there is a vacant orbital.
Answer:

Cyclopentadienyl anion has two electrons in one of its p -orbital whereas, cyclopropenyl cation has a vacant p -orbital.

Question 28. Write the name and structural formula of the dibromobenzene which forms three mononitro compounds.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 1 And 3 Dibromobenzene

Question 29. What happens when each of the following compounds is heated with acidified K2Cr2O7 solution—
Answer:

Ethylbenzene:

Ethylbenzene gets oxidised to benzoic acid.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ethylbenzene

Question 30. Benzene exhibits a greater tendency towards substitution reactions but a lesser tendency towards addition reactions — Explain.
Answer:

Benzene attains stability by resonance. If benzene undergoes addition reactions, then it no longer participates in resonance. The aromaticity of benzene is no longer retained due to loss of conjugation.

Consequently, the extra stability of benzene is lost. So, benzene has a lower tendency to undergo an addition reaction. However, during the formation of the substitution product, the aromaticity and stability of benzene remain intact. So, benzene has a higher tendency towards substitution reactions.

Question 31. Benzene burns with a luminous sooty flame but methane bums with a non-luminous flame with no black smoke. Why?
Answer:

Due to the high percentage of carbon, elementary carbon is produced during the burning of benzene. As a result, black smoke is formed. The presence of hot carbon particles in the flame makes the flame luminous. In methane, the percentage of carbon is low so no elementary carbon is produced during the burning of methane. Thus, methane burns with a non-luminous flame with no black smoke.

Question 32. Name the electrophiles that participate in the following reactions: nitration, chlorination, Frieclel-Crafts alkylation, Friedel-Crafts acylation, and sulphonation.
Answer:

Electrophiles which participate in nitration, chlorination, Friedel-Crafts alkylation, Friedel-Crafts acylation, and sulphonation reactions are nitronium ion (+NO2), positively charged chlorine ion (Cl+) or chlorine-iron (III) Chloride complex (Cl — Cl+FeCl3), carbocation (R), B: acylium ion (R+CO) and sulfur trioxide (SO3) respectively.

Question 33. Why iodobenzene cannot be prepared directly by combining benzene and iodine in the presence of iron filings? Why is this reaction possible in the presence of nitric acid?
Answer:

Iodobenzene cannot be directly prepared by combining benzene and iodine because the reaction is reversible. However, in the presence of nitric acid, this reaction becomes possible because nitric acid oxidizes the hydrogen iodide as it is formed and so drives the reaction to the right.

Question 34. Write the structure of the compound 4-(1-isopropyl butyl)-3-propyl undecane.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 4 And 1 Isopropylbutyl 3 Propylundecane

Question 35. Write the structure of 2,2,3-trimethylpentane and label the 1°, 2°, 3° and 4° carbon atoms.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 And 2 and 3 Trimethylpentane

Question 36. Write the IUPAC names of two different optically active alkanes with the lowest molecular mass.
Answer:

2 optically active alkanes with the lowest molecular masses-

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Lowest Molecular Masses

Question 37. What is the state of hybridization of the quaternary carbon atom present in the neopentane molecule? Write the IUPAC name and structure of the alkane formed by the combination of neopentyl and tert-butyl groups.
Answer:

The state of hybridization of the quaternary carbon atom In a nooporitanu molecule is sp³

The alkane formed by the combination of neopentyl and terf-butyl groups Is—

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons IUPAC Names 2 And 2 And 4 And 4 Tetramethylpentane

IUPAC name: 2,2,4,4-tetramethylpentane

Question 38. How many chain isomers will be obtained on replacement of different H-atoms of n-pentane? Write their structures and IUPAC names.
Answer:

Three non-equivalent H-atoms are present in a pentane (CH3CH2CH2CH2CH3) molecule. Thus, the replacement of these H-atoms by —CH3 groups results in three isomeric alkanes. These are as follows —

CH3CH2CH2CH2CH2CH3 (hexane)

CH3CH2CH2CH(CH3)2(2-methylpentane)

CH3CH2CH(CH3)CH2CH3(3-methylpentane)

Question 39. Write the trivial and IUPAC names of the branched chain alkane with the lowest molecular mass.
Answer:

The trivial name of the branched chain alkane with the lowest molecular mass is isobutane and its IUPAC name is 2-methylpropane.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Isobutane

Question 40. Write the IUPAC name and structure of the alkane having formula C8H18 and containing a maximum number of methyl groups.
Answer:

The alkane of formula C8H18 containing the maximum number of methyl groups is

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons IUPAC Name Of 2 And 2 And 3 And 3 Tetramethylbutane

IUPAC name: 2,2,3,3-tetramethylbutane

Question 41. Benzene cannot be used as a solvent in ozonolysis of unsaturated hydrocarbons—why?
Answer:

Benzene itself reacts with ozone to form a triozonide. So, benzene cannot be used as a solvent in ozonolysis of unsaturated hydrocarbons

Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons NCERT Short Q&A

Question 42. Which one of the following three alkyl halides does not undergo Wurtz reaction and why?

  1. CH3CH2Br
  2. CH3I
  3. (CH3)3CB

Answer:

  1. The second step of the Wurtz reaction is an SN2 reaction.
  2. An SN2 reaction is very susceptible to steric effect so, a 3° alkyl halide does not take part in an SN2 reaction.
  3. So, (CH3)3CBr being a 3° alkyl halide does not undergo Wurtz reaction

Question 43. Which compound is the strongest acid and why?

  1. HC ≡CH
  2. C6H6
  3. C2H6
  4. CH3OH

Answer:

CH3OH is the strongest acid because here the H-atom is bonded to oxygen which is more electronegative titan carbon irrespective of its state of hybridisation

Question 44. Give two equations for the preparation of propane from the Grignard reagent.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Grignard Reagent

Question 45. How can CH3D be prepared from CH4?
Answer:

 

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Prepared From Methane

Question 46. The preparation of which of the following alkanes by Wurtz reaction is not practicable?

  1. (CH3)3C-C(CH3)3
  2. CH3—CH(CH3)—CH2CH3
  3. (CH3)2CHCH2CH2CH(CH3)2

Answer:

  1. Not practicable. Although it is a symmetrical alkane, prepared from a carboxylic acid? its preparation requires a f-alkyl halide, (CH3)3CX, which does not participate in Wurtz reaction.
  2. Not practicable. It is an unsymmetrical alkane.
  3. Practicable, because it is a symmetrical alkane

Question 47. When a concentrated aqueous solution of a mixture of sodium salts of two monocarboxylic acids is subjected to electrolysis, ethane, propane, and butane are liberated at the anode. Write the structures and names of the two starting sodium salts
Answer:

Ethane may be produced from two CH3COONa molecules, propane from 1 CH3COONa molecule and one CH3CH2COONa molecule, and butane (CH2CH2CH2CH3) from 2CH3CH2COONa molecules. Evidentlyethane, propane & butane may be obtained from the mixture of sodium ethanoate (CH3COONa) & sodium propionate (CH3CH2COONa)

Question 48. How can an alkane having one carbon atom less be prepared from a carboxylic acid?
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Carboxylic Acid

Question 49. Arrange the following compounds in the increasing order of their acidic character.

  1. H2O, CH2=CH2, NH3
  2. HC≡CH, CH3OH, CH3CH3

Answer:

1. Increasing order of acidic character: CH2=CH2 < NH3 < H2O [Because, the increasing order of electronegativity: C2 < N < O ]

2. Increasing order of acidic character: CH3CH3 < HC = CH < CH3OH [increasing order of electronegativity: c ,<C. <ol

Question 50. An alkane (molecular mass 72) produces only one monochloro derivative. Give IIJPAC the name of the compound. Give reasons.
Ana.

As the alkane (CnH2n+2) on monochlorination produces only one monochloride derivative, so all of its hydrogens are equivalent. The molecular mass of the alkane is 72, i.e.,12 × n +{2n + 2) = 72, or n = 5. Hence, the alkane contains a carbon atom, l.e., it is one of the isomeric pentanes. The pentane in which all the H-atoms are equivalent is neopentane, (CH3)4 C. The IUPAC name of the compound is 2,2-dimethylpropane.

Question 51.  NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify ABC And D
Answer:

A = CH3CHO (Acetaldehyde);

B= CHCHOH

(Ethyl alcohol); C = CHCl3

D = HCOONa (Sodium formate)

Question 52. Acetylene does not react with NaOH or KOH, even though it possesses an acidic character —why?
Answer:

Acetylene (HC = CH) is a weaker acid than water (H2O) and OH- is a weak base than HC=C. As a result, weak acid HC=CH does not react with weak base OH to form strong acid H2O and strong base HC≡C. So acetylene fails to react with NaOH or KOH.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Weaker Acid And Stronger Acid

Question 53.  Write the products obtained when propyne ion (CH3C = C:) is allowed to react with

  1. H2O,
  2. CH3OH
  3. H3 (liquid)
  4. 1-hexene and
  5. Hexane.

Also mention, where no reaction occurs
Answer:

  1. CH3C = CH + OH
  2. CH3C = CH + CH3O
  3. No reaction
  4. No reaction
  5. No reaction.

(Propyne is a weaker acid than H2O and CH3OH but it is a stronger acid than, NH3 1-hexene and hexane.]

Question 54. Write the names of the products obtained in the following cases
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Products Obtained In The Following Cases

Answer:

  1. Br CH2CH2 COOH (3-bromopropanoic acid).
  2. C6H5 COCH3 (Acetophenone).

NCERT Solutions Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Short Q&A

Question 55. How can allyl chloride be prepared from 1-propanol?
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ally Chloride

Question 56. trans-pent-2-ene is polar but Frans-but-2-ene is non-polar —why
Answer:

In a trans-but-2-ene molecule, the two C-—CH3 bond moments, oriented in opposite directions cancel each other and so the net dipole moment in a trans-but-2-ene molecule is zero. On the other hand, in the trans-pent-2-ene molecule, although the C-*-CH3 and C—C2H5 bond moments act in opposite directions, they are not equal in magnitude so they cannot cancel each other. Hence, the molecule possesses a net dipole moment.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Non Polar And Polar

Question 57. Convert acetylene into but-2-one.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Acetylene Into But 2 ene

Question 58. Ozonolysis of an alkene leads to the formation of an aldehyde and an isomeric ketone having the molecular formula, C3H6O. Identify the alkene.
Answer:

The aldehyde and the ketone having molecular formula, C3H6O are CH3CH2CHO and CH3COCH3 respectively.

Therefore, the starting alkene is 2-methylpent-2-ene. (CH3)2C= O + O=CHCH2CH3-(CH3)2C =CHCH2CH

Question 59. An alkene having molecular formula, C4H8 reacts with HBr to form a tertiary alkyl bromide. Identify the alkene and the alkyl bromide.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Alkene And Alkyl Bromide

Question 60. Carry out the following transformation (in two steps): Methyl acetylene →1-bromopropan
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Methyl Acetylene Of 1 Bromopropane

Question 61. H How can butan-2-one be prepared from acetylene?
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Butan 2 One

Question 62. Write the IUPAC names of the products obtained when buta-1,3-diene reacts with bromine in1:1 molar ratio
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Buta 1 And 3 Diene Reacts With Bromine

Question 63. Distinguish between buta-1,3-diene and but-1-one.
Answer:

But-1-one (CH3CH2C = CH) reacts with ammoniacal cuprous chloride solution to give a red precipitate. Buta-1,3- diene, however, does not respond to this test.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Buta 1And 3 Diene And But 1 Yne

Short Question and Answers for Class 11 Chemistry Hydrocarbons

Question 64. Prove that benzene is insoluble in water and is lighter than water.
Answer:

Benzene is taken in a separating flask and water is added to it. The mixture is shaken and then allowed to stand until the two layers are separated. The upper layer contains benzene while water settles at the bottom. This observation proves that benzene is insoluble in water and is lighter than water.

Question 65. Why does benzene burn with a sooty flame?
Answer:

As the carbon content in benzene molecule (C6H6, C: H = 1: 1 ) is relatively higher as compared to the saturated hydrocarbon, hexane (C6H14 C: H = 1:2.3), elementary carbon is formed during burning of benzene. So, benzene bums with a sooty flame

Question 66. Nitration of aniline with 98% H2SO4 and cone. [Anilinium sulfate (water soluble)] HNO3 occurs very slowly and mainly metasubstitution occurs —why?
Answer:

In the presence of 98% H2SO4, the — NH2 group of aniline takes up a proton (H) and is converted to an electron attracting (-1) and meta-directing — NH3 group. Electron electrophilic attack of the —NO2 group occurs very slowly. This accounts for the extremely slow rate of nitration of aniline and the formation of the mainly mega-substituted products under strong acidic conditions.

Question 67. Activating groups are ortho-/para- directing, while; the deactivating groups are meta- directing—why?
An8.

The activating groups by exerting their electron-donating +1 and/or +R effects increase electron densities at the ortho and para- positions to a larger extent than the meta-position. So, the electrophiles (E+) enter preferably the ortho- and parapositions. On the other hand, the deactivating groups by exerting their electron-withdrawing -I and I or -R effects decrease electron densities of meta-positions to a lesser extent than the ortho- and para-positions. So the electrophile enters preferably the relatively more electron-rich meta-position.

Question 68. How will you remove traces of aniline present in benzene?
Answer:

If benzene containing traces of aniline (basic) is shaken with a cone. H2SO4 then aniline dissolves in the acid forming a salt.- The acid layer is thus removed. In this way, traces of aniline present in benzene can be removed

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Anilinium Sulphate

Question 69. How can traces of phenol present in a sample of benzene be removed?
Answer:

If the sample of benzene containing traces of phenol (acidic) is shaken with 10% NaOH solution then phenol reacts with NaOH to form sodium phenoxide which dissolves in the aqueous layer. The aqueous layer is then removed. In this way, traces of phenol present in a sample of benzene can be removed.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Sodium Phenoxide

Question 70. How will you distinguish between benzene and hexane by a simple test in the laboratory?
Answer:

The percentage of carbon in benzene is much higher than the corresponding alkane, hexane. So benzene bums with the formation of elementary carbon and as a result, a sooty flame is produced. During the burning of hexane no such sooty flame is produced. Thus, by observing the nature of the flame produced, the two compounds can be easily distinguished.

Question 71. Aniline does not undergo Friedel-Crafts reaction, though it contains an electron-donating group—why?
Answer:

Aniline (Lewis base) combines with AlCl3 (Lewis acid) by donating the unshared electron pair on nitrogen, to form a complex. As a result, the N-atom of the — NH2 group acquires a positive charge and this, being converted into an electron attracting group, decreases the electron density of the ring to such an extent that the Friedel-Crafts reaction does not occur.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Lewis Acid Lewis Base Complex

Question 72.  How much trisubstituted benzene may be obtained from o-, m-, and p-chlorotoluene and why?
Answer:

Each of o – and m -chlorotoluene will give 4 trisubstituted benzenes, while p -chlorotoluene will give two trisubstituted benzenes. This is because there are 4 types of non-equivalent hydrogens (or positions) in each of the ortho- and meta¬ isomers and two types of non-equivalent hydrogens (or positions) in the para-isomer

Question 73. C5H12 and C8H18 are two alkanes that form one monochloride each reacting with chlorine. Write the names of the alkanes and structural formulas of the chlorides.
Answer:

As both the alkanes form one monochloride, it can be said that all H-atoms in these two alkanes are equivalent. Therefore, the alkane with molecular formula C6H12 is (CH3)4C and the alkane with molecular formula C8H18 is (CH3)3C-C(CH3)3

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Structural Formulas Of The Chloride

Question 74. How can you convert methyl acetylene to acetone?
Answer:

At 60-80°C temperature, when methyl acetylene or propyne is passed through a dilute (20%) solution of sulphuric acid containing 1% H2SO4, it combines with one molecule of water to form the unstable compound, 2-propanol. Addition of water molecule to unsymmetrical alkyne (propyne in this case) through Markownikoff’s rule. 2-propenol! Rapidly tautomerizes to acetone

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Convert Methyl Acetylene To Acetone

Question 75. Mention two reactions of benzene to show its behavior is different from that of the open-chain unsaturated hydrocarbons.
Answer:

  1. Benzene does not decolorise bromine water.
  2. Benzene does not react with halogen acids such as HCl, HBr, etc

Question 76. Is it possible to isolate pure staggered ethane or pure eclipsed ethane at room temperature? Explain.
Answer:

The energy difference between eclipsed and staggered conformations of ethane is only 2.8kcal .mol-1, which is easily achieved by collisions among the molecules at room temperature. So it is not possible to isolate either pure staggered or pure eclipsed form of ethane at room temperature.

Question 77. Explain why rotation about carbon-carbon double bond is hindered?.
Answer:

Carbon-carbon double bond consists of a σ -and a π bond. The π-bond is formed by lateral overlap of unhybridised p -p-orbitals of two carbon atoms above and below the plane of the carbon atoms. If an attempt is made to rotate one of the atoms of the double bond concerning the other, the p orbitals will no longer overlap, thereby causing the fission of the n bond. Since breaking of a π -bond requires a considerable amount of energy, which is not available at room temperature, rotation about the carbon-carbon double bond is hindered.

Question 78. Arrange the following carbanions in order of their Hg+ decreasing stability

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Arrange The Following Carbanions
Answer:

Due to greater s -character sp -hybridized carbon is more electronegative than sp³ -hybridized carbon and hence can accommodate the -ve charge more effectively. So 1 and 2 are more stable than 3. Again —CH group has an electron-donating +1 effect, therefore it interacts with the -ve charge on carbanion carbon and hedestabilizesises 1 relative to 2. Thus, the stability of the given carbanions decreases in the sequence: B> 1> 3

Question 79. Explain why Tert butylbenzene cannot be oxidized to benzoic acid by treatment with alkaline KMnO4
Answer:

Alkylbenzenes can be oxidized to benzoic acid provided that the side chain contains one benzylic {hydrogen atom. Since tert-butylbenzene does not contain any benzylic hydrogen, so the alkyl chain cannot be oxidized to the — COOH group.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Benzylic Carbon

Question 80. Explain why HF forms hydrogen bonding with acetylene even though it is non-polar
Answer:

Due to the sp -hybridization of carbon, the electrons of the C —H bond of acetylene are attracted considerably toward carbon. Consequently, each carbon carries a partial negative charge and each hydrogen carries a partial positive charge. Owing to the presence of a partial positive charge on hydrogen, acetylene forms an H -bond with the F -atom of the HF molecule

⇒ \(\begin{array}{r}
\delta+\delta-\delta-\delta+\delta-\delta+ \\
\cdots \mathrm{H}-\mathrm{C} \equiv \stackrel{\delta}{\mathrm{C}}-\mathrm{H} \cdots \mathrm{F}-\mathrm{H}
\end{array}\)

Hydrocarbons Chapter 13 Short Question and Answers Class 11

Question 81. One mole ofa symmetrical alkene on ozonolysis gives two moles of an aldehyde having a molecular mass of 44u. Identify the alkene
Answer:

Let, the aldehyde be CnH2n+1CHO

The molecular mass of this aldehyde

=[12n + (2n +1) + (12 +1 + 16)]u

= (14n + 30)u

Thus, 14n + 30 = 44

n = 1

So the aldehyde is CH3CHO.

The alkene is CH3CH=CH— CH..

Question 82. The addition of HBr to 1 -butene gives a mixture of mechanisms: A and B as the main products together with a small amount of another compound C. Identify A, B, and C
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons HBr To 1 Butene Gives Mixture

Question 83. An alkene, C6H12, reacts with HBr in the absence as well as in the presence of peroxide to give the same product. Find its structure.
Answer:

Symmetrical alkenes react with HBr in the presence or absence of peroxide to give the same product. Hence the given alkene may have the structure (1) or (2)

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Symmetrical Alkenes React

Question 84. How will you prepare a sample of propane free from other alkanes using ethyl bromide, methyl bromide, and diethyl ether as the organic compounds, together? The product‘T is iodobenzene. With other inorganic materials
Answer:

It can be prepared by Corey-House synthesis:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Corey House Synthesis

Question 85. The catalytic hydrogenation of which of the following is most exothermic?

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Exotherimic

Answer:

The least substituted alkene, having the lowest number of hyperconjugative structures, has the least thermodynamic stability (i.e., highest energy content) and so it has the highest heat of hydrogenation. Now, out of the given compounds, (C) is the least substituted alkene and so it has the highest heat of hydrogenation.

Question 86. Identify A, B, C & D in the following reaction—

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons ABCD Following Reactions

Answer:

  1. H —C≡C —H
  2.  H —C ≡ CNa
  3. H—C ≡ C—CH3
  4. H2C=CH—CH3

Question 87. Identify A, B, C Si D in the following reaction

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons ABCD Following Reactions.

Answer:

  1.  CH2=CH2
  2. CH= CH
  3. CH3CHO
  4. CH3—CH3

Question 88. What organic compound is obtained when

  1. Ethyl iodide is subjected to react with Zn -Cu couple/aqueous ethanol and 
  2. Iodoform is heated with Ag powder?

Answer:

  1. CH3CH3
  2. C2H2

Question 89. Write structures of A and B in the following reactions.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Following Structure

Question 90.  Which one of these two reactions can be used for the identification of ethylenic unsaturation? Why? ½ + ½+½ + 1
Answer:

R-CH(Br)—CH3

R—CH(Br) —CH2Br

Question 91.  A hydrocarbon (A) is obtained when 1,2-dibromoethane reacts with alcoholic KOH. (A) decolourises alkaline KMnO4 solution. (A) contains acidic hydrogen. Identify (A) with reasons.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 1 And 2 Dibromoethane Reacts With KOH

 

Question 92. Writes structures of A, B, and C 

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Writes structures of A, B and C

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Writes Structures Of A, B and C. Answer

Question 93. How will you convert?

1. HC = CH→H3C-CH2-CH3

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Convert Example

Answer:

Question 94. An organic compound (A) composed of C and H contains 85.71 %C. It shows M+ at mlz = 42 in the mass spectrum. The compound reacts with HBr in the absence of peroxide to yield an organic compound (B) which is isomeric with the compound (C) obtained when the compound reacts with HBr in the presence of peroxide. Identify A, B, and C.
Answer:

⇒ \(C: H=\frac{85.71}{12}: \frac{14.29}{1}=7.14: 14.29=1: 2\)

Emperical formula = CH2, Molar formula = (CH2)n

According to the problem, n × (12 + 2) = 42.

n = 3. So, the actual molecular formula is C3H6. DBE = 1. So, probable structures of CH6 are—

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Probable Structure

Structure A is accepted as it can undergo given reactions:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Structure A is Accepted As It Can Under Go Given Reactions

Question 95.

1. Write equations of all the steps of the reaction of methane with chlorine in the presence of diffused sunlight

2. Identify A and B NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify A And B Compounds

Answer:

⇒ \(\mathrm{A} \Rightarrow \mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{CH}_2 \mathrm{OSO}_3 \mathrm{H}, \mathrm{B} \Rightarrow \mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{CH}_2 \mathrm{OH}\)

Question 18. Convert benzene into aniline by using the following reagents in the correct order: alkaline KMnO4 and then HCl NH3, heat; Br2/KOH; CH3Cl /anhydrous AlCl3.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Convert To Benzene Into Aniline

Question 96. Write structures of the organic products obtained in the following reactions :

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons The Structures Of The Organic Products

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons The Structures Of The Organic Products.

Question 97. Identify (X) and (Y) in the following reactions:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify X and Y In the Following Reactions

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify X and Y In the Following Reactions.

Question 98. Identify(M) and (N)in the following reactions

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify M And N

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identity M And N In The Following Reactions.

Question 99. Write the product of the following reaction:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Write The Product Of The following Reaction
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Write The Product Of The Following Reaction Answer

NCERT Class 11 Chemistry Hydrocarbons Short Questions and Answers PDF

Question 100. Benzene in reaction with NOCl in the presence of acid produces an organic compound (1).

  1. On treatment with NaNH2/Liq.NH3 furnishes another organic compound (15).
  2. Treatment with NaNO2/HBF4 affords an organic compound
  3. Which on heating gives an organic compound.
  4. Identify(1), (2), (3) and (4).

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Benzene On Reaction With NOCl

Question 101. Two different compounds produce only acetaldehyde on ozonolysis. Draw the structures of the two compounds.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Draw the eclipsed and staggered conformations

Question 102. Write the name and the structural formula of the product obtained when hydrogen bromide reacts with propene in the presence of benzoyl peroxide.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Benzyl Peroxide

Question 103. Identify the compound in the following reaction

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify Compound A

Answer:

Identify the compound A in the following reaction:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify The Compound A Answer

Question 104.

1. Among benzene and toluene, which one will undergo nitration reaction easily and why?

2. Identify A, B, C and D

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify ABCD Reaction

Answer:

If the electron density of the benzene ring increases, then the reactivity of the ring towards electrophilic substitution also increases. In toluene, the —CH3 group increases the electron density of the ring and as a result, the reactivity of the ring also increases due to +1 and the hyperconjugation effect of the —CH3 group. So, nitration occurs more easily for toluene than unsubstituted benzene.

Question 105. Write the name and structural formula of A in the following reaction.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Structural Formula Of Benzene

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ethylene Oxide

Question 106. What happens when NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Happens EtherWhat happens ether?
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ether

Question 107. Two isomeric compounds A and B have the molecular formula C3H.Br forms the same compound C on dehydrobromination. C on ozonolysis produces acetaldehyde and formaldehyde. Identify A, B, and C
Answer:

⇒ \(A \Rightarrow \mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{CH}_2 \mathrm{CH}_2 \mathrm{Br}\)

⇒ \(B \Rightarrow \mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{CH}(\mathrm{Br}) \mathrm{CH}_3\)

⇒ \(C \Rightarrow \mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{CH}=\mathrm{CH}_2\)

Question 108. An alkene A on ozonolysis gives a mixture of ethanal & pentan-3-one. Write the structure & IUPAC name of A.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons An Alkene A On Ozonolysis Gives A Mixture Of Ethanal

Question 109. An alkene ‘A’ contains three C —C, eight C —H crbonds and one C — C π -bond. ‘A’ on ozonolysis gives two moles of an aldehyde of molar mass 44 u. Write the IUPAC name of ‘A’.
Answer:

An aldehyde with molar mass 44u is ethanal (CH3CH=:O). The formula of the alkene ‘A’ which on ozonolysis gives two moles of ethanol can be determined as follows—

⇒ \(\underset{\text { Ethanal }}{\mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{CH}}=\underset{\text { Ethanal }}{\mathrm{O}}+\underset{\text { But-2-ene (A) }}{\mathrm{O}}=\underset{\mathrm{CHCH}_3}{\mathrm{CH}_3-\mathrm{CH}}=\underset{\mathrm{CH}}{\mathrm{CH}}-\mathrm{CH}_3\)

There are three C — C cr -bonds, eight C —H tr -bonds, and one C —C 7t -bond in but-2-one.

Question 110. Propanal and pentane-3-one are the ozonolysis products of an alkene. What Is the structural formula of the alkene?
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Propanal And Pentan 3 One Are The Ozonolysis

Question 111. Write chemical equations of the combustion reaction of the following hydrocarbons: Butane Pantene Hexyne Toluene
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Butane Pantene Hexyne

Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons NCERT Solutions Short Questions Class 11

Question 112. Draw The Cis- and trans-structure of hex- 2 ene which isomer will have higher B>P and Why?
Answer:

The general formula of hex-2-ene is CH3—CH2—CH2—CH=CH—CH3. Structural formulas of cis-and trans-isomers of this compound are-

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Cis And Trans Isomers Of This Compounds

The ds-isomer being more polar than the trans-isomer has a higher value of dipole moment than that of the trans-isomer. Intermolecular dipole-dipole interaction in the case of cis-isomers is more than that in trans-isomers. So, the boiling point of the customer is higher.

Question 113. Why is benzene extraordinarily stable though it contains three double bonds?
Answer:

There are (4n + 2) delocalized 7r -electrons (n = 1) in the planar benzene molecule.

Consequently, it attains stability due to aromaticity. So, benzene is extraordinarily stable despite having three double bonds.

Question 114. Out of benzene, m-dinitrobenzene, and toluene which will undergo nitration most easily, and why
Answer:

Nitration of the benzene ring is an electrophilic substitution reaction. In this reaction, the presence of an activating group ( —CH3) increases the reactivity of the benzene ring, whereas the presence of a deactivating group (—NO2) decreases the reactivity of the benzene ring. Therefore, order of nitration is toluene > benzene > m-dinitrobenzene.

Question 115. Suggest the name of a Lewis acid other than anhydrous aluminium chloride which can be used during ethylation of benzene.
Answer:

Ethylation of benzene means the introduction of an ethyl group in the benzene ring. This reaction is carried out by Friedel-Crafts reaction of benzene with ethyl halide (chloride or bromide), ethene, or ethanol. Lewis acids, other than anhydrous AlCl3, that can be used in this reaction are anhydrous FeCl3, SnCl4, BF3, HF, etc.

Question 116. Why does an iline not participate in the Friedel-Crafts reaction?
Answer:

Aniline reacts with AlCl3 complexing \(\mathrm{C}_6 \mathrm{H}_5-\stackrel{\oplus}{\mathrm{N}} \mathrm{H}_2-\stackrel{\ominus}{\mathrm{AlCl}} \mathrm{Cl}_3\) which makes —NH2 group electron-withdrawing nature. Consequently, the benzene ring becomes highly deactivated so aniline does not participate in the Friedel-Crafts reaction;

Question 117. The reaction of CH2=CH—N(CH3)3I takes place contrary to Markownikoff’s rule—why?
Answer: 

The carbocation formed due to the addition of H+ to the carbon atom containing a higher number of hydrogen atoms becomes unstable because of the electron-attracting —NMe3 group.

So, the reaction takes place contrary’ to Markownikoff’s rule;

Question 118. Mention the limitations of the Wurtzreaction.
Answer:

Limitations:

  • Tertiary alkyl halides do not respond to this reaction,
  • Methane cannot be prepared by this reaction and
  • Preparation of unsymmetrical alkanes cannot be done by this method;

Question 119. What product is formed when the given compound reacts with HBr and why?
Answer: The product obtained

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Product Obtained First Step is because the carbocation formed in the first step

Is, resonance stabilized due to —OCH3 group

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Resonance Stabilised

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons  Warm-Up Exercise Question And Answers

Question 1. What are the chief constituents of LPG?
Answer: The chief constituents of LPG are n-butane and isobutane.

Question 2. Why do C—C bonds instead of C—H bonds of alkanes dissociate due to the effect of heat?
Answer:
The bond energy of the C— C bond (ΔH = 83 kcal. mol-1) is less than that of the C—H bond (ΔH= 99 kcal. mol-1). So, the C—C bond dissociates more easily than the C—H bond.

Question 3. Write the IUPAC name of the straight-chain hydrocarbon consisting of 20 carbon atoms.
Answer:
IUPAC’s name of the straight-chain hydrocarbon consisting of 20 carbon atoms is eicosane.

Question 4. Give the structures of the isomers of molecular formula C5H12
Answer: CH3CH2CH2CH2CH3 (n -pentane) CH3CH(CH3)CH,CH3 (isopentane) and (CH3)4C (neopentane)

Question 5. Explain why dry ether is used in the Wurtzreaction.
Answer:

Dry ether is used because it is present in ether, then it may react with metallic sodium thereby rendering it ineffective

2Na + 2H2O→2NaOH + H2

Question 6. Predict whether Me3CBr will take part in the Wurtz reaction or not
Answer:  Wurtz reaction proceeds through the SN2 pathway. As tertiary alkyl halides do not participate in the SN2 reaction (due to steric effect), Me3CBr does not participate in the Wurtz reaction

Question 7. Explain why methane does not react with chlorine in the dark.
Answer:  The reaction does not take place because in the dark Cl —Cl bond does not dissociate to form Cl free radical;

Question 8. One molecule of a hydrocarbon produces one molecule each of acetone, methyl glyoxal, and formaldehyde on ozonolysis. Identify the hydrocarbon.
Answer:

The hydrocarbon is 3, 4-dimethylpenta-l, 3-diene [CH3—C(CH3)=C(CH3)—CH=CH2] or, 2,4-dimethylpenta-1,3-diene [CH2=C(CH3)—CH=C(CH3) —CH3];

Short Answer Questions on Hydrocarbons Class 11 NCERT

Question 9. Explain why 1-butyne reacts with ammoniacal silver nitrate to produce a white precipitate, but 2-butyne does not
Answer:

1-butyne (CH3CH2C=CH) being a terminal alkyne reacts with ammoniacal AgNOsolution to produce a white precipitate but 2-butyne (CH3C=CCH3) being a non-terminal alkyne does not react with ammoniacal AgNO3 solution;

Question 10. How will you detect the presence of acetylene in a gas mixture?
Answer:

If the gas mixture when passed through ammoniacal AgNO3 solution or ammoniacal Cu2Cl2 solution forms a white or red precipitate, then the gas mixture contains acetylene.

Question 11. Explain why the carbon-carbon bond in acetylene is shorter than the carbon-carbon bond in ethylene.
Answer:

Cr -bond in acetylene (HC=CH) is formed due to the overlapping of two small sp-hybridized orbitals whereas in ethylene (H2C=CH2) it is formed by overlapping of two bigger sp² hybridized orbitals. So, the bond length of HC=CH <H2C=CH2;

Question 12. How will you distinguish between ethylene and acetylene?
Answer:

Acetylene reacts with ammoniacal AgNO2 solution to form a white precipitate of silver acetylide (AgC=CAg) but ethylene does not give a similar reaction with ammoniacal AgNO3 solution.

Question 13. The population of which conformation increases with the temperature rise?
Answer:
The population of the less stable conformation Increases with the increase in temperature.

Question 14. What are the carbides that react with water to form methane commonly known as?
Answer: The carbides which react with water to form methane are commonly known as methanldes.

Question 15.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify X And Y

Question 16. Why are hydrocarbons insoluble in water but highly soluble in solvents like petroleum ether, benzene, carbon tetrachloride, etc?
Answer:

An important principle regarding dissolution is ‘like dissolves like’. It means that polar molecules dissolve in polar solvents while non-polar molecules dissolve in nonpolar solvents. This dissolution process is thermodynamically favorable. Water is a highly polar solvent whereas, petroleum, ether, benzene, and carbon tetrachloride are non-polar solvents. As hydrocarbons are non-polar compounds, they are insoluble in water but soluble in petroleum ether, benzene, and carbon tetrachloride.

Question 17. Why are the alkanes called paraffins?
Answer: Alkanes are called paraffin as their chemical reactivity is quite low (Latin: parum = little, affinis = affinity).

Question 18. What are the typical reactions of alkanes?
Answer: Typical reactions of alkanes are substitution reactions.

Question 19. Mention the type of mechanism through which halogenation of alkanes occurs.
Answer: Free-radical mechanism.

Question 20. What happens when methane is heated at 1000°C in the absence of air?
Answer:

Methane when heated at 1000°C in the absence of air, decomposes to form a fine powder of carbon which is known as carbon black:

⇒ \(\mathrm{CH}_4 →{1000^{\circ} \mathrm{C}} \mathrm{C}+2 \mathrm{H}_2 \uparrow\)

Question 21. What is the main constituent of natural gas which is used as a fuel?
Answer: The main constituent of natural gas which is used as a fuel is methane (90%).

Question 22. Why is light or heat essential for the chlorination of alkanes?
Answer:

Cl free radical is required for the initiation of the reaction between an alkane and chlorine, i.e., homolysis of the Cl—Cl bond is necessary. The energy required for this hemolysis is derived from light or heat. So, light or heat is essential for the chlorination of alkanes.

Question 23. Which gas is responsible for explosions in coal mines?
Answer: Methane is responsible for explosions in coal mines.

Question 24. Write the IUPAC name of freon – 113.
Answer: IUPAC name off neon-113, i.e., Cl2FC— CClF2 is 1,1,2-trichloro-1,2,2-trifluoroethane

Question 25. Which reaction helps locate the position of the double bond in alkenes?
Answer:

The reaction which helps locate the position of the double bonds in alkenes is ozonolysis.

Question 26. An alkene (C4Hg) reacts with HBr in the presence or in the absence of peroxide to give the same compound. Identify the alkene.
Answer:

As tire given alkene (molecular formula: C4HO) reacts with HBr to give the same product in the presence and absence of peroxide, the alkene is symmetrical. So, a symmetrical alkene with molecular formula C4H8 is but-2-ene (CH3CH=CHCH3).

Question 27. Calculate the number of sigma (or) and pi (n) bonds in methyl acetylene.
Answer:

In methyl acetylene (CH3-C CH), there are 6 a-bonds and 2 bonds.

Question 28. Which of the following compounds will react with metallic sodium to produce H2 gas?

  1. C2H4
  2. C6H6
  3. C2H2
  4. CH3CH2CH3

Answer: 3. Acetylene (C2H2) reacts with metallic sodium to produce H2 gas:

⇒ \(\mathrm{HC} \equiv \mathrm{CH}+2 \mathrm{Na} \rightarrow \mathrm{NaC} \equiv \mathrm{CNa}+\mathrm{H}_2 \uparrow\)

Question 29. The C2 — C3 bond 1,3-butadiene possesses some double bond characteristics.
Answer:

The C2—C3 bond in 1,3-butadiene possesses some double bond character because of the delocalization of n -electrons.

Question 30. An arena when oxidised forms 1,3-dicarboxylic acid. Write the numbers of side chains and their position in the arena.
A
nswer:

As the arena gets oxidized to a dicarboxylic acid, it has two side chains. It can be said that the two side chains are at 1,3- or meta-position of each other because a 1,3-dicarboxylic acid forms in the oxidation.

Question 32. Distinguish between benzene and toluene with the help of a chemical reaction.
Answer:

Toluene on oxidation by alkaline KMn04 and subsequent acidification produces shining white crystals of benzoic acid. Benzene, on the other hand, does not undergo oxidation with alkaline KMnO4 to form any white precipitate.

Question 33. Between — NH2 and —NO2, which group facilitates nucleophilic substitution reaction in the benzene ring?
Answer:

The group that facilitates nucleophilic substitution reaction in the benzene ring is — NO2 because it decreases the electron density of the benzene ring.

Class 11 Hydrocarbons Short Questions and Answers NCERT Solutions

Question 34. Arrange in order of increasing reactivity towards electrophilic substitution: benzene, nitrobenzene, toluene, chlorobenzene.
Answer:

The order of increasing reactivity towards electrophilic substitution of the compounds is :

Nitrobenzene< Chloro¬ benzene < Benzene < Toluene.

Question 35. Name the halogen carrier in the chlorination of benzene.
Answer: The compound that acts as the halogen carrier in the chlorination of benzene is either AlCl3 or FeCl3.

Question 36. Benzene undergoes de-sulphonation but not denitration. Why?
Answer:

Since sulphonation is a reversible reaction, benzene can undergo a desulphonation reaction. However, nitration is an irreversible reaction. So, benzene cannot undergo a nitration reaction.

Question 37. If the calculated and the experimental heats of combustion of benzene are 824.1 and 789.1 kcal mol-1 respectively, then calculate the value of resonance energy of benzene.
Answer:

Resonance energy = calculated heat of combustion experimental heat of combustion = (824.1 – 789.1)kcal. mol-1= 35 kcal .mol-1

NCERT Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Long Question And Answers

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Long Question And Answers

Question 1. How can an eclipsed conformation of ethane be converted into a staggered conformation?
Answer:

In an ethane molecule, if one carbon atom is kept fixed around the C—C bond axis and the other carbon atom is rotated at a minimum angle of 60°, then the eclipsed conformation is converted to the staggered conformation.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Staggered Conformation

Question 2. Give examples of a chiral conformation and an achiral conformation of n-butane.
Answer:

Gauche-staggered conformation of n-butane is chiral because it cannot be superimposed on its mirror image.

However, the fully eclipsed conformation of n-butane is achiral as it can be superimposed on its mirror image.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Superimposed On Its Mirror Image

Question 3. Arrange the following conformations of n-butane according to their increasing stability:

  1. Gauche-staggered
  2. Fully eclipsed
  3. Eclipsed and
  4. Ante-Mggered

Answer:

When 2-iodopropane is used as the alkyl halide in the Wurtz reaction, the alkane obtained is 2,3-dimethylbutane.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 And 3 Dimethylbutane

Question 4. Which of the following alkanes cannot be prepared by the Wurtz reaction in good yield?

  1. (CH3)2CHCH2CH(CH3)2
  2. (CH3)2CHCH2CH2CH(CH3)2
  3. (CH3)3CCH2CH2CH2CH3
  4. CH3CH2C(CH3)2CH2CH3
  5. (CH3)3C-C(CH3)3

Answer:

(1), (3) and (4) are three unsymmetrical alkanes. So, these cannot be prepared by Wurtz reaction in good yield. Again, for preparing alkane (5), a 3° alkyl halide is required. So, despite being a symmetrical alkane, (5) cannot be prepared by the Wurtz reaction.

NCERT Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Long Question and Answers

Question 5. How will you prepare methane and ethane starting from ethanoic acid?
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Wurtz Reaction

Question 6. How many monochloro derivatives are obtained on chlorination of n-pentane, isopentane and neopentane? Write down their structures.
Answer:

There are three and four types of non-equivalent hydrogen atoms in n-pentane (CH3CH2CH2CH2CH3) and isopentane [CH3CH(CH3)CH2CH3] respectively. Whereas, in neopentane [(CH3)4C], all H -atoms are equivalent.

Therefore, chlorination of n-pentane, isopentane and neopentane form three, four and one monochloride derivatives respectively.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Monochloro Derivatives

Question 7. Chlorination of cyclohexane to prepare chlorocyclohexane is more practicable than the chlorination of methylcyclohexane to prepare l-chloro-l-methylcyclohexane— explain.
Answer:

There are five types of non-equivalent H -atoms in methylcyclohexane

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Methylcyclohexane

When it undergoes chlorination, four other monochloride derivatives are formed along with 1-chloro-1-methylcyclohexane

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 1 Chloro 1 Methylcyclohexane

As a result, the yield of the desired product is low’—’ and Low it is difficult to separate the product from the mixture. On the other hand, all H -atoms in cyclohexane are equivalent and thus, only chlorocyclohexane

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Chlorocyclohexane

Is formed as the product for this reason, Achlorination of cyclohexane to prepare chlorocyclohexane is more feasible than the chlorination of methylcyclohexane to prepare 1-chloro-l-methylcyclohexane.

Question 8. Write the IUPAC names of the following compounds:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Write The IUPAC Name Of The Compounds

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 3 Isopropyl 4And 4 Dimethylpent 2 ene And 2 Ethyl 3 Methybut1 ene

Question 9. Write the structural formula:

  1. 3-(1- methyl ethyl) hex-2-ene; 
  2. 4-ethyl- 2, 4- dimethyl kept-1- ene

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Structural Formulas Answers

Question 10. Write the IUPAC names and structures of the alkenes having the molecular formula C5H10.
Answer:

IUPAC names and structures of the alkenes having the molecular formula C5H10 are as follows

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Alkenes Molecular Formulas

Hydrocarbons Class 11 Long Question and Answers NCERT

Question 11. Write the mechanism of acid-catalysed dehydration of butyl alcohol.
Answer:

Dehydration of isopropyl alcohol in the presence of concentrated H2SO4 is an El reaction. The reaction occurs in three steps. The second step of the reaction is the slowest, i.e., it is the die rate-determining step of the reaction.

Step 1: Protonation of the alcohol.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Protonation Of The Alcohol

Step 2: Elimination of water molecules and formation of carbocation

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Elimination Of Water Molecule

Step 3: Elimination of proton from carbocation

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Elimination Of Proton From Carbocation

Question 12. Write the structures of A and B obtained from given reactions
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Write Structure Of A And B Obtained In Given Reactions

Answer:

A is R —CHBr —CH3 and B is RCHBrCH2Br. The alkene, HBr and the formed alkyl bromide (A) are all colourless. So, the left reaction cannot be used to detect ethylenic unsaturation.

On the other hand, the alkene and the formed dibromoalkane (B) are colourless but bromine has a reddish-brown colour.

So, the right reaction can be used to detect ethylenic unsaturation because decolourisation of bromine takes place in this reaction.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Decolourisation Of Bromine Place

Question 13. How can a double bond be created in a molecule of a compound which has a carbon-carbon single bond?
Answer:

A double bond is created in a molecule of a compound containing a carbon-carbon single bond by the can-given method.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Compound Containing Carbon Carbon

Question 14. Which reaction is used to detect ethylenic unsaturation and why? Write the structures and IUPAC names of the compounds expected to be obtained in the given reactions:

⇒ \(\mathrm{CH}_3-\mathrm{CH}=\mathrm{CH}_2+\mathrm{HCl}→{\text { Peroxide }}\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{CH}_3-\mathrm{CH}=\mathrm{CH}_2+\mathrm{HBr}→{\text { Peroxide }}\)

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Given Reactions Answers

Question 15. Write the product of the given reaction. Explain its formation:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Write The Product of Reaction

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Product Of Given Reactions

Due to the -R and -I -effect of the — NO2 group, carbocation [I] is less stable than carbocation [II]. So the reaction proceeds through carbocation [II] and the major product formed is

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Major Products Of Carbocations

Question 16. State Markownikoffs rule. Explain with an example. How would you convert ethylene to acetylene? Identify the compound in the reaction—

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons A In The Reaction

Answer:

Markownikoffs rule and example: Conversion of ethylene to acetylene

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ethylene To Acetylene

Question 17. Ethane can be dried by passing through concentrated H2S04 but not ethylene—why?
Answer:

Ethane being a saturated hydrocarbon does not react with concentrated H2SO4

CH3 —CH3  (Ethane) + cone. H2SO4 . So, ethane can be dried by passing through concentrated H2SO4.

On the other hand, ethylene being an unsaturated hydrocarbon, when passed through concentrated H2SO4 gets absorbed by the acid and forms ethyl hydrogen sulphate. So, ethylene cannot be dried by passing through concentrated H2SO4.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Acetylene Prepared By Passing A Stem Of Pure Hydrogen

Question 18. Identify the compounds A, B and C in the following reaction and write their names:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Reaction And Write Their Names

Answer:

Carbonyl compounds B and C contain three and two carbon atoms respectively. There are also three carbon atoms on one side of the double bond and two carbon atoms on the other side of the double bond in the alkene.

Therefore, two alkenes with molecular formula C5H10 are: 2-methylbut-2-ene [CH3 —C(CH3)=CHCH3] and pent-2-ene (CH3CH2CH=CHCH3) . If A (C5H10) is 2-methylbut-2-ene, thenB (C3H6O) &C(C2H4O) areacetone (CH3COCH3) and acetaldehyde (CH3CHO) respectively.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 Methylbut 2 Ene Form Of Acetone And Acetaldehyde

If A is pent-2-ene, then B and C are propanal (CH3CH2CHO) and acetaldehyde (CH3CHO) respectively.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Propanal And Acetaldehyde

Question 19. An alkene on ozonolysis produces propanone and propanal. The alkene is—

  1. 2-methyl pent-2-ene
  2. 3-methyl pent-2- ene
  3. A-methyl pent-2-ene
  4. Hex-3-ene.

Answer:

The products formed on ozonolysis are propanone and propanal. Therefore, the alkene can be determined as—

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 Methylpent 2 ene

The alkene is (1) 2-methylpent-2-ene.

Question 20. How can cis- and trans-hydroxylation of cis-2-butene be carried out? Comment on the optical activity of the formed products.
Answer:

Osmium tetroxide adds to the double bond of cis-2- butene to form osmic ester which is hydrolysed by an aqueous ethanolic solution of sodium bisulphite. In this case, the two —OH groups get attached to the doubly bonded carbon atoms from the same side of the double bond and form 1,2-diol.

So, cis-hydroxylation takes place in case of this reaction. On the other hand, cis-2-butene reacts with peracids to form the corresponding epoxide. The resulting epoxide on hydrolysis with dilute acid or alkali yields 1,2-diol.

Epoxidation followed by hydrolysis causes the addition of two —OH groups from the opposite sides of the double bond. So, trans-hydroxylation takes place in case of this reaction.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Racemic Mixture Optically Inactive

Question 21. What product would you expect from the following reaction?

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Product Of Bromide

Answer:

An alkyne should be formed when a vicinal dihalide is refluxed with ethanolic KOH. However, in the given case, an alkyne does not form because a six-membered ring system cannot accommodate a linear portion like C—C=C —C. So, the compound formed is 1,3-cyclohexadiene.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 1 And 3 Cyclohexadiene

Question 22. Identify and B in the following reactions

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify A And B Reactions

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify A And b Following Reactions

Question 23. Give IUPAC names of the following compounds:

1. CH3CH2-CH=C=CH2

2.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons IUPAC Names Of The Following Compounds Option 2

3.  CH2=CH-CH(CH3)-(CH3)C=CH2

Answer:

IUPACname: 1,2-pentadiene.

IUPAC name: 1-methyl-1,4-cyclohexadiene.

IUPAC name: 2,3-dimethyl-1,4-pentadiene

Question 24. What are the two planar conformations of 1,3-butadiene? Which conformation is less stable and why?
Answer:

The two planar conformations of1,3-butadiene are—

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Two Planar Conformations

Due to steric hindrance or strain, s-ds-conformation is less stable.

Question 25. Between 1,3- and 1,4-cyclohexadiene, which compound has a lower value of heat of hydrogenation and why?
Answer:

1,3-cyclohexadiene being a conjugated diene is more stable than 1,4-cyclohexadiene which is a nonconjugated diene. So, the heat of hydrogenation of 1,3- cyclohexadiene has a lesser value than that of 1,4- cyclohexadiene.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Cyclohexadiene

Question 26. Calculate the double bond equivalent of benzene from its molecular formula.
Answer:

Double bond equivalent (DBE) of compound,

⇒ \(\mathrm{DBE}=\frac{\sum n(v-2)}{2}+1\)

Where n is the number of different atoms present in the molecule and v is the valency of each atom. The molecular formula of benzene is C6H6.

So, DBE of benzene = \(\frac{6(4-2)+6(1-2)}{2}+1=4\)

Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons NCERT Long Q&A

Question 27. What knowledge about the carbon-carbon bond length in benzene may be obtained from valence bond theory?
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Hybrid Structure

The benzene molecule is a resonance hybrid of Kekule structures (1) and (2) and the contribution of each hybrid structure is 50% i.e., equal.

The single bonds (C—C) and the double bonds (C—C) in structure (1) become double and single bonds respectively in structure (2). As the two equally stable resonance structures (1) and (2) contribute equally to the hybrid.

It may be said that any two adjacent carbon atoms of a benzene molecule are linked by a bond intermediate between a single and a double bond. So, all the carbon-carbon bonds of benzene are equivalent and their lengths are equal (1.39A).

Again, the bond order of each bond is the same (1.5). So, it can be said that all carbon-carbon bonds are equal in length.

⇒ \(\text { Bond order }=\frac{\text { Double bond }+ \text { Single bond }}{2}=\frac{2+1}{2}=1.5\)

Question 28. Which of the following representations is correct and why?

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Representation Is Correct Answer

Answer:

According to representation

(1), it seems that structures (1) and (2) have a separate existence. There is no separate existence of structures (1) and (2).

So, (1) and (2) cannot be related by ’. Thus, the representation (i) is incorrect. Since (1) and (2) are two resonance structures which have no separate existence. So, (1) and (2) can be related by’ •*-»ÿ ‘. Thus, the representation

(2) is correct.

Question 29. What is the basic difference between aromatic and anti¬ aromatic compounds?
Answer:

Monocyclic planar conjugated polyene systems containing (4n + 2) delocalised; π-electrons (n = 0, 1,2,3, are called aromatic compounds.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 6 Pi Electron System

Monocyclic planar conjugated polyene systems containing 4n delocalised π- electrons (n = 1,2,3,…) are called antiaromatic compounds.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 4 Pie Electron System

Question 30. Will cyclooctatetraene exhibit aromatic character? Explain.
Answer:

Since cyclooctatetraene does not contain (4n + 2)n electrons, it does not exhibit an aromatic character.

As cyclooctatetraene has 4n – electrons (n=2), it should be an antiaromatic compound. However, the ring of this compound is very large so it does not exist in the unstable planar shape, rather it forms a tub-shaped structure. As a result, conjugation is lost and so cyclooctatetraene is a non-aromatic compound.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Cyclooctatetraene Is A Non Aromatic Compound

Question 31. Using the theory of aromaticity, explain the finding that A and B are different compounds, but Cand D are identical.
Answer:

As A is an antiaromatic compound (4nπ -electron system, n = 1 ), it becomes unstable due to the delocalisation of π electrons. As delocalisation of π -electrons does not take place for A, B is not the resonance structure of A.

B is the structural isomer of A. So, A and B are two different compounds. Again, C is an aromatic compound [(4n + 2)π electron-system, n = 1 ] which attains stability due to the delocalisation of electrons. So, delocalisation of electrons takes place for C. D is the resonance structure of C, i.e., Cand D are same compound.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Same And Separete Compounds

Question 32. Classify each of the given species as aromatic, antiaromatic and nonaromatic

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Aromatic And Antiaromatic And Nonaromatic

Answer:

  1. Is an antiaromatic compound because the B atom contains a vacant p -orbital,
  2. Is a non-aromatic compound because one carbon atom of the ring does not have a p -orbital.
  3. Behaves as an aromatic compound with (4n + 2)π-electrons (n = 1) because of the vacant d -d-orbital and lone pair of electrons of the sulphur atom

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Lone Pair Of Electron Of the Sulphur

Is an aromatic ion with (4n+2)π- electrons, n = 0

Question 33. Which is the smallest aromatics species?
Answer:

The smallest aromatic species is cyclopropenyl cation.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Cyclopropenyl Cation

Question 34. Write structural formulae of isomeric nitrotoluenes.
Answer:

Structural formulae ofisomeric nitrotoluenes are

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Structural Formulae Of Isomeric Nitrotoluenes

Question 35. Write structural formulae of isomeric dibromophenols.
Answer:

Structural formulae of isomeric dibromo phenols are

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Structural Formulae Of Isomeric Dibromophenols

Question 36. More than three dibromobenzenes are not possible—explain.
Answer:

Considering the resonance structures of benzene, it is easy to understand that positions 1,2- and 1,6- are indistinguishable. Similarly, positions 1,3- and 1,5- are indistinguishable. Thus, in the case of bromobenzene, only three isomers are possible which are as follows

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Dibromobenzene

Question 37. Write the IUPAC names of the given compounds

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons IUPAC Names Of The Given Compounds

Answer:

  1. 1,2-dihydroxybenzene
  2. 1-phenylpropanoid-l-one
  3. 2-hydroxybenzoic acid
  4. Al-phenylethylamine
  5. l-bromo-3-chlorobenzene
  6. 3-phenylpropanoid acid
  7. 2,4,6-trinitrotoluene
  8. 4-hydroxy-3-methoxy benzaldehyde

Question 38. Write structures and IUPAC names:

  1. Mesitylene
  2. Styrene
  3. Pyrogallol
  4. Picric acid
  5. Salicylaldehyde
  6. Benzophenone
  7. TNT
  8. Phthalic acid
  9. Anthranilic acid.

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Write Structures And IUPAC Names

Question 39. Classify the following groups as o-/p-or m- directing group and activating or deactivating group:

  1. -NO2
  2. -Cl
  3. -C2H5
  4. -CP3
  5. OH
  6. — NHCOCH3
  7. —NH3
  8. — O
  9. —COCH3

Answer:

  1. — NO2 (deactivating and m -directing),
  2. —Cl (deactivating and o/p -directing),
  3. —C2H5 (activating and o-lp- directing),
  4. — CF3 (deactivating and m -directing),
  5. —OH (activating and o-lp- directing),
  6. — NHCOCH3 (activating and o-lp- directing),
  7. — NH3 (deactivating and m directing),
  8. — Oe (activating and o-lp-directing
  9. — COCH3 (deactivating and m -directing).

Question 40. Explain each of the following observations:

  1. Although —Cl is a deactivating group, it is o-lp-directly.
  2. The —CH3 group is an o-/p- directing group, even though the carbon atom contains no unshared pair of electrons.
  3. The —OCH3 group is an activating and o-/p directing group.
  4. The — CCl3 group is a m -m-directing group, even though the carbon atom is not bonded to a more electronegative atom by a double or triple bond.

Answer:

3. —OCH3  group is an o-/p-directing group because an unshared pair of electrons on O-atom participate in resonance (+R -effect) and increase the electron density of the ring at ortho- and para-positions.

So, electrophiles (E) preferably enter the ortho- and para-positions. Due to an increase in electron density, the ring becomes more activated than the unsubstituted benzene towards an electrophilic substitution reaction. Thus, — OCH3 is an activating group.

4. —CCl3 is an electron-withdrawing group because of its -I effect which is attributed to the presence of three highly electronegative Cl -atoms. Consequently, it decreases the electron density of the benzene ring, especially at the ortho- and para-positions.

So, —CCl3 is a deactivating group which makes the ring less reactive towards electrophilic substitution and substitution occurs preferably at meta-position.

NCERT Solutions Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Long Q&A

Question 41. How will you prepare benzene from the given compounds?

  1. C6H5COOH
  2. C6H5CMe3 
  3. C6H5CH2Cl
  4. C3H5Br

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Prepare benzene From The Given Compounds

Question 42. Write two processes to convert C6H6 into C6H5D.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Write Two Process To Convert

Question 43. Write the NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Formula And Name Of The Productsformed.

 

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Formula Name Of The Products Formed

Question 44. Why groups like — CHO, — NO2, — B(OR) — PBr3 and — SR2 act as meta-directing groups?
Answer:

Since the carbon atom of the:

  1. — The CHO group is bonded to the oxygen atom by a double bond, the nitrogen atom of the
  2. — The NO2 group is linked with the oxygen atom by a double bond, the boron atom of the
  3. —B (OR)3 group contains a vacant p -orbital and the phosphorus and sulphur atoms of the groups

+ PBr3 and — +SR2-, have vacant d-orbitals, all of these groups reduce the electron densities of ortho- and para- positions by their -R effect. Consequently, the electron density at the metaposition becomes relatively higher and the electrophile preferably enters the meta-position. Thus, these groups behave as meta-directing groups

Question 45. Arrange the compounds in increasing order of their rate of nitration and give reason: Benzene, Toluene, Nitrobenzene, Hexadeuterobenzene (C6D6).
Answer:

The increasing order of rate of nitration of given compounds is nitrobenzene < benzene = hexadeuterobenzene < toluene. The electron-attracting nitro (— NO2) group decreases the electron density of the nitrobenzene ring and as a result, its nitration occurs at a rate slower than that of benzene.

On the other hand, the electron-repelling methyl (— CH3) group increases the electron density of the toluene ring and as a result, its nitration proceeds at a rate faster than that of benzene. Benzene and hexadeuterobenzene (C6D6) undergo nitration at the same rate because, in an aromatic electrophilic substitution reaction, cleavage of the C — H or C — D bond does not occur at the rate-determining step.

Question 46. A mixture of benzene and bromine solution remains unchanged for an indefinite period, but if an iron nail is added to the solution, bromination of benzene occurs rapidly—explain.
Answer:

Benzene is an aromatic compound having no ethylenic unsaturation. So benzene does not participate in additional reactions with bromine. Again, the substitution reaction of benzene does not take place with the poor electrophile bromine alone.

So a solution of bromine in benzene remains stable (f.e., unchanged) for an indefinite period. However, when an iron nail is added to the solution, bromination of benzene occurs to yield bromobenzene because iron then acts as a halogen carrier. The red solution of bromine becomes colourless

2Fe + 3Br2→2FeBr3; Br2 + FeBr3 → Br+ FeBr

C6H6 + Br+ FeBr4 →C6H5Br + HBr + FeBr3

Question 47. Write the monosubstituted compounds formed in each of the following reactions and state whether each reaction is faster or slower than that of benzene.

  1. Nitration of C6H5NHCOCH3,
  2. Bromination of C6H5CBr3
  3. Chlorination of C6H5CMe3
  4. Nitration of C6H5—C6H5
  5. Nitration of C6H5—COOCH3
  6. Sulphonation of C6H5CHMe2
  7. Nitration of C6H5CN,
  8. Bromination of C6H5I,
  9. Nitration of C6H5-C6H4C6H5

Answer:

1. p-O2NC6H4NHCOCH3 (for this compound nitration occurs faster than benzene).

2. m-BrC6H4CBr3 (for this compound bromination occurs slower than benzene)

3. p-ClC6H4CMe3 (for this compound chlorination occurs faster than benzene)

4. p-O2NC6H4C6Hg (for this compound nitration occurs faster than benzene)

5. m-O2NC6H4COOMe (for this compound nitration occurs slower than benzene)

6. p-HSO3C6H4CHMe2 (for this compound sulphonation occurs faster than benzene)

7. m-O2NC6H4CN (for this compound nitration occurs slower than benzene)

8. p- BrC6H4I (reaction occurs slower than benzene)

9.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Faster Than Benzene In The Middle Ring

(reaction occurs faster than benzene in the middle ring because it is attached to two activating — CgH5 groups on both sides.)

Question 48. Write three methods by which alkyl side chains can be introduced into the benzene ring
Answer:

The: methods by which alkyl side chains, can be introduced into the benzene ring are—

1. By using (a) CH3CH3X, AlCl3CH2=CH2 HF and CH3CH2OH, BF3 or concentrated H2SO4 in Friedel-Crafts alkylation reaction.

2. By acylation of benzene using CH3COCI or (CH3CO)2O, AlCl3 followed by . Clemmensen reduction NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Clemmensen Reduction the formed ketone.

4. By reacting CH3CH2Br with Ph2CuLi according to Corey-House synthesis.

Question 49. Classify the following groups based on their orientation and reactivity:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Orientation And Reactivity

Answer:

1,4 and 5 are activating and ortho-/para- directing groups. 3 and 6 are deactivating and meta-directing groups. 2 is a deactivating group (due to — NO2 ) and is ortho-/para directing >C=C<

Question 50. 1-butyne and 2-butyne are allowed to react separately with the reagents given below:

  1. Na, liquid NH3
  2. H2 (1 mole), Pd-BaSO4, quinoline,
  3. H2SO4,H2O, H2SO4
  4. H2/Pt.

Which reagent(s) will produce the same product in both cases? Write the structures, of products formed in these cases
Answer:

Both 1-butyne & 2-butyne react separately with reagents 1 and 2 to produce 1-butene and 2-butene respectively

However, reagents(3 & 4 react with 1-butyne & 2-butyne separately to yield same products (2-butanone & butane)

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 Butanone And Butane

Question 51. Ethyne reacts with dil. H2S04 in the presence of Hg2+ salts to give acetaldehyde, but with HC1, under similar conditions, it gives vinyl chloride. Account for such observation.
Answer:

In the first step, ethyne reacts with Hg2+ to form a cyclic complex (I). This is then attacked by more nucleophilic H2O, 2— rather than, weakly nucleophilic SO4, to form unstable vinyl alcohol which then tautomerism to give acetaldehyde

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Tautomerises To Give Acetaldehyde

If HCl is used instead of H2SO4 then the complex (I) is attacked by more nucleophilic Cl-, rather than weakly nucleophilic H2O, to give vinyl chloride

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Vinyl Chloride

An alkane has a molecular mass of 72. Give the structure of all the possible isomers along with their IUPAC OH names

Let the alkane be CnH2n+2. It’s molecular

=12n + (2n + 2) = 14n + 2

.*. 14n + 2 = 72, thus n – 5 and hence the alkane is C5H12

The isomers of the alkane C5H12 are—

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Isomers Of The Alkenes

Long Questions and Answers for Class 11 Chemistry Hydrocarbons

Question 52. Find the number of structural and configurational isomers of a bromo compound C5H9Br formed by the addition of HBR to 2-pentyne.
Answer:

Addition of one molar proportion of HBr to CH3—CH2—C=C—CH3 produces two structural isomers 1 and 2

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Structural Isomers Of A And B

Each of these structural isomers can exist as a pair of geometrical isomers (cis and trans) and hence there are four possible configurational isomers

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Four Possible Configurational Isomers

Question 53. Identify the products P and Q in the following reaction:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify The Products P And Q

Answer: In the absence of light, the reaction occurs via a polar mechanism

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons In Absence And Presence Of Light Reactions

Question 54. Identify the product ‘T’ in the following reaction and the major product. Account for its formation.
NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify The Product Of T
Answer:

The product‘T is iodobenzene.

Explanation: Since I am less electronegative than Cl, so I+ is the effective electrophile that takes part in the reaction

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Sigma Complex And Iodobenzene

Question 55. Identify the major product obtained on; monobromination (Br2/FeBr3) of meta methyl anisole and account for its formation
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Monobromination Of Meta Methylanisole

Both —CH3 and —OCH3 are o-/p-directing groups. Therefore, the possible positions of attack which are facilitated by these groups are indicated by arrows as shown below

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Indicated By Arrows Of Possible Positions

Attack by the electrophile (Br+) is disfavoured at C2 because this position is most crowded. Again -I effect of — the OCH3 group does not favour attack at C6. So most favourable attack occurs at C4, thereby producing 4-bromo-3-methylanhole as

Question 56. The enthalpy of hydrogenation of cyclohexene is -119.5 kj. mol-1 ,. If the resonance energy of benzene is 150.4 kj. mol-1 , estimate its enthalpy of Br2/FeBr3 hydrogenation.
Answer:

Enthalpy of hydrogenation of cyclohexene

=-119.5 kj- mol-1

So enthalpy of hydrogenation of hypothetical cyclohexatriene

= 3 × -119.5 kj- mol-1,

In other words, the calculated (or theoretical) enthalpy of hydrogenation of benzene =-3 × -119.5 kj- mol-1,

Let the actual (i.e., experimental) enthalpy of hydrogenation of benzene = × kj- mol-1

Now, R. E. of benzene = calculated enthalpy of hydrogenation of benzene- actual enthalpy of hydrogenation of benzene

o,-150.4 = -3 X 119.5 —x

x = -3 ×119.5 + 150.4 = -208.1 kj. mol-1

Question 57. How low will you prove:

  1. Acidic character of acetylene.
  2. Presence of terminal =CH2 group in 1-pentene.
  3. Presence of acetylenic hydrogen in 1-butyne.
  4. 2-butene is a symmetrical alkene. 1-butyne

Answer:

When acetylene is added to water and shaken, the resulting solution does turn blue litmus red. The following reactions in which the H-atoms of acetylene are replaced by metal atoms prove the acidic character of acetylene.

  1. HBr (a) Acetylene (HC=CH) reacts with sodium in two steps to form monosodium acetylide (HC = CNa) and disodium acetylide (NaC = CNa) respectively and in each case, H is evolved.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Disodium Acetylide

2. When acetylene gas is passed through ammoniacal Cu2Cl2 or AgNO3 solution, metallic acetylide is precipitated in each case

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Metallic Acetylide Is Precipitated

3. Ozonolysis of 1-pentene leads to the formation of formaldehyde (HCHO) as one of the products. This proves that there is a terminal =CH2 group present in 1-pentene

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ozonolysis Of 1 Pentene

When 1-butyne is treated with ammoniacal cuprous chloride, a red precipitate of cuprous 1-butynide is obtained. Again, when an aqueous solution of silver nitrate is added to the alcoholic solution of 1-butyne, a white precipitate of silver 1-but nude is obtained.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 1 Butyne Is Treated With Ammoniacal Cuprous Chloride

Ozonolysis of any symmetrical alkene results in the formation of only one carbonyl compound (2 moles). Since 2-butene, on ozonolysis, produces two moles of acetaldehyde (CH3 CHO), it must be a symmetrical alkene. Its structure is CH3 CH=CH CH3.

Question 58. Identify the major product obtained in each of the following reactions and explain its formation

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Following Reactions And Explain Its Formation

Answer:

1. 

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 1 Bromo 1 Phenylpropane Of Major

Although the alkene is an unsymmetrical one, Markownikoff’s rule is not directly applicable here because there are the same number of H-atoms attached to double-bonded carbons. Out of the 2 carbocations ( C6H5CHCH2CH3 & C6H5CH2CHCH3 ) obtained in the first step of the reaction, the first one (a benzylic carbocation) is more stable because it is stabilised by resonance involving the benzene ring. So, this carbocation is formed more easily and readily and in the second step, it combines with the Br ion to give 1-bromo-l-phenylpropane as the major product.

2. 

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 Chloro 1 Iodo 2 Methylpropane

This reaction occurs according to Markownikoff’s rule. Chlorine is more electronegative than iodine. So, in the Iδ+– Clδ- molecule, the I-atom with a partial positive charge combines first with the alkene as an electrophile. Between the two carbocations, (CH3)2+CCH2I and  (CH3)2+CICH2 formed in the first one being a 3° carbocation is relatively more stable. So, it is formed more easily and readily and in the second step, it combines with Cl to give 2-chloro-lido-2-methylpropane as the major product.

3. 

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 Chloro 1 Iodo 2 Methylpropane

Double bond is more reactive than triple bond towards electrophilic addition reactions. For this reason, bromine (1 mole) is added mainly to the double bond of the compound to produce 4, 5 -dibromo pent-1-one as the major product.

Question 59. Write the names and structures of the two alkenes (molecular formula: C4H6) which give the compound when added to HBr in the absence of organic peroxide but different compounds when added to HBr in the presence of peroxide
Answer:

When but-1-ene (CH3CH2CH=CH2) and but-2-ene (CH3CH=CHCH3) react with HBr in the absence of an organic peroxide, the same product is obtained.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons React With HBr In Absence Of An Organic Peroxide

However, in the presence of an organic peroxide, the addition of HBr to but-1-ene occurs contrary to Markownikoff’s rule and hence differences are obtained from these two cases

1.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Different Producers Are Obtained In These Two Cases But 1 ene

2.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Different Producers Are Obtained In These Two Cases But 2 ene

Question 60. Mention two reactions in which ethylene and benzene behave differently and two reactions in which they behave similarly.
Answer:

Benzene, unlike ethylene, fails to discharge the red colour of bromine in CCl4 or the reddish-violet (purple) colour of potassium permanganate solution because, unlike ethylene the π -electron system of benzene possesses extraordinary.
O2 stabilisation.

So, in these two reactions ethylene and benzene behave differently.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ethylene And Benzene

In the following two reactions, ethylene and benzene behave similarly.

1. Both ethylene and benzene bums with sooty flame to produce CO2 and H2O

⇒ \(\mathrm{C}_2 \mathrm{H}_4+3 \mathrm{O}_2 \longrightarrow 2 \mathrm{CO}_2+2 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

⇒  \(2 \mathrm{C}_6 \mathrm{H}_6+15 \mathrm{O}_2 \longrightarrow 12 \mathrm{CO}_2+6 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\)

2. Both ethylene and benzene react with ozone to form ozonide (an additional

⇒ \(\mathrm{C}_2 \mathrm{H}_4+\mathrm{O}_3 \longrightarrow \mathrm{C}_2 \mathrm{H}_4 \mathrm{O}_3\) (Ethylene (ozonides)

⇒  \(\mathrm{C}_6 \mathrm{H}_6+3 \mathrm{O}_3 \longrightarrow \mathrm{C}_6 \mathrm{H}_6 \mathrm{O}_9\) (Benzene tri ozonide)

Question 61. Distinguish between:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Toluene
Answer:

1. Toluene (C6H5CH3), on oxidation by alkaline KMnO4 solution followed by acidification gives a white crystalline precipitate of benzoic acid (C6H5COOH). On the other hand, tert-butylbenzene does not undergo such an oxidation reaction by an alkaline KMnO4 solution.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Toluene.

2. O -xylene and m -xylene, on oxidation by alkaline KMnO4 solution, produce phthalic acid and isophthalic acid respectively. Phthalic acid, when heated, forms phthalic anhydride which responds to phthalein test On the other hand, isophthalic acid on heating does not produce any anhydride.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons O-xylene And M-Xylene On Oxidation By Alkaline

Hydrocarbons Chapter 13 Long Question and Answers Class 11

Question 62. Write the name & structure of the following compounds:

  1. An unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon which forms monosodium salt.
  2. An organic compound which causes depletion of the ozone layer.
  3. An alkane which is used as a fuel for household cooking.
  4. An alkyl bromide which reacts with alcoholic KOH to form only 1-butene.
  5. An alkene which reacts with HBr in the presence or absence of peroxide to give the same product.
  6. A compound containing iodine which, when heated with silver powder, produces acetylene.
  7. An alkyl bromide (C4H9Br) does not participate in the Wurtz reaction.
  8. An alkene which on ozonolysis forms glyoxal and formaldehyde.

Answer:

  1. Propyne (CH3C= CH).
  2. Dichlorodifluoromethane (CF2Cl2).
  3. Butane(CH3CH2CH2CH3).
  4. 1-bromobutane (CH3CH2CH2CH2Br).
  5. 2-butene (CH3CH=CHCH3).
  6. Iodoform (CHI3).
  7. Tert-butylbromide (Me3CBr).
  8. 1,3-butadiene (CH2=CH—CH=CH2)

Question 63. Identify A … G in the following reaction sequence

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify A And G In The Following Reaction Sequence

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Identify A AndG In The following Reaction Sequence Answer

Question 64. Write structures and names of the compounds A to Q in the following reaction sequences:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons The Structures And Names Of The Compounds A To Q

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons The Structures And Names Of The Compounds A To Q .

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons The Structures And Names Of The Compounds A To Q..

Question 65. How will you distinguish between each of the given pairs of compounds by a single chemical test? 

  1. Ethylene and acetylene
  2. Ethane and acetylene
  3. 1-butyne and 2-butyne
  4. Ethane and ethylene.
  5. Propene and propyne
  6. 1-butene and 2-butene
  7. 2-pentene and benzene
  8. Benzene and cyclohexene.

Answer:

The distinction between two compounds should be written in a tabular form. A reagent which either causes a colour change, or evolution of a gas or the appearance of a precipitate should be selected for this purpose.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons The Distinction Between Two Compounds

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons The Distinction Between Two Compounds.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons The Distinction Between Two Compounds..

Question 66. How will you carry out the following transformations:

  1. Acetylene → Acetone
  2. Acetylene →Dldeuteroacetylene(C2D2)
  3. Acetylene → Acetylenedicarboxyllc acid
  4. 1-butyne → 2-butyne
  5. Propene → 1-propanol  Propyne →  Propanal

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Acetylenes Acetone

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Acetylenes Acetone2

Question 67. The boiling points of three isomeric pentanes are 36.2°C, 28°C and 9.5°C respectively. Identify the compounds and give a reason.
Answer:

The strength of van der Waals forces depends on the area of products, A and B obtained in the following reactions: contact between molecules. The area of contact between straight-chain n -pentane (CH3CHCH2CH2CH3) molecules is maximum. So, the extent of van der Waals’ attraction among its molecules is maximum. For this reason, its boiling point is highest (36.2°C). On the other hand, the area of contact between spherical neopentane [(CH3)4C] molecules is minimal.

So, _ the extent of van der Waals’ attraction among its molecules is the minimum. For this reason, its boiling point is the lowest (9.5°C). Again, the area of contact between isopentane [(CH3)2CHCH2CH3] molecules is intermediate between n-pentane and neopentane and so, its boiling point (28°C) is intermediate between the other two isomers.

Class 11 Hydrocarbons Long Questions and Answers NCERT Solutions

Question 68. Write the structure and the name of the monobromoderivative which is obtained as the major product when n-butane reacts with bromine in the presence of light. Why is it produced in larger amounts?
Answer:

N-butane reacts with bromine in the presence of light to give 2-bromobutane as the major product.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 1 Bromobutane And 2 Bromobutane

The reaction occurs through the free radical mechanism. As 2° free radical (CH3CH2CHCH3) is relatively more stable than 1° free radical (CH3CH2CH2CH2), displacement of 2° H-atom occurs rapidly to give 2-bromobutane as the major product

Question 68. Possible methods for the preparation of 4-methyl-2- pentyne arc are given. Which method is desirable & why?

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Possible Methods For Preparation

Answer:

In both the methods given, the reaction in the second step (reddish-brown) proceeds through the SN2 pathway and it is known that an SN2 reaction is very susceptible to steric effect So, the product will be obtained in good yield if, in the second step, methyl or primary alkyl bromide is used. In the second step of the second method, methyl bromide (CH3Br) has been used. Hence, the second method is desirable.

Question 70.  Three separate cylinders contain methane, and ethylene acetylene respectively. How will you identify them?
Ana.

The three gases are first separately passed through the ammoniacal solution of cuprous chloride. The gas, which gives a red precipitate, is acetylene. The gases in the remaining two cylinders are separately passed through a solution of bromine in CCl4. The gas, which decolourises the reddish-brown solution of bromine, is ethylene. Hence, the remaining gas in the other cylinder is methane.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Cylinder Methane

Question 71. Give an example alkene which on oxidation by acidic solution of KMn04 or on ozonolysis gives the same compound. Give reason.
Answer:

A terminal =CR2 group of an alkene gets converted into a ketone when the alkene is heated with an acidic solution of KMnO4 or subjected to ozonolysis. Hence, an example of such an alkene is 2,3-dimethyl but-2-ene

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 And 3 Dimethylbut 2 ene

Question 72. Write the formulas and names of the alkenes which on hydrogenation form 2-methylpentane.
Answer:

The carbon skeleton of the probable alkenes is

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Hydrocarbons Probable Alkenes

As there are four different positions of the double bond in the given carbon skeleton, four alkenes are possible which form 2-methylpentane on hydrogenation. The probable alkenes are:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 Methylpentane On Hydrogenation

Question 73. Write two possible methods of preparing 2-methylpropane by Corey-House synthesis. Out of these two methods, which one is better and why?
Answer:

Two possible methods of preparing 2-methylpropane by Corey-House synthesis are as follows-

Hydrocarbons 2 Methylpropane By Corey House Synthesis

In Corey-House synthesis, the third step is an SN2 reaction (sensitive to steric effect). So, this step is highly favourable for methyl or primary halides, and less’ favourable for secondary alkyl halides arid1 does not occur in the case of tertiary alkyl halides. In methods (1) and (2), a secondary halide and methyl halide have been used respectively In ease of the third step. So, method

(1) Is better than the method

(2) for preparing 2-methyl propane by Corey-House synthesis.

Question 74. A or B NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons A And B Geometrical Isomers A and B are the two geometrical isomers. Identify them.
Answer:

The alkene which gives only acetaldehyde on ozonolysis is 2-butene (CH3– CH —CH CH3).

CH3CH=O+O=CHCI ⇒ CH3CH=CHCH3

So, A and B are the two geometrical isomers of 2-butene:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Two Geometrical Isomers

Question 75. Dlazomethane (CH2N2), on decomposition forms singlet methylene (: CH2) which gets attached to different non-equivalent C—H bonds of alkanes to form various alkanes. Name the alkanes formed when pentane (CH3CH2CH2CH2CH3) reacts with singlet methylene. Assuming methylene to be highly reactive and less selective, calculate the probable amounts of the formed alkanes.
Answer:

Three alkanes are formed when pentane reacts with singlet methylene because there are three non-equivalent C—H bonds in pentane molecules. So, the alkanes formed are:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Singlet Methylene Form Of The Alkanes

As methylene is highly reactive and less selective, its insertion occurs randomly. So, the amounts of the formed compounds have calculated the basis of the probability factor and number of equivalent C— H bonds. For example, Percentage of hexane,

(CH3CH2CH2CH2CH2CH3) = \(\frac{6}{12}\) × 100 = 50

Percentage of 2-methyl pentane

CH3—CH – CH3—CH2CH2CH3  =\(\frac{6}{12}\) × 100 = 50

percentage of 3-methyl pentane = \(\frac{2}{12}\) × 100 = 16.7

Question 76. How will you prepare (CH3)2CD14 CH3 from propane (CH3CH2CH3)?
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons How Will You Prepare Form Of Propane

NCERT Class 11 Chemistry Hydrocarbons Long Question and Answer PDF

Question 77. How will you prepare \({ }^{14} \mathrm{CH}_3{ }^{14} \mathrm{CH}_2{ }^{14} \mathrm{CH}_3\) taking \({ }^{14} \mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{I}\) as the only source of carbon?
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Source Of Carbon

Question 78. In the reaction of 2-pentene with HI, the two isomeric iodopentanes are produced in almost equal amounts —why?
Answer:

The two doubly bonded carbon atoms in 2-pentene are bonded to the same number (one) of H-atoms. So, the two isomeric iodopentanes are produced in nearly equal amounts.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 Idopentane And 3 Iodopentane

The two 2° carbocations (CH3CH2CH2CHCH3 and CH3CH2CHCH2CH3 ) obtained on the addition of proton at C-2 or C-3 are almost equally stable. So, the reaction proceeds through the two routes nearly at the same rate and consequently, the two isomeric iodopentanes are formed in nearly equal amounts.

Question 79. From the following two reactions, arrange HC = CH, NH3 and H2O in the increasing order of their acidic character.

  1. HC = CH + NaNH2→ HC = CNa + NH3
  2. HC = CNa + H2O → HC = CH + NaOH

Answer:

In reaction no. , HC ≡ CH exhibits its acidic character and produces NH3 from NaNH2. So HC = CH is more acidic than NH3.

On the other hand, in reaction (2), water exhibits its acidic character and produces HC = CH from HC = CNa. So, H2O is more acidic than HC = CH. Thus, the increasing order of acidic character: NH3 < HC=CH < H2O

Question 80. Unlike acetylene, ethylene dissolves in concentrated sulphuric acid—why?
Answer:

In the first step of the reaction with concentrated H2SO4, ethylene forms an ethyl cation (CH3C+H2) and acetylene forms a vinyl cation (CH2 =+CH) by accepting a H® ion.

Since vinyl cation is less stable than ethyl cation, in the case of acetylene, the first step (rate-determining step) of the reaction does not occur easily. Thus, unlike ethylene, acetylene fails to dissolve in concentrated H2SO4

Question 81. Write the structure of the product expected to be formed when CH2=CH—CH3(C = 14C) is subjected to free radical chlorination.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Chlorination

Question 82. Identify the products obtained when ethylene gas is passed through bromine water in the presence of sodium chloride.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Bromine Water Presence Of Sodium Chloride

Question 83. Which alkenes are formed by dehydrating the following alcohols in the presence of acid? Give the reaction mechanism.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Dehydrating The Following Alcohols

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Alkenes Are Formed On Dehydrating

Question 84. The conjugated dienes are more reactive than alkenes which in turn are more reactive than alkynes towards electrophilic addition reactions —explain.
Answer:

The reactivity of alkenes, alkynes or conjugated dienes towards electrophilic addition reaction depends on the stability of the intermediate carbocation obtained in the rate-determining step by addition of the electrophile (E+).

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Electrophilic Addition Reactions

Out of the three carbocations (la, Ila and IUa), (IlIa) is the most stable because it is stabilised by resonance. Again, out of (a) and (Ila), (IIla) is less stable because the positive charge in it is placed on a more electronegative sp2 -hybfiflis6d carbon atom.

Thus, the stabilities of these carbocations follow the order IIIa> la > Ila. Therefore, the order of activity of these compounds is conjugated diene > alkene > alkyne.

Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons NCERT Solutions Long Questions Class 11

Question 85. Calculate the resonance energy of 1,3-butadiene from the following data

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 1 And 3 Butadiene

Answer:

The heat liberated due to hydrogenation of one double bond = 30 kcal – mol-1

The heat liberated due to hydrogenation of two double bonds = 30 × 2 = 60 kcal – mol-1.

Heat liberated due to hydrogenation of 1,3-butadiene (CH=CH—CH=CH2) = 57 kcal -mol-1.

Therefore, resonance energy of 1,3-butadiene = 60- 57 = 3 kcal – mol-1

Question 86. Dehydration of alcohols to alkene is carried out by treating with a cone. H2SO4 but not with cone. HCl or HNO3. Give reasons.
Answer:

Dehydration of alcohol proceeds via the formation of a carbocation intermediate. If HCl is used as the dehydrating agent then chloride ion (Cl), being a good nucleophile, attacks at carbonium ion carbon (Cl+) thereby producing alkyl chloride as the substitution product together with the alkene as the elimination product.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Dehydration Of Alcohols

If cone. H2SO4 Is used as the reagent the H2SO4 ion derived from H2SO4 does not act as a nucleophile. Instead, the carbocation loses a proton from the β -carbon atom to give alkene (R—CH=CH2) as the elimination product.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Elimination Of Products

If cone. HNO3 is used as the reagent then it being a strong oxidising agent, brings about oxidation of the alcohol first to an aldehyde or a ketone and then to a carboxylic acid.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ketone And Then To A Carboxylic Acid

Question 87. How will you prepare ethylbenzene by using ethyne as the only organic substance and any other inorganic substance of your choice?
Answer:

Ethylbenzene (C6H5C2H5) may be prepared from ethyne (acetylene) through the following steps:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Prepare Ethylbenzene By Using Ethyne

Question 88. Explain why the bromination of benzene requires FeBr3 as a catalyst, while the bromination of anisole (C6H5OCH3) does not require any catalyst.
Answer:

Since the benzene molecule is not so reactive,© for bromination it requires more reactive bromine cation (Br) or the complex Br— Br—FeBr3 as the electrophile. Due to the presence of electron-donating (+R) methoxy (— OCH3) group.

The anisole ring becomes much more reactive towards an electrophilic substitution reaction. When the non-polar bromine molecule comes in contact with the anisole ring, it 6+ 6 — becomes partially polarised (Br— Br)and its positive end (weak electrophile) undergoes easy attack by anisole. Therefore, due to the greater reactivity of anisole, its bromination requires no catalyst.

Question 89. Neither vinyl chloride (CH2=CH—Cl) nor chlorobenzene (C6H5 —Cl) can be used as an alkylating agent in the Friedel-Crafts reaction—why?
Answer:

In vinyl chloride or chlorobenzene, the unshared pair of electrons on the Cl atom is involved in resonance interaction with the σ -electron system and as a result, the C—Cl bond in both cases acquires some double bond character.

The Lewis acid AlCl3 is incapable of breaking such a strong C—Cl bond. Moreover, even if the C— Cl bond breaks, the carbocations produced would be unstable (due to a positive charge on an sp² – hybridised carbon atom).

Hence such a bond is very much reluctant to undergo cleavage. For this reason, vinyl chloride or chlorobenzene cannot be used as an alkylating agent in the Friedel-Crafts reaction.

Question 90. Two methods for the preparation of propylbenzene are given below-

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Propylbenzene Methods Given In Below

Question 91. Which one of the two methods is more effective for the preparation of propylbenzene? Give reason.
Answer:

Method 2 is more effective for the preparation of propylbenzene. This is because, in method 1, the alkylating agent containing a chain of three carbon atoms isomerises to give isopropyl benzene as the principal product.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Isopropylbenzene

Moreover, the alkyl group activates the benzene ring towards further substitution. So, there is a possibility of polyalkylation of benzene. However, although method 2 involves two steps, the desired propylbenzene is obtained as the only product with a higher yield. In the first step of the reaction.

The CH3CH2CO — group is introduced into the ring. Since the acyl group has no possibility of isomerisation, no other isomeric group can enter the ring.

Furthermore, the acyl group being an electron-attracting one deactivates the ring and consequently, polyacylation cannot take place. Hence in the first step, only propiophenone (C6H5COCH2CH3) is produced and in the second step, it is reduced by Clemmensen method to give only propylbenzene.

Question 92. Which ring (A or B) is in each of the following? Compounds will undergo nitration readily and why?

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Propylbenzene

Answer:

  • Ring A is attached to the electron-donating or activating group — :O: COPh, whereas ring B is attached to the electron-attracting or deactivating — COOPh group. So, ring A is more reactive than ring B towards electrophilic substitution reaction. Hence, ring A will undergo nitration readily.
  • Since a deactivating — N02 group is attached to ring A, it is relatively less reactive than ring B towards electrophilic substitution. Consequently, ring B undergoes nitration readily.
  • Ring A is attached to an electron-donating or activating — CH3 group while ring B is linked to an electron-attracting or deactivating — CF3 group. So, ring A is relatively more reactive than ring B towards electrophilic substitution. Hence, ring A undergoes nitration at a faster rate.
  • Ring B undergoes nitration readily. The reason is similar to that given in the case of compound (1).

Question 93. Write the names and structures of the compounds formed during the Friedel-Crafts reaction of benzene with

  1. CH2Cl2
  2. CHCl3 and
  3. CCl4

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Friedel Crafts Recation Of Benzene

Question 94. Show the formation of the electrophile in each case:

  1. Cl3/AlCl3
  2. Br2/Fe
  3. Conc.HNO3 + conc.H2SO4

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Electrophile In Each Case

Question 95. How will you prepare the following compounds from benzene?

  1. PhCH2CH2Ph,
  2. PhCH2CH2CH2Ph and
  3. PhCH2CH2CH2CH2Ph

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Compounds From Benzene

Question 96. An optically active compound A (C10H4) gets oxidised to benzoic acid (C6H5COOH) by alkaline KMnO4 However, compound B, which is an optically inactive isomer of A does not get oxidised by alkaline KMn04. Identify A and B.

Answer:

As A is oxidised to C6H5COOH, A is a substituted benzene which has only one side chain consisting of four carbon atoms. Again, as A is optically active, there must be an unsymmetric carbon atom present in the side chain.

So, the side chain is —CH(CH3)CH2CH3 and A is sec-butylbenzene, C6H5CH(CH3)CH2CH3. B, an isomer of A does not get oxidised by alkaline KMnO4.

Thus, there is no benzylic hydrogen in the compound. So, the side chain is — C(CH3)3. The compound B is tert-butylbenzene, C6H5C(CH3)3

Question 97. Considering the stability of <r -complex, explain why — OCH3 is o-lp- orienting while —NO2 is mega-orienting.
Answer:

Electrophilic substitution reaction in anisole proceeds via the following reaction mechanism:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Electrophilic Substitution Reacyion In Anisole

There is an extraordinarily stable (every atom has its octet fulfilled) resonance structure in both ortho- and para-a -complex, but there is no such resonance structure in the meta-σ- complex. So, ortho- and para-cr -complex is more stable than meta-cr complex. Consequently, electrophilic substitution proceeds easily and rapidly via ortho- and para-a -complex resulting in ortho and para-substituted compounds as major products. Thus, — OCH3 is ortho-/para-orienting group.

Electrophilic substitution reaction in nitrobenzene proceeds via the following reaction mechanism:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Nitrobenzene Proceeds

Both ortho- and para-complexes are extraordinarily unstable resonance structures (due to the presence of a positive charge on two adjacent atoms). However, in meta-σ -complex there is no such resonance structure and so it is more stable than ortho- and para- σ -complex.

Thus, the reaction proceeds rapidly via the meta- σ -complex and the meta- substituted compound is obtained as the major product Thus, — NO is /nefa-orienting group.

Question 98.  Identify (A)-(F) in the following reaction

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Relative Stabilities Of The Two Compounds

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Relative Stabilities Of The Two Compounds Answer

Question 99.

1. What will be the major product when propyne is treated with aqueous H2SO4? Explain the equation.

2. An organic compound (A), C7H8O is insoluble in aqueous NaHCO3 but soluble in NaOH. (A), on treatment with bromine water rapidly forms compound (B), C7H5OBr2. Give structures of (A) & (B). What will be (A) if it does not dissolve in NaOH solution but shows the reaction given above?

Answer:

Propyne does not react with aqueous H2SO4 in the absence of Hg2+ ion. In the presence of an Hg2+ ion, propyne reacts with aqueous H2SO4 to give the unstable compound prop-2-enol (according to Markownikoff’s rule) which tautomerism to give acetone.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Among Benzene And Toluene

The problem is solved by assuming that the compound ‘B’ has the molecular formula C7H6OBr2

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Compound B Molecular Formula

Long Answer Questions on Hydrocarbons Class 11 NCERT

Question 100.  Write the structural formula of the compounds A to F:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Write The Structural Formula OfThe Compound A To F
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Compounds A To F

Question 101. Both Br2(g) and NO2(g) are reddish-brown gaseous substances. How will you chemically distinguish between them?
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Reddish Brown Gaseous

Question 102. Draw the structural formula of the compound from A to F.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Draw Structural Formula Of The Compound From A to F

Question 103. Convert:

  1. 2-propanol → 1-propanol
  2. 2-butene→Ethane

Answer: 

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Convert Reactions

Question 104. Write the IUPAC names of the following compounds:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons IUPAC Names Of The Following Compounds

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Write IUPAC Names Of The Following Compounds Answer

Question 105. For the Riven compounds write structural formulas and IUFPAC names for all possible isomers having the number of double or triple bonds as indicated:

  1. C4H8 (one double bond)
  2. C5H8 (one triple bond)

Answer:

Hydrocarbons Double Bond And Triple Bond

Question 106. Write IUPAC names of the products obtained by the ozonolysis of the following compounds:

  1. Pent-2-ene
  2. 3,4-dimethyIhept-3-ene
  3. 2-ethyl but-1-ene
  4. I-phenyl but-1-ene

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons OZonolysis Of The Following Compounds

Question 107. Explain why the following systems are not aromatic.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Systems Are Not Aromatic

Answer:

1.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Systems Are Not Aromatic 1

There are no p-orbitals on one of the H H CH3H CH3 carbon atoms forming the ring structure of this system and It is not a cyclic conjugated polyene containing (4n + 2)n -electrons. So, the system is not aromatic.

2.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Ring Structure

There are no p-orbitals on one of the carbon atoms forming the ring structure of this system and it is not a cyclic conjugated polyene containing (4n + 2)n -electrons. So, the system is not aromatic.

3.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons CyclooctatetraeneCyclooctatetraene has a non-planar structure and there are 8π -electrons in it. So, cyclooctatetraene is a non-aromatic compound.

Question 108.  How will you convert benzene into

  1. p-nitrobromobenzene
  2. m-nltrochlorobenzene
  3. p-nitrotoluene
  4. Acetophenone

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Convert To Benzene

Hydrocarbons Class 11 Long Question and Answers NCERT

Question 109. In H3C—CH2—C(CH3)2—CH2CH(CH3)2, identify 1°, 2°, and 3° carbon atoms and give the number of H atoms bonded to each one of these.
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Hydrocarbons In H Atoms Bonded

Number of H-atoms attached to 1° carbon atom = 15

Number of H-atoms attached to 2° carbon atom = 4

Number of H-atoms attached to 3° carbon atom = 1

Question 110. Write down the products of ozonolysis of 1,2-dimethylbenzene (o-xylene). How does the result support the Kekule structure for benzene?
Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Kekule Structure

As the products A, B and C cannot be obtained from any one of the two Kekule structures, this confirms that o-xylene is a resonance hybrid of the two Kekule structures 1 and 2.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Kekule Structure Resonance Hybrid

Question 111. Arrange benzene, n-hexane and ethyne in decreasing order of acidic behaviour. Also, give a reason for this behaviour.
Answer:

The hybridisation state of carbon in the compounds benzene, n-hexane and ethyne is as follows—

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons n Hexane And Ethyne

The nucleus. Thus, the correct order of decreasing acidic behaviour is ethyne > benzene > n-hexane.

Question 112. How would you convert the given compounds into benzene?

  1. Ethyne
  2. Ethene
  3. Hexane

Answer:

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Compounds Into Benzene

Question 113. Write structures of all the alkenes which on hydrogenation give 2-methylbutane.
Answer:

The structural formula of 2-methyl butane is—

Hydrocarbons 2 Methylbutane

The structures of different alkenes by putting double bonds at different positions along with satisfying the tetravalency of each carbon atom which gives 2-methyl butane on hydrogenation are as follows-

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2 Methylbutane On Hydrogenation

Question 114. Arrange the following set of compounds in order of their decreasing relative reactivity with an electrophile, E+.

  1. Chlorobenzene, 2,4-dinitrochlorobenzene, p-nitrochlorobenzene
  2. Toluene, p-H3C —C6H4—NO2, P-O2N—C6H4—NO2

Answer:

The electron density of the benzene nucleus increases in the presence of an electron-donating group (activating group). Consequently, electrophiles can easily attack the benzene nucleus. On the other hand, the electron density of the benzene nucleus decreases in the presence of the electron-withdrawing group (deactivating group). This makes electrophilic substitution difficult for the benzene nucleus.

Therefore, the order of the different compounds according to their decreasing relative reactivity with an electrophile E+ is—

Chlorobenzene > p-nitrochlorobenzene > 2,4-dinitrochlorobenzene

Toluene > p-CH3C6H5NO2 > p-O2NC6H4NO2

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Discovery Of Fundamental Particles

The atomic theory of matter was first proposed by Sir John Dalton (an English scientist) in 1808. His theory, called Dalton’s atomic theory was a landmark in the history of chemistry. According to this theory, the atom is the smallest, indivisible, discrete particle of matter, which takes part in chemical reactions.

However, the researches done by eminent scientists like J. J. Thomson, Goldstein, Rutherford, Chadwick, Bohr, and others towards the end of the 19th century and in the beginning of the 20th century have conclusively proved that atoms were no longer the smallest indivisible particle. Rather, atoms are -3 composed of several smaller particles called subatomic particles. At present J. scientists have identified about 35 different subatomic particles, some of L which are stable while the others are unstable. These particles may be divided under three heads which is shown in the adjacent table.

The three subatomic particles namely electrons, protons, and neutrons are the main constituents of an atom and are regarded as the fundamental particles

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Subatomic Particles

Cathode rays: Discovery of electron 

William Crookes, in 1878, studied the conduction of electricity through gases. A discharge tube was filled with a gas at very low pressure (0.01 mm Hg) and the electrodes were connected to a source of high voltage \(\approx 10^4 \mathrm{~V}\).

It was observed that the glass wall behind the anode began to glow with a faint greenish light called fluorescence.

Further investigations revealed that this fluorescence was due to the bombardment of the glass wall by certain invisible rays which were emitted from the cathode surface and moved towards the anode with tremendous speed.

The rays originated from the cathode and were called the cathode ray.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Production Of Cathode Rays In The Discharge Tube

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes Chapter 2 Structure of Atom

Nature of cathode rays: J.J Thomson (in 1897) and others characterized these rays based on different experimental findings.

  1. Cathode rays are emitted perpendicularly from the cathode surface and travel towards the anode.
  2. They cast a sharp shadow on any opaque object placed in their path. So, like ordinary light, cathode rays also travel in straight lines.
  3. When a light paddle wheel (made of mica) is placed in their path, the wheel begins to rotate. This indicates that cathode rays are composed of material particles and possess momentum.
  4. As cathode rays possess momentum, they can penetrate thin foil metals like aluminum.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Deflection Of Carthode Rays In Electric Feild

  1. Cathode rays are deflected by an electric field (towards the positive plate) as well as by a magnetic field, suggesting that cathode rays consist of negatively charged particles.
  2. When these rays strike a metal foil, the foil gets heated indicating that cathode rays produce a heating effect.
  3. Cathode rays ionize the gas through which they pass.
  4. Like ordinary light, cathode rays affect photographic plates. This is called fogging.
  5. Cathode rays produce fluorescence on the glass walls of a tube or a screen coated with zinc sulfide 1 ‘(ZnS) or barium platinocyanide Ba[Pt(CN)6].
  6. Cathode rays produce X-rays when they strike against the surface of hard metals like tungsten, molybdenum, etc.
  7. The characteristics of cathode rays are independent of the material of the cathode nature of the gas used in the discharge tube.
  8. Considering the various properties of cathode rays, J. J. Thomson concluded that cathode rays are made of material particles, cathode rays carry a negative charge.
  9. He named these negatively charged particles as negatron. Later, these particles were named electrons by G. J. Stoney (in 1874).

J. J. Thomson (1897) used discharge tubes fitted with electrodes made of different metals and filled different gases in the tube. Every time he found that the ratio of charge to mass of electrons (e/m) was the same.

e/m of electron = \(\frac{\text { charge of cathode ray particle }}{\text { mass of cathode ray particle }}\)

= \(1.76 \times 10^8 \mathrm{C} \cdot \mathrm{g}^{-1}\)

= \(1.76 \times 10^{11} \mathrm{C} \cdot \mathrm{kg}^{-1}\)

R. A. Millikan (1917) with the help of his oil drop experiment, determined the charge of an electron. Charge ofan electron (e) = -1.602 x 1019 C (or, -4.8 x 101°esu)

No other fundamental particle is known to contain a charge lower than this. This is the minimum measurable quantity of negative charge.

The quantity of electrical charge carried by all negatively charged panicles is an integral multiple of this charge.

Hence, the electronic charge is considered to be die fundamental unit of electricity and is called one unit. The mass of an electron can be calculated from the values of e and e/m.

Mass of an electron = \(\frac{e}{e / m}=\frac{1.602 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{C}}{1.76 \times 10^8 \mathrm{C} \cdot \mathrm{g}^{-1}} \)

= \(9.11 \times 10^{-28} \mathrm{~g}=9.11 \times 10^{-31} \mathrm{~kg}\)

= 0.000548

1 u = \(1.66 \times 10^{-24}\)

Mass of an electron = \(\frac{1}{1837}\) x mass of a hydrogen atom Thus, a hydrogen atom is 1837 times heavier than an electron. The mass of an electron being very small may be considered as negligible for all practical involving chemical calculations.

Therefore, an electron may be defined as a subatomic particle having a unit negative charge (1.602 × 10-9C) & negligible mass (9.11 × 10-28g).

The radius of an electron = 2.8 × 10-13cm

Electrons are universal constituents of matter:

The elm ratio of negatively charged particles constituting the cathode rays was found to be the same irrespective of the nature of the cathode and the nature of the gas used in the discharge tube, thereby showing that the electrons are the basic constituents of all atoms.

Other experiments showing the existence of electrons:

The following experiments show that the same charge-to-mass ratio exists for the electrons emitted—

  1. Spontaneously from radioactive substances in the form of X-rays.
  2. when ultraviolet rays are incident on the surface of active metals (Example: Na, K, etc.).
  3. When certain metal filaments are heated to a very high temperature.
  4. When any form of matter is exposed to X-rays.

Origin of cathode rays in discharge tube:

  1. On applying high voltage, electrons are first emitted from the surface of the cathode which travel in straight lines with high speed.
  2. During their passage through the gas inside the tube, more electrons are ejected due to the bombardment of the gas molecules by the high-speed electrons.
  3. On increasing the voltage in the discharge tube, the speed of the electrons increases, and the electron density in the cathode ray increases.

Applications of cathode ray tube:

In picture tubes of televisions:

The picture tube of a television is a cathode ray tube. Due to fluorescence, a picture is formed on the television screen when an electron beam strikes the screen coated with a fluorescent or phosphorescent material.

In fluorescent tubes:

These types of tubes are filled with gases like argon, nitrogen, etc. along with a small amount of mercury vapor under very low pressure.

  • They are cathode ray tubes with their inner walls coated with a suitable fluorescent material.
  • On passing electric current, electric discharge occurs inside the tube.
  • As a result, electrons from the cathode are transferred to the higher energy state due to collision with the atoms and molecules of the gases or the mercury vapor.
  • On their return to the ground state photons are emitted in the form of UV rays. These rays hit the inner walls of the tube and produce visible light.

Anode rays: Discovery of proton

  • Since negatively charged electrons are the essential constituents of all atoms and the atom as a whole is electrically neutral, it was thought that some positively charged particles must also be present in the atom.
  • Goldstein, in 1886, performed the discharge tube experiment using a perforated cathode. On passing electric discharge at low pressure, he observed that some luminous rays were emitted from the side of the anode which passed through the holes in the cathode and produced fluorescence on the glass wall coated with zinc sulfide.
  • These rays were originally called canal rays as they passed through the holes in the cathode.
  • As they travel from the side of the anode towards the cathode, these rays are also called anode rays.
  • These were named positive rays (since they were found to carry a positive charge) by J. J. Thomson (1907).

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Production Of Positive Rays

Characteristics of anode rays:

  • Anode rays travel in straight lines but their speed is much less than that ofthe cathode rays.
  • They consist of material particles.
  • They are positively charged as indicated by the direction of their deflection in the electric and magnetic fields.
  • From the extent of deflection in the electric field, it was proved that the particles constituting the anode rays arc are much heavier than electrons.
  • The E/M value of the particles in the anode rays is much smaller than that of the cathode ray particles.
  • Furthermore, the e/m value of the particles depends on the nature ofthe gas taken in the discharge tube.
  • The E/M value of anode ray particles is maximum when hydrogen gas (the lightest element) is used in the discharge tube.
  • The mass of the particle with this maximum e/m value is almost the same as that of an H-atom and its charge is equal to that of an electron but opposite in sign.
  • It may therefore be concluded that such anode ray particles with maximum e/m value are none other than H-atoms devoid of electrons. These were called protons by Rutherford (1911).

Anode rays produced using H2 gas in the discharge tube consist of positively charged particles:

H+ [highest e/m ], D+, H+, HD+, and D+ [lowest e/m].

Origin of anode rays:

  • On applying high voltage between the electrodes in the discharge tube, cathode ray particles (i.e., electrons) move at a high speed toward the anode.
  • In the course of their motion, they collide with the gas molecules or atoms and knock out one or more electrons to produce positively charged ions, thereby constituting anode rays.

⇒ \(\text { A (neutral gaseous atom) } \stackrel{\text { ionised }}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{A}^{+}+e\)

  • Thus, the anode rays are not emitted from the anode but produced from the gaseous substance present in the discharge tube.
  • So it is clear that the e/m ratio of the ray particles depends on the gaseous substance in the discharge tube. For example, the use of hydrogen to the formation of H+ ions which constitute the orhunode rays.

⇒ \(\mathbf{H} \text { (atom) }-\boldsymbol{e} \stackrel{+}{\longrightarrow} \mathbf{H}^{+} \text {(proton) }\)

E/m of proton = +9.58× 104C.g-1

Charge of proton = + 1.602×10-19 C (Or, +4.8 × 10-10esu)

Mass of proton (m) = \(\frac{\text { charge of a proton }}{c / m \text { of a proton }}\)

= \(\frac{1.602 \times 10^{-19}}{9.58 \times 10^4}\)

= \(1.6725 \times 10^{-24} \mathrm{~g}\)

This mass is nearly the same as that of an H-atom. A proton Is 1836 times heavier than an electron. So, a proton carries 1 unit of +ve charge and it is 1 836 times heavier than an electron.

Radius of a proton \(\approx 1.2 \times 10^{-13} \mathrm{~cm}\)

Proton is a fundamental constituent of all atoms:

  • Taking different gases in the discharge tube experiment, it was shown that the mass of anode ray particles is minimal when hydrogen is used as the gaseous substance.
  • Masses of other anode ray particles produced in different experiments using different gases are always integral multiples of the mass of a proton.
  • Thus a proton, like an electron, is also a fundamental constituent of all atoms.
  • Apart from the electrical discharge in gases under low pressure, protons are also emitted in certain nuclear reactions

Example: The bombardment of aluminum metal with a particle

⇒ \(\left({ }_2^4 \mathrm{He}\right)\) or bombardment of nitrogen gas with neutron \(\left({ }_0^1 n\right)\)

⇒ \({ }_{13}^{27} \mathrm{Al}+{ }_2^4 \mathrm{He} \rightarrow{ }_{14}^{30} \mathrm{Si}+{ }_1^1 \mathrm{H} ; \quad{ }_7^{14} \mathrm{~N}+{ }_0^1 n \rightarrow{ }_6^{14} \mathrm{C}+{ }_1^1 \mathrm{H}\)

Differences Between Cathode And Anode Rays

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Difference Between Cathode And Anode Rays

Radioactivity:

After the discovery of electrons and protons, it is well established that the atoms are divisible into sub-atomic particles.

  • This was further supported by the phenomenon of radioactivity, discovered by Becquerel in 1896.
  • The phenomenon of spontaneous emission of active radiations by certain elements like uranium, radium, etc.
  • Is called radioactivity, and the elements emitting such radiation are called radioactive elements.

On placing a sample of uranium mineral in a cavity made in a block of lead and allowing the emitted rays to pass through strong electric or magnetic fields, the radiation is resolved in three directions.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Spiltting Of Radioactive Rays In An Electric Field

  • The rays which are deflected slightly towards the negative plate and hence carry + ve charge are called α rays. The particles present in a -rays are called particles, α- rays are called α – particles, and each particle carries 2 units +ve charge and has a mass of 4u. So these are helium atoms with two units +ve charge and are represented as 24He.
  • The rays that are deflected towards the positive plate to a larger extent must carry a -ve charge. These are called α-rays. The particles present in β -rays are called β -P-particles. These particles have the same charge and mass as that of the electrons and are represented as -10e.
  • The rays that remain undeflected are called γ-rays. These are purely electromagnetic radiations.

Discovery Of Neutron

  • According to the atomic mass scale, a proton has a mass of one unit while an electron has a negligible mass.
  • If an atom comprises only electrons and protons then the mass of an atom will be almost equal to the sum of the masses of the protons present in it.
  • In practice, it is found that except for ordinary hydrogen, all other atoms have masses much greater than the sum of the masses of the protons contained by diem.
  • This led the scientists to search for a neutral particle having considerable mass. Rutherford, in 1920, predicted the presence of a fundamental particle within an atom, having no charge but one unit mass. This particle was termed a neutron.
  • James Chadwick (a student of Rutherford), in 1932, performed some scattering experiments in which he bombarded beryllium metal with fast-moving a -particles emitted from radioactive polonium.
  • He observed that new types of particles were emitted which was not deflected by the electric or magnetic field. i.e., those were neutral.
  • The mass of such a particle was found to be nearly equal to that of a proton or a hydrogen atom.
  • These neutral particles having a unit mass must be the same particle i.e., neutron as predicted by Rutherford. Being neutral, neutrons are more penetrating than electrons or protons.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Electrons Or Protons

Mass of neutron = 1.675 × 10-24 g

⇒ \(\approx\)mass of a proton

= 1837 x mass ofan electron

e/m of neutron = [because neutron has no charge]

Atoms of all elements except hydrogen constitute three fundamental particles:

  1. Electron,
  2. Proton and
  3. Neutron.

In each atom, the number of protons is equal to the number of electrons because an atom as a whole is electrically neutral. Ordinary hydrogen contains no neutron, it only contains one proton and one electron.

Subatomic particles other than an electron, proton, and neutron, are also known

Example: Positron \(\left({ }_{+1}^0 e\right),\); 71 -meson, neutrino (v), photon, etc.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Difference Between Cathode And Anode Rays Characteristics Of Electron, Proton And Other Subatomic Particles

Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 2 Structure of Atom NCERT Notes

Structure Of Atom Numerical Examples

Question 1. An atom of an element contains 2 electrons In the first shell (n – 1 ), 8 electrons in the second shell (n = 2), and 5 electrons in the third shell (n = 3).

There are 16 neutrons in the nucleus of the atom. From these data, find—

  1. The atomic no. of the element,
  2. the no. of s and -electrons in the atom,
  3. Mass no. of the element.

Answer:

1. Atomic number = number of protons = number of electrons =2+8 + 5

= 15

2. \(\begin{array}{|c|c|c|c|}
\hline \text { Shell No. } & \begin{array}{c}
\text { Total no. of } \\
\text { electrons }
\end{array} & \begin{array}{c}
\text { No. of } \\
s \text {-electrons }
\end{array} & \begin{array}{c}
\text { No. of } \\
p \text {-electrons }
\end{array} \\
\hline 1 & 2 & 2 & 0 \\
\hline 2 & 8 & 2 & (8-2)=6 \\
\hline 3 & 5 & 2 & (5-2)=3 \\
\hline
\end{array}\)

∴ Total number of s- electron – 2 + 2+2 =6

Total number of p -electron 6 + 3 =9

3. The mass number of protons + number of neutrons = 15+16

= 31.

Question 2. Determine the number of protons present In 5.6 I16. of n sample of oxygen gas at STP, containing \({ }^{16} 0\) isotope only.
Answer:

The number of oxygen molecules present in 22.4 L of the gas = 6.022 × 1023.

∴ 5.6 L of oxygen at STP contains = \(\frac{5.6 \times 6.022 \times 10^{23}}{22.4}\)

= 1.50055  × 1023 Molecules

Number of O-atoms in the given volume of the gas

⇒ \(2 \times 1.50055 \times 10^{23}=3.011 \times 10^{23}\)

since oxygen is diatomic]

Now, each 16O atom contains 8 protons.

∴ Number of protons in 3.011 × 1023 atoms of oxygen

= 8 × 3.01 1 × 1023

= 2.4088 × 1024

Question 3. Find the number of protons required to fill u sphere of 10cm3 volume. What Is the muss of those number of protons?
Answer:

The radius of a proton = 1.2 × 1013 cm (approx.)

∴ The approximate volume of a proton \(=\frac{4}{3} \pi r^3\)

⇒ \(\frac{4}{3} \times 3.14 \times\left(1.2 \times 10^{-13}\right)^3 \mathrm{~cm}^3=7.235 \times 10^{-39} \mathrm{~cm}^3\)

∴ The number of protons which can be accommodated in the sphere of capacity 10 cm3

⇒ \(\frac{10}{7.235 \times 10^{-39}}=1.382 \times 10^{39}\)

∴ The mass of that number of protons

1.382 × 1039 × 1.672 ×10-24 g

= 2.311 × 1015g

= 2.311 × 1012 kg

Question 4. Determine the number of neutrons and their mass, present in 7 mg of \({ }^{14}{ }_6^{14} \mathrm{C}\) Assume that the mass of I neutron = muss of 1 H-atom.
Answer:

No. of neutrons present In a \({ }_6^{14} \mathrm{C} \text {-atom }\) atom = (14-6)= 8

Number of atoms in 1 gram morn or 14 g of carbon-containing only \({ }_6^{14} \mathrm{C}\) isotope 6.022 x 1023

∴ In 7 mg or 0.007 g of carbon, the number of atoms \(=\frac{6.022 \times 10^{23} \times 0.007}{14}\)

∴ In 7 mg of carbon, the number of neutrons

∴ \(=\frac{6.022 \times 10^{23} \times 0.007 \times 8}{14}=24.088 \times 10^{20}\)

Again, mass of 6.022 × 1023 atoms of hydrogen = 1.008 g

∴ Mass of 1 atom of hydrogen \(=\frac{1.008}{6.022 \times 10^{23}} \mathrm{~g}\)

= mass of 1 neutron [according to the given condition]

∴ Mass of 24.088 × 1020 neutrons

⇒ \(\frac{1.008 \times 24.088 \times 10^{20}}{6.022 \times 10^{23}}=4.032 \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{~g}\)

Question 5. How many different types of HCl molecule can be produced from two natural isotopes of hydrogen 1H = 99% and 2H = 1%) and two natural isotopes of chlorine (3CI = 76% and 37CI = 24%). Arrange the molecules obtained in the decreasing order of their availability.
Answer:

Four different types of HCl molecules can be produced.

They are

⇒ \({ }^1 \mathrm{H}^{35} \mathrm{Cl},{ }^1 \mathrm{H}^{37} \mathrm{Cl},{ }^2 \mathrm{H}^{35} \mathrm{Cl},{ }^2 \mathrm{H}^{37} \mathrm{Cl} \text {. }\)

Since the availability of XH and 35C1 are comparatively 2H and 37C1, the decreasing order of their availability

⇒ \({ }^1 \mathrm{H}^{35} \mathrm{Cl}>{ }^1 \mathrm{H}^{37} \mathrm{Cl}>{ }^2 \mathrm{H}^{35} \mathrm{Cl}>{ }^2 \mathrm{H}^{37} \mathrm{Cl}\)

Question 6. A sample of oxygen contains the isotope, 180. How many neutrons are present in 11.2L of the gas at STP?
Answer:

Atomic Number of oxygen

= 8 Number of neutrons in a 180 isotope

= 18-8

= 10

∴ Number of atoms in 22.4 L of 18O isotope at STP

= 2 × 6.022 × 1023

∴ Number of neutrons in 22.4L of 180 isotopes at STP

= 10 × 2 × 6.022 ×1023 [since oxygen molecule is diatomic]

∴ Number of neutrons in 11.2Lof 180 isotopes at STP

=  \(\frac{10 \times 2 \times 6.022 \times 10^{23} \times 11.2}{22.4}\)

= \(6.022 \times 10^{24}\)

Question 7. A sample contains two isotopes, 160 and 180. How many protons are present in 11.2L of the sample at STP? What would be the difference in the no. of protons, if the sample contains only one isotope?
Answer:

Each of the atoms of 160 and 180 contains 8 protons (atomic number of oxygen = 8 ) Total number of atoms is 22.41. oxygen ( 160 and 180 ) at SIT = 6.022 × 1023×2

[since oxygen molecule is diatomic]

Number of protons in 22.4L oxygen sample at STP

= \(\frac{8 \times 2 \times 6.022 \times 10^{23} \times 11.2}{22.4}\)

∴ Number of protons in 11.2 L oxygen sample at STP

= \(4.8176 \times 10^{24}\)

If the sample contains only one isotope, then there will be no difference in the number of protons because both 16O and 180 isotopes contain 8 protons in their atoms.

Electromagnetic Radiation: Origin Of Atomic Spectra

We have already seen that Rutherford’s atomic model failed to explain the atomic spectra and stability of an atom.

  • In order to investigate the reasons behind the failure of the Rutherford model, scientists felt the need to explain the nature and origin of atomic spectra.
  • Atomic spectra result from the electromagnetic radiations emitted by the excited atoms.
  • These electromagnetic radiations can pass through a vacuum also. According to Newton and other physicists, light is nothing but a stream of very small particles. The phenomena of reflection, refraction, etc.
  • Can be successfully explained using Newton’s theory but those like dispersion, interference, etc. cannot. Thus, the particle nature of light was replaced by the wave nature of light.

Wave nature of electromagnetic radiation: Maxwell’s theory

James Maxwell (1865) studied the nature of light and concluded that light is transmitted in the form of electromagnetic waves, which are associated with oscillating electric and magnetic fields.

  • The oscillating electric and magnetic fields are perpendicular to each other and are both perpendicular to the direction of propagation ofthe wave.
  • The absorption or emission of radiation by a body occurs continuously.
  • The radiations possessing wave character, travel with the velocity of light (3 x 108m-s_1 in vacuum).
  • The color of the radiation depends on its wavelength.
  • Electromagnetic waves, unlike sound waves or water waves, do not need a material medium for propagation, Electromagnetic waves can travel through a vacuum.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Electric And Magnetic Fields Are Perpendicular To Each Other And To The Direction Of Propagation

Some quantities related to electromagnetic radiation

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Some Quantities Related Related To Electrmagnentic Radition

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom The Spectrum Of Electromagnetic Radiation and The Visible Spectrum

Electromagnetic spectrum:

Different types of electromagnetic radiation differ only in their frequencies and hence in their wavelengths.

The order of increasing wavelengths is:

Cosmic rays <γ -rays < X-rays < UV rays (150-3800Å) < visible light (3800-7600Å) < IR-rays (7600-6 × 106Å) < Microwaves < Radio waves.

  • The complete spectrum obtained by arranging these electromagnetic radiations in order of their increasing wavelengths or decreasing frequencies is called electromagnetic spectrum.
  • Various types of electromagnetic radiation have different energies and are being used for different applications.

Some applications of electromagnetic waves are listed below.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Limitations Of Electromagnetic Wave Theory

Limitations of electromagnetic wave theory:

This theory successfully explains the properties of light such as interference and diffraction.

However, it failed to explain the phenomena such as

  1. Black body radiation
  2. Photoelectric effect line spectra of atoms
  3. Variation of heat capacity of solids as a function of temperature.

Black body radiation:

An ideal body, which emits and absorbs radiations of all frequencies is called a black body and the radiation emitted by such a body is called black body radiation.

  • When a substance having a high melting point is heated, viz an iron bar, it first turns red, then yellow, and then glows with a white light and finally with a blue light.
  • According to electromagnetic wave theory, since the emission and absorption of energy occur continuously, the energy of an electromagnetic wave is supposed to be proportional to its intensity and independent of its frequency or wavelength.
  • So according to wave theory, a body should emit radiation ofthe same colour although its intensity may vary as the heating is continued.
  • We have already seen that, on applying heat, the color of a solid changes with the temperature rise.
  • The color change indicates that the frequency of radiation emitted increases with the rise in temperature (since red light indicates low frequency and blue light indicates high).
  • Hence, electromagnetic wave theory can’t explain black body radiation.

The variation of intensity with wavelength of radiation emitted by a black body at two different temperatures ( T1 and T2 ).

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Grsph Of Intensity Vs wavelenght For Black Radiation

The intensity of the radiation emitted depends only on temperature.

At a given temperature, the intensity of radiation emitted increases with a decrease in wavelength reaches a maximum value at a certain wavelength, and then starts decreasing with a further decrease in wavelength. (Observe the variation in the plot from right to left).

Structure of Atom Class 11 Notes

Photoelectric effect:

The phenomenon of ejection of electrons from the surface of a metal when the light of a suitable wavelength falls on it, is called the photoelectric effect and the ejected electrons are called photoelectrons.

  • The apparatus used for studying the photoelectric effect. In the figure, Tis an evacuated glass tube fitted with two quartz windows.
  • Two metal plates, A and B, are fitted at two ends of the tube. The plate A is photosensitive and acts as the cathode.
  • The plate B is the electron detector and acts as the anode. The plate electrodes are connected to a battery via a milliammeter.
  • When the light of a suitable wavelength strikes plate A, photoelectrons are ejected from it The electrons are attracted by detector B and so they move toward it
  • These electrons are responsible for the flow of current through the external circuit which can be measured using the milliamm.
  • By measuring the strength of the current flowing through the circuit, it is possible to determine the kinetic energy ofthe electrons.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Photoelectric Effect

The following are a few important observations about the Velocity 3 x 108 photoelectric effect: 

  • For any given metal, there exists a minimum frequency called threshold frequency (VG).
  • At frequencies below the threshold frequency, no electrons are emitted, no matter how large the intensity of the incident light or how long the irradiation occurs.
  • The number of photoelectrons emitted per second is proportional to the intensity ofthe incident light.
  • The kinetic energy of the photoelectrons is direct radiation of a frequency of 97.8 MHz. proportional to the frequency of the incident radiation.
  • With an increase in the frequency of light, the kinetic energy of the electrons increases.
  • The kinetic energy ofthe photoelectrons are independent of the intensity ofthe incident radiation.

The observations cannot be explained based on electromagnetic wave theory. For instance:

  • According to this theory, the absorption or emission of radiation occurs continuously. Hence, the energy of light is expected to depend on the intensity of the incident light.
  • Thus, light of any frequency can be made to have sufficient energy to cause the emission of electrons, merely by increasing its intensity. However, this is not true in practice.
  • According to this theory, the energy of the ejected electrons should be proportional to the intensity of the incident light, which is not the case in reality.

Numerical examples

Question 1. Yellow light emitted from a sodium lamp has a wavelength of 580 nm. Calculate the frequency and wave number of yellow light.

Answer:

⇒ \(\lambda=580 \mathrm{~nm}=580 \times 10^{-7} \mathrm{~cm}\)

Since 1nm = 10-7 cm

⇒ \(v=\frac{c}{\lambda}=\frac{3 \times 10^{10}}{580 \times 10^{-7}}=5.17 \times 10^{14} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}\)

⇒ \(\vec{v}=\frac{1}{\lambda}=\frac{1}{580 \times 10^{-7}}=17241.37 \mathrm{~cm}^{-1}\)

Question 2. A radio station broadcasts at a frequency of 100 MHz. How long would it take to reach a receiving system at a distance of 300 km? Calculate the wavelength and wave number of these radiations.
Answer:

Required time \(=\frac{\text { Distance }}{\text { Velocity }}=\frac{300 \times 100}{3 \times 10^8}=3 \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{~s}\)

Since the Velocity of any electromagnetic radiation = 3 ×108m.s-1

Wavelength of that radiation \(\lambda=\frac{c}{v}=\frac{3 \times 10^{\circ}}{100 \times 10^6}=3 \mathrm{~m}\)

Since 100MHz =1006 Hz]

Wave number (v) = 1/λ = 1/3

= 0.33m-1

Question 3. Calculate the wavelength of an electromagnetic radiation of frequency of 97.8 MHz.
Answer:

Wavelength of radiation \(\lambda=\frac{c}{v}=\frac{3 \times 10^8 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}}{97.8 \times 10^6 \mathrm{~s}^{-1}}\)

= 3.06 m

Question 4. How long would it take a radio wave of frequency, 6.2× 108s-1 to travel from Mars to Earth, the observation distance being 8.1 × 107km?
Answer:

The velocity of any electromagnetic radiation (c) 3 × 108m

Required time \(\frac{\text { Distance }}{\text { Velocity }}\)

= =\(\frac{8.1 \times 10^7 \times 10^3}{3 \times 10^8}\)

= 270s

= 4min 30s

Particle nature of electromagnetic radiation: Planck’s quantum theory

The electromagnetic wave theory could successfully explain the various phenomena of light such as interference, diffraction, polarisation, etc.

  • However, it failed to explain the various phenomena involving energy transfer, namely black body radiation, photoelectric effect, etc.
  • The failure of the classical electromagnetic theory of radiation led Max Planck (1900) to propose a new theory known as ‘Planck’s quantum theory’.
  • Later this theory was extended by Einstein (1905). The main points of this theory are— M Radiant energy is emitted or absorbed in the form of small, discrete packets of energy called ‘quanta’ (singular quantum). In the case of light, the quantum of energy is often called ‘photon’.
  • The energy of each quantum of radiation does not have a fixed value. It depends on the frequency of the emitted or absorbed radiation.
  • The energy possessed by each quantum of radiation is directly proportional to its frequency, i.e.,

E ∝ v or E = hv [where E = energy of each quantum or photon, v = frequency of the radiation, h = Planck’s constant (6.626 ×10-27erg-s or 6.626 × 10-34J-s )].

The total amount of energy emitted or absorbed by a body must be an integral multiple of a quantum, i.e., E = nhv [where n = number of photons, absorbed or emitted by a body]. This means the amount of energy emitted or absorbed by a body can be—hv, 2hv, 3hv, etc. but never 0.5 hv or 1.4 hv.

The energy possessed by one photon is called one quantum.

The energy possessed by one-mole photons is called one Einstein.

1 einstein = NO (or 6.022 × 1023 ) quanta.

∴ 1 einstein energy (J5) = N0hv

Explanation of black body radiation based on quantum theory:

When a solid is heated, the atoms are set into oscillations emitting radiations of frequency v.

As heating is continued the atoms absorb more energy and emit radiations of higher frequency. Since the frequency of red light is minimal, an iron rod on heating first turns red and then yellow (higher frequency than red) and further turns into white and finally blue.

Explanation of the photoelectric effect based on quantum theory:

Einstein (1905) explained different aspects of the photoelectric effect using Planck’s quantum theory, as follows

  • When a light of certain frequency strikes a metal surface, photons ofthe light collide with the electrons ofthe metal. Each photon thus transfers its entire energy (hv) to each of the colliding electrons.
  • Photoelectrons are emitted only if the energy of the photon is sufficient to overcome the force of attraction between the electron and the nucleus.
  • In other words, electrons are emitted from the surface of metals, when irradiated with photons of a certain minimum frequency known as threshold frequency (hv0).
  • The minimum energy of a photon that causes photoelectric emission is known as the photoelectric work function (hv0).

If the frequency of the incident radiation (v) is greater than the threshold frequency (v0), the excess energy of the protons Is transferred to the ejected electrons ns kinetic energy;

⇒  \(\frac{1}{2} mv-W_0\).

Hence, the kinetic energy of the ejected electrons

  • Increases with an Increase In the frequency of the Incident light.
  • Keeping the frequency constant, If the Intensity of the incident light Is
  • Increased, the number of photons striking the metal surface increases,
  • This In turn Increases the number of electrons of the metal colliding with the photons, which In turn increases the strength of the photoelectric current.
  • The above observations are By experimental results, A plot of the kinetic energy of emitted photoelectrons against the frequency of the absorbed photons gives a straight line with slope, h.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Plot Of Kinetic Energy Of PhotoElectrons Against Frequency Of Photon Intensity Of Incident Radiation

Keeping the frequency constant, a plot of the kinetic energy of the entitled photoelectrons against the intensity of incident radiation gives n straight line parallel to the x-axis.

Dual nature of electromagnetic radiation:

Prom the above discussion It Is clear that the properties of radiation like Interference or diffraction can be explained if the light is considered to have a wave nature whereas, other properties of light such as black body radiation, photoelectric effect, etc.

Can be explained, if the light is considered to have a particle nature. Thus, it is concluded that light behaves both as a wave and also as a stream of particles. Therefore light is said to have a dual nature.

Numerical Examples

Question 1. A Ray of habit or frequency SOA is incident on a metal surface and thus, absorbs 10-7J of Calculate the number of photons Incident on the mental surface
Answer:

Let the number of photons incident on the metal surface = n

∴ \(n h v=10^{-7} \text { or, } \frac{n h c}{\lambda}=10^{-7}\)

Or, \(\frac{n \times 6.626 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}{5000 \times 10^{-10}}=10^{-7}\)

Or, \(n=\frac{10^{-7} \times 5000 \times 10^{-10}}{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}=2.51 \times 10^{11}\)

Question 2. The threshold frequency, v0 for a metal is 7.0× 104s-1. Calculate the kinetic energy of an electron emitted, when radiation of frequency, v = 1.2 × 1015s-1, strikes this metal.
Answer:

Kinetic energy of the photoelectrorts \(\left(\frac{1}{2} m v^2\right)=h\left(v-v_0\right)\)

= \(\left(6.626 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{~J} \cdot \mathrm{s}\right)\left(1.2 \times 10^{15} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}-7.0 \times 10^{14} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}\right)\)

= \(3.31 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}\)

Question 3. If a light with frequency 2.0 × 1016Hz emitted photo o electrons with double the kinetic energy as emitted by the light of frequency 1.25 × 1016 Hz from the same metal surface, calculate the threshold frequency of the metal
Answer:

Kinetic energy of photoelectrons \(\left(\frac{1}{2} m v^2\right)=h\left(v-v_0\right)\)

Given, h(2.0 × 1016-v0) = h(1.25 × 1016-v0) ×2

or, v0 = (2.5- 2.0) × 1016 =0.5 ×1016

= 5 × l015Hz

Question 4. When a radiation of frequency 7.5×1014 Hz strikes a metal surface, the maximum kinetic attained by the emitted electrons is 1.6 × 10-19J. Calculate the threshold frequency of the metal.
Answer:

Kinetic energy ofemitted electrons \(\left(\frac{1}{2} m v^2\right)=h\left(v-v_0\right)\)

Given, 1.6 × 10-19 = h(v-v0)

Or, \(\frac{1.6 \times 10^{-19}}{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}=7.5 \times 10^{14}-v_0\)

or, v0 = 7.5 × 1014 –  2.41 × 1014

= 5.09 ×1014 Hz

Question 5. Calculate the energy of each quantum of electromagnetic radiation having a wavelength of 6000 Å. [h = 6.624 × 10-27erg.s]
Answer:

Energy of each quantum, \(E=h v=\frac{h c}{\lambda}\)

∴ \(E=6.624 \times 10^{-27} \times \frac{3 \times 10^{10}}{6000 \times 10^{-8}}=3.312 \times 10^{-12} \mathrm{erg}\)

[c = 3 × 10cm.s-1

λ = 6000Å

λ = 6000 × 10-8cm ]

NCERT Solutions Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 2 Structure of Atom

Question 6. Calculate the energy of 1 mol of photons of an electromagnetic radiation of frequency 2.6 × 1023. [h = 6.026 × 10-34j.s
Answer:

The energy of l mol photons = N0hv

= 0.022 × 1023 × 6.626 × 10-34 × 2.5 × 10H

= 99.75 kj.mol-`1

Question 7. How many photons of light with wavelength 400 CBM provide 1 energy? = 6.626 × 10-34J.s
Answer:

Energy of 1 photon \(=h v=\frac{h c}{\lambda}\)

⇒ \(=\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}{400 \times 10^{-9}} \mathrm{~J}\)

[since 1nm= 10-9m]

∴ No. of photons required to produce 1.0J energy

= \(\frac{1.0}{\left(6.626 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8\right) /\left(400 \times 10^{-9}\right)} \)

= \(\frac{400 \times 10^{-9}}{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}=2.012 \times 10^{18}\).

Question 8. Find the wave number and energy of each photon present in yellow light having wavelength 580nm. (c = 3 ×108 m.s-1 and h = 6.627 × 10-34J.s]
Answer:

Wave number \((\bar{v})=\frac{1}{\lambda}=\frac{1}{580 \times 10^{-9}} \mathrm{~m}^{-1}\)

= 1.724 ×10-16 m-1

∴  1nm = 10-9m

Energy of each photon {E) = \(h v=h \times \frac{c}{\lambda}\)

⇒ \(\left(6.627 \times 10^{-34}\right) \times \frac{3 \times 10^8}{580 \times 10^{-9}}=3.428 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}\)

Question 9. Calculate the frequency of light emitted when an electron drops from a higher to lower energy level of an atom and the difference between the two energy levels is 35.64 x 10-13erg.[h = 6.624 × 10-27erg-s]
Answer:

E1 and E2 are the two energy levels, then the difference between their energies is given by, E2-E1 = hv or, ΔE = hv

h = Planck’s constant and

v = Frequency of light emitted

∴ \(v=\frac{\Delta E}{h}=\frac{35.64 \times 10^{-13} \mathrm{erg}}{6.624 \times 10^{-13} \mathrm{erg} \cdot \mathrm{s}}=5.3804 \times 10^{14} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}\)

Question 10. An 80 W bulb emits a monochromatic light of wavelength 480nm. Calculate the number of photons emitted per second by the bulb.
Answer:

Power of the bulb =80 W = 80.s-1

Energy of a photon \(=h v=\frac{h c}{\lambda}\)

= \(\frac{\left(6.626 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{~J} \cdot \mathrm{s}\right)\left(3 \times 10^8 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\right)}{480 \times 10^{-9} \mathrm{~m}}\)

= \(4.14 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}\)

Number of emitted photons per second =  \(\frac{80 \mathrm{~J} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}}{4.14 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}}\)

= \(1.932 \times 10^{20} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}\)

Question 11. Calculate the wavelength of a photon (in nm) having energy of 1 eV.
Answer:

Energy of 1 photon, E = 1 eV = \(1.609 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}\)

E = hv = \(=h \frac{c}{\lambda}\)

Or, λ = \(\frac{h c}{E}=\frac{\left(6.626 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{~J} \cdot \mathrm{s}\right) \times\left(3 \times 10^8 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\right)}{1.609 \times 10^{-19}}\)

= \(12.35 \times 10^{-7} \mathrm{~m}\)

= \(\frac{12.35 \times 10^{-7}}{10^{-9}}\)

Question 12. The iodine molecule absorbs radiation of wavelength 450nm to dissociate into iodine atoms. If each molecule of iodine absorbs 1 quantum of radiation, determine the kinetic energy of the iodine atom. (Bond energy of I2 = 240kJ.mol-1 )
Answer:

The energy required for the dissociation of 1 mol of iodine molecules = Bond energy of I2 molecule = 240kJ

∴ The energy required for the dissociation of a single iodine molecule

= \(\frac{240 \times 10^3}{6.022 \times 10^{23}} \mathrm{~J}\)

= \(3.985 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}\)

Energy absorbed by each iodine molecule \(=h v=\frac{h c}{\lambda}\)

⇒ \(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}{450 \times 10^{-9}} \mathrm{~J}=4.417 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}\)

∴ The surplus energy after the dissociation of each molecule of iodine =(4.417-3.985) × 10-19J =4.32 × 10-20J

This surplus energy imparts kinetic energy to each iodine molecule.

The surplus energy that imparts kinetic energy to each iodine atom

= \(\frac{4.32 \times 10^{-20}}{2} \mathrm{~J}\)

= \(2.16 \times 10^{-20} \mathrm{~J}\)

∴ The kinetic energy of each iodine atom = 2.16 × 10-20J.

Question 13. Calculate the energy associated with 1 mol of photon corresponding to electromagnetic radiation having a frequency of 5 × 10-14Hz.
Answer:

Energy associated with 1 mol of a photon is given by, E=Nhv [AT = Avogadro number, h = Planck’s constant, v = frequency of radiation]

= \(6.022 \times 10^{23} \times\left(6.626 \times 10^{-34}\right) \times\left(5 \times 10^{14}\right) \mathrm{J}\)

= \(199.51 \times 10^3\) J

= 199.51 kJ

Emission And Absorption Spectra

When light or any other electromagnetic radiation is made to pass through a spectroscope, the light separates into various components of different wavelengths, producing various colored bands.

The set of colored bands formed is called a spectrum. Spectra can be of two types —

  1. Emission spectrum and
  2. Absorption spectrum

Emission spectrum: When the radiation emitted from any source such as any incandescent solid, liquid, or gaseous substance (i.e., by passing an electric discharge through a gas at low pressure or by heating some substance to high temperature) is directly analyzed through a spectroscope, the spectrum obtained is called an emission spectrum.

Depending on the source of radiation, the emission spectrum can be divided into two types—

Continuous spectrum:

The spectrum produced when white light emitted from any source such as the sun, a bulb, a molten metal, or any incandescent source is passed through a spectroscope is a continuous spectrum.

  • In this spectrum, the colors from red to violet are arranged sequentially continuously, without any break.
  • In this spectrum, red lies at one end and violet at the other, and the rest of the colors lie between these two colors.
  • The colors are so continuous that each of them appears to merge into the other.

Hence, it is known as a continuous spectrum. It contains all the wavelengths of the visible range.

For example— Solar spectrum.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Absorption Spectrum

The spectrum emitted from an incandescent source that contains all the wavelengths of light of the visible range is known as continuous spectrum. There are no. black lines in this spectrum.

Line spectrum or atomic spectrum:

  • If a gaseous element is heated or an electric discharge is passed through the gas at low pressure and the light emitted is resolved in a spectroscope, the spectrum obtained is not continuous.
  • In this case, the different colored lines obtained are separated from each other by dark bands.
  • The spectrum obtained is called the line spectrum.

The excited gaseous atoms are responsible for the piotirllou of such spectrum, lunco, line spectrum Is also known as the atomic spectrum.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Line Spectrum

In a lino spectrum, each line corresponds to a particular wavelength. The line spectrum of each element consists of a group of lines with certain fixed wavelengths, Every element has Its characteristic spectrum, which is different from those of other elements.

For example, (the spectrum of sodium vapor gives two yellow lines. Hence, the line spectrum of each element characterizes the atom of that element.

Therefore, the atomic spectrum of an element can be used to identify the element and Is sometimes called the fingerprint of its atoms.

Absorption spectrum:

When white light emitted from a heated incandescent substance is passed through a liquid or a gaseous substance, radiations of certain wavelengths are absorbed.

  • If the emergent radiations are resolved in a spectroscope, a few dark lines are observed, in the atoms. Otherwise continuous spectrum.
  • These dark lines constitute the absorption spectrum of that absorbing substance (liquid or gas).
  • The dark lines in the absorption spectrum are at the same place where colored lines are obtained in the emission spectrum for the same substance.
  • This indicates that the wavelengths of radiation absorbed in the absorption spectrum are the same as those emitted in the case of the emission spectrum.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Continuous Spectrum

Differences between emission and absorption spectra

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Differences Between Emission And Absorption Spectra

Emission spectrum: Line spectrum of a hydrogen atom

  • To study the emission spectrum of hydrogen, the gas is taken in a discharge tube at low pressure, and an electric discharge is passed through it. ill H2 molecules dissociate into energetically excited Hatoms and emit electromagnetic radiation.
  • The emitted radiation is allowed to pass through the prism in a spectroscope.
  • The resulting spectrum consists of a large number of isolated sharp lines grouped into different series, named after their discoverers. These lines constitute the line spectrum (discontinuous spectrum).
  • The visible region ofthe hydrogen spectrum can be viewed even with the naked eye. It was discovered by Balmer in 1885 and hence the series of isolated spectral lines involving the visible region is called the Balmer series.
  • Balmer observed four prominent lines (red, bluish-green, blue and violet) in the visible region and these were designated as Ha, Hy, and respectively.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Sturcture Of Atoms Line Spectrum Of H-Atom In Visible Region (Balmer Series)

Balmer (1885) showed that the wave numbers (inverse of wavelengths) of the spectral lines in the visible region (Balmer series) can be expressed by the empirical formula,

⇒ \(\bar{v}=R\left[\frac{1}{2^2}-\frac{1}{n^2}\right]\) ……[1]

Where R is the universal constant, known as Rydberg’s constant Its value is 1.09678 × 105 cm-1. n is an integer equal to or greater than 3 (i’.e., n = 3, 4, 5, 6 v (wave number) =i, where X – wavelength.

  • Replacing n by 3, 4, 5, and 6 respectively the wave numbers of the spectral lines, Hy and can be calculated.
  • Further investigation on the line spectrum of hydrogen (using an improved spectroscope) led to the discovery of five other series lines in the ultraviolet and infrared regions. These are indicated in the adjacent table.
  • Rydberg (1890), showed that all series of lines in the hydrogen spectrum could be described by the following expression (similar to Balmer’s empirical formula)

⇒ \(\bar{v}=R\left[\frac{1}{n_1^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right]\) …..[2]

Where nx =1, 2, 3, 4,……, n2 = n1 + 1 , n1 + 2,…….

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Atomic Spectrum Of Hydrogen Atom

Series Of Lines In The Line Spectrum Of Hydrogen Atom 

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Series Of lines in the line Spectrum Of Hydrogen Atom

Putting n1 = 1,2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and n2 = + 1, n1 + 2, n+3, … etc., die wave numbers of the spectral lines corresponding to Lyman, Balmer, Paschen, Brackett Pfund and Humphreys series can be calculated.

The cause of the formation of the line spectrum of hydrogen was not exactly known at that time.

However, it was believed that the line spectrum was obtained as a result of absorption and subsequent emission of energy discontinuously by the electron present in the H-atom. Hence, the line spectrum is also called an atomic spectrum.

Numerical Examples

Question 1. Calculate the wavelengths of Hff and in the emission spectrum of hydrogen. [R = 109678 cm-1].
Answer:

Balmers equation is given by \(\bar{v}=R\left[\frac{1}{2^2}-\frac{1}{n^2}\right]\)

n=3 for H and n = 6 for H

∴ \(\bar{v}_{\mathrm{H}_a}=109678\left(\frac{1}{2^2}-\frac{1}{3^2}\right)=109678 \times \frac{5}{36} \mathrm{~cm}^{-1}\)

∴ \(\lambda_{\mathrm{H}_\alpha}=\frac{1}{\bar{v}_{\mathrm{H}_\alpha}}=\frac{36}{109678 \times 5}=6.565 \times 10^{-5} \mathrm{~cm}\)

Similarly \(\bar{v}_{\mathrm{H}_\delta}=109678\left(\frac{1}{2^2}-\frac{1}{6^2}\right)=109687 \times \frac{8}{36} \mathrm{~cm}^{-1}\)

∴ \(\lambda_{\mathrm{H}_8}=\frac{1}{\bar{v}_{\mathrm{H}_8}}=\frac{36}{109678 \times 8}=4.10 \times 10^{-5} \mathrm{~cm}\)

NCERT Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 2 Atom Structure Notes

Question 2. Identify the spectral line having a wavelength of 4.863 x 10_5cm in the emission spectra of hydrogen.
Answer:

Wave no \(\bar{v}=R\left[\frac{1}{2^2}-\frac{1}{n^2}\right]\)

[Given, lamba = 4.863 × 10-5Cm]

∴ \(\bar{v}=\frac{1}{\lambda}=\frac{1}{4.863 \times 10^{-5}}=109678\left[\frac{1}{4}-\frac{1}{n^2}\right]\)

∴ \(\frac{1}{n^2}=\frac{1}{4}-\frac{1}{4.863 \times 10^{-5} \times 109678}=0.0625 \quad \text { or, } n=4\)

The spectral line with wavelength 4.863 × 10-5cm is Hbeta.

Question 3. Determine the wavelength and frequency of the radiation having the longest wavelength in the Lyman series of hydrogen atoms.
Answer:

Rydberg’s equation \(\frac{1}{\lambda}=R\left[\frac{1}{n_1^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right]\): In case of lyman series. For the wavelength to be the longest, the difference in energies between the two energy levels should be minimal.

Hence, n2= 2

∴ \(\frac{1}{\lambda}=109678\left(\frac{1}{1^2}-\frac{1}{2^2}\right) \quad \text { or, } \frac{1}{\lambda}=109678\left(1-\frac{1}{4}\right)\)

∴ \(\lambda=\frac{4}{3 \times 109678}=1215.67 \times 10^{-8} \mathrm{~cm}=1215.67\)

So, the X radiation109678 has the longest wavelength in the Lyman series = 1215.67×10-8 cm.

∴ Frequency of the radiation

⇒ \(v=\frac{c}{\lambda}=\frac{3 \times 10^{10}}{1215.67 \times 10^{-8}} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}\)

=\(2.467 \times 10^{15} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}\)

Question 4. The wave number of a spectral line in the Lyman series of H-atom is 82260 cm-1. Show that this line has appeared in this series due to the return of the electron from the second to the first orbit.
Answer:

Wave number \(\bar{v}=R\left[\frac{1}{n_1^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right]\)

∴ \(\nabla=R\left[1-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right] \text { or, } \frac{\bar{v}}{R}=1-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\)

Or, \(\frac{1}{n_2^2}=1-\frac{\bar{v}}{R}=1-\frac{82260}{109680}=\frac{27420}{109680}=\frac{1}{4}=\frac{1}{2^2}\)

∴ n2=2

This means that the electron has returned from the second to the first orbit.

Question 5. Calculate the shortest and longest wavelengths in the Lyman series of the hydrogen spectrum.
Answer:

For the Lyman series, n1 = 1 and n2 = 2,3,4, …..

Rydberg equation \(\vec{v}=R\left[\frac{1}{n_1^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right],\)

The difference between nx and n2 is maximum for the shortest wavelength in the Lyman series. Hence n2 = .

∴ \(\frac{1}{\lambda_{\min }}=\bar{v}_{\max }=R\left[\frac{1}{1^2}-\frac{1}{\infty^2}\right]=R=109678 \mathrm{~cm}^{-1}\)

∴ \(\lambda_{\min }=\frac{1}{109678}=9.117 \times 10^{-6} \mathrm{~cm}=911.7\)

Similarly, the difference between n1 and n2 is minimal for the longest wavelength in the Lyman series. Hence, n2 = 2

∴ \(\frac{1}{\lambda_{\max }}=\bar{v}_{\min }=R\left[\frac{1}{1^2}-\frac{1}{2^2}\right]=\frac{3}{4} R\)

∴ \(\frac{1}{\lambda_{\max }}=\bar{v}_{\min }=R\left[\frac{1}{1^2}-\frac{1}{2^2}\right]=\frac{3}{4} R\)

∴ \(\lambda_{\max }=\frac{4}{3 R}=\frac{4}{3 \times 109678}\)

=\(1215.7 \times 10^{-8} \mathrm{~cm}=1215.7\)

Question 6. Show that the Balmer series appears between 3647A and 6563A in the hydrogen spectrum
Answer:

For Balmer series \(\frac{1}{\lambda}=\bar{v}=R\left[\frac{1}{2^2}-\frac{1}{n^2}\right], n=3,4,5, \cdots \infty\)

The Limits Of the Balmer Series Can Be obtained when n = 3 and n = 00 respectively

⇒ \(\frac{1}{\lambda_{\min }}=\bar{v}_{\max }=R\left[\frac{1}{2^2}-\frac{1}{\infty^2}\right]=\frac{R}{4}=\frac{109678}{4} \mathrm{~cm}^{-1}\)

∴ \(\lambda_{\min }=\frac{4}{109678} \mathrm{~cm}=3647 \times 10^{-8} \mathrm{~cm}=3647 \)

Also, \(\frac{1}{\lambda_{\max }}=\bar{v}_{\min }=R\left[\frac{1}{2^2}-\frac{1}{3^2}\right]=\frac{5 R}{36}=\frac{5 \times 109678}{36} \mathrm{~cm}^{-1}\)

∴ \(\lambda_{\max }=\frac{36}{5 \times 109678}=6564 \times 10^{-8} \mathrm{~cm}=6564 \)

Question 7. Calculate the wavelength of the spectral line with n2 = 3 in the Lyman series of hydrogen atoms.
Answer:

In Lyman series, = 1

∴ \(\bar{v}=R\left[\frac{1}{1^2}-\frac{1}{3^2}\right]=109678 \times \frac{8}{9} \mathrm{~cm}^{-1}\)

Since n2 = 3

⇒ \(\lambda=\frac{1}{\bar{v}}=\frac{9}{109678 \times 8}=1.026 \times 10^{-5} \mathrm{~cm}\)

Bohr’s Atomic Model

In 1913, Neils Bohr, an eminent scientist successfully explained the stability of an atom and the cause of the appearance of line spectra with the help of Planck’s quantum theory.

He rectified the defects of Rutherford’s nuclear model and put forward a new atomic model for the hydrogen atom which is known as Bohr’s atomic model or Rutherford-Bohr’s atomic model.

Postulates Of Bohr’s Model Of Atom

The theory, put forward by Bohr regarding the structure of the H-atom, is based on three revolutionary postulates—

Postulate 1:

The electron in the hydrogen atom revolves around the nucleus only in certain selected circular paths (called orbits) which are associated with definite energies. The electrons revolve only in those orbits in which the angular momentum ofthe electron is a whole number multiple of \(\frac{h}{2 \pi},\) i.e., the angular momentum of the electron, \(m v r=n \times \frac{h}{2 \pi}\), Where n= 1,2,3,4 ……….etc, m = mass of the electron, v = velocity of the electron, r = radius of the orbit, h = Planck’s constant. Thus, the angular.

Postulate 2:

When an electron revolves in any selected orbit, it neither emits nor absorbs energy. The energy of an electron in a particular orbit remains constant. These orbits are, therefore, called stationary orbits although the electrons are not stationary. Electrons revolving in a stationary orbit are said to be in the stationary state.

Explanation:

Each stationary orbit is considered as the energy level. The energy of an electron revolving in a stationary orbit is supposed to be the energy of that particular orbit although the orbit has no energy of its own. The energy of the orbit increases with an increase in its distance from the nucleus.

Depending on their distance from the nucleus, these orbits are divided into seven energy levels such as K, L, M, N… etc. and these are designated respectively by the numbers 1, 2, 3, 4 . . . etc.

The numbers signifying the energy levels are known as principal quantum numbers (re). These orbits can be arranged in the increasing order of their energy as follows:

K(n = 1) < L(n = 2) < M(n = 3) < N(n = 4)… etc.

Postulate 3:

When an electron jumps from a higher stationary energy, level to a lower stationary energy level, it emits a fixed amount of energy in the form of radiation. On the other hand, when an electron absorbs a certain amount of energy, it moves to a higher energy level.

Electrons can never occupy a position in between two successive stationary energy levels.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Emission Absorption Of Energy Due To Electron Transition

Mathematical expression:

If the frequency of radiation emitted or absorbed is assumed to be v and the energies of the higher and lower stationary orbits as E2 and E1 respectively, then the difference in energy, ΔE = E2-E1 =hv, [where h = Planck’s constant

[Since E2 and E1 have fixed values, the magnitude of v is also fixed. This accounts for the existence of some definite lines in the emission spectra of hydrogen. Energy is involved in the transition of electrons.

Concept of quantization of energy:

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Continuous Change of Energy Discontinous Or Quantised Energy

The concept of quantization of energy can be best understood by taking the following example: When a person moves down a staircase, his energy changes discontinuously.

He can have only certain definite values of energies corresponding to those of the various steps.

Alternatively, the energy of the person is quantized. However, if he goes down a ramp, his energy changes continuously, having any value corresponding to any point on the ramp. In short, energy is not quantized.

Calculation Of Various Quantities For Hydrogen-Like Atoms Using Bohr’s Theory

The radius of ‘faith orbit:

Suppose the total quantity of positive charge in the nucleus of a hydrogen-like atom is Ze (where Z = atomic number and e = charge of a proton or an electron).

The only electron present in that atom is revolving around the nucleus in a circular orbit of radius, r with velocity, v.

According to Coulomb’s law, the attractive force of the nucleus on the electron i.e… the centripetal force = [where Ze is the total positive charge on the nucleus and e =charge of an electron].

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Centrifugal Force

In case of an electron revolving with velocity v, centrifugal force = \(\frac{m v^2}{r}\) [where m = mass of electron and r = radius ofthe orbit], For the stability of an atom, the centripetal force must be equal to the centrifugal force, i.e

⇒ \(\frac{Z e^2}{r^2}=\frac{m v^2}{r} \quad \text { or, } v^2=\frac{Z e^2}{m r}\)  …………………….. (1)

According to Bohr’s theory, the angular momentum of the revolving electron in a stationary orbit is an integral multiple \(\frac{h}{2 \pi} \text { i.e., } m v r=\frac{n h}{2 \pi}\)

[where, n = 1,2,3… etc., are whole numbers]

Or, \(v=\frac{n h}{2 \pi m r}\)…………………….. (2)

Or, \(v^2=\frac{n^2 h^2}{4 \pi^2 m^2 r^2}\) …………………….. (3)

Hence, from equations [1] and [3] we have,

⇒ \(\frac{Z e^2}{m r}=\frac{n^2 h^2}{4 \pi^2 m^2 r^2} \quad \text { or, } \frac{Z e^2}{m}=\frac{n^2 h^2}{4 \pi^2 m^2 r}\)

Or, \(r=\frac{n^2 h^2}{4 \pi^2 m^2} \times \frac{m}{Z e^2} \text { or, } r=\frac{n^2 h^2}{4 \pi^2 m Z e^2}\)

i.e., radius of ‘n’ th orbit \(r_n=\frac{n^2 h^2}{4 \pi^2 m Z e^2}\)…………………….. (4)

Equation [4] indicates the radius of with orbit of the revolving electron.

The velocity of a revolving electron in ‘n’th orbit:

According to Bohr’s theory, the angular momentum of a revolving electron is given by, mvr \(=\frac{n h}{2 \pi} \quad \text { or, } r=\frac{n h}{2 \pi m v}\)

Again, the radius of ‘n’ th orbit, r \(=\frac{n^2 h^2}{4 \pi^2 m Z e^2}\)

Comparing the above two relations we may write,

⇒ \(\frac{n h}{2 \pi m v}=\frac{n^2 h^2}{4 \pi^2 m Z e^2} \quad \text { or, } \frac{1}{v}=\frac{n h}{2 \pi Z e^2} \quad \text { or, } v=\frac{2 \pi Z e^2}{n h}\)

∴ The velocity of an electron revolving in the ‘n’th Bohr orbit is given by

⇒ \(v_n=\frac{2 \pi Z e^2}{n h}\)…………………….. (5)

Substituting the values of n = 1, 2, 3, etc., in this equation, the velocity of revolving electrons in different Bohr orbits can be determined.

The velocity of resolving electron in the ‘ n ‘th orbit of the H atom.

= \(\frac{2 \times \frac{22}{7} \times 1 \times\left(4.8 \times 10^{-10}\right)^2}{n \times\left(6.626 \times 10^{-27}\right)}=\frac{2.186 \times 10^8}{n} \mathrm{~cm} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

Relation between the velocities of an electron in ‘n’th and first orbit:

Velocity of an electron revolving in the’ n ‘th orbit.

⇒ \(\left(v_n\right)=\frac{2 \pi \mathrm{Z} e^2}{n h}\) and that in the first orbit, (v1) \(=\frac{2 \pi Z e^2}{1 \times h}\)

∴ \(\frac{v_n}{v_1}=\frac{2 \pi Z e^2}{n h} \times \frac{1 \times h}{2 \pi Z e^2}=\frac{1}{n}\)

∴ \(\frac{v_n}{v_1}=\frac{2 \pi Z e^2}{n h} \times \frac{1 \times h}{2 \pi Z e^2}=\frac{1}{n}\)

or, \(v_n=v_1 \times \frac{1}{n}\)

Relation between the radius of ‘n’th orbit and the first orbit.

Radius of ‘n th orbit \(\left(r_n\right)=\frac{n^2 h^2}{4 \pi^2 m Z e^2}\) and the radius of the first orbit \(\left(r_1\right)=\frac{1^2 \cdot h^2}{4 \pi^2 m Z e^2}=\frac{h^2}{4 \pi^2 m Z e^2}\)

∴ \(\frac{r_n}{r_1}=\frac{n^2 h^2}{4 \pi^2 m Z e^2} \times \frac{4 \pi^2 m Z e^2}{h^2}=n^2\)

or, rn = r1 × n²

The total energy of an electron revolving in ‘n’th orbit:

The total energy of electron revolving in ‘ n ‘th orbit, En = Kinetic energy + Potential energy

En = Kinetic energy + Potential energy

= \(\frac{1}{2} m v^2+\left(-\frac{Z e^2}{r}\right)=\frac{1}{2} m \times \frac{Z e^2}{m r}-\frac{Z e^2}{r}\)

= \(\frac{1}{2} \frac{Z e^2}{r}-\frac{Z e^2}{r}=-\frac{Z e^2}{2 r}=-\frac{Z e^2}{2} \times \frac{1}{r}\)

∴ \(v^2=\frac{Z e^2}{m r}\)

Since \(v^2=\frac{Z e^2}{m r}\)

= \(-\frac{Z e^2}{2} \times \frac{4 \pi^2 m Z e^2}{n^2 h^2}\)

r = \(\frac{n^2 h^2}{4 \pi^2 m Z e^2}\)…………………….. (6)

Equation [6] Indicates the energy of the electron revolving in the orbit of a Hydrogen- like

For hydrogen atom Z =1

∴ For hydrogen atom, \(E_n=-\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{n^2 h^2}\)…………………….. (7)

Substituting the values of m, e, n, and R in equation number[7] we have

⇒ \(E_n=-\frac{2 \times(22 / 7)^2 \times\left(9.108 \times 10^{-28} \mathrm{~g}\right) \times\left(4.8 \times 10^{-10} \mathrm{esu}\right)^4}{n^2 \times\left(6.626 \times 10^{-27} \mathrm{erg} \cdot \mathrm{s}\right)^2}\)

= \(-\frac{2.176 \times 10^{-11}}{n^2} \mathrm{erg} \cdot \text { atom }^{-1}\)

= \(-\frac{2.176 \times 10^{-18}}{n^2} \mathrm{~J} \cdot \mathrm{atom}^{-1}=-\frac{1312}{n^2} \mathrm{~kJ} \cdot \mathrm{mol}^{-1} \quad \cdots[7 \mathrm{a}]\)

Energies E1,  E2, E3, etc., are calculated by putting n – 1, 2, 3, etc. in equation [7a] and are represented schematically in.

It is observed from these values that successive energy levels are not equidistant. The energy gap between two successive levels decreases with an increase in distance from the nucleus.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Different Energy Levels Of H-Atoms

When an electron is at an infinite distance from the nucleus, its potential energy is zero.

Work done to bring the electron from an infinite distance to a distance V concerning the nucleus gives the measure of its potential energy.

The force of attraction between the nucleus and the electron is I given by, F = (applying Coulomb’s law).

∴ The potential energy of the electron at a distance ‘r’ from the nucleus \(=\int_{r=\infty}^{r=\infty} \frac{Z e^2}{r^2} d r=-\frac{Z e^2}{r}\)

Electronic energy as negative energy:

When an electron is at an infinite distance (n = ∞) from the nucleus, it experiences no force of attraction from the nucleus. Hence, the energy of the electron at an infinite distance from / the nucleus is taken as zero (E∞ = 0).

  • When the electron moves towards the nucleus, it experiences a force of attraction from the nucleus.
  • As a result, some energy is released and the energy of the electron becomes negative. Due to the release of energy, the stability of the electron occupying a fixed orbit in the atom is increased.
  • As the electron comes closer to the nucleus, it experiences a greater force of attraction and hence more energy is released, thereby making the electronic energy more negative.

All these facts are per the expression of electronic energy,

⇒ \(E_n=-\frac{2 \pi^2 m Z^2 e^4}{n^2 h^2}\) As n decreases, the energy of the electron decreases (because it is associated with a -ve sign) and hence the stability of the electron in the atom increases.

Thus, the negative value ofthe electronic energy in an atom signifies that the stability of the electron increases as it occupies orbits closer to the nucleus.

The energy is minimal when it revolves around the nucleus occupying the first orbit (i.e., n = 1).

The ratio of the energies of an electron revolving in the V th orbit and the first orbit of the hydrogen-like atom:

⇒ \(\frac{E_n}{E_1}=\left(-\frac{2 \pi^2 m Z^2 e^4}{n^2 h^2}\right) \times \frac{1}{\left(-\frac{2 \pi^2 m Z^2 e^4}{1^2 \times h^2}\right)}=\frac{1}{n^2}\)

∴ \(E_n=E_1 \times \frac{1}{n^2}\) …………………….. (8)

The radius of the first orbit of the hydrogen atom:

From equation number [4], it is seen that the radius of the ‘ n ’ th orbit of a hydrogen-like atom, \(r_n=\frac{n^2 h^2}{4 \pi^2 m Z e^2}\)

Where, h = Planck’s constant = 6.626 × 10-27erg-s , m = mass of electron = 9.1× 10-28g, e =charge of electron = 4.8 × 10-10esu]

Derivation of Rydberg’s equation

When an electron of a hydrogen atom jumps from ‘ n2 ‘th orbit to‘ ‘th orbit, let the frequency of emitted radiation be v. According to Bohr’s theory,

⇒ \(h v=E_{n_2}-E_{n_1}=\left(-\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{n_2^2 h^2}\right)-\left(-\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{n_1^2 h^2}\right)[\text { for } \mathrm{H}, Z=1]\)

=\(\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{h^2}\left(\frac{1}{n_1^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right)\)

⇒ \(\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{h^2}\left(\frac{1}{n_1^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right)\) …………………….. (9)

∴ \(v=\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{h^3}\left(\frac{1}{n_1^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right)\) …………………….. (10)

or, \(\frac{c}{\lambda}=\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{h^3}\left(\frac{1}{n_1^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right)\)

Since \(h v=E_{n_2}-E_{n_1}=\left(-\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{n_2^2 h^2}\right)-\left(-\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{n_1^2 h^2}\right)\)

⇒ \(\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{h^2}\left(\frac{1}{n_1^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right)\)

∴ \(v=\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{h^3}\left(\frac{1}{n_1^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right)\)

Or, \(\frac{c}{\lambda}=\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{h^3}\left(\frac{1}{n_1^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right)\)

Since \(v=\frac{c}{\lambda}\)

Or, \(\frac{1}{\lambda}=\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{c h^3}\left(\frac{1}{n_1^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right)\)

Since \(\frac{1}{\lambda}=\bar{v}\) = wave Number ]

or, \(\bar{v}=R\left(\frac{1}{n_1^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right)\) …………………….. (11)

R is a constant known as Rydberg’s constant.

∴ Rydberg’s constant,R \(=\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{c h^3}\) …………………….. (12)

Note that earlier equation in article[11]no is2.4.4.comparable with equation [2]

Equation [11] is Rydberg’s equation which is related to the line spectra of the hydrogen atom:

Expression for wave number of spectral lines involving one-electron ions is given by

⇒ \(\bar{v}=Z^2 \times R\left(\frac{1}{n^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right) \text {, where } Z=\text { atomic number. }\)

⇒  \(\bar{v}=Z^2 \times R\left(\frac{1}{n^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right) \text {, where } Z=\text { atomic number. } \)

Calculation of the value of Rydberg’s constant: Substituting the values of n, m, e, c and h in equation [12] we get,

Rydberg’s constant, \(R=\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{c h^3}\)

= \(\frac{2 \times(3.14)^2 \times\left(9.108 \times 10^{-28} \mathrm{~g}\right) \times\left(4.8 \times 10^{-10} \mathrm{esu}\right)^4}{\left(2.9979 \times 10^{10} \mathrm{~cm} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\right) \times\left(6.626 \times 10^{-27} \mathrm{erg} \cdot \mathrm{s}\right)^3}\)

=109737cm-1

The experimentally measured value of Rydberg’s constant is 109677 cm-1. This value of R agrees fairly well with that ofthe calculated value.

Wavelength of radiation emitted due to electronic transition from third to second Bohr orbit: Rydberg’s equation related to the frequency ofthe spectral lines of H -atom-

\(\bar{v}=R\left(\frac{1}{n_1^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right)\)

R= 109677 cm-1

The wavelength of radiation (A) emitted due to the transition of an electron of a hydrogen atom from the third orbit (n = 3) to the second orbit (n = 2) can be calculated with the help of this equation.

⇒ \(\frac{1}{\lambda}=R\left(\frac{1}{2^2}-\frac{1}{3^2}\right)\)

Since \(\bar{v}=\frac{1}{\lambda} \text { and } n_1=2, n_2=3\)

Or, \(\frac{1}{\lambda}=109677 \times\left(\frac{9-4}{36}\right)=\frac{109677 \times 5}{36} .\)

∴ \(\lambda=\frac{36}{109677 \times 5}=6564.7 \times 10^{-8} \mathrm{~cm}=6564.7 \)

As the wavelength of visible light lies between 4000-8000 A, the line spectrum appears in the visible region. It represents the Balmer series.

Structure of Atom Chapter 2 NCERT Solutions Class 11

The ionization potential of the H-atom from Rydberg’s equation:

The ionization potential of hydrogen is defined as the energy required to transfer the electron from the first orbit (n = 1) of a hydrogen atom to an infinite distance to form an H+ ion.

Or, \(\frac{1}{\lambda}=\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{c h^3}\left(\frac{1}{n_1^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right)\left[ \bar{v}=\frac{1}{\lambda} \text { and } R=\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{c h^3}\right]\)

Or, \(\frac{c}{\lambda}=\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{h^3}\left(\frac{1}{n_1^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right)\)

Or, \(v=\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{h^3}\left(\frac{1}{n_1^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right)\)

Since \(v=\frac{c}{\lambda}\)

Or, \(h v=\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{h^2}\left(\frac{1}{n_1^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right)\)

Or, \(\Delta E=\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{h^2}\left(\frac{1}{n_1^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right)\)

[since E =Hv]

Substituting n1 = 1 and n2 = infinite in the equation, the value of the ionization potential of a hydrogen atom can be obtained.

∴ The ionization potential of H-atom (in CGS unit)

⇒ \(\frac{2 \times(3.14)^2 \times\left(9.108 \times 10^{-28}\right) \times\left(4.8 \times 10^{-10}\right)^4}{\left(6.626 \times 10^{-27}\right)^2} \times\left(\frac{1}{1^2}-\frac{1}{\infty^2}\right)\)

= 2170 × 10-14 × (1 -0) =2170 × 10-14erg-atom-1

= 2170 × 10-14× 6.24 × 1011 eV-atom-1

= 13.6 eV-atomr1 =13.6 x 1.6022 × 10-19 atom-1

= 13.6 x 1.6022 x 10-19 x 6.022 × 10-19-mol-1

= 1312kJ-mol-1

[since 1 erg = 6.24 × 1011eV]

The ionization energy of other one-electron species is given by, \(I E=(I E)_{\mathrm{H}} \times \frac{Z^2}{n^2}, \text { where }(I E)_{\mathrm{H}}\) = Inonisation Energy Of H-atom, Z = Atmotic number,n = principal Quantum number from which the electron is removed.

Number of revolutions of an electron ptt second:

Velocity of an electron revolving in the ‘n’ th orbit \(v_n=\frac{2 \pi Z e^2}{n h}\)

Perimeter of the orbit = 2nrn \(=\frac{2 \pi n^2 h^2}{4 \pi^2 m Z e^2}=\frac{n^2 h^2}{2 \pi m Z e^2}\)

∴ Number of revolutions of an electron in the ‘ n ’th orbit per second = \(=\frac{\text { Velocity }}{\text { Perimeter }}\)

= \(\frac{2 \pi Z e^2}{n h} \div \frac{n^2 h^2}{2 \pi m Z e^2}\)

= \(\frac{2 \pi Z e^2}{n h} \times \frac{2 \pi m Z e^2}{n^2 h^2}=\frac{4 \pi^2 m Z^2 e^4}{n^3 h^3}\)

Explanation of hydrogen spectrum by Bohr’s theory

Bohr’s theory furnishes a logical explanation of the origin ground state) of six series of spectral lines in the atomic spectrum of hydrogen.

  • Under ordinary conditions, the revolving electron ESS Merits Of Bohr’s atomic model in the hydrogen atom exists in the lowest energy state (n = 1 ), known as the ground state.
  • If energy (Example: heat, light) is available for absorption, then the electron present in the kT-shell (n=1) absorbs the energy and moves to a higher energy level [L(n = 2), Af(n = 3), N(n = 4)…..etc.]. This state is known as the excited state.
  • Since in a sample of hydrogen, there are a large number of atoms, the electrons in different H-atoms absorb different amounts of energies (quanta) and are promoted to different higher energy levels viz., n = 2, 3, 4,
  • When the source of energy is removed, electrons jump back to any lower energy level by emitting energy (quanta) as radiations of different frequencies which give rise to different lines in the spectrum. When electrons from orbits n = 2,3,4, ••• jump back to orbit n = 1, a series of lines, known as the Lyman series is obtained.
  • Similarly, if electrons from higher energy levels n = 3, 4, 5, 6, . . . jump back to energy level n = 2, the Balmer series will appear in the spectrum.

In the same way, when the electrons return to the third energy level (n = 3), Paschen series, to the fourth energy level (n = 4), Brackett series, to the fifth energy level (n = 5), Pfimd series and to the sixth energy level (n = 6), Humphreys series is obtained in the spectrum. The formation of six spectral series is illustrated below.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Six Series Of Spectral Lines in Hydrogen Spectra

Thus, it is clear that a hydrogen atom containing only one electron can form several series of lines in its atomic spectrum.

Merits Of Bohr’s atomic model

Stability of an atom:

One of the main postulates of Bohr’s theory regarding the structure of an atom is that an electron while revolving in its stationary orbit does not emit any energy.

So, the electron moving continuously around the nucleus in a fixed orbit will never fall on the nucleus i.e., this postulate offers a reasonable explanation regarding the stability of an atom by eliminating the main defect of Rutherford’s nuclear model.

Line spectrum of H-atom:

Bohr’s atomic model can explain the discontinuous spectra formed in different one-electron systems such as H – atoms, He+ ion, Li2+ ion, etc.

The radius of the first orbit of H-atom:

From Bohr’s theory, it has been possible to estimate the value of the radius of the first orbit (n = 1) of a hydrogen atom.

Its value is 0.529 × 10-8 cm or 0.529 Å. This value has been calculated later by other methods and found to be very close to that obtained based on Bohr’s theory.

Principal quantum number:

The idea of principal quantum numbers was first established through Bohr’s model.

The energy of an electron:

Based on Bohr’s theory, the energy of an electron revolving in any quantum level can be calculated and from this, it has also been possible to estimate the energy emitted or absorbed due to the transition of an electron from one energy level to another.

Thus, the relative positions of different lines in atomic spectra can be explained.

Rydberg’s constant and its value:

With the help of Bohr’s theory, mathematical expression as well as the value of Rydberg’s constant can be determined.

Limitations of Bohr’s atomic model

Spectra of atoms or ions having two or more electrons:

(i.e., multi-electron system) cannot be explained with the help of Bohr’s theory.

  1. When spectroscopes with high resolving powers were used, it was found that each line in the spectrum was split into several closely spaced lines (called fine structure) which could not be explained by Bohr’s theory.
  2. Bohr’s theory could not explain the splitting of spectral lines under the influence of magnetic field (Zeeman effect) or electric field (Stark effect) i.e., the formation of fine structure of atomic spectra.
  3. Bohr’s atomic model is two-dimensional and hence, fails to give an idea about the actual three-dimensional electronic model of the atom.
  4. According to de Broglie (1923), a tiny particle like an electron has dual character i.e., an electron has a particle as well as wave nature. Bohr treated the electron only as a particle, i.e., Bohr’s model ignored the dual character of the electron.
  5. According to Bohr’s atomic model, an electron moves around the nucleus along a fixed circular path with a definite velocity.
  6. However, according to Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle, it is impossible to simultaneously measure both the position and velocity (or momen- turn) of a subatomic particle-like electron with absolute accuracy at a particular instant.
  7. Thus, Bohr’s theory directly contradicts Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Difference Between Cathode And Anode Rays Comparision Between Rutherford's and Bohr's atomic Model

Sommerfeld’s modification Of Bohr’s Theory Idea Of Elliptical Orbits

To explain the fine structure of spectral lines in the hydrogen spectrum.

Sommerfeld (in 1915) extended Bohr’s theory and proposed that—

  1. An electron moves around a positively charged nucleus in different elliptical orbits in addition to circular orbits.
  2. When the electron moves in an elliptical orbit, the nucleus remains at one of the foci.
  3. When the electron moves in a circular path, the angle of revolution changes while the distance from the nucleus remains the same.
  4. However, in an elliptical motion, both the angle of revolution (or radial angle) and the distance (‘ r’ or radial distance) ofthe electron from the nucleus change.
  5. In order to describe an elliptical path, Sommerfeld introduced the concept of a second quantum number, called the azimuthal quantum number, denoted by the letter ‘k’ in addition to the principal quantum number n. These two quantum numbers are related to each other by the equation,

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Motion Of An Electron In Elliptical Orbit

⇒ \(\frac{n}{k}=\frac{\text { length of major axis }(a)}{\text { length of minor axis }(b)}\)

⇒ \(\frac{k}{n}=\frac{b}{a}=\sqrt{1-\epsilon^2}[\epsilon=\text { eccentricity }]\)

When n = k, i.e., length of major axis = length of major axis, the ellipse reduces to a circle. Thus, a circular orbit is a special case of the elliptical orbit.

For each value of n, k may have n different values. These are 1, 2, 3…, n. Thus for the Bohr orbit with n – 4, there are four Sommerfeld orbits (three elliptical orbits + one circular orbit) with k = 1, 2, 3, and 4. When k = 4, the elliptical orbit reduces to a circular orbit.

Sommerfeld thus introduced the concept of subshells in a principal quantum shell. The difference in energy between any two subshells is quite small.

The fine structure of the hydrogen spectrum can be explained by assuming several transitions between several subshells, each characterized by different values of k but the same value of n.

To explain the splitting of spectral lines under the influence of the electric or magnetic fields, Sommerfeld suggested that the electronic orbits may lie in different planes.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Sommerfelds's Model

Discussion:

  • Bohr’s idea of ‘electrons moving in circular ‘ orbits’ was extended by Sommerfeld by introducing the concept of elliptical orbits.
  • According to Einstein’s theory of relativity, the equation expressing the relation between rest mass and mass of a moving particle is given by \(=m_0 /\left(1-\frac{v^2}{c^2}\right)^{1 / 2}\) between rest mass and mass of a moving particle is given by m- mass of the moving particle, v=velocity of the moving particle, c = velocity of light).
  • According to Kepler’s law, the velocity of a body moving in an elliptical orbit is maximum at the perihelion (closest to the focus) and minimum at the aphelion (farthest from the focus).
  • Therefore, the mass of an electron moving in an elliptical orbit is maximum at the perihelion and minimum at the aphelion.
  • Consequently, the electron is compelled to deviate from its original orbit to a new and identical elliptical path that lies in the same plane. Thus, the elliptical path continues its precession slowly surrounding the nucleus.
  • Due to this continuous precessional motion of the elliptical orbit, the energy of the electron undergoes a slight change depending on the position of the elliptical orbit.
  • The fine structure of spectral lines observed in the atomic spectra actually originates from the slight difference in energy ofthe electron.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Precessional Motion Of Electron Is An Elliptical Orbit

Merits of Sommerfeld’s modification

  • Due to the introduction of azimuthal quantum numbers, the concept of multiple elliptical orbits corresponding to the same principal quantum number came into being.
  • Due to multiple values of azimuthal quantum number for the same value of the principal quantum number, the transition of an electron can occur from one quantum level to another which may result in multiple lines in the spectrum. Thus the fine structure of the spectrum can be explained by Sommerfeld’s theory.
  • The subshells belonging to the same principal energy levels have different eccentricities. The more is the eccentricity of a subshell, the more is the opportunity for the electrons residing in that subshell to be closer to the nucleus. Thus, the subshell wifi possesses more penetration power and the corresponding electrons belonging to the subshell will have more power to shield the nuclear charge.

Demerits of Sommerfeld’s Modification.

  • Like Bohr’s atomic model, the atomic structure proposed by Sommerfeld is also two-dimensional. this model also fails to explain the three-dimensional model of atomic structure.
  • Sommerfeld’s modification also fails to explain the spectra of multi-electron atoms.
  • The relative intensities of the fines in the spectra cannot be explained by using this theory.
  • Sommerfeld’s atomic model contradicts Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle because according to the latter, it is impossible to simultaneously determine the exact position and exact momentum of an electron.

Numerical Examples

Question 1. Calculate the energy associated with the fifth orbit of H-atom, if the energy associated with the first orbit is 2.17 x 1018J.atom-1
Answer:

⇒ \(E \propto \frac{1}{n^2} \text { or } E=\frac{K}{n^2}\)

∴ \(E_1=\frac{K}{1^2}(\text { for } n=1) \text { and } E_5=\frac{K}{5^2}(\text { for } n=5)\)

∴ \(\frac{E_5}{E_1}=\frac{1}{25} \quad \text { or, } E_5=\frac{E_1}{25}=\frac{-2.17 \times 10^{-18}}{25}\)

=-8.68 × 10-20 J atom-1

Question 2. The radius of the first orbit of the H-atom is 0.53A. Find the radius of the fifth orbit.
Answer:

⇒ \(r_n=r_1 \times n^2\)

∴ \(r_5=r_1 \times 5^2=0.53 \times 25=13.25\)

Question 3. Will there be regular variations in the energy associated with successive principal quantum numbers of hydrogen-like atoms?
Answer:

No, the variation will not be regular because, energy Associated with an element with an electron in n-th Orbit, En = \(=\frac{-2 \pi^2 m Z^2 e^4}{n^2 h^2}\)

For a hydrogen-like atom, \(\frac{-2 \pi^2 m Z^2 e^4}{n^2 h^2}\) = constant

∴ \(E_n=\frac{K}{n^2}\)

∴ \(E_1=\frac{K}{1^2}, E_2=\frac{K}{2^2}, E_3=\frac{K}{3^2}, E_4=\frac{K}{4^2}, \cdots \text { etc. }\)

From the values of the energy associated with the electrons, it is clear that the variation of energy in successive principal quantum numbers of hydrogen-like atoms is not regular. the spacing between the energy levels decreases, as we move outwards from the nucleus.

Atomic Structure Class 11 Chemistry Notes PDF

Question 4. Energy associated with the n-th orldt of 11 -atom Is I ‘l (i given by the expression, \(E_n=-\frac{13.6}{n^2}\). Show that \(E_{(n+1)}-E_n=\frac{13.6 \times 2}{n^3} \mathrm{eV} \text {, when ‘ } n \text { ‘ is very large. }\)
Answer:

⇒ \(E_{(n+1)}-E_n=\left[-\frac{13.6}{(n+1)^2}-\left(-\frac{13.6}{n^2}\right)\right]\)

= \(\left[\frac{13.6}{n^2}-\frac{13.6}{(n+1)^2}\right] \mathrm{eV}=\frac{13.6(2 n+1)}{n^2(n+1)^2} \mathrm{eV}\)

If the value of n is very large, then (2n + l)=2n and(n+l)=n

∴ \(E_{(n+1)}-E_n=\frac{13.6 \times 2 n}{n^2 \times n^2}=\frac{13.6 \times 2}{n^3} \mathrm{eV}\)

Question 5. If an electron Is promoted from the first orbit to the third orbit of a hydrogen atom, then by how many times will the radius of the orbit be increased?
Answer:

The radius ofthe n -th orbit of H -atom \(r_n=\frac{n^2 h^2}{4 \pi^2 m e^2}\)

Radius ofthe first orbit \(\left(r_1\right)=\frac{1^2 \times h^2}{4 \pi^2 m e^2}\)

Radius of the third orbit (r3) \(=\frac{3^2 \times h^2}{4 \pi^2 m e^2}\)

∴ \(\frac{r_3}{r_1}=\frac{3^2 \times h^2}{4 \pi^2 m e^2} \times \frac{4 \pi^2 m e^2}{h^2}=9 \text { i.e., } r_3=9 \times r_1 \text {. }\)

∴ The radius ofthe orbit will be increased by 9 times

Question 6. If an electron drops from the third orbit (n = 3) to the first orbit (n = 1) of the H-atom, what will be the frequency and wavelength of the radiation emitted? What would have happened if the electron jumped from the first orbit to the third orbit?
Answer: Let the frequency of the emitted radiation be v.

Then \(v=R \times c \times\left[\frac{1}{n_1^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right] \mathrm{cps}\)

=\(109677 \times 3 \times 10^{10} \times\left(\frac{1}{1^2}-\frac{1}{3^2}\right)\)

=\(329031 \times 10^{10} \times\left(1-\frac{1}{9}\right)\)

Since R = 109677 cm-1 and c = 3 × 1010 em s-1 ]

= 3.29 × 1015 × 0.889 = 2.925 ×1015  cps.

The wavelength of the emitted radiation,

⇒ \(\lambda=\frac{c}{v}=\frac{3 \times 10^{10}}{2.925 \times 10^{15}}=1.025 \times 10^{-5} \mathrm{~cm}=1025 \mathrm{~A}\)

When an electron jumps from the 1st orbit to the 3rd orbit then energy is absorbed.

The frequency and wavelength of absorbed radiation are the same i.e., the frequency and wavelength of absorbed radiation will be 2.925 x 1015 cps and 1025A respectively.

Quantities 7. Find the wavelength (in angstrom) of the photon| emitted when an electron jumps from the second Bohr orbit to the first Bohr orbit of the hydrogen atom. The ionization potential of the hydrogen atom in its ground energy state =2.17 x 10-11 erg-atom-1
Answer:

The energy of the electron in the electron in first orbit (n = 1 ) of hydrogen atom \(E_1=-\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{h^2}\)

The ionization potential of hydrogen atom le., the energy required to move the electron from n = 1 energy level to an infinite distance

=2.17 × 1011 erg.

∴ Energy of electron in1st (n = 1) orbit =-2.17 × 1011 erg

\(\text { i.e., }-\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{h^2}=-2.17 \times 10^{-11}\)

=1221 × 10-8 cm =1221Å

Since 1Å = 10-8 cm]

Question 8. Determine Balmer the series wavelengths of H and H Lines in the Balmer Series [ R= 109670 cm-1 ]
Answer:

For Balmer series:

⇒ \(\bar{v}=\frac{1}{\lambda}=R\left[\frac{1}{n_1^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right]\)

For Balmer Series n1 =2 And For The Line Hα, n2 = 3

∴ \(\frac{1}{\lambda}=109670\left[\frac{1}{2^2}-\frac{1}{3^2}\right]=109670\left(\frac{1}{4}-\frac{1}{9}\right)\)

∴ \(\lambda=\frac{36}{109670 \times 5}=6.565 \times 10^{-5} \mathrm{~cm}\)

For the line Hβ, n2 = 4

⇒ \(\frac{1}{\lambda}=109670\left[\frac{1}{2^2}-\frac{1}{4^2}\right]=109670\left(\frac{1}{4}-\frac{1}{16}\right)\)

∴ \(\lambda=\frac{16}{109670 \times 3}=4.863 \times 10^{-5} \mathrm{~cm}\)

Question 9. Find the velocity of the electron revolving in the third orbit of the hydrogen atom. Also, determine the number of revolutions of the electron per second around the nucleus.
Answer:

The velocity of the electron revolving in the 3rd orbit around the nucleus of the hydrogen atom,

\(v_3=\frac{2 \pi e^2}{3 \times h}=\frac{2 \times 3.14 \times\left(4.8 \times 10^{-10}\right)^2}{3 \times\left(6.627 \times 10^{-27}\right)}=7.278 \times 10^7 \mathrm{~cm} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

The radius of the n ’ th orbit of H-atom, rn \(=\frac{n^2 h^2}{4 \pi^2 m e^2}\)

∴ Radius ofthe third orbit (r³) \(=\frac{3^2 h^2}{4 \pi^2 m e^2}\)

= \(\frac{9 \times\left(6.627 \times 10^{-27}\right)^2}{4 \times(3.14)^2 \times\left(9.108 \times 10^{-28}\right) \times\left(4.8 \times 10^{-10}\right)^2}\)

= 4.77 × 10-8 cm [m = 9.108 × 10-28 g]

Circumference ofthe third orbit

= 27πr³ = 2 × 3.14 × 4.77 × 10-8 =2.99 × 10-7cm

∴ Number of revolutions of electron per second around the nucleus \(=\frac{\text { Velocity }}{\text { Circumference of the orbit }}\)

= \(\frac{7.278 \times 10^7}{2.99 \times 10^{-7}}=2.43 \times 10^{14}\)

Question 10. Prove that the velocity of an electron revolving in the 1st orbit of H-atom is nearly 10-2 times that of light.
Answer:

According to Bohr’s theory, mvr \(=\frac{n h}{2 \pi}\)

The radius of‘ n ‘th orbit, r \(=\frac{n^2 h^2}{4 \pi^2 m Z e^2}\)

From equations [1] and [2], we have \(\frac{n h}{2 \pi m \nu}=\frac{n^2 h^2}{4 \pi^2 m Z e^2}\)

⇒ \(\text { or, } \frac{1}{v}=\frac{n h}{2 \pi \mathrm{Z} e^2} \text { or, } v=\frac{2 \pi \mathrm{Z} e^2}{n h}\)

For hydrogen atom, Z = 1 ; Hence, \(\nu=\frac{2 \pi e^2}{n h}\)

For the first orbit, n = 1 , e = 4.8 x 10-1 esu,

h = 6.627 × 10-27 erg-s

∴ The velocity of moving electron in the first orbit

⇒ \(v=\frac{2 \times 3.14 \times\left(4.8 \times 10^{-10}\right)^2}{1 \times 6.627 \times 10^{-27}}\)

= 2.183 × 108 =(2.183 × 10-10) × 10-2 cm-s-1

Again, the velocity of light =3 × 1010 cm-s-1

Hence, the velocity of an electron revolving in the first orbit of the H-atom is almost 10-2 times ofthe velocity of light.

Question 11. If the energy of the first Bohr orbit is – 13.58 eV, then what will be the energy of the third Bohr orbit?
Answer:

Energy of n -th Bohr-orbit of H-atom, En \(=-\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{n^2 h^2}\)

∴ Energy first Bohr orbit, E1 \(=-\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{1^2 \times h^2}\)

∴ Energy of third Bohr orbit, E3 \(=-\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{3^2 \times h^2}\)

Hence \(\frac{E_3}{E_1}=\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{9 \times h^2} \times \frac{h^2}{2 \pi^2 m e^4}=\frac{1}{9}\)

∴ \(E_3=\frac{1}{9} \times E_1=\frac{1}{9} \times(-13.58) \mathrm{eV}=-1.509 \mathrm{eV}\)

Question 12. The velocity of an electron revolving in a certain orbit of the H-atom is \(\frac{1}{275}\) times the velocity of light. Find the orbit in which the electron is revolving.
Answer: Let the electron is revolving in the n-th orbit.

The velocity ofthe electron in the n -th orbit, \(V_n=\frac{2 \pi Z e^2}{n h}\)

[since Z=1

e= 4.8 × 1010 esu

h = 6.626 × 10-27erg.s]

= \(\frac{2 \times 3.14 \times\left(4.8 \times 10^{-10}\right)^2}{n \times 6.626 \times 10^{-27}}\)

Since Z = 1

e = 4.8 × 10-10esu

h= 6.626 × 10-27 erg.s

= \(\frac{2.18 \times 10^8}{n} \mathrm{~cm} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

Given, the velocity of revolution of the electron

= \(\frac{1}{275} \times\left(3 \times 10^{10}\right) \mathrm{cm} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}=1.09 \times 10^8 \mathrm{~cm} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

∴ \(\frac{2.18 \times 10^8}{n}=1.09 \times 10^8\)

or, \(n=\frac{2.18 \times 10^8}{1.09 \times 10^8}=2\)

∴ The electron is revolving in the 2nd orbit of H-atom.

Question 13. According to Bohr’s theory, the energy of an electron in n-th, \(E_n=-\frac{21.76 \times 10^{-19}}{n^2} \mathrm{~J}\) J. Find the longest Wavelength of radiation required to remove one electron from the 3rd orbit of He+ ion.
Answer:

The energy of the electron in n -th orbit of H-atom,

⇒ \(E_n=-\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{n^2 h^2}\)

[Since Z=1]

∴ \(-\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{n^2 h^2}=-\frac{21.76 \times 10^{-19}}{n^2}=21.76 \times 10^{-19}\)

Now the energy ofthe electron in’ n ‘th orbit of He+ ion.

⇒ \(E_n^{\prime}=-\frac{2 \pi^2 Z^2 m e^4}{n^2 h^2}=-\frac{2 \pi^2 \times 2^2 \times m e^4}{n^2 h^2}\)

Since Z=2.

Therefore, E’n \(=-\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{n^2 h^2} \times 4\)

∴ \(E_3=-\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{3^2 \times h^2} \times 4\)

Removal of an electron from the 3rd orbit means a transfer of electron from the 3rd orbit to n = infinite.

∴ Energy ofthe electron at an infinite distance

\(E_{\infty}=-\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{\infty^2 \times h^2} \times 4=0\)

Therefore the energy required to remove the electron,

⇒ \(\Delta E=E_{\infty}-E_3=0-\left(-\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{3^2 \times h^2} \times 4\right)=\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{h^2} \times \frac{4}{9}\)

∴ \(\Delta E=21.76 \times 10^{-19} \times \frac{4}{9} \mathrm{~J}\)

Since \(\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{h^2}=21.76 \times 10^{-19}\)

We know, AE = \(h \times \frac{c}{\lambda}\)

⇒ \(\text { or, } \quad \frac{\left(6.627 \times 10^{-34}\right) \times\left(3 \times 10^8\right)}{\lambda}=21.76 \times 10^{-19} \times \frac{4}{9}\)

[Since h = 6.627 × 10-34j-s and c = 3 × 108m-s-1 ]

Hence \(\lambda=\frac{9 \times\left(6.627 \times 10^{-34}\right) \times\left(3 \times 10^8\right)}{21.76 \times 10^{-19} \times 4}\)

= 2056 × 10-19m = 2056 Å

1 Å = 10-10 m = 20556 Å

[Since 1 Å = 10-10m]

Question 14. Calculate the energy emitted when electrons of 1.0g. An og atom of hydrogen undergoes transition emitting the spectra) line of lowest energy in the visible region of Its atomic spectrum [RH = 1.1 ×  107m-1].
Answer:

The given spectral line in the visible region corresponds to the Balmer series. For the Balmer series,

⇒ \(\vec{v}=R_M\left[\frac{1}{n_1^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right]\)

For Lowest Energy, n1 =2 and n2= 3.

∴ \(\frac{1}{\lambda}=R_H\left[\frac{1}{2^2}-\frac{1}{3^2}\right]=1.1 \times 10^7 \times \frac{5}{36}\)

The amount of energy emitted during the transition of an electron, E = hv \(=h \times \frac{c}{\lambda}=h \times c \times \frac{1}{\lambda}\)

= \(6.626 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8 \times\left(1.1 \times 10^7 \times \frac{5}{36}\right)=3.037 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}\)

∴ The energy emitted when electrons of gram-atom of hydrogen undergo transition =N0 x hv

= 6.022  ×  1023× (3.037 × 10-19) J = 18.28 ×  104 J = 182.8 kj

Question 15. The atomic spectrum of hydrogen contains a series of four lines having wavelengths 656.5, 486.3, 434.2, and 410.3 nm. Determine the wavelength of the next line in the same series [RH = 109678 cm-1].
Answer:

As the given wavelengths lie in the visible region, they should belong to the Balmer series. For Balmer series, nx = 2. The value of n1=2 the shortest wavelength (410.3nm) can be determined using the equation,

⇒\(\bar{v}=\frac{1}{\lambda}=R_H\left(\frac{1}{2^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right)\)

Or, \(\frac{1}{410.3 \times 10^{-7} \mathrm{~cm}}=109678 \mathrm{~cm}^{-1}\left(\frac{1}{4}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right)\)

Or, \(\frac{1}{n_2^2}=\frac{1}{4}-\frac{1}{410.3 \times 10^{-7} \times 109678} \quad \text { or, } \frac{1}{n_2^2}=0.25-0.22\)

Or, \(n_2^2=\frac{1}{0.03}=33.33\)

∴ N2 =6

Thus, the next line is obtained as a result of the transition of an electron from n2 = 7 to = 2.

∴ \(\frac{1}{\lambda}=109678\left(\frac{1}{2^2}-\frac{1}{7^2}\right) \mathrm{cm}^{-1}=25181 \mathrm{~cm}^{-1}\)

Or, \(\lambda=\frac{1}{25181}=3.971 \times 10^{-5} \mathrm{~cm}=397.1 \mathrm{~nm}\)

Question 16. The angular momentum of an electron in a Bohr’s orbit of a hydrogen atom is 3.1655× 1034kgm2s-1. Calculate the wavelength of the spectral line emitted when an electron falls from this level to the next lower level.
Answer:

Angular momentum of an electron in ‘n-th’ Bohr orbit of H-atom, mvr \(=\frac{n h}{2 \pi}\)

Or, \(3.1655 \times 10^{-34}=\frac{n \times 6.626 \times 10^{-34}}{2 \times 3.14}\)

⇒ \(\bar{v}=\frac{1}{\lambda}=109678\left(\frac{1}{n_1^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right) \mathrm{cm}^{-1}\)

= \(109678\left(\frac{1}{2^2}-\frac{1}{3^2}\right)\)

= \(\lambda=6.564 \times 10^{-5} \mathrm{~cm}\)

Since n1 = 2, n2 = 3

Question 17. Calculate the distance of separation between the second and third orbits of the hydrogen atom.
Answer:

The radius of the n-th orbit of the H-atom is given by \(r_n=0.529 \times n^2\)

∴ r3– r2 =0.529(32-22)Å

= 0.529 × 5

= 2.645 Å

Class 11 Chemistry Atom Structure Important Topics

Question 18. After absorbing an energy of 2.044¹∪10-19J, the electron of the H-atom will jump to which orbit?
Answer:

The energy of the electron in the n-th orbit of the H-atom is,

⇒ \(E_n=\frac{-2.18 \times 10^{-19}}{n^2} \mathrm{~J}\)

The energy of an electron in the ground state (n = 1) is

Ex = \(E_1=-21.8 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}\)

If tire electron absorbs an energy of 2.044 × 10—19 J, the total energy

= \(\left(-21.8 \times 10^{-19}+20.44 \times 10^{-19}\right) \mathrm{J}=-1.36 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}\)

∴ \(\frac{-21.8 \times 10^{-19}}{n^2}=-1.36 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}\)

∴ \(n=\sqrt{\frac{-21.8 \times 10^{-19}}{-1.36 \times 10^{-19}}}=4\)

Thus, the electron will jump to the fourth orbit.

Towards The Development Of Quantum Mechanical Model Of Atom

The limitations of Bohr’s model of the atom led to the development of a new improved model for atoms. Two significant concepts that led to the formulation of such a model were:

Dual nature of matter particles, Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle.

Dual Nature Of Matter Particles: De Broglie Theory

Both the scientists, Niels Bohr and Sommerfeld regarded electrons as negatively charged particles. However, the particle nature of the electron failed to explain some of its characteristics.

In 1905, Einstein suggested that light has a dual nature i.e., both wave nature as well as particle nature.

In 1924, French physicist, Louis de Broglie concluded that just like radiations, moving electrons or other such microscopic particles are associated with wave nature i.e., they exhibit wave nature as well as particle nature.

The wave associated with a particle is called a matter wave or de Broglie wave.

The wavelength associated with a moving particle is given by the de Broglie equation \(\lambda=\frac{h}{m v}=\frac{h}{p}\) [A = wavelength of the moving particle, m = mass of the particle, v = velocity of the particle, p = momentum of tire particle, h = Planck’s constant.] All the properties of electrons and other matter particles can be explained by its wave-particle duality.

From de Broglie equation, \(\lambda \propto \frac{1}{m v}\)

Since h=Constant i.e., wavelength \(\propto \frac{1}{\text { momentum }}\)

Thus, the wavelength of the wave associated with a fast-moving particle is inversely proportional to its momentum.

Derivation of de Broglie Equation:

The de Broglie equation was derived by using Planck’s quantum theory and Einstein’s equation of grass-energy equivalency. According to Planck’s quantum theory,

\(E=h v=h \times \frac{c}{\lambda}\)

where, c = velocity of light, E = energy of a photon, v = frequency and A = wavelength.

According to Einstein’s equation, E = mc²

Where, m = mass ofa photon, c = velocity of a photon.

From [1] and [2] we have \(\frac{h c}{\lambda}=m c^2 \text { or, } \lambda=\frac{h}{m c} \cdots[3]\) de Broglie pointed out that equation (3) can be applied to fast-moving matter particles such as electrons.

∴ \(\lambda=\frac{h}{m v}\) [m = mass & v = velocity ofthe particle]

This is de Broglie equation.

The wave associated with fast-moving matter particles is called matter wave or de Broglie wave.

This type of wave is distinctively different from electromagnetic waves.

de Broglie equation has no significance for moving particles having large mass because in such cases the wavelength of the associated wave is too small for ordinary observation.

For example, the wavelength associated with a cricket ball of mass 200 g (0.2 kg) moving with a velocity of 1 m-s-1 is—

⇒ \(\lambda=\frac{h}{m v}=\frac{6.62 \times 10^{-34}}{0.2 \times 1} \mathrm{~m}=3.31 \times 10^{-23} \mathrm{pm}\)

Such a small value of A cannot be measured.

Application of wave nature of electrons:

The concept of the wave nature of electrons is used in electron microscopes to get images of particles as tiny as 10A and for studying the surface structure of solid substances.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Differences Between Electromagnetic Waves And Matter Waves

Angular momentum of Bohr electron from do Broglie equation:

According to de Broglie, a tiny particle like an electron, revolving in a circular orbit must have a wave character associated with it. Thus, for the wave (associated with the moving electron) to be completely in phase, the circumference of the orbit should be an integral multiple of the wavelength, λ.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Angular Momentum Of Bohr Electron De Brogile

∴ 2πλ = nλ or, λ \(=\frac{2 \pi r}{n}\)

[where, r = radius of the orbit and n = an integer] From de Broglie equation \(\lambda=\frac{h}{m v}\)

[where, m = mass of electron, v = velocity of electron.]

∴ \(\frac{2 \pi r}{n}=\frac{h}{m v} \text { or, } m v r \text { (angular momentum) }=\frac{n h}{2 \pi}\)

[where, r = radius of the orbit and n = an integer] From de Broglie Equation

⇒ \(\lambda=\frac{h}{m v}\)

This is the same relation as predicted by Bohr.

Circumference of the electronic orbit and the wavelength associated with the electronic motion:

From Bohr’s theory, angular momentum of an electron revolving in a circular orbit is an integral multiple of \(\frac{h}{2 \pi} \text { i.e., } m v r=\frac{n h}{2 \pi}\) orbit is an integral multiple of \(\frac{h}{2 \pi} \text { i.e., } m v r=\frac{n h}{2 \pi}\)

or, \(m v=\frac{n h}{2 \pi r}\)

r = radius ofthe orbit, v = velocity ofelectron. From de Broglie equation, \(\lambda=\frac{h}{m v} \quad \text { or, } m v=\frac{h}{\lambda}\)

[where λ = wavelength associated with moving electron.]
From [1] and [2] we have, \(\frac{n h}{2 \pi r}=\frac{h}{\lambda} \quad \text { or, } 2 \pi r=n \lambda\) or, 2πr = nλ

So, the circumference of the electronic orbit is an integral multiple of the wavelengths associated with the motion of electrons.

The kinetic energy of a moving particle and the de Broglie wavelength associated with it:

Kinetic energy(E) of a particle (mass = m) moving with velocity v is given by,

\(E=\frac{1}{2} m v^2 \quad \text { or, } m E=\frac{1}{2} m^2 v^2 \quad \text { or, } m v=\sqrt{2 m E}\) …………………..(1)

From de Broglie equation \(\lambda=\frac{h}{m \nu} \quad \text { or, } m v=\frac{h}{\lambda}\)…………………..(2)

[λ = wavelength associated with the moving particle] From 1 and 2 we have

⇒ \(\frac{h}{\lambda}=\sqrt{2 m E} \text { or, } \lambda=\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m E}}\) …………………..(3)

Calculation of de Broglie wavelength of the electron from the potential applied:

If an accelerating potential V is applied to an electron beam, the energy acquired by each electron

= e (charge in coulomb)×  V(potential in volt)

= eV electron – volt

This energy becomes the kinetic energy of the electron.

∴ \(\frac{1}{2} m v^2=e V \quad \text { or, } \quad v=\sqrt{\frac{2 e V}{m}}\)

Substituting the values of h, m, and e in equation [1], we get \(\lambda=\frac{1.226 \times 10^{-9}}{\sqrt{V}} \mathrm{~m}\)

In place of the electron, if any other charged particle carrying Q coulomb is accelerated under a potential difference of V volt, then kinetic energy = QV. Hence \(\lambda=\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m Q V}}\)

Numerical Examples

Question 1. Calculate the wavelength of the de Broglie wave associated with an electron moving with a velocity of 2.05 x 107m-s-1
Answer:

From de Broglie equation:

⇒ \(\lambda=\frac{h}{m v}\)

Where λ = wavelength , m = mass ofthe electron, v = velocity of the electron,

⇒ \(\lambda=\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}{\left(9.11 \times 10^{-31}\right) \times\left(2.05 \times 10^7\right)}\)

= \(3.548 \times 10^{-11} \mathrm{~m}\)

Question 2. Calculate the velocity of an electron having de Broglie wavelength of 200A \(\left[m=9.11 \times 10^{-31} \mathrm{~kg}, h=6.626 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{~J} \cdot \mathrm{s}\right]\)
Answer:

According to de Broglie equation, \(\lambda=\frac{h}{m v}\)

∴ \(v=\frac{h}{m \lambda}=\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{~kg} \cdot \mathrm{m}^2 \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}}{\left(9.11 \times 10^{-31} \mathrm{~kg}\right) \times\left(200 \times 10^{-10} \mathrm{~m}\right)}\)

= 3.64 ×  × 10 34 m.s

[Since 1Å =1010m]

Question 3. Calculate the ratio of velocities of a moving electron to that of a proton associated with the same de Broglie wavelength. [mg = 9.11 × 10-31 kg, mp = 1.67 × 10-27 kg, h = 6.626 × 10-34 J.s]
Answer:

As given in the question, Ae = Ap

∴ \(\frac{h}{m_e \nu_e}=\frac{h}{m_p \nu_p}\)

∴ \(\frac{v_e}{v_p}=\frac{m_p}{m_e}=\frac{1.67 \times 10^{-27}}{9.11 \times 10^{-31}}=1833\)

Question 4. Calculate the momentum of the particle which has a de Broglie wavelength of O.lA
Answer:

⇒ \(\lambda=\frac{h}{m v}\)

∴ \(m v=\frac{h}{\lambda}=\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{~kg} \cdot \mathrm{m}^2 \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}}{0.1 \times 10^{-10} \mathrm{~m}}\)

= 6.626 ×10  23kg-m-s-1.

Since 1A= 10-10m]

Question 5. Calculate the de Broglie wavelength of a proton that is moving with a kinetic energy of 5 x 10-23J.
Answer:

Mass of a proton = 1.67 x 10-27kg

Kinetic energy of a proton =5 x 10 23J

∴ \(\frac{1}{2} m v^2=5 \times 10^{-23}\)

Or, \(\frac{1}{2} \times 1.67 \times 10^{-27} \times v^2=5 \times 10^{-23}\)

∴ \(v=\left(\frac{10 \times 10^{-23}}{1.67 \times 10^{-27}}\right)^{1 / 2}=244.7 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

∴ \(\lambda=\frac{h}{m \nu}=\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}{1.67 \times 10^{-27} \times 244.7}=1.62 \times 10^{-9} \mathrm{~m}\)

∴ \(\lambda=\frac{h}{m \nu}=\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}{1.67 \times 10^{-27} \times 244.7}=1.62 \times 10^{-9} \mathrm{~m}\)

Question 6. Calculate the de Broglie wavelength of an electron moving With A speed that is 1% of the speed of light.
Answer:

⇒ \(\lambda=\frac{h}{m v}\)

=\(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}{\left(9.11 \times 10^{-31}\right) \times\left(3 \times 10^8 \times \frac{1}{100}\right)} \)

= \(2.42 \times 10^{-10} \mathrm{~m}\)

Question 7. Calculate the kinetic energy of an a- -particle that has a de Broglie wavelength of 8 pm.
Answer:

Mass of an a -particle \(=\frac{4 \times 10^{-3}}{6.022 \times 10^{23}} \mathrm{~kg}=6.64 \times 10^{-27} \mathrm{~kg}\)

⇒ \(\lambda=\frac{h}{m v} \text { or, } v=\frac{h}{m \lambda}=\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}{\left(6.64 \times 10^{-27}\right) \times\left(8 \times 10^{-12}\right)}\)

= 1.247× 1014m.s-1

[since 1 pm = 10-121m]

The kinetic energy of the α -particle = 1/2 mv²

=\(\frac{1}{2} \times\left(6.64 \times 10^{-27}\right) \times\left(1.247 \times 10^4\right)^2 \mathrm{~J}=5.16 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}\)

Question 8. Calculate the de Broglie wavelength of an electron accelerating in a particle accelerator through a potential difference of 110 million volt
Answer:

The kinetic energy of an electron under the potential difference of of110 million volts = llOMeV =110x 106eV

∴ \(\frac{1}{2} m v^2=110 \times 10^6 \mathrm{eV}=110 \times 10^6 \times 1.602 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}\)

Or, \(\frac{1}{2} \times 9.11 \times 10^{-31} \times v^2=110 \times 10^6 \times 1.602 \times 10^{-19}\)

∴ \(v=\left(\frac{2 \times 110 \times 10^6 \times 1.602 \times 10^{-19}}{9.11 \times 10^{-31}}\right)^{1 / 2}\)

= 6.22 × 109m.s-1

∴ \(\frac{h}{m v}=\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}{\left(9.11 \times 10^{-31}\right) \times\left(6.22 \times 10^9\right)} \)

= \(1.17 \times 10^{-13} \mathrm{~m}\)

Structure of Atom Chapter 2 Class 11 Chemistry Detailed Notes

Question 9. Find de Broglie wavelength associated with a tennis ball of mass 60 g moving with a velocity of 10 m.s-1
Answer:

de Broglie wavelength, \(\lambda=\frac{h}{m v}\)

Here, h = 6.626 × 10-34 J.s-1

m = 60g = 60 ×10-3 kg = 6 × 10-2 kg, v = 10 m.s-1

∴ \(\lambda=\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}{6 \times 10^{-2} \times 10}=1.105 \times 10^{-33} \mathrm{~m}\)

Question 10. Calculate the wavelength (in nm) associated with a beam of protons moving with a velocity of 103m-s-1. [Mass of proton 1.67 ×10-27kg, h = 6.63 × 10-34 J.s-1]
Answer:

de Broglie wavelength \(\lambda=\frac{h}{m v}\)

= \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{1.67 \times 10^{-27} \times 10^3} \mathrm{~m}=0.40 \times 10^{-9} \mathrm{~m}\)

= 0.40 nm

Question 11. Calculate the wavelength of an a -particle having an energy of 6.8 × 10-18J.
Answer:

⇒ \(\lambda=\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m E}}=\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}{\sqrt{2 \times 6.8 \times 10^{-18} \times\left(4 \times 1.67 \times 10^{-27}\right)}}\)

= 2.198 × 10-12m

Question 12. Calculate the wavelength of the wave associated with an electron beam, if the beam is accelerated by a potential difference of 5000 volts.
Answer:

Kinetic energy ofthe electron = 5000 eV

= 5000 × 1.602 ×10-19J

The velocity of an electron due to the applied potential difference is ms-1. Hence, kinetic energy \(=\frac{1}{2} m v^2\)

∴ \(\frac{1}{2} m v^2=5000 \times 1.602 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}\)

= 5000 × 1.602 ×10-19  Kg.m2.s-1

∴ \(v=\sqrt{\frac{2 \times 5000 \times 1.602 \times 10^{-19}}{9.11 \times 10^{-31}}}=4.193 \times 10^7 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

[since mass of electron = 9.11 × 10-31kg]

From de Brogile Equation , we get, \(\lambda=\frac{h}{m v}\)

⇒ \(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}{9.11 \times 10^{-31} \times 4.193 \times 10^7}\)

= \(=0.1736 \times 10^{-10} \mathrm{~m}\)

=0.1736 Å

Question 13. The electron of 2 -atom in the ground state absorbs energy equal to 1.5 times the minimum energy, required to remove the electron from the hydrogen atom. Calculate the wavelength of the electron emitted, [mass of electron =9.11 X 10-31kg]
Answer:

The energy required to remove an electron from the ground state of H-atom = 13.6eV. Therefore, energy absorbed by the electron of H-atom = 1.5 × 13.6eV = 20.4eV

∴ Residual energy after removal ofthe electron

= (20.4- 13.6)eV = 6.8eV = 6.8 × 1.602 ×10-19

This residual energy is converted into kinetic energy.

∴ \(\frac{1}{2} m v^2=6.8 \times 1.602 \times 10^{-19}\)

∴ \(v=\sqrt{\frac{6.8 \times 1.602 \times 10^{-19}}{9.11 \times 10^{-31}}}\)

= \(1.546 \times 10^6 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

λ = \(\frac{h}{m v}\)

=\(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{~kg} \cdot \mathrm{m}^2 \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}}{\left(9.11 \times 10^{-31} \mathrm{~kg}\right) \times\left(1.546 \times 10^6 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\right)}\)

= \(4.70 \times 10^{-10} \mathrm{~m}\)

Question 14. Find the velocity of an electron so that its momentum is equal to that of a photon Of Wavelength 650nm.
Answer:

⇒ \(\lambda=\frac{h}{p}\) [from de Broglie Equation]

∴ If the momentum of electron = momentum of a photon, then A of electron =A of photon = 650nm

Applying de Broglie equation to electron, \(\lambda=\frac{h}{p}=\frac{h}{m v}\)

∴v =  \(\frac{h}{m \lambda}=\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{\left(9.11 \times 10^{-31}\right)\left(650 \times 10^{-9}\right)}\)

= 118.97 m.s-1

Question 15. The kinetic energy of a subatomic particle is 3.60 x 10_24J. Calculate the frequency of the corresponding particle wave.
Answer:

Kinetic energy \(=\frac{1}{2} m v^2=3.60 \times 10^{-24} \mathrm{~J}\)

∴ mv² = 2 × 3.60 × 10-24J

=7.2× 10-24J For any given wave

∴ \(=\frac{v}{v}\)

∴ \(\frac{h}{m v}=\frac{v}{v} \text { or, } v=\frac{m v^2}{h}\) \(=\frac{7.2 \times 10^{-24}}{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}=1.086 \times 10^{10} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}\)

Question 16. Calculate the mass of a photon with wavelength 3.6A.
Answer:

A = 3.2Å =3.2× 10-10m Velocity of photons (v) = velocity of light

= 3.2× 10-8m.s-1

From de Broglie equation, \(\lambda=\frac{h}{m v}\)

Or, \(m=\frac{h}{\lambda v}=\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}{\left(3.2 \times 10^{-10}\right) \times\left(3 \times 10^8\right)}=6.9 \times 10^{-33} \mathrm{~kg}\)

Heisenberg’s Uncertainty Principle Numerical Examples

Question 1. Calculate the uncertainty in velocity (m.s-1 ) of a moving object of mass 25 g, if the uncertainty in its position is 10-5m. [h = 6.6 × 10-34 J.s]
Answer:

We, know \(\Delta x \cdot \Delta p=\frac{h}{4 \pi} \text { or, } \Delta x \cdot m \Delta v=\frac{h}{4 \pi}\)

∴ \(\Delta v=\frac{6.6 \times 10^{-34}}{4 \times 3.14 \times 10^{-5} \times 0.025}\)

= \(2.099 \times 10^{-28} \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

= \(\Delta x=10^{-5} \mathrm{~m}, m=25 \mathrm{~g}\)

= 0.025kg

Question 2. An electron has a velocity of 600m-s_1 [accuracy: 0.005%]. With what accuracy can we locate the position of this electron?[mass of an electron = 9.1 × 10-31kg, h = 6.6 ×  10-34 J.s ]
Answer:

According to uncertainty principle, \(\Delta x \cdot m \Delta v=\frac{h}{4 \pi}\)

Or, \(\frac{6.6 \times 10^{-34}}{4 \times 3.14 \times\left(9.1 \times 10^{-31}\right) \times\left(600 \times \frac{0.005}{100}\right)}\)

⇒ \(\frac{6.6 \times 10^{-34}}{4\times 3.14 \times 9.1 \times 10^{-31} \times 0.03}\)

⇒\(1.92 \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{~m}\)

Question 3. The uncertainties in position and velocity of a particle arc 10-1° in and 5.27× 10-24 m-s-1 respectively. Calculate the mass of the particle.
Answer:

According to uncertainty principle \(\Delta x \cdot \Delta p=\frac{h}{4 \pi}\)

or, \((\Delta p)^2=\frac{h}{4 \pi}\)

[since \(\Delta x=\Delta p\)

Therefore \(\Delta p=\sqrt{\frac{h}{4 \pi}} \quad \text { or, } m \Delta v=\sqrt{\frac{h}{4 \pi}} \text { or, } \Delta v=\frac{1}{2 m} \sqrt{\frac{h}{\pi}}\)

Question 4. If uncertainties in the position and momentum of a moving object are the same, find uncertainty in velocity
Answer:

According to uncertainly principle, \(\Delta x \cdot \Delta p=\frac{h}{4 \pi}\)

Or, \((\Delta p)^2=\frac{h}{4 \pi}\)

∴ Δx = Δp

∴ Δp =   \(\sqrt{\frac{h}{4 \pi}}\)

Or, mΔv =  \(\sqrt{\frac{h}{4 \pi}} \text { or, } \Delta v=\frac{1}{2 m} \sqrt{\frac{h}{\pi}}\)

Question 5. Calculate the uncertainty in the velocity of an electron if the uncertainty in its position is of the order ±12pm
Answer:

According to uncertainly principle, Δx.mΔv = h/4π

Δv = \(\)

Mass of electron =9.11 ×  10-31kg

And 1pm=10-12 m

= \(4.82 \times 10^6 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

Class 11 Chemistry Structure of Atom Summary

Question 6. Calculate the minimum uncertainty in the position of a bullet of mass 2.5g having a probable velocity between 60,000,000 and 60,000,001 m.s-1
Answer:

The maximum uncertainty in velocity

Av =60,000,001-60,000,000 =l m.s-1

According to the uncertainty principle, Ax – mAv = h/mv

∴ \(\Delta x=\frac{h}{4 \pi m \times \Delta v}\)

= \(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}{4 \times 3.14 \times\left(2.5 \times 10^{-3}\right) \times 1}\)

= \(2.12 \times 10^{-32} \mathrm{~m}\)

Question 7. The uncertainty in the determination of the velocity of a dust particle (of mass O.lmg) is 4.5 X 10-20 m-s Calculate the least uncertainty in its position.
Answer:

⇒  \(\Delta x \times \Delta p \frac{h}{4 \pi} \text { or, } \Delta x \times m \Delta v \frac{h}{4 \pi} \text { or, } \Delta x \frac{h}{4 \pi m \times \Delta v}\)

Least uncertainty in determining its position,

Δx  = \(\frac{h}{4 \pi m \times \Delta v}=\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-5}}{4 \times 3.14 \times\left(0.1 \times 10^{-6}\right)\times\left(4.5 \times 10^{-20}\right)}\)

= \(1.172 \times 10^{-8} \mathrm{~m}\)

Question 8. If uncertainties in the measurement of the position and momentum of an electron are found to be equal in magnitude, then what is the uncertainty in the measurement of velocity? Comment on the result.
Answer:

According to uncertainty principle, \(\Delta x \times \Delta p=\frac{h}{2 \pi}\)

Given, Δx =Δp

∴ \((\Delta p)^2=\frac{h}{4 \pi} \text { or, } \Delta p=\sqrt{\frac{h}{4 \pi}}\)

Or, \(m \Delta v=\sqrt{\frac{h}{4 \pi}}, \text { or } \Delta v=\frac{1}{m} \sqrt{\frac{h}{4 \pi}}\)

= \(\frac{1}{9.11 \times 10^{-31}} \sqrt{\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}{4 \times 3.14}}=7.97 \times 10^{12} \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

Question 9. Calculate the product of uncertainties in the position and velocity of an electron of mass 9.1 X 10-31kg, according to Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle.
Answer:

According to uncertainty principle, \(\Delta x \cdot \Delta p=\frac{h}{4 \pi}\)

Or, \(\Delta x \cdot m \Delta v=\frac{h}{4 \pi} \quad \text { or, } \Delta x \cdot \Delta v=\frac{h}{4 \pi m}\)

=  \(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{~kg} \cdot \mathrm{m}^2 \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}}{4 \times 3.14 \times 9.11 \times 10^{-31} \mathrm{~kg}}\)

= \(5.79 \times 10^{-5} \mathrm{~m}^2 \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

Shapes Of Orbitals From Wave Function

It has been stated earlier that the three-dimensional space around the nucleus in which the probability of finding an electron is maximum is called an orbital.

To obtain a clear idea about the shapes of orbitals, we will first discuss the variation of—

  1. The radial part of the wave function,
  2. Square of the radial wave function, and
  3. Radial distribution function with an increase in distance from the nucleus.

Variation Of Radial Part Of Wave Function With Distance From The Nucleus

Schrodinger wave equation for the electron in a one-electron atom (H-atom) can be solved to get different expressions for wave function \((\psi)\) for different orbitals.

The orbital wave function for an electron in an atom has no physical meaning. It is simply a mathematical function of the coordinates of the electron.

However, for different orbitals the plots of the radial part of the corresponding wave functions as a function of r (distance from the nucleus) are different. depicts such plots for Is, 2s, 2p and 3s orbitals.

For is -orbital, the radial part of the wave function [ψ(r) or R] decreases sharply with increasing distance, r, from the dying nucleus.

For 2s -orbital ψ (r) or R, decreases sharply in the beginning, becomes zero at a particular distance, and then becomes negative as r increases.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Plot Of DIfference From The Nucleus (r) Verus

FM 3s-orbilal \(\psi\). decreases sharply in the Beginning with an Increase In r, becomes zero At A Particcular Distance, And Then Becomes negative. On Further Increases In \(r, \psi(r)\) again becomes zero and finally becomes positive.

For 2p -orbital if \(\psi(r)\) rises from zero to a maximum, then decreases with increasing distance (r) from the nucleus. On further increase in distance, ifr(r) approaches almost zero.

For 3p -orbital,\(\psi(r)\) rises from zero and attains a maximum value. On further increase in ψ(r) begins to decrease and becomes zero at a particular distance. Then it becomes negative with a further increase in r.

Characteristic features observed in the plots of r vs Ψ(r):

  1. The radial part of the wave functions for 2s, 3s, 3p, etc. orbitals can be positive or negative depending upon the distance (r) from the nucleus. These are not related to the positive and negative charges.
  2. For each orbital, the radial part of the wave function Ψ(r) approaches zero as r→∞.
  3. For 2s, 3s, and 3p -orbitals, one common feature for the variation of wave function Ψ(r)) with distance is that Ψ(r) becomes zero at a finite distance from the nucleus. However, for different orbitals if Ψ(r) becomes zero at different distances Ψ(r).
  4. The distance Ψ(r) at which becomes zero is called a nodal point radial node or simply node. At the nodal point, the radial wave function if Ψ(r) changes its sign from positive to negative or vice versa.
  5. For different orbitals, the number of radial nodes =(n-1-1).
  6. This indicates that the number of radial nodes is determined by the values of the principal quantum number ( n) and azimuthal quantum number (Z) of the orbital under consideration.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Number of radial nodes

There is no relation between the positive and negative values of the wave function with the positive and negative charges.

Radial probability density [Ψ²(r) Or R²] graphs variation Of the square Of Radical Wave Function With Distance From The nucleus (r)

The square of the radial wave function, Ψ²(r) or R2 for an orbital gives the radial density.

According to the German physicist, Max Bom, the radial density, Ψ²(r) at a point gives the probability density of the electron at that point along a particular radial line.

The variation of Ψ²(r) as a function of r for different orbitals is given in the figure. The nature of these curves is different for different orbitals.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Graph Of Electron Probability

For Is -orbital, probability density is maximum near the nucleus (r≈0) and decreases sharply as we move from it.

For 2s -orbital the probability density is maximum near the nucleus (r≈0).

With increasing distance, Ψ2(r) first decreases sharply to zero and starts increasing again. After reaching a small maxima it decreases again and approaches zero as the value of r increases further.

The intermediate region (a spherical shell) where this probability density reduces to zero is called the nodal surface or simply node.

In general ns -orbital has (n- 1) nodes. Thus, the number of nodes for 2s -orbital is one, two for 3s and so on, i.e., the number of nodes increases with an increase of principal quantum number n.

The probability density variation for Is and 2s orbitals can be visualized in terms of charge cloud diagrams. In these diagrams, the density of the dots in a region represents the electron probability density in that region.

For 2p- Orbital Probability Density Is zero at r = 0. However, with increasing distance, it begins to increase and reaches a maximum and then decreases gradually as the distance (r) from the nucleus increases and ultimately approaches zero.

From similar plots of various orbitals, it has been found that all orbitals except s, have zero electron density at r = 0.

Radial probability distribution curve: Variation of radial distribution function (RDF) with distance from the nucleus (r)

The plot of Ψ²(r) versus r gives the probability density for the electron around the nucleus. However, in order to determine the total probability in an infinitesimally small region, we have to multiply probability density if Ψ2(r) by the volume of the region i.e., probability = Ψ²(r) x dv [where dv = volume of the region].

Since the atoms have spherical symmetry, it is more useful to discuss the probability of finding the electron in a spherical shell between the spheres of radii r and (r + dr).

The volume of such a shell of extremely small thickness, dr, is 4nr2dr. So we have, Probability = R2 x 4rrr2dr = 47tr2Ψ²(r)(r)dr [since R = Ψ²(r))].

This gives the probability of finding the electron at a particular distance (r) from the nucleus. This is called radial distribution function (RDF).

Radial distribution function (RDF) = 4πr²ψ²(r)dr

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom 2p- orbital

Important information obtained from the plots of RDF vs r:

  1. For all orbitals, the probability is zero at the nucleus.
  2. If the point r = 0 is neglected, then it can be seen that,
  3. The number of radial nodes for any orbital -n-l- 1,
  4. The number of maxima (peak) for any orbital =(n-l- 1) +1 = (n-/). The peak in any curve gives the distance from the nucleus to that point where the probability of finding the electron is maximum. This is called the radius of maximum probability.
  5. All the s -orbitals, except the first one (Is), have a shell-like structure, rather like an onion, or a hailstone, consisting of concentric layers of electron density. Similarly, all but the first p -p-orbital (2p) and the first dorbital (3d) have shell-like structures.
  6. The first s -s-orbital (Is), first p -p-p-orbital (2p) and first orbital (3d) have two important characteristics—
  7. they do not contain radial nodes and contain only one maxima.
  8. Examination of the plots for Is, 2s, and 3s -orbitals shows that the most probable distance of maximum probability density increases markedly as the principal quantum number increases.
  9. Furthermore, by comparing the plots for 2s and 2p, or 3s, 3p, and 3d -orbitals it is seen that the most probable radius decreases slightly as the azimuthal quantum number increases.

Shapes Of Orbitals

The angular part of the wave function, A; m(6, 0), depends on the azimuthal (/) and magnetic (m) quantum numbers but is independent ofthe principal quantum number (n).

On the other hand, the radial part of the wave function, Rn t(r), depends on the principal quantum number (n).

Thus the principal quantum number ( n) determines the size, while the azimuthal (/)and magnetic (m) quantum numbers determine the shape of an orbital.

Shape of s-orbital:

From the solutions of the Schrodinger equation for s -s-orbital of H-atom, it has been known that the value of wave function ψ, or the probability of finding the electron ψ2 in space around the nucleus depends only on the distance from the nucleus but not on the direction.

  • In other words, there is an equal probability of finding the electron at a given distance in all directions Around the nucleus, i.e. ψ=f(r)
  • Thus all s -orbitals are spherical. For Is -orbital, RDF (the probability of finding the electron) increases as the distance from the nucleus increases and reaches a maximum value at a particular distance.
  • (This distance is 0.529A for the electron in the ground state of H-atom). Then this probability begins to decrease and becomes negligible at large distances.
  • Thus for Is -orbital, the probability of finding the electron is zero at r = 0 and also at r =∞

Like Is -orbital, 2s -orbital is also spherical.

However, 2s -orbital differs from Is -orbital in the fact that the probability of finding the electron is zero not only at r = 0 and r = ∞ but also at a particular distance between r = 0 and r – ∞.

  • In fact, for 2s -orbital, RDF (the probability of finding the electron) increases as the distance from the nucleus increases and reaches a maximum value.
  • Then it begins to decrease and becomes zero at a particular distance.
  • The spherical shell of zero electron density is called a nodal surface or simply a node.
  • After crossing the nodal surface the probability of finding the electron begins to increase again and reaches a second maxima.

This second maximum represents the region of the highest electron density in a 2s orbital. This is known as an antinode.

  • After crossing this region of highest electron density, die probability of finding the electron again begins to decrease and approaches zero as the value of r increases further.
  • Thus 2s -orbital has a shell-like structure consisting of concentric layers of electron density.
  • 3s -orbital is also spherical. Its structure is similar to that of the 2s -orbital, but it differs from the 2s orbital as it has two nodal surfaces and three regions of maximum electron density.
  • The probability of finding the electron at the 3rd maxima is the highest and is called the antinode in a 3s -orbital.
  • Thus there are two nodes before the arrival of the highest probability region. These are pictorially represented in
  • Angular wave function \(\left[\mathrm{A}_{L, m}(\theta, \phi)\right]\) for s -orbital does not depend on θ and Φ.
  • It has non-zero values (with equal magnitude) in all possible directions. So s -orbital has no nodal plane.

Points to remember: Is, 2s, and 3s -orbitals are all spherical, but they differ from each other in the following respects—

Size and energy of ns -orbital increases as the magnitude of n increases. Thus, we have Is < 2s < 3s—.

Depending on the value of n, there are different numbers of nodes in ns -orbital. Thus, there are 0, 1, and 2 nodes for Is, 2s, and 3s -orbitals respectively.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Shape Of S-Orbital (boundary surface diagram)

Shapes of ρ-orbitals:

On solving the Schrodinger equation for 2p orbital of H-atom, it has been known that wave function depends on—

  • The distance (r) from the nucleus and also the orientation of the orbital in three-dimensional space (x, y, z).
  • Probability density calculation shows that each p -p-orbital consists of two sections, which are the regions of maximum electron density.
  • These two sections are called lobes, which are on either side ofthe plane passing through the nucleus.
  • The probability density of the electron is zero on this plane. It is called the nodal plane.
  • Again, the probability density of the electron is equal in both lobes, but the wave function has opposite signs in the two lobes.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Shape of 1s, 2s and 3s- obitals

  • Now, for p-orbitals, f= 1 and hence m = -1,0, +1. Thus there are three p-orbitals in any quantum level (except n = 1 ). The size, shape, and energy of the three p -orbitals are identical.
  • They differ, however, in the way the lobes are oriented. Since the lobes may be considered to lie along the three axes x, y, and z, they are assigned the designations px, py, and pz respectively.
  • It should be noted, however, that there is no simple relation between the values of m(-l; 0, +1) and the x, y, and z directions.

The wave functions for the three p -p-orbitals are—

⇒ \(\psi_x=f(r) \cdot f(x) ; \psi_y=f(r) \cdot f(y) ; \psi_z=f(r) \cdot f(z)\)

The three p-orbitals corresponding to a particular quantum level are said to be degenerate because they have the same energy.

  • Thus there are three degenerate p-orbitals in each of the second n = 2, third n = 3, fourth n = 4, etc. quantum levels.
  • Like s -s-orbitals, p -p-orbitals increase in size and energy with an increase in the principal quantum number (n). Hence the order of increasing size and energy of various p -p-orbitals is 2p< 3p < 4p < …..
  • Now the number of radial nodes for 2p -orbital -n-1-1 = 2-1-1 = 0. Thus 2p -orbitals [i.e., 2px, 2py, 2pz) have no radial nodes.

The number of radial nodes for p -p-orbitals of some of the higher quantum levels is given in the following table.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Difference Between Cathode And Anode Rays Camprision Among orbital

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Different Orientations Of 2p- Orbitals Angular Part Of the wave function Squared

For px -orbital probability density is zero in the yz -plane. So yz -plane is the nodal plane of px -orbital. Similarly zx and xy -planes are the nodal planes for py and pz orbitals respectively.

  • It should be remembered that the number of nodal planes for any orbital is equal to the value of azimuthal quantum number l corresponding to that orbital.
  • The number of nodal planes is, however independent of the principal quantum number ‘ n ‘.

The no. of nodal planes for s, p, d, and f-orbitals (belonging to any principal quantum level) are 0, 1, 2, and 3 respectively.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Difference Between Cathode And Anode Rays Difference Between 2p- orbitals and nmber of radial nodes

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Radial Nodes For Different P-orbitals

Shapes of d-orbitals:

From solutions of the Schrodinger wave equation for 3d -orbitals of H-atom it has been known that the wave function depends on the distance from the nucleus (r) and also on two different directions in space,

For example f(f)  = f(r)-f(x)-f(y) Now, for 3d -orbital, 1 = 2. Hence m = -2, -1, 0, +1, +2.

Thus there are five d -d-orbitals in the 3rd quantum level.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Principle Quantum Orbital

These d -d-orbitals have the same energy and hence they are degenerate. These orbitals are designated as dxydyzdzx>dx2-y2 and dz2- Probability density calculation shows that the orientations of these orbitals in space are different.

The shapes of the first four d -d-orbitals are similar to each other (which has four lobes) whereas that ofthe fifth dz2 is different (which has only two lobes).

The d -orbitals for which n is greater than three {viz., 4d, 5d, etc.) also have shapes similar to 3d -orbitals, but they differ in energy and size.

dxy -orbital has four lobes, lying in the xy -plane. The hatch lobe makes an angle of 45° with x and y-axes.

The wave function for d -orbital has the same sign (either + or – ) in each pair of opposite lobes, but opposite signs (+ and – ) I in adjacent lobes, relating to the symmetry of the angular wave function.

The wave function if =0 along the x, y, and z axes indicates that the xz – and yz – planes represent the nodal planes of the d -orbital.

These planes are at right angles with each other. Similarly, dyz -the orbital has four lobes lying in the yz -plane, each lobe makes an angle of 45° with the y and z axes.

The wave function dxy =0 along the three axes (x, y, and z) indicates that the xy and xz planes constitute the nodal planes of the dyz -orbital. The planes are at right angles with each other.

Similarly, dxz -the orbital has four lobes lying in the xz-plane, each lobe makes an angle of 45° with x and z-axes. The wave function ifrd =0 along the three axes (x, y, and z), indicates that xy and yz -planes constitute the nodal planes of dxz -orbital. These planes are at right angles with each other.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Radial Nodes For Different P-orbitals

dx2-y2 -orbital has four lobes which lie along the x and y axes in the xy -plane. The wave function xy = ψ ax2-y2 along the z-axis indicates that this orbital has two nodal planes that pass through the origin and make angles of 45° with xz and yz -planes. These two planes are at right angles with each other.

dz² -orbital has two lobes (having the same sign which lie along the z-axis and contain an annular portion surrounding the nucleus in the xy-plane. This annular portion of the orbital is called the doughnut or belly band.

A conical surface passing through the origin constitutes the nodal plane of the dz2 -orbital.

F-Orbitals Schrodinger wave equation gives a set of solutions when the azimuthal quantum number f has the value 3. These are called f-orbitals. For l = 3, m has the values -3, -2, -1, 0, +1, +2, +3. Thus there are seven f-orbitals.

For the existence of f-orbitals, the minimum value of the principal quantum number, n, has to be 4, as the value of l cannot be greater than (n-l).

These seven orbitals have the same energy (degenerate) but they differ in their orientations in space. The seven f-orbitals are designated.

⇒ \(\text { as }-f_{x\left(x^2-y^2\right)}, f_{y\left(x^2-y^2\right)}, f_{z\left(x^2-y^2\right)}, f_{x y z}, f_{z^3}, f_{y z^2}, f_{x z^2} \text {. }\)

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom f-orbitals

  1. No. spherical/radial nodes in any orbital = n-1- 1
  2. No. of planar or angular nodes in any orbital = Z
  3. Total no. of nodes in any orbital = n-1

Structure of Atom Class 11 Notes

Rules For Filling Up Of Electrons In Different Orbitals

The correct ground state electronic configuration of an atom is obtained based on the following principles—Pauli’s exclusion principle, Hund’s rule, and the Aufbau principle.

Pauli’s exclusion principle

Principle:

The knowledge of four quantum numbers is important in assigning the exact location of the electron within an atom.

  • After meticulous study of the line spectra of atoms, Wolfgang Pauli in 1925 proposed his exclusion principle which is widely known as Pauli’s exclusion principle.
  • According to this principle, no two electrons in an atom will have the same values for all four quantum numbers (n, l, m, and s).
  • If three of the quantum numbers of any two electrons are the same then they must differ in their fourth quantum number.
  • If the quantum numbers n, l, and m of two electrons have identical values, then the value of s should be different (+i for one and for the other).
  • Therefore, the corollary of this principle may be stated as—each orbital can accommodate a maximum of two electrons having an opposite spin.

With the help of Pauli’s exclusion principle, the maximum number of electrons a subshell can accommodate can be calculated. For example—

s -subshell:

In the case of s -subshell, 1 = 0. Therefore m = 0. Number of orbitals in s -subshell = 1.

According to Pauli’s exclusion principle, each orbital can hold a maximum number of two electrons. So, s -subshell can accommodate a maximum of 2 electrons.

p -subshell:

For p -subshell, 1=1 and m = —1,0, +1. The number of orbitals in the -subshell is three (px, py, and pz ).

According to Pauli’s exclusion principle, since each orbital can hold a maximum of 2 electrons, the maximum accommodating capacity of p -subshell {i.e., three p orbitals)

=3 × 2 = 6 electrons.

d -subshell:

In the case of d -subshell, 1 = 2, m = -2, -1, 0 +1, +2. Thus, m has 5 values indicating the presence of 5 orbitals. As the maximum number of electrons that each orbital can hold is 2, the maximum number of electrons that a d -d-subshell can accommodate is 5× 2 = 10.

f-subshell:

For f-subshell, l = 3, m = -3, -2, -1, 0, +1, +2, +3. Seven values of m indicate the presence of seven orbitals. Hence the maximum number of electrons that may be present in f-subshell is 7 × 2 = 14.

Pauli’s exclusion principle also permits the determination of the maximum number of electrons that can be present in a certain orbit or shell.

Example:

For L -shell (n = 2), l has two values, i.e., 1 = 0 [ssubshell] and l = 1 [p -subshell].

The s -subshell can hold 2 electrons and p -subshell can accommodate 6 electrons. Therefore, the maximum accommodating capacity for L shell =(2 + 6) = 8 electrons.

Similarly, it can be shown that, the maximum number of electrons that can be accommodated in M-shell (n = 3) = 18 and the maximum number of electrons that may be present in IVshell (n = 4) =32.

Electron accommodating capacity of K, L, M, and V-shell

Thus, it is seen that the maximum number of electrons accommodated in any electronic orbit with the principal quantum number’ n’ is 2n2.

Number of orbitals and electron accommodating capacity of different shells.

Hund’s multiplicity rule:

This rule helps decide the mode of filling of the orbitals of the same energy level with electrons.

Rule:

The pairing of electrons in the orbitals within the same subshell does not take place until the orbitals are singly filled up with electrons having parallel spin.

Discussion:

The rule implies that orbitals with the same energy are filled up first with one electron and then the additional electron occupies the singly filled orbital orbital to form paired electrons (with opposite spin).

The energy order of the orbitals, the Aufbau principle, and the electronic configuration of atoms

The German word ‘Aufbau’ means ‘to build one by one! The Aufbau principle gives the sequence of gradual filling up of the different subshells of multi-electron atoms.

Aufbau principle:

The Aufbau principle states that electrons are added progressively to the various orbitals in the order of increasing energy, starting with the orbital with the lowest energy.

Electrons never occupy the die orbital of higher energy leaving the orbital of lower energy vacant.

A study of the results of spectral analysis has led to the arrangement of the shells and subshell in the increasing order of their energies in the following sequence:

Is < 2s < 2p < 3s < 3p < 4s < 3d < 4p < 5s < 4d < 5p < 6s < 4f< Sd < 6p < 7s < 5f< 6d ..

Electronic configuration always conforms to Pauli’s Exclusion Principle.

According to Hund’s rule, pairing electrons in the orbitals within the same subshell (degenerate orbitals hating the same n ) cannot occur until the orbitals are singly filled up.

The energy of the subshell increases with an increase in the value of (n + l). In a multi-electron atom, the energy of a subshell, cannot be determined only by principal quantum number (n ), in exclusion of azimuthal quantum number (Z).

The correct order of energies of various subshells is determined by the (n + 1) rule or Bohr-Bury rule.

The implication of the rule can be better understood with the help ofthe following example.

In case of 3d -subshell, (n + Z) = (3 + 2) = 5, but for 4s -subshell, (n + Z) = (4 + 0) = 4 .

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Order Of Increasing Energies Of Various Subshells

From this, it is clear that the energy of the 4s -subshell is less than that of the 3d -subshell. Hence, the electron goes to the 4s subshell first, in preference to the 3d -subshell.

If Two subshells have the same value for{n + 1), then the electron enters that subshell which has a lower value of n.

For example, for 3d -subshell, (n + 1) = (3 + 2) = 5 and for 4p -subshell, (n + 1) = (4 + 1) = 5 In this case, the electron first enters the 3d -subshell which has a.lower value of n.

The sequence in which the subshells are filled with electrons.

The figure depicts the sequence of filling up of the subshells with electrons. The electronic configuration of any atom can be easily predicted from this diagram.

Exceptions to (n+1) rule:

Exceptions to the {n + Z) rule are found to occur in the case of filling up of electrons in Lanthanum (La) and Actinium (Ac).

The values of (n + 1) in the case of both the subshells 4/ and 5d (4 + 3 = 7 = 5 + 2) are found to be the same.

Similarly the values of (n +1) in the case of both the subshells 5/ and 6d (5 + 3 = 8 = 6 + 2) are equal. So, the order of energies of these subshells is 4f< 5d and 5f< 6d.

According to the (n + Z) rule, the expected electronic configuration of La (57) and Ac (89) should be [Xe]4/15d06s2 and [Rn]5/16d°7s2 respectively.

However, the electronic configuration of La and Ac are actually [Xe]4/ and [Rn]5/°6d17s2 respectively. In other words, lanthanum and actinium are exceptions to the (n + 1) rule.

Method of writing electronic configuration of an atom 1) To express the electronic configuration of an atom, the principal quantum number (n = 1, 2, 3… etc.) is written first.

The symbol ofthe subsheU(s, p, d, f, etc.) is written to the right ofthe principal quantum number. For example, s -subshell of the first shell is expressed as Is; sand subshells of the second shell are expressed as 2s and 2p respectively.

The total number of electrons present in any subshell is then written as the right superscript of the subshell symbol.

For example, the electronic configuration, ls²2s²2p5 suggests that the s -subshell of the first shell contains 2 electrons, and the s, and p -subshells of the second shell contain 2 electrons and 5 electrons respectively. Thus, the total number of electrons present is equal to 9.

Examples: Electronic configuration of 17CL atom:

The atomic number of chlorine is 17. Number of electrons present in chlorine atom is 17.

Out of these 17 electrons, 2 electrons are present in the s -subshell of the first shell (K-shell), 2 electrons and 6 electrons in the s – and p -subshell of the second shell (L -shell) respectively, and 2 and 5 electrons are present in the s – and p -subshell of the third shell (Mshell) respectively.

Thus, the electronic configuration of the chlorine atom is ls²2s²2p63s²3p5.

Electronic configuration of 26Fe atom:

The atomic number of iron is 26. Number of electrons present in an atom of iron is 26. These 26 electrons are distributed in K, L, M, and N-shells in such a way that their electronic configuration becomes ls²2s²2p63s23pe3de4s2.

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Electronic Configuration Of 26 Fe Atom

Here the symbol signifies an orbital and the arrow sign (↑) means an odd electron and the paired arrow sign (↓↑) stands for a pair of electrons with opposite spins.

Stability of half-filled or filled subshells The electronic configurations of some atoms have certain characteristic features.

It is seen that half-filled and filled subshells are more stable compared to nearly half-filled or nearly-filled subshells.

Hence, if the (n-1)d -subshell of any atom contains 4 or 9 electrons and the ns -subshell contains 2 electrons, then one electron from the ns -subshell gets shifted to the (n-1) d subshell, thereby making a total number of either 5 or 10 electrons in it. As a result, ns -subshell is left with 1 electron instead of 2.

The extra stability of half-filled and filled subshells can be explained in terms of the symmetrical distribution of electrons and exchange energy.

Symmetrical distribution of electrons:

The subshells with half-filled or filled electrons are found to have a more symmetrical distribution of electrons.

Consequently, they have lower energy which ultimately results in greater stability of the electronic configuration.

Electrons present in the same subshell have equal energy but their spatial distribution is different. As a result, the magnitude of the shielding effect of another is quite small and so, the electrons are more strongly attracted by the nucleus.

Interelectronic repulsion:

Two types of interactions are possible between electrons of the same subshell due to interelectronic repulsive force.

Interaction due to electronic charge:

The magnitude of the repulsive force acting between two electrons situated at n distance r from each other is inversely proportional to the square of the distance between them.

Consequently, the stability of two-electron or multi-electron ions or atoms increases with an increase in distance r. Thus, die two electrons present in the d -d-subshell prefer to be in two separate d -orbitals instead of one leading to the increased stability ofthe atom or ion.

Interaction due to rotation of electrons:

Two electrons tend to remain close to each other if they have opposite spins. On the other hand, if both the electrons have parallel spin, then they prefer to remain far from each other.

The electrons occupying degenerate orbitals (orbitals of the same energy) can exchange their positions with other electrons with the same spin. In this process, exchange energy is released.

The greater the probability of exchange, the more stable the configuration. The probability of exchange is greater in the case of a half-filled or filled subshell.

Thus, the magnitude of exchange energy is greatest for half-filled or filled subshells leading to their exceptionally high stability.

This exchange energy forms the basis of Hund’s multiplicity rule. The relative magnitude of exchange energy can be calculated by the formula,

No. of exchanges \(=\frac{n !}{2 \times(n-2) !}\)

(n = number of degenerate electrons with parallel spin.)

Number of interactions in case of d4 electronic configuration

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Number Of Interactions In Case Of D4 Electronic Configuration

NCERT Solutions Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 2 Structure of Atom

Total number of exchanges for d4 electronic configuration

=3+2+1=6

Number of interactions in case of d5 electronic configuration

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Number Of Interactions In Case Of D5 Electronic Configuration

Electronic configuration of ions

When an additional electron is added to an orbital of an atom, a negatively charged ion called an anion is formed while the removal of an electron from the orbital of an atom produces a positively charged ion called cation.

1. Electronic configuration of anions:

The total number of electrons present in an anionic species is = (Z + n) where Z = atomic number and n = number of electrons gained. The electronic configuration ofthe anion is written based on the total number of electrons present in it.

Examples: 

1. Fluoride ion (F): Total number of electrons present in F ion

= (9 + 1) = 10

Electronic configuration of F ion =  ls²2s²2p6-

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Fluoride Configuration

2. Nitride ion (N³¯ ): Total number of electrons present in N³¯ ion

= (7 + 3) = 10

Electronic configuration of N³¯ ion = ls²2s²2p6

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Nitride Ion Configuration

3. Oxide ion (O²¯): Total number of electrons present in  O²¯ ion

= (8 + 2) = 10.

Electronic configuration of O²¯ ion = ls22s22p6

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Oxide Ion Configuration

4. Sulphide Ion (S²¯): Total number ofelectrons present in S²¯ ion

=(1.6 + 2) = 18

Electronic configuration of S²¯ ion = ls22s22p63s23p6

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Sulphide Ion Configuration

2. Electronic Configuration of cations:

  • A total number of electrons present in a cationic species = (Z-n) where Z = atomic number and n = number of electrons lost.
  • For writing the electronic configuration of the cation, the electronic configuration of the neutral atom is written first.
  • Then requisite no. of electrons is removed from the outermost shell. Electrons from the ns -subshell should be removed before removing any electron from the (n- 1)d -subshell.
  • The total number of electrons present in a cationic species = (Z-n) where Z = atomic number and n = number of electrons lost.
  • For writing the electronic configuration of the cation, the electronic configuration of the neutral atom is written first.
  • Then requisite no. of electrons is removed from the outermost shell. Electrons from the ns -subshell should be removed before removing any electron from the (n- 1)d -subshell.

Examples:

1. Sodium ion (Na+):

Electronic configuration of = \({ }_{11} \mathrm{Na}: 1 s^2 2 s^2 2 p^6 3 s^1\)

⇒ \(\mathrm{Na}^{+} \text {lon: } 1 s^2 2 s^2 2 p^6\)

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Sodium Ion Configuration

2. Chromium Ion (Cr3+):

Electronic Configuration of =   \({ }_{24} \mathrm{Cr}: 1 s^2 2 s^2 2 p^6 3 s^2 3 p^6 3 d^5 4 s^1\)

⇒ \(\mathbf{C r}^{3+} \text { ion: } 1 s^2 2 s^2 2 p^6 3 s^2 3 p^6 3 d^3\)

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Chromium Ion Configuration

3. Manganese ion (Mn2+):

Electronic Configuration of = \(25^{\mathrm{Mn}}: 1 s^2 2 s^2 2 p^6 3 s^2 3 p^6 3 d^5 4 s^2\)

⇒ \(\mathbf{M n}^{2+} \text { ion: } 1 s^2 2 s^2 2 p^6 3 s^2 3 p^6 3 d^5\)

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Manganese Ion Configuration

4. Ferrous (Fe2+) and Ferric (Fe3+) ion:

Electronic Configuration of = \({ }_{26} \mathrm{Fe}: 1 s^2 2 s^2 2 p^6 3 s^2 3 p^6 3 d^6 4 s^2\)

⇒ Ferrous ion (Fe2+): =\(1 s^2 2 s^2 2 p^6 3 s^2 3 p^6 3 d^6\)

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Ferrous Ion Configuration

⇒ Similarly, ferric ion (Fe3+):

Electronic Configuration of =\(1 s^2 2 s^2 2 p^6 3 s^2 3 p^6 3 d^5\)

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Ferric Ion Configuration

5. Cuprous (Cu+) and Cupric (Cu2+) ion:

⇒  Cu++ ion:

Electronic Configuration of = ls22s22p63s23p663d10

⇒ Similarly, cupric ion (Cu2+):

Electronic Configuration of =  ls22s22p63s23p663d9

CBSE Class 11 Chemistry Notes For Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Cupric Ion Configuration

Numerical Examples

Question 1. A sample of gaseous oxygen contains only 180 isotopes. How many neutrons are present in 11.2 L of the gas at STP?
Answer:

No. of neutrons present in an atom of 180 isotope

=(18-8) = 10

∴ No. of neutrons present in 11.2L of  the gas

= \(\frac{2 \times 10 \times 6.022 \times 10^{23} \times 11.2}{22.4}=6.022 \times 10^{24}\)

Question 2. Calculate the energy required for the promotion of electrons from the 1st to 5th Bohr orbit of all the atoms present in 1 mole of H-atoms.
Answer:

Electronic energy in the n-th orbit ofH-atom

⇒ \(E_n=-\frac{1312}{n^2} \mathrm{~kJ} \cdot \mathrm{mol}^{-1}\)

∴ Total energy required

= \(\left(E_5-E_1\right)=-\frac{1312}{5^2}-\left(-\frac{1312}{1^2}\right)=1259.52 \mathrm{~kJ} \cdot \mathrm{mol}^{-1}\)

Question 3. Calculate the velocity (cm-s-1) and frequency of revolution of electron present in the 3rd orbit of H-atom.
Answer:

Velocity of revolving electron present in the 3rd orbit of H atom

= \(\frac{2 \pi z e^2}{n h}=\frac{2 \times \pi \times 1 \times\left(4.8 \times 10^{-10}\right)^2}{3 \times 6.626 \times 10^{-27}}\)

Frequency of revolution ofthe electron

= \(\frac{v}{2 \pi r}=\frac{v}{2 \pi\left(\frac{n^2 h^2}{4 \pi^2 m z e^2}\right)}=\frac{2 \pi m v z e^2}{n^2 h^2}\)

= \(\frac{2 \times 3.14 \times\left(9.11 \times 10^{-28}\right) \times\left(7.27 \times 10^7\right) \times 1 \times\left(4.8 \times 10^{-10}\right)^2}{(3)^2 \times\left(6.626 \times 10^{-27}\right)^2}\)

= 2.4242 ×  1014

Question 4. Calculate the wavelength and frequency associated with the spectral line having the longest wavelength in the fund series of hydrogen spectra.
Answer:

In the case of the Pfund series, the spectral line with the longest wavelength is obtained when the electronic transition occurs from n2 = 6 to nl = 5. Thus

⇒ \(\bar{v}=\frac{1}{\lambda}=109678\left(\frac{1}{5^2}-\frac{1}{6^2}\right)=1340.5\)

⇒ \(\lambda=7.4 \times 10^{-4} \mathrm{~cm}\)

= \(\frac{c}{\lambda}=\frac{3 \times 10^{10}}{7.4 \times 10^{-4}}\)

v = \(\frac{c}{\lambda}=\frac{3 \times 10^{10}}{7.4 \times 10^{-4}}=4.05 \times 10^{13} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}\)

= \(4.05 \times 10^{13} \mathrm{~Hz}\)

Question 5. Calculate the energy of 1 mol of photons associated with a frequency of 5 ×1010s-1
Answer:

E = N0hv=  \(6.022 \times 10^{23}\left(6.626 \times 10^{-34}\right)\left(5 \times 10^{10}\right)\)

=19.95J

Question 6. The wavelength associated with a moving particle of mass 0.1 mg is 3.3× 10-29m. Find its velocity, [h = 6.6×  10-34 kg.m2.s-1]
Answer:

λ =  \(\frac{h}{m v}\)

v = \(\frac{h}{m \lambda}=\frac{6.6 \times 10^{-34}}{\left(0.1 \times 10^{-6}\right) \times\left(3.3 \times 10^{-29}\right)}\)

= \(200 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

Question 7. Calculate the kinetic energy of a moving electron associated with a wavelength of 4.8 pm.
Answer:

v = \(\frac{h}{m \lambda}=\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{~kg} \cdot \mathrm{m}^2 \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}}{\left(9.11 \times 10^{-31} \mathrm{~kg}\right) \times\left(4.8 \times 10^{-12} \mathrm{~m}\right)}\)

= \(1.51 \times 10^8 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

Kinetic energy

⇒  \(=\frac{h}{m \lambda}=\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{~kg} \cdot \mathrm{m}^2 \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}}{\left(9.11 \times 10^{-31} \mathrm{~kg}\right) \times\left(4.8 \times 10^{-12} \mathrm{~m}\right)}\)

=\(1.038 \times 10^{-14} \mathrm{~J}\)

NCERT Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 2 Atom Structure Notes

Question 8. Calculate the frequency and wavelength of the energy emitted when the electron jumps from the 4th orbit to the 1st orbit of the H-atom.
Answer:

⇒  \(\bar{v}=\frac{1}{\lambda}=1.09678 \times 10^7 \times\left(\frac{1}{1^2}-\frac{1}{4^2}\right)=10.28 \times 10^6 \mathrm{~m}^{-1}\)

⇒  \(\text { Frequency, } v=\frac{c}{\lambda}=\frac{3 \times 10^8 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}}{9.73 \times 10^{-8} \mathrm{~m}}=3.1 \times 10^5 \mathrm{~s}^{-1}\)

Question 9. The wavelength of the first line in the Balmer series of H-atom is 15200 cm-1. Calculate the wavelength of the first line in the same series of Li2+ ions. 10. The ionization potential of sodium is 4.946 × 102kJ.mol-1 Calculate the wavelength of the radiation required to ionize a sodium atom

⇒  \(\bar{v}_{\mathrm{H}}=R_H\left(\frac{1}{2^2}-\frac{1}{n^2}\right)=15200 \mathrm{~cm}^{-1}\)

= \(\bar{v}_{\mathrm{Li} \mathrm{i}^{3+}}=\bar{v}_{\mathrm{H}} \times z^2=15200 \times 3^2=136800 \mathrm{~cm}^{-1}\)

Question 11. The wavelength range of the visible spectrum extends from violet (400 nm) to red (750 nm). Express these wavelengths in frequencies (Hz) (Inm = 109m)
Answer:

For violet light, \(v_1=\frac{c}{\lambda_1}=\frac{3 \times 10^8}{400 \times 10^{-9}}=7.5 \times 10^{14} \mathrm{~Hz}\)

For red light, \(v_2=\frac{c}{\lambda_2}=\frac{3 \times 10^8}{750 \times 10^{-9}}=4.0 \times 10^{14} \mathrm{~Hz}\)

Thus the frequency range of visible light extends from 11.0 × 1014HZ to 7.5 × 1014 Hz.

NCERT Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Very Question And Answers

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Very Short Questions And Answers

Question 1. What is the value of the elm of an electron?
Answer: 1.76 × 108Cg-1

Question 2. How many times is a proton heavier than an electron?
Answer: 1837 times (approx.),

Question 3. Mention one similarity between isobar and isotone-
Answer: Atoms of different elements,

Question 4. What is wave number?
Answer: No. of waves in 1 cm,

Question 5. Arrange in order of the increasing wavelength
Answer: γ-ray

Question 6. What is meant by stationary orbit?
Answer: Orbits in which the energy of revolving electrons remains fixed

NCERT Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 2 Very Short Questions and Answers

Question 7. Who proposed the quantum theory of radiation?
Answer: M. Planck

Question 8. What is the value of Planck’s constant in the SI unit?
Answer: 6.626 × 10-34

Question 9. What is the value of the angular momentum of an electron occupying the second orbit in an atom?
Answer: \(\frac{h}{\pi}\)

Question 10. Mention the symbol and the mass number of an element that contains two neutrons in the nucleus.
Answer: \({ }_2^4 \mathrm{He}\)

Question 11. Why is the spectrum of H+ not obtained?
Answer: Because H+ does not contain any electrons,

Question 12. How many protons & electrons are in Hion?  
Answer: One proton and two electrons,

Question 13. From which principal energy state, the excited electron comes down to yield spectral lines in the Balmer series?
Answer: L-shell (n = 2),

Question 14. How many neutrons are present in and 20 40 Ca 2+
Answer: 20 neutrons,

Question 15. What is the nature of hydrogen spectra?
Answer: Discontinuous spectrum or line spectrum,

Question 16. Mention one ion that obeys Bohr’s theory.
Answer: He+,

Question 17. Write the relationship between wavelength and momentum of a moving microscopic particle. Who proposed this relationship?
Answer: \(\lambda=\frac{h}{m v}\)

Question 18. Indicate the limitation of Broglie’s equation.
Answer: Not applicable to macroscopic particles,

Question 19. Is the uncertainty principle applicable to stationary electrons?
Answer: Not applicable

Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 2 Structure of Atom Short Q&A

Question 20. Energy associated with which of the following waves is not quantized?

  • Electromagnetic wave
  • Matter-wave

Answer: Matter waves,

Question 21. What is an orbital according to the quantum mechanical model?
Answer: The region around the nucleus has the maximum probability of finding an electron,

Question 22. How do you specify an electron in an atom?
Answer: By using four quantum numbers (n, l, m and s),

Question 23. What is the maximum number of orbitals in the ‘j’th orbit?
Answer: n²,

Question 24. Which is the lowest energy level containing ‘g1 sub-shell?
Answer:  n = 5 (fifth shell),

Question 25. Identify the orbital with n = 4 and 1 = 0.
Answer: 4s,

Question 26. Which ‘d’-orbital does not contain four lobes?
Answer: dz2

Question 27. Which quantum electron?
Answer: Azimuthal quantum number (l),

Question 28. Write the electronic configuration of Mn
Answer: ls22s22p53s2 3p63d5,

Question 29. What is the total number of nodes in 3d -orbital?
Answer:

Total no. of nodes =(n-1)

= 3- 1

= 2

Question 30. Which subshell has the lowest screening power?
Answer: f

Question 31. Which quantum number is used to distinguish between the electrons present in a single orbital?
Answer: Spin quantum number, S,

Question 32. What are the quantum numbers used to indicate the size and shape of orbitals?
Answer: Principal & azimuthal quantum numbers,

Question 33. State the condition under which electronic energy is considered to be negative.
Answer: When the electron is at an infinite distance from the nucleus ( n = ∞ )

Question 34. What are the fundamental constituents____of atom?
Answer: Electrons, protons, and neutrons are the fundamental constituents of an atom.

Question 35. Name the element containing no neutrons.
Answer: Ordinary hydrogen atom or protium:

Structure of Atom Class 11 Very Short Questions and Answers

Question 36. Name the anode ray particle with the highest value.
Answer: The e/m value of a proton (H+ ion) has the highest value.

Question 37. What is the consequence when cathode rays strike a hard metal surface like tungsten?
Answer: X-rays are produced.

Question 38. Why is an electron called a universal particle?
Answer: Its mass and charge are independent of its source

Question 39. What is the value of a fundamental unit of electricity?
Answer: The charge carried by one electron is said to be the fundamental unit of electricity. Its magnitude is 4.8 × 10-19 esu or 1.602 × 10-19 C.

Question 40. Besides electron, proton, and neutron, name two other subatomic particles.
Answer: Positron (+1e 0 ) and Neutrino (0v0 ).

Question 41. Out of X-rays, γ-rays, and microwaves, which one has die highest and which one has die lowest frequency?
Answer:

Highest frequency: γ-rays

Lowest frequency: Microwave

Question 42. Arrange the given subshells in the increasing order of their energies: 3d, 4p, 4s, 5p, 4d, 6s, 4f.
Answer:

The sequence of energy of the given subshells is 4s < 3d < 4p < 4d < 5p < 6s < 4.

Question 43. What is the main difference between a wave emitted by an electric bulb and that associated with a tiny particle moving at a very high speed?
Answer: The bulb emits electromagnetic waves, while that associated with the moving particle is matter.

Question 44. At what distance from the nucleus is the radial probability maximum for the Is -orbital of the hydrogen atom? What is this distance called?
Answer: At a distance of 0.529Å, the radial probability is maximum. This distance is called the Bohr radius.

Question 45. In which shell(s), there is no existence of d -subshell?
Answer: There is no existence of ‘d’ subshell in K and L -shells

Question 46. Out of the four quantum numbers which one does not result from the solution of the Schrodinger wave equation?
Answer: Spin quantum number.

Quantum 47. The 4f-subshell of an atom contains 12 electrons. What is the maximum number of electrons having spins in the same direction?
Answer: Seven electrons have spin in the same direction.

Question 48. What is the lowest value of n that allows g-orbitals to exist?
Answer: For the existence of g-subshell, 1 should be 4. For a given orbital, the maximum value of 1 = (n-1). Thus, for 1 = 4, the minimum value of n should be 5.

Question 49. An electron is in one of the 3d orbitals. Give the possible values on n, l, and mI for this electron.
Answer:

For 3d-subshell, n = 3,1 = 2  and m1 = -2, -1, 0, +1, +2.

Question 50. Give the number of electrons in the species +H2, H2, and.
Answer: The number of electrons present in +H2, H2, and 2O+ is 1, 2, and 15 respectively.

Question 51. Arrange falling radiations in increasing order of frequency; radiation from microwave own amber light from traffic signal radiation from FM radio cosmic ray from outer space X-rays.
Answer: Radiation from FM radio < microwave < amber light < Xrays < cosmic rays.

Question 52.  Write the possible values of’ m ‘ for a 4/-electron. 

Answer:

For a 4f-elcctron, n = 4, l = 3. Thus, the possible value of m will be: +3, +2, +1, 0, -1, -2, -3

Question 53. How many numbers of electrons are present in one HClO4 molecule?
Answer: In one molecule of HClO4molecule, total number of electrons present in it = (1 + 17 + 4 ×  8) = 50

Very Short Questions for Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 2

Question 54. Explain why cathode rays are produced only at very low pressure of gas inside the discharge tube-
Answer: Gases being had conductor do not allow electricity to pass through them In discharge tube at high pressure.

Question 55. Mention two uses of cathode ray tubes in our daily life.
Answer: Television picture tube and fluorescent tube.

Question 56. Calculate the charge of 1 mol electron.
Answer: Charge Avogrado no, x Charge of 1 electron

⇒  (6.022 × 1023) × (1,602 ×10-19) =9.047 × 104C

Question 57. What happens when high-velocity cathode rays strike a tungsten foil?
Answer: X-rays are emitted.

Question 58. Who discovered the neutron?
Answer: J. Chadwick (1932).

Question 59.  Between proton or neutron which one is heavier?
Answer: Neutron (1.675× 10-24g) is slightly heavier than proton (1.6725× 10-24g).

Question 60. Name the experiment that helps us to determine the number of protons in the nucleus of an atom.
Answer: Moseley’s experiment on X-rays

Question 61. What is the relation between Cl and S2-?
Answer: Both have 18 electrons and hence, are isoelectronic

Question 62. Mention the most important application of the de Broglie concept.
Answer: The de-Broglie concept is utilized in the construction of an electron microscope used for the measurement of the size of very small objects.

Question 63. Identify the relation between the nuclides, 14Si38 & 15P31.
Answer: The number of neutrons in the nuclides is the same. Thus, they are isotones.

Question 64. A cation M3+ has 23 electrons. Find the atomic no. of M.
Answer: Number of electrons present in the neutral M-atom.

Question 65. Mention any three phenomena that can be explained with the help of the wave theory of light.
Answer: Interference, diffraction, polarisation.

Question 66. Differentiate between a quantum and a photon.
Answer:

The smallest packet of energy of any electromagnetic radiation is quantum and that of light is called a photon.

Question 67. Which property of electromagnetic radiation is useful in explaining the phenomena involving energy transfer?
Answer: Particle nature of electromagnetic radiation

Question 68. An electron beam hitting a ZnS screen produces scintillations on it What do you conclude?
Answer: From this phenomenon, we can conclude that electrons have a particle nature.

Question 69. An electron beam after hitting a nickel crystal produces a diffraction pattern. What do you conclude?
Answer: From this phenomenon, we can conclude that electrons have a particle nature.

Question 70. What type of spectrum will be obtained if the electron o/Hatom approaches its nucleus inspiral pathway?
Answer: A continuous spectrum will be obtained due to the constant emission of energy.

Question 71. Name the series of spectral lines observed in the visible region of the hydrogen spectrum.
Answer: Balmer series

Question 72. Which electronic transition corresponds to the third line in the Balmer series ofthe hydrogen spectrum?
Answer: Electronic transition from the 5th orbit to the 2nd orbit.

Question 73. Name the five series in the atomic spectrum of hydrogen.
Answer: Lyman, Balmer, Paschen, Brackett and Pfund.

Question 74. What is meant by the quantization energy of an electron?
Answer: This means that the electrons in an atom have only definite values of energy

Question 75. Mint is the value of Planck’s constant in the SI unit.
Answer: h = 6.626 × 10-34J-s

NCERT Class 11 Structure of Atom Very Short Answer Solutions

Question 76. Which theory forms the basis of Bohr’s atomic model?
Answer: Planck’s quantum theory.

Question 77. Who proposed the concept of the dual nature of electrons?
Answer: The concept was proposed by de Broglie.

Question 78. Whatare de Broglie waves?
Answer: The waves associated with matter particles in motion are called matter waves or de Broglie waves.

Question 79. Write de Broglie equation for microscopic particles.
Answer: \(\lambda=\frac{h}{p}\) wavelength p = momentum of particle (mv).

Question 80. What is the relation between wave nature and particle nature of moving particles?
Answer: Wave nature \(\propto \frac{1}{\text { particle nature }}\).

Question 81. For which particles is the uncertainty principle applicable?
Answer: Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle applies to tiny subatomic particles like electrons, protons, neutrons, etc.

Question 82. Write Schrodinger’s wave equation, indicating the significance ofthe notations used.
Answer: Schrodinger’s wave equation is based on the dual nature (wave and particle) of electrons.

Question 83. What is the basis of Schrodinger’s wave equation?
Answer: Schrodinger’s wave equation is based on the dual nature (wave and particle) of electrons.

Question 84. Schrodinger’s wave equation does not give us any idea about which quantum number.
Answer: Spin quantum number (s).

Question 85. How many nodal planes are present in 5d –orbital.
Answer: Number of nodal planes in 5d -orbital = 2

Question 86. Write the expression for radial distribution Junction.
Answer: RDF = 4π²r Ψ²

Question 87. Calculate the number of radial nodes and planar nodes in the 4dx²-y² orbital.
Answer:

No. of radial nodes =n-l-1 = 4-2-1 = 1

No. of planar nodes = l = 2

Question 88. What will be the sign of 2Ψ along an axis on the two opposite sides ofthe nucleus?
Answer: The sign of Ψ2p along an axis will be opposite on the two opposite sides ofthe nucleus

Question 89. What will be the values of Ψ2px2py, and Ψ2pz When the value of r=0?
Answer: When r = 0 , the value of Ψ2px2py  and Ψ2pz, is zero (0).

Question 90. In which direction the value of Ψdxy is zero?
Answer: Along the x,y, and z-axis

Question 91. In which direction the value of  dx²-y² is the highest?
Answer: Along the x and y-axis.

Question 92. How many angular nodes are present in dxy -orbital? Identify them.
Answer: Two angular nodes are present (xz -plane and yz -plane).

Question 93. In which direction is the value ofdÿ, is zero?
Answer: Along z -the z-axis.

Question 94. How many angular nodes are possible for an orbital?
Answer: ‘V number of angular nodes are possible (where Z = azimuthal quantum number).

Question 95. Does the number of angular nodes of an orbital depend on the principal quantum number?
Answer: No, it depends only on the azimuthal quantum number.

Structure of Atom Class 11 NCERT Solutions for Short Questions

Question 96. How many angular nodes are present in s -s-orbital? Indicate the subshells present in the M -M-shell. How many orbitals are present in this shell?
Answer: s -orbital does not possess any angular nodes because the value of the angular wave function cannot be zero in any direction.

Question 97. How many quantum numbers are needed to designate an orbital? Name them.
Answer: Three quantum numbers are needed to designate an orbital, namely, ‘ n ‘ l’ and ‘ m

Question 98. Write the vdltt&Wfthe magnetic quantum number for the ‘3d ’-orbitals.
Answer: For 3d orbitals, 1 = 2. Hence the values of the magnetic quantum no., ‘ m’ are +2, +1, 0, -1, -2.

Question 99.4f-subshell of an atom contains 10 electrons. How many of Write the expression for the orbital angular momentum of a revolving electron.
Answer: The orbital angular momentum of the electron, ‘U is given by: L \(\sqrt{l(l+1)} \times \frac{h}{2 \pi}\)

Question 100. Write the expression for the orbital angular momentum of arevolving electron
Answer: The orbital angular momentum of an electron, ‘U is given by: I = \(\sqrt{l(l+1)} \times \frac{h}{2 \pi}.\)

Question 101. Why does an electron pair in an orbital have an opposite spin?
Answer: If a pair of electrons with parallel spin are present in the same orbital then they will repel each other.

Question 102. Balmer series of hydrogen spectrum lies in which region?
Answer: It lies in the visible region ofthe spectrum.

Question 103. How are the frequency and wave number of electromagnetic radiation related to each other?
Answer:

⇒ v=\(\frac{c}{\lambda}=c \times \frac{1}{\lambda}=c \times \bar{v}\)wave number \(\bar{v}=\frac{1}{\lambda}\)

Question 104. An electron beam after passing through a thin foil of gold produces a diffraction pattern (consisting of several concentric rings). What do you conclude?
Answer: Electron in motion has wage character.

Question 105. What is a quantum?
Answer: The smallest packet of energy of any radiation is called a quantum.

Question 106. What happens when an electron hits a zinc sulfide screen and what does it prove?
Answer: A scintillation is produced, which in turn proves that the electron has a particle nature.

Question 107. A scintillation is produced, which in turn proves that the electron has a particle nature.
Answer: [‘ m ‘ and ‘ e ‘ represent the mass and charge of the electron]

Question 108. Is Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle applicable to a stationary electron? Explain
Answer: It is not applicable. Since the velocity of a stationary electron is ‘zero’, (v = 0), its position can be located accurately.

Question 109. Name the series of spectral lines obtained, when electrons from various energy levels jump to the first orbit in hydrogen
Answer: Lyman series

Question 110. An atom of an element contains 29 electors and 35 n = 2, 1 = 1, neutrons. Deduce the number of protons and the electronic configuration of the element.
Answer: For an electrically neutral atom, the number of protons = the number of electrons = 29.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Fill In The Blanks

Question 1. The cgs unit of Planck’s constant is unit is _____________
Answer: Erg-s, J.s,

Question 2. The angular momentum of an electron in the nth orbit is _____________ 2+ ion.
Answer: nh/2π

Question 3. If an α -particle and two (i -particles are emitted from a radioactive element, the element produced becomes an _____________of the parent element.
Answer: Isotope

Question 4. With the help of Bohr’s atomic model, the idea of _____________quantum number was first obtained.
Answer: Principal

Question 5. Bohr’sunitatomic of Rydberg’smodel ignored constant _____________
Answer: Three-dimensional

Question 6. The unit of Rydergs’s Constant In CGS UNit is _____________
Answer: Cm-1

Class 11 Chemistry Structure of Atom Very Short Questions

Question 7. The range of wavelength of visible light is _____________
Answer:  4000°-8000A°

Question 8. The ionization potential of hydrogen is _____________
Answer:  Cm-1

Question 9. Uhlenbeck and Goudsmit introduced the concept of_____________ quantum number.
Answer: 13.54eV

Question 10. The product of uncertainties in the position and momentum of an electron is always equal to or greater than_____________
Answer: Spin

Question 11. The product of uncertainties in the position and momentum of the electron is always equal to or greater than_____________
Answer: h/4n

Question 12. The number of magnetic quantum numbers required to describe the electrons of-subshell is _____________
Answer: 1. 12.5

NCERT Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Long Question And Answers

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Long Question And Answers

Question 1. The second line of the Lyman series of H-atom coincides with the sixth line of the Paschen series of an ionic species ‘X. Identify ‘X. (Suppose the value of the Rydberg constant, R is the same in both cases)
Answer:

For the second line of the Lyman series of H-atom,

⇒ \(\bar{v}=R\left(\frac{1}{1^2}-\frac{1}{3^2}\right)\)

For the sixth line of the Paschen series of the species ‘X with atomic number Z, v \(=R Z^2\left(\frac{1}{3^2}-\frac{1}{9^2}\right)\)

Since the Second Line Of Lyman Seriea Coincides With The Sixth Line Of the Paschen Series Of The Species X We Can equate

⇒ \(R\left(\frac{1}{1^2}-\frac{1}{3^2}\right)=R Z^2\left(\frac{1}{3^2}-\frac{1}{9^2}\right)\)

⇒ \(\frac{8}{9}=Z^2 \times \frac{8}{81} \quad \text { or, } Z^2=9\)

Z = 3

∴ The Ionic Spec ies Would Be Li2+

Question 2. An element of atomic weight Z consists of two isotopes of mass number (Z-1) and (Z + 2). Calculate the % of the higher isotope.
Answer:

Let the % of the higher isotope [mass number (Z + 2) ] be x.

Hence other isotope [mass number (Z- 1) ] will be (100- x)

Average atomic weight (Z) \(=\frac{x(Z+2)+(100-x)(Z-1)}{100}\)

100Z = Zx + 2x+ 100Z- 100- Zx + x

Or, 3x = 100

or, x= 33.3%

NCERT Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 2 Long Question and Answers

Question 3. Show that the sum of energies for the transition from n = 3 to n = 2 and from n = 2 to n = 1 is equals to the energy of transition from n = 3 to n = 1 in the case of an H-atom. Are wavelength and frequencies of the emitted spectrum also additive to their energies?
Answer:

⇒  \(\begin{aligned}& \Delta E_{3 \rightarrow 2}=R_H\left(\frac{1}{2^2}-\frac{1}{3^2}\right) \\& \Delta E_{2 \rightarrow 1}=R_H\left(\frac{1}{1^2}-\frac{1}{2^2}\right) \\& \Delta E_{3 \rightarrow 1}=R_H\left(\frac{1}{1^2}-\frac{1}{3^2}\right)\end{aligned}\)

From equation (1), (2) and (3) we have,

⇒ \(\Delta E_{3 \rightarrow 2}+\Delta E_{2 \rightarrow 1}=R_H\left(\frac{1}{1^2}-\frac{1}{3^2}\right)=\Delta E_{3 \rightarrow 1}\)

⇒ \(\text { Thus, } \Delta E_{3 \rightarrow 1}=\Delta E_{3 \rightarrow 2}+\Delta E_{2 \rightarrow 1}\)

Since E – hv hence frequencies are also additive but \(E=\frac{h c}{\lambda}\) and thus wavelengths are not additive

Question 4. The Schrodinger wave equation for the 2s electron of a hydrogen atom is, \(\psi_{2 s}=\frac{1}{4 \sqrt{2 \pi}}\left[\frac{1}{a_0}\right]^{3 / 2} \times\left[2-\frac{r}{a_0}\right] \times e^{-r / 2 a_0}\) Node is defined as the point where the probability of finding an electron is zero.
Answer: 

∴ \(\text { If } r=r_0, \psi_{2 s}^2=0\)

∴ \(\frac{1}{32 \pi}\left(\frac{1}{a_0}\right)^2\left(2-\frac{r_0}{a_0}\right)^2 e^{-r_0 / 2 a_0}=0\)

The only factor that can be zero in the above expression is \(\left(2-\frac{r_0}{a_0}\right)\)

∴ \(2-\frac{r_0}{a_0}=0 ; \quad \text { or, } r_0=2 a_0 \text {. }\)

Question 5. If the uncertainty in the position of a moving electron is equal to its DC Broglie wavelength, prove that Its velocity is completely uncertain.
Answer: Uncertainty in the position of the electron, Ax = λ.

λ = \(\frac{h}{p}\) [From de Broglie equation]

∴ \(p=\frac{h}{\lambda}=\frac{h}{\Delta x} \quad \text { or, } \Delta x=\frac{h}{p}\)

According to Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle

∴ \(\Delta x \cdot \Delta p  \frac{h}{4 \pi} \quad \text { or, } \frac{h}{p} \cdot \Delta p\frac{h}{4 \pi} \quad \text { or, } \quad \frac{\Delta p}{p}\frac{1}{4 \pi}\)

or, \(\frac{m \Delta v}{m v}  \frac{1}{4 \pi} \quad \text { or, } \quad \Delta v  \frac{v}{4 \pi}\)

The uncertainty in velocity is so large that its velocity Is uncertain.

Question 6. The electron revolving In the n-th orbit of the Be3+ ion has the same speed as that of the electron in the ground state of the hydrogen atom. Find the value of n.
Answer:

The velocity of an electron in the n-th orbit of hydrogen-like species is given by, \(v_n=\frac{Z}{n} \times v_1\)

[where v1 = velocity of the electron in the 1st orbit of H-atom i.e., the velocity of the electron in the ground state of H-atom, and Z = Atomic number of hydrogen-like species]

Now for \(\mathrm{Be}^{3+} \text {-ion } Z=4 \text {, so } v_n=\frac{4}{n} \times v_1\)

But it is given that, vn = v1

∴ \(v_1=\frac{4}{n} v_1 \quad \text { or } n=4\)

Question 7. The mass number of an ion with a unit negative charge is 37. The number of neutrons present in the ion is 10.6% more than that of electrons. Identify the ion.
Answer:

Let the number of protons in the ion = x. Therefore, the number of electrons =x + 1 (y the ion contains a unit negative charge). Thus, the number of neutrons =37-x.

Number of neutrons Number of electrons

= 37- x – (x + 1) = 36-2x

Percent of excess neutrons as compared to electrons =\(\frac{(36-2 x) \times 100}{x+1}\)

Given= \(\frac{(36-2 x) \times 100}{x+1}\)

= 10.6

Or = \(\frac{36-2 x}{x+1}=\frac{106}{1000}\)

or, x = 17.04=17 [v the number of protons present in an atom or an ion cannot be a fraction]

Hence it is a chloride ion (Cl)

Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 2 NCERT Solutions Long Q&A

Question 8. Mention Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle. Calculate the uncertainty of velocity of an electron which has an uncertainty in the position of 1Å
Answer:

According to the Heisenberg uncertainty principle,

⇒ \(\Delta x \times \Delta p\frac{h}{4 \pi} \quad \text { or } \Delta x \times m \Delta v \frac{h}{4 \pi}\)

The uncertainty in position, Δx = 1Å  = 10-10m

Thus  Δv

= \(\frac{h}{\Delta x \times m \times 4 \pi}\)

= \(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}{10^{-10} \times 9.1 \times 10^{-31} \times 4 \pi}\)

= \(5.794 \times 10^5 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

Question 9. Calculate the number of electrons which will together weigh one gram. Calculate the mass and charge of one mole of electrons.
Answer:

Mass of one electron = 9.11× 10-31kg.

∴ 1g or 10 3 kg = \(\frac{1}{9.11 \times 10^{-31}} \times 10^{-3}\) electrons 9.11 ×10-31 = 1.098 × 1027 elctrons.

Mass of one electron = 9.11× 10-31kg.

So, mass of one mole of elctrons = (9.11 ×10-31kg) x (6.022 ×1023) = 5.485 × 10-7 kg Charge on one electron = 1.602 × 10-31C

Thus, charge on one mole of elctrons = (1.602 × 10-19C) × (6.022 × 1023) = 9.65 × 104C.

Question 10.

  1. Calculate the total number of electrons present in one mole of methane.
  2. Find
    1. The total number and
    2. The total mass of neutrons in 7 mg of 14C. (Assume that the mass of a neutron = 1.675 × 10-27kg).
  3. Find
    1. The total number and
    2. The total mass of protons in 34 mg of NH3 at STP.

Will the answer change if the temperature and pressure are changed?
Answer:

1. 1 molecule of CH4 contains =6 + 4 = 10 electrons. Thus, one mole or 6.022 × 1023 molecules will contain

= 6.022 × 1023× 10 = 6.022 × 1024 electrons.

2.

1. 1 mol 14C-atom = 6.022 × 1023

14C atoms = 14g

14C .One 14C -atom contains =14-6 = 8 neutrons.

∴ 14g or 14000 mg 14C = 8 × 6.022 × 1023 neutrons

2.  Mass of one neutron = 1.675 × 10-27kg.

So, the mass of 2.4088× 10-21 k neutrons

= (2.4088 × 1021) × (1.675 × 10-27) = 4.0347 × 10-6 kg

3.

1. 1 mol NH≡ l7g NH4 ≡ 6.022 × 1023 molecules of NH3.

Therefore, the number of protons present in 17g

NH3 = (6.022 × 1023) × (7 + 3) = 6.022 × 1024

Number of protons in 34 mg or 0.034 g mass 6.022× 1024

NH’3 – Hg× 0.034g = 1.2044 × 1022

2. Mass of a proton = 1.6725 × 10-27kg

Mass of 1.2044 × 1022 protons

= (1.6725× 10-27) × (1.2044 × 1022) =2.014 × 10-5kg

There is no effect of temperature and pressure.

Question 11. What is the number of photons of light with a wavelength of 4000 pm that provide 1J of energy?
Answer:

Wavelength of light (A) = 4000pm

= 4000 × 10-12m = 4 × 10-9m

According to Planck’s quantum theory, the energy of a photon

⇒ \(E=N h v=N h \frac{c}{\lambda}\)

[N= no. of photons h= 6.626 × 10-34 J-s , c = 3.0 ×108 m-s-1]

⇒  \(N=\frac{E \times \lambda}{h \times c}\)

= \(\frac{1 \mathrm{~J} \times\left(4 \times 10^{-9} \mathrm{~m}\right)}{\left(6.626 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{~J} \cdot \mathrm{s}\right)\left(3.0 \times 10^8\mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\right)}\)

= \(2.012 \times 10^{16}\)

Question 12. A photon of wavelength 4 x 10-7m strikes on the metal surface, the work function of the metal is 2.13 eV. Calculate the energy of the photon (eV) the kinetic energy of the emission, and the velocity of the photoelectron (leV = 1.6020 × 10-19J)
Answer:

Energy of a photon (E) = ,\(h v=\frac{h c}{\lambda}\)

=  \(\frac{\left(6.626 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{~J} \cdot \mathrm{s}\right) \times\left(3 \times 10^8 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\right)}{4 \times 10^{-7} \mathrm{~m}}\)

= \(4.97 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}\)

Or, energy of a photon \(=\frac{4.97 \times 10^{-19}}{1.602 \times 10^{-19}} \mathrm{eV}=3.10 \mathrm{eV}\)

The kinetic energy of emitted electron = energy of a photon- work function of a metal.

= (4.97 × 10-19– 2.13 × 1.602 × 10-19)J

= 1.56 × 10-19

J = 0.97eV

Kinetic energy of photoelctron, \(\frac{1}{2} m v^2=1.56 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}\)

⇒ \(\text { or, } v^2=\frac{2 \times 1.56 \times 10^{-19}}{m}=\frac{2 \times 1.56 \times 10^{-19}}{9.108 \times 10^{-31}}=0.34 \times 10^{12}\)

Velocity of photoelectron, v = 5.83 × 10-5m.s-1

Question 13. A 25-watt bulb emits monochromatic yellow light of wavelength of 0.57 pm. Calculate the rate of emission of quanta per second.
Answer:

Energy emitted by the bulb = 25 watts = 25 J-s-1

Energy ofa photon (E) = hv \(h \frac{c}{\lambda}\)

λ = 0.57μm

c= \(0.57 \times 10^{-6} \mathrm{~m}\)

c = \(3 \times 10^8 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

h = \(6.626 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{~J} \cdot \mathrm{s}\)

Substituting the values we get,

E= \(\frac{\left(6.626 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{~J} \cdot \mathrm{s}\right)\left(3 \times 10^8 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\right)}{0.57 \times 10^{-6} \mathrm{~m}}=3.49 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}\)

No. of quanta emitted \(=\frac{25 \mathrm{~J} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}}{3.49 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}}=7.16 \times 10^{19} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}\)

Long Questions for Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 2 Structure of Atom

Question 14. What is the wavelength of light emitted when the electron in a hydrogen atom undergoes a transition from an energy level with n = 4 to an energy level with n = 2?
Answer:

According to the Rydberg equation, wave number,

⇒ \(\bar{v}=R\left(\frac{1}{n_1^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right)\)

⇒  \(\bar{v}=109677\left[\frac{1}{(2)^2}-\frac{1}{(4)^2}\right] \mathrm{cm}^{-1}\)

[R = 109677 cm-1 and n2 = 4, n1 = 2]cm-1

Or, v = 109677 × \(\frac{3}{16}\) = 20564.43cm

λ = \(\frac{1}{\bar{\nu}}=\frac{1}{20564.43} \mathrm{~cm}\)

= 4.86 × 10-5cm = 486 × 10-7crn

= 486 × 10-9nm

= 486nm.

Question 15. How much energy is needed to ionize an H-atom if the electron occupies n = 5 orbit? Compare your answer with the ionization enthalpy of the H-atom (energy required to remove the electron from n = 1 orbit).
Answer:

⇒  \(E_n=-\frac{21.76 \times 10^{-19}}{n^2} \mathrm{~J}\)

⇒\(E_1=-21.76 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}\)

⇒ \(E_5=-\frac{21.76 \times 10^{-19}}{(5)^2}\)

= \(-8.704 \times 10^{-20} \mathrm{~J} \text { and } E_{\infty}=0\)

⇒  \(\frac{\Delta E}{\Delta E^{\prime}}=\frac{8.704 \times 10^{-20} \mathrm{~J}}{21.76 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}}=4 \times 10^{-2}\)

Question 16. The energy associated with the first orbit in the hydrogen atom is -2.18 ×  10-18J. atom-1. What is the energy associated with the fifth orbit? Calculate the radius of Bohr’s fifth orbit for the hydrogen atom.
Answer:

Energy of the first orbit (E1) = -2.18 ×  10-18J-atom-1

We know that the energy of n-th orbit (En) \(=E_1 \times \frac{Z^2}{n^2}\)

=\(-2.18 \times 10^{-18} \times \frac{1^2}{n^2}\)

For H-atom, Z= 1

Thus energy of 5th Orbit (e5) \(=-2.18 \times 10^{-18} \times \frac{1^2}{5^2}\)

= -8.72 × 10-20 J atom

Bohr radius for n-th-orbit of H-atom (rn) = 0.529 × n2A

[For H-atom, Z = 1]

∴ Bohr radius of 5th orbit, r5 = 0.529 × 52 Å

= 13.225Å

Question 17. Find the wave number for the longest wavelength transition In the Balmer series of atomic hydrogen.
Answer:

The equation used for explaining the line spectrum of hydrogen for \(\bar{v}=R\left(\frac{1}{n_1^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right)\) Balmer series, n1 = 2

As \(\bar{v}=\frac{1}{\lambda}, \lambda\) will be longest if n2 is minimum.

Thus, here n2 = n1 + 1

= 2+1

= 3 (R = 109677 cm-1 )

So. \(\vec{v}=R\left(\frac{1}{2^2}-\frac{1}{3^2}\right)\)

Or, \(\bar{v}=109677\left(\frac{1}{2^2}-\frac{1}{3^2}\right) \mathrm{cm}^{-1}\)

= \(109677 \times \frac{5}{36} \mathrm{~cm}^{-1}=1.5233 \times 10^4 \mathrm{~cm}^{-1}\)

Question 18. What is the energy in joules, required to shift the electron of the hydrogen atom from the first Bohr orbit to the fifth Bohr orbit and what is the wavelength of the light emitted when the electron returns to the ground state? The ground state electron energy is -2.18 × 5-11 erg.
Answer:

Given: energy of ground state (Ex) = -2.18 × 101 erg

Energy of n-th orbit, \(E_n=\frac{E_1}{n^2} \operatorname{erg}=\frac{-2.18 \times 10^{-11}}{n^2} \mathrm{erg}\)

The amount of energy required when an electron jumps from the last orbit to 5th orbit.

⇒ \(\Delta E=E_5-E_1=\frac{-2.18 \times 10^{-11}}{5^2}-\left(-2.18 \times 10^{-11}\right)\)

= \(2.18 \times 10^{-11}\left(1-\frac{1}{25}\right)\)

= 2.093 × 1011 erg

=  2.093 × 10-18 J

[1 erg = 10-7 J ]

The amount of energy released when the electron returns from the 5th orbit to the list-orbit =2.093 × 1011 erg

We know that, AE = hv \(=h \frac{c}{\lambda}\)

⇒ \(\frac{h c}{\Delta E}=\frac{\left(6.626 \times 10^{-27} \mathrm{erg} \cdot \mathrm{s}\right) \times\left(3 \times 10^{10} \mathrm{~cm} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\right)}{2.093 \times 10^{-11} \mathrm{erg}}\)

= 9.497 × 10-6cm

=950 × 10-8cm

= 950 Å

Question 19. The electron energy in the hydrogen atom is given by En = (-2.18 × 10-18)/n²J. Calculate the energy required to remove an electron completely from the n = 2 orbit. What is the longest wavelength of light in cm that can be used to cause this transition?
Answer:

E2 = \(-\frac{2.18 \times 10^{-18}}{(2)^2} \mathrm{~J}=-5.45 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}\)

The energy required to remove an electron completely from the orbit with

⇒ n \(n=2, \Delta E=E_{\infty 0}-E_2=0-\left(-5.45 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}\right)\)

= 5.45 × 10-19J

⇒ \(=\frac{h c}{\Delta E}=\frac{\left(6.626 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{~J} \cdot \mathrm{s}\right) \times\left(3 \times 10^8 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\right)}{5.45 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}}\)

= \(3.647 \times 10^{-7} \mathrm{~m}=3.647 \times 10^{-5} \mathrm{~cm}\)

Question 20. Calculate the wavelength of an electron moving with a velocity of 2.05× 10-7 m.s-1
Answer:

The velocity of an electron ( v) = 2.05 × 10-17 S-1 According to de Broglie equation,

Wavelength \((\lambda)=\frac{h}{m v}\)

= \(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{~J} \cdot \mathrm{s}}{\left(9.108 \times 10^{-31} \mathrm{~kg}\right) \times\left(2.05 \times 10^7 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\right)}\)

Thus, the wavelength of the electron will be 3.549 × 10-11 m

NCERT Solutions Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 2 Structure of Atom

Question 21. The mass of an electron is 9.1 x 10-31kg. If its K.E is 3.0 × 10-25J, calculate its wavelength.
Answer:

Mass of an electron (m) = 9.1 × 10-31 kg

⇒ \(\mathrm{KE}=\frac{1}{2} m v^2=3.0 \times 10^{-25} \mathrm{~J}\)

Velocity of an electron \((v)=\sqrt{\frac{2 \times \mathrm{KE}}{m}}=\sqrt{\frac{2 \times 3.0 \times 10^{-25}}{9.1 \times 10^{-31} \mathrm{~kg}}}\)

= 812 m.s-1

Wavelength of the moving electron \((\lambda)=\frac{h}{m v}\)

= \(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{~J} \cdot \mathrm{s}}{\left(9.1 \times 10^{-31} \mathrm{~kg}\right) \times\left(812 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\right)}=8.967 \times 10^{-7} \mathrm{In}\)

Question 22.

1. Write the electronic configurations of the following ions: 

  1. H
  2. Xa
  3. O2-
  4. F

2. What are the atomic numbers of elements whose outermost electrons are represented by 

  1. 3s1
  2.  2p3
  3. 3p5

3. Which atoms are indicated by the following configurations?

  1. [He]2s1
  2. [Ne]3s23p3
  3. [Ar]4s23d1

Answer: 

1. 

  1. H: Is2
  2. Na+ : ls22s22p5
  3. O2--: ls2s2p6
  4. F: ls22s22p6

2.

  1. The configuration ofthe elementwill be ls22s22p63s1; its atomic numberwill be 11.
  2. The configuration of the element will be 1s22s22p3; its atomic number will be 7.
  3. The configuration of the element will be ls22s22p63s23p5; its atomic number will be 17.

3.

  1. Lithium (Li), (Z = 3)
  2. Phosphorous (P), (Z =15)
  3. Scandium (Sc), (Z= 21).

Question 23. An atomic orbital has n = 3. What are the possible values of 1 and m1? List the quantum numbers (m{ and 1) of electrons for 3d orbital. Which of the following orbitals are possible? 1 p, 2s. 2p and 3f
Answer:

1. If n = 3 , then 1 = 0, 1, 2

When I = 0, m1 = 0; when l = 1 , m1 = -1, 0, +1 ;

When l = 2, m1= -2, -1, 0, +1, +2

2. For 3d-subshell, n = 3 and 1 = 2; for l = 2, m1= -2,-1,+1,+2

3. lp is not possible because for p-subshe,l=1. When n = 1, l cannot be 1. 2s is possible because for subshell, 1 = 0, when n = 2, 1 can be 0. 2p is possible because for p-subshell,l =1, when n = 2,l can be 1. 3f is not possible because for f-subshell, l = 3. When n = 3,   l cannot be 3.

Question 24. Calculate the energy required for the process \(\mathrm{He}^{+}(g) \rightarrow \mathrm{He}^{2+}(g)+e\) The ionization energy of the H-atom in the ground state is 2.18 ×10-18J.atom-1
Answer:

The energy of an electron residing in the nth-orbit of a hydrogen-like atom/ion is En \(=-\frac{2 \pi^2 m Z^2 e^4}{n^2 h^2}\)

Ionization enthalpy for h- atom = E∞ – E1

= 0\(-\left[-\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4 \times 1^2}{1^2 \times h^2}\right]\)

Or, \(\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{h^2}=2.18 \times 10^{-18} \mathrm{~J}\)

IE = 2. 18 ×  10-18J

Again, ionisation enthalpy of He+ ion = E∞ – E1

= 0 \(-\left[-\frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4 \times 2^2}{1^2 \times h^2}\right]\)

Since Z = 2

= \(4 \times \frac{2 \pi^2 m e^4}{h^2}=4 \times 2.18 \times 10^{-18} \mathrm{~J}=8.72 \times 10^{-18} \mathrm{~J}\)

∴ Energy required for the process = 8.72 ×  10-18J

Question 25. The longest wavelength doublet absorption transition is observed at 589 and 589.6 nm. Calculate the frequency of each radiation and energy difference between two excited states.
Answer:

λ1 = 589nm = 589× 10-9m

∴ Frequency, v1 \(=\frac{c}{\lambda_1}=\frac{3.0 \times 10^8 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}}{589 \times 10^{-9} \mathrm{~m}}\)

λ2 = 589.6nm = 589.6 × 10-9 m

∴ Frequency (v2) \(=\frac{c}{\lambda_2}=\frac{3.0 \times 10^8}{589.6 \times 10^{-9}}=5.088 \times 10^{14} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}\)

The difference in energy (AE) = E1-E2 = h(v1-v2)

= 6.626 ×  10-34× (5.093- 5.088) × 1014

= 3.313 ×  10-22J

Question 26. The ejection of the photoelectron from the silver metal In the photoelectric effect experiment can be stopped by applying the voltage of 0.35 V when the radiation 256.7 nm is used. Calculate the work function for silver metal.
Answer:

The energy of incident radiation, E = hv = work function of a metal + Kinetic energy of photoelectrons.

or, \(B=h v=h \frac{c}{\lambda}=\frac{\left(6.626 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{~J} \cdot \mathrm{s}\right) \times\left(3 \times 10^8 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\right)}{\left(256.7 \times 10^{-9} \mathrm{~m}\right)}\)

Or, E = 7.74 ×  10-19J

= 4.03eV

Since leV = 1.602 ×  10-19J)

The potential applied provides the Kinetic energy to the electron. Thus, the kinetic energy of the electron =0.35eV. So, the work function of silver metal = (4.83- 0.35)eV

= 4.48eV.

Question 27. Emission transitions in the Paschcn series end at orbit n = 3 and start from orbit n and can be represented as v = 3.29 ×  10-15(Hz) [1/3²-1/n²]. Calculate the value of n if the transition is observed at 1285 nm. Find the region of the spectrum.
Answer:

⇒ \(v=\frac{c}{\lambda}=\frac{3.0 \times 10^8 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}}{1285 \times 10^{-9} \mathrm{~m}}=3.29 \times 10^{15}\left(\frac{1}{3^2}-\frac{1}{n^2}\right)\)

⇒ \(2.33 \times 10^{14}=3.29 \times 10^{15}\left(\frac{1}{9}-\frac{1}{n^2}\right)\)

Or = \(\quad \frac{2.33 \times 10^{14}}{3.29 \times 10^{15}}=\frac{1}{9}-\frac{1}{n^2} \text { or, } 0.071=\frac{1}{9}-\frac{1}{n^2}\)

⇒ \(\text { or, } \frac{1}{n^2}=\frac{1}{9}-0.071 \text { or, } \frac{1}{n^2}=0.040 \text { or, } n^2=25\)

or, n – 5. Therefore, radiation corresponding to 1285 nm belongs to the infrared region.

Question 28. An element with mass number 81 contains 31.7% more neutrons as compared to protons. Assign the atomic symbol.
Answer:

No. of protons + no. of neutrons = mass number = 81

Let, the number of protons present in an atom = x

Number of neutrons present \(=x+\frac{31.7}{100} \times x\)

As given in the question, x + 1.317x = 81

or, 2.317x = 81 or, x = 34.96

= 35

Thus, number of protons = 35 l.e., atomic number = 35

The element with atomic number 35 is Br

∴ The Symbol is \({ }_{35}^{81} \mathrm{Br} \text {. }\)

Question 29. Neon gas is generally used in the sign boards. If it emits strongly at 616 nm, calculate the dying frequency of emission, distance traveled by this radiation in the 30s energy of quantum, and the number of quanta present if it produces 21 of energy.
Answer:

A = 616nm = 616 ×  10-19 m, c = 3 ×  10-8m.s-1

Radiation Frequency

⇒ \(v=\frac{c}{\lambda}=\frac{3 \times 10^8}{616 \times 10^{-9}}=4.87 \times 10^{14} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}\)

Distance (s) traveled by the radiation in 30 s = ext =3 x 108m-s-1 x 30 s = 9 ×  109m.

Energy of quantum

E = hv = 6.626 × 10-34 × 4.87 ×  1014

= 3.23 × 10-19J.

Number of quanta = \(\frac{\text { total energy }}{\text { energy of each quantum }}\)

= \(\frac{2 \mathrm{~J}}{3.23 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}}=6.19 \times 10^{18}\)

Chapter 2 Structure of Atom Long Answer Solutions

Question 30. In astronomical observations, signals observed from the distant stars are generally weak. If the photon detector receives a total of 3.15 ×  10-18J from the radiations of 600 nm, calculate the number of photons received by the detector.
Answer:

Wavelength λ= 600nm = 600 ×  10-9m.

Energy of phyton \(=\frac{h c}{\lambda}=\frac{\left(6.626 \times 10^{-34}\right) \times\left(3 \times 10^8\right)}{600 \times 10^{-9}}\)

= 3.313 ×  10-19 J.

Number of photons detected by the detector

= \(\frac{\text { total energy received by the detector }}{\text { energy of each photon }}\)

= \(\frac{3.15 \times 10^{-18} \mathrm{~J}}{3.313 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}}=9.15 \approx 10 \text { photons. }\)

Question 31. Lifetimes of the molecules in the excited states are often measured by using a pulsed radiantly source of duration nearly in the nano-second range. If the radiation source has a duration of 2 ns and the number of photons emitted during the pulse source is 2.5×  1015, calculate the energy of the source.
Answer:

Frequency emission (v)=  \(=\frac{1}{\text { time period }}=\frac{1}{2 \times 10^{-9} \mathrm{~s}}\)

= 0.5×  109s-1

The energy of emission =Nhv

= 2.5 × 1015 × 6.626 ×10-34 × 0.5 × 109

= 8.2825 × 1010 J.

Question 32. The work function for the cesium atom is 1.9 eV. Calculate

  1. The threshold wavelength and
  2. The threshold frequency of the radiation. If the cesium element is irradiated with a wavelength of 500 nm, calculate the kinetic energy and the velocity of the ejected photoelectron.

Answer:

The work function of cesium ( w0) = h0= 1.9eV

∴ Threshold frequency, v0 \(=\frac{1.9 \mathrm{eV}}{h}=\frac{1.9 \times 1.602 \times 10^{-19}}{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{~J} \cdot \mathrm{s}}\)

Or, v0= 4.59 ×  1014 s-1

[since leV = 1.602 × 10-19J]

Again, threshold wavelength (A0) = c/v0

= \(\frac{3 \times 10^8 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}}{4.59 \times 10^{14} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}}\)

= \(6.536 \times 10^{-7} \mathrm{~m}\)

1. Thus threshold wavelength of cesium = 6.536 × 10-7m

= 654 × 10-9m = 654nm

2.Threshold frequency = 4.59 × 1014s-1Kinetic energy (KE) of the emitted electron

⇒ \(\frac{1}{2} m v^2=h v-w_0=\left(h v-h v_0\right)=h c\left(\frac{1}{\lambda}-\frac{1}{\lambda_0}\right)\)

Or, Kinetic energy (KE)

= \(\left(6.626 \times 10^{-34}\right)\left(3 \times 10^8\right)\left(\frac{1}{500 \times 10^{-9} \mathrm{~m}}-\frac{1}{654 \times 10^{-9} \mathrm{~m}}\right)\)

Or, KE = 9.36 × 10-20J; So, the Kinetic energy of the emitted electron is 9.36 × 10-20J.

Or, \(\frac{1}{2} m v^2=9.36 \times 10^{-20}\)

Or, \(v^2=\frac{9.36 \times 10^{-20} \times 2}{9.108 \times 10^{-31}} \text { or, } v=4.53 \times 10^5\)

Hence, the velocity of the emitted electron is 4.53 × 105m.s-1

Question 33. The following results are observed when sodium metal is irradiated with different wavelengths. Calculate

  1. Threshold wavelength and
  2. Planck’s constant.

λ(nm) – v × 10-5(cm.s-1)

  1. 500 – 2.55
  2. 450 – 4.35
  3. 400- 5.35

Answer:

1. Let threshold wavelength = λ0nm = λ0 × 10-9m

Again, the Kinetic energy of the emitted electron.

⇒ \(\left(\frac{1}{2} m v^2\right)=h\left(v-v_0\right)=h c\left(\frac{1}{\lambda}-\frac{1}{\lambda_0}\right)\) …………………(1)

Putting the given values in (1) we get

⇒ \(\frac{1}{2} m\left(2.55 \times 10^5\right)^2=\frac{h c}{10^{-9}}\left(\frac{1}{500}-\frac{1}{\lambda_0}\right)\) …………………(2)

⇒ \(\frac{1}{2} m\left(4.35 \times 10^5\right)^2=\frac{h c}{10^{-9}}\left(\frac{1}{450}-\frac{1}{\lambda_0}\right)\)…………………(3)

⇒ \(\frac{1}{2} m\left(5.35 \times 10^5\right)^2=\frac{h c}{10^{-9}}\left(\frac{1}{400}-\frac{1}{\lambda_0}\right)\) …………………(4)

Dividing (3) by (2) we get \(\frac{\lambda_0-450}{450 \lambda_0} \times \frac{500 \lambda_0}{\lambda_0-500}=\left(\frac{4.35}{2.55}\right)^2\)

Or, λ0 = 530.88=531 nm

2. Substituting the value of λ0 in (4) we have

⇒ \(\frac{1}{2} \times\left(9.108 \times 10^{-31}\right) \times\left(5.35 \times 10^5\right)^2\)

=\(\frac{h \times 3 \times 10^8}{10^{-9}}\left(\frac{1}{400}-\frac{1}{531}\right) \quad \text { or, } h=7.045 \times 10^{-34}\)

Value of Planck’s constant obtained = 7.045 ×  10-34 J.s

Question 34. If the photon of the wavelength 150 pm strikes an atom and one of its inner bound electrons is ejected out with a velocity of 1.5× 107 m.s1, calculate the energy with which it is bound to the nucleus.
Answer:

The energy of an incident photon

⇒\(\frac{h c}{\lambda}=\frac{\left(6.626 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{~J} \cdot \mathrm{s}\right) \times\left(3 \times 10^8 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\right)}{\left(150 \times 10^{-12} \mathrm{~m}\right)}\)

= 1.3252 × 10-15 J

= 13.252 × 10-16 J

Kinetic energy of emitted  electron \(\left(\frac{1}{2} m v^2\right)\)

= \(\frac{1}{2} \times\left(9.108 \times 10^{-31} \mathrm{~kg}\right) \times\left(1.5 \times 10^7 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\right)^2\)

= 1.025× 10-16 J

So, the energy with which the electron was bound to the

nucleus =(13.252 × 10-16 – 1.025 × 10-16 )J

= 12.227 × 10-16 J = 7.632 ¹ 103eV

Structure of Atom Chapter 2 Class 11 Long Answer Solutions

Question 35. Calculate the wavelength for the emission transition if it starts from the orbit having a radius of 1.3225 nm and ends at 211.6 pm. Name the series to which this transition belongs and the region of the spectrum.
Answer:

For a 1 electron system, the radius of the n-th orbit \(=\frac{52.9 n^2}{Z}\) pm

The radius of the orbit from which the transition of the electron occurs

= 1.3225nm = 1322.5pm \(=\frac{52.9 n_1^2}{Z}\)

The radius ofthe orbit to which the electron is added.

⇒ \(r_2=211.6 \mathrm{pm}=\frac{52.9 n_2^2}{Z}\)

⇒  \(\text { So, } \frac{r_1}{r_2}=\frac{1322.5}{211.6}=\frac{n_1^2}{n_2^2} \text { or, } \frac{n_1}{n_2}=2.5\)

When n1 = 5 and n2 = 2, the equation obtained for n1 and n2 is satisfied. Thus, the transition occurs from n = 5 to n = 2 and belongs to the Balmer series.

∴ Wave number (v) = 109677 \(\times\left(\frac{1}{2^2}-\frac{1}{5^2}\right)\)

= 2.3 × 104cm-1. and wavelength \((\lambda)=\frac{1}{\bar{v}}=\frac{1}{2.3 \times 10^4} \mathrm{~cm}\)

= 4.35 × 10-5cm

= 435nm

Thus, it lies in the visible region.

Question 36. If the velocity of the electron in Bohr’s first orbit is 2.19 ×  106m.s-1, calculate the de Broglie wavelength associated with it.
Answer:

v = \(2.19 \times 10^6 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

m = \(9.108 \times 10^{-31} \mathrm{~kg}\)

λ = \(\frac{h}{m u}=\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{~kg} \cdot \mathrm{m}^2 \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}}{\left(9.108 \times 10^{-31} \mathrm{~kg}\right) \times\left(2.19 \times 10^6 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\right)}\)

= \(3.32 \times 10^{-10} \mathrm{~m}=332 \times 10^{-12} \mathrm{~m}\)

= 332pm

Question 37. The velocity associated with a proton moving in a j potential difference of 1000 V is 4.37 × 10-3m.s-1. If the hockey ball of mass 0.1 kg is moving with this velocity, calculate the wavelength associated with this velocity.
Answer:

Velocity of hockey ball =4.37 × 105m.s-1 , mass = 0.1kg

∴ Wavelength (λ) = \(\frac{h}{m v}=\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{~kg} \cdot \mathrm{m}^2 \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}}{0.1 \mathrm{~kg} \times 4.37 \times 10^5 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}}\)

= \(1.52 \times 10^{-38} \mathrm{~m}\)

Question 38. If the position of the electron is measured within an accuracy of ± 0.002nm, calculate the uncertainty In the momentum of the electron. Suppose the momentum of the electron Is h/(4xm × 0.05)nm, is there any problem in defining this value?
Answer:

Given, Ax = 0.002nm = 2 x 10-3nm = 2 x 10-12m According to Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle.

⇒ \(\Delta x \times \Delta p=\frac{h}{4 \pi} \quad \text { or, } \Delta p=\frac{h}{4 \pi \Delta x}\)

= \(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}{4 \times 3.14 \times 2 \times 10^{-12}}=2.638 \times 10^{-23} \mathrm{~kg} \cdot \mathrm{m}^2 \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

Again Momentum of the electron

= \(=\frac{1}{4 \pi \times 0.05 \mathrm{~nm}}=\frac{n}{4 \pi \times 5 \times 10^{-11} \mathrm{~m}} \)

= \(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{~kg} \cdot \mathrm{m}^2 \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}}{4 \times 3.14 \times 5 \times 10^{-11} \mathrm{~m}}\)

= \(1.055 \times 10^{-24} \mathrm{~kg} \cdot \mathrm{m}^2 \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

The value of uncertainty cannot be greater than the actual momentum. Thus the actual magnitude of momentum cannot m be defined in as reality

Question 39. The quantum numbers of six electrons are given below. Arrange them in order of increasing energy. list if any of this combinationÿ) has/ have the same energy.

  • n = 4, l = 2, m1=-2 ms =-1/2
  • n = 4, l = 2, m1=1 ms =+1/2
  • n = 4, l = 2, m1=0 ms =+1/2
  • n = 4, l =2, m1=-2 ms =-1/2
  • n = 4, l = 2, m1=-2 ms =+1/2
  • n = 4, l = 2, m1=-2 ms =+1/2

Answer: The orbital occupied by the electrons that are designated by the given sets of quantum numbers are,

  1. 4d
  2. 3d
  3. 4p
  4. 3d
  5. 3p
  6. 4p

So, increasing the order of their energies will be:

5<2<4<6=3<1

Question 40. What transition in the hydrogen spectrum would have the same wavelength as the Balmer transition n = 4 to n = 2 of the He+ spectrum?
Answer:

For Balmer transition, n = 4 to n = 2, for He+ spectrum, the Rydberg equation is,

⇒ \(\bar{v}=\frac{1}{\lambda}=R Z^2\left(\frac{1}{2^2}-\frac{1}{4^2}\right)=R \times 2^2 \times \frac{3}{16}=\frac{3 R}{4}\)

∴  He, Z=2

For Hydrogen spectrum

⇒ \(\bar{v}=\frac{1}{\lambda}=R Z^2\left(\frac{1}{n^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right)=R\left(\frac{1}{n_1^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right)\)

According To The Question,

⇒ \(R\left(\frac{1}{n_1^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right)=\frac{3 R}{4}\)

or, \(\left(\frac{1}{n_1^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right)=\frac{3}{4}\)

The equation (1) will be true if n = 1 and n -2.

For hydrogen, the spectrum transition is from n = 2 to n = 1.

Class 11 Chemistry Long Questions on Structure of Atom

Question 41. Which of the following subshells have no real existence?

  1. 2d
  2. 3f
  3. 4g
  4. 5d

Answer:

In the case of d -subshell, l = 2. In the second shell ( n = 2), the values of l are 0 and 1. So there cannot be any d -d-subshell In the third shell. Therefore, we can say that there Is no real existence of a 2d subshell.

In the case of f-subshell, l = 3. In the third shell (n = 3), the values of l are 0, 1, and 2. Since there cannot be any f-subshell In this shell, there is no real existence of 3f- subshell.

ln case of g -subshell, l = 4. In the fourth shell (n = 4), the values of l are 0, 1, 2, and 3. Since there cannot be any g subshell in this shell, there is no real existence of a 4g subshell.

In the case of d -subshell, l = 2. In the fifth shell (n = 5), the values of l are 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4. Therefore 5d sub-shell has real existence.

Question 42. An electron is described by magnetic quantum no.m = +3. Indicate the lowest possible value of ‘n ’for this electron. (tv) n = 4,1=0
Answer:

For an electron having magnetic quantum number m = +3, the lowest possible value of azimuthal quantum number ‘ l’ would be 3, and for an electron having 1 = 3, the lowest possible value for ‘ n’ would be 4.

In other words, the lowest possible energy level (‘n’) that the electron would occupy is the 4th shell (n = 4).

For an electron having magnetic quantum number m = +3, the lowest possible value of azimuthal quantum number ‘ l’ would be 3, and for an electron having 1 = 3, the lowest possible value for ‘ n’ would be 4.

In other words, the lowest possible energy level (‘n’) that the electron would occupy is the 4th shell (n = 4).

NCERT Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 3 Classification Of Elements And Periodicity In Properties Very Short Question And Answers

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 3 Classification Of Elements And Periodicity In Properties Very Short Question And Answers

Question 1. Who proposed the ‘law of octaves’?
Answer: Newland

Question 2. For which of the elements, the ‘Law of octave’ is not applicable?
Answer: Heavy mental

Question 3. Identify the element predicted by Mendeleev as ekaaluminium.
Answer: Gallium

Question 4. Mention the name of the group in the periodic table, which contains solid, liquid, and gaseous elements.
Answer: Group 72 or 17

Question 5. Mention the position of the alkali metals in the periodic table.
Answer: Group 1 A or 1

Question 6. Give an example of an element whose atomic mass has been corrected by Mendeleev’s periodic table.
Answer: Be

NCERT Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 3 Very Short Questions and Answers

Question 7. Who proved that atomic number but not atomic mass is the more proper determining factor of the periodicity of elements?
Answer: Moseley

Question 8. Give an example of d -a block element which is not regarded as a transition element.
Answer: Zn

Question 9. How many rare earth elements are present in the periodic table? Give an example-
Answer: 14

Question 10. Give the common electronic configuration of d-block elements.
Answer: (n-1) s1-10 ns 1-2

Question 11. Name the transition element having the lowest atomic mass.
Answer: Se

Question 12. Which element gives brick red coloration to the flame? In which block, the element is in the periodic table?
Answer: Ca, s-block

Question 13. Mention the respective block of the elements having atomic numbers 7, 11, and 22.
Answer: p,s,d

Question 14. What do you mean by representative elements?
Answer: Elements Of S and P- block’s

Question 15. Give two terminal elements of the rare earth element series.
Answer: Ce, lu

Question 16. How will you detect the starting and ending of a period in the periodic table?
Answer: By electronic configuration.

Question 17. Which block contains inner transition elements?
Answer: F

Question 18. Give an example of a transition element, which has filled d-subshellinits ground state.
Answer: Cu

Question 19. Why the ions or atoms of the transition elements are paramagnetic?
Answer: Due to the presence of unpaired d -electrons, 20. Cations of group-1A and 2A,

Question 20. Give an example of a diamagnetic.
Answer: Cations of group-1A and 2A,

Question 21. Why and Co called ferromagnetic?
Answer: They can easily be converted into magnets.

Question 22. Which element gives golden-yellow coloration to the flame?
Answer: Na

Question 23. Why Mg cannot be identified by flame test?
Answer: They can easily be converted into magnets.

Question 24. Which are called ‘noble metals’?
Answer: Elements of 5d -series (especially Pt, Au, and Hg ),

Question 25. Give the electronic configuration of the outermost shell of lanthanides.
Answer: 4f1-14 5d0-16s2

Question 26. Which of the groups in the periodic table contain all the metallic elements?
Answer: Group-2A

Question 27. Give the names of the ‘noble gas’ elements present in the second and fifth periods.
Answer: Ne, Xe

Question 28. Mention the name and atomic number of the element present in group 13 of the third period.
Answer: Al.13

Question 29. Give the electronic configuration of the fifth element ofthe first transition series.
Answer: Electronic configuration of Mn

Question 30. Identify the transition element(s): K, Mn, Ca, Cs, Fe, Cu, pb.
Answer: Mn, Fe, Cu, Pb,

Question 31. Name two elements that do not give a flame test.
Answer: Be, Mg

Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 3 NCERT Very Short Questions and Answers

Question 32. Which lanthanide elements have only 1 electron in a 5dsubshell?
Answer: Lu

Question 33. Write the outermost electronic configuration of chalcogens.
Answer: ns2 np4

Question 34. What will be the position in the periodic table of the element having electronic configuration ls22s22p4?
Answer: Second period, Grop -16

Question 35. Mention the position of the pnictogens in the long form of the periodic table.
Answer: 15

Question 37. Which element has the highest oxidizing property?
Answer: Fluorine

Question 38. Give one example of each metal, nonmetal, or metalloid presenting the p-block of the periodic table.
Answer: Pb.N.As

Question 39. Give the names of two non-metals present in s -block of the periodic table.
Answer: H2.He

Question 40. What is the unit of electron affinity?
Answer: Kj-mol-1

Question 41. Is the value of the electron affinity of an element zero?
Answer: Yes

Question 42. Between Fe2+ and Fe3+, which is smaller in size, and 6. Why?
Answer: Fe3+, Z/e ratio is higher,

Question 43. Which element of each pair has higher electron affinity?

  • Br, Cl
  • F, Cl
  • O, S

Answer:

  • Cl
  • Cl
  • S

Question 44. The first ionization potential of carbon is 11.2 eV. State whether the value of the first ionization potential of silicon is the same or greater or less than that of carbon
Answer: Lower

Question 45. Arrange s,p,d & f-subshells according to the screening power.
Answer: S>p>d> f

Question 46. Which element has the lowest ionization potential?
Answer: Cs

Question 47. Which element has the highest ionization potential?
Answer: He

Question 48. What is the unit of ionization potential?
Answer: eV atom-1

Question 49. What is the change observed in the covalent character of the oxides of the elements starting from Na to Cl in the third period?
Answer: Increases

Question 50. Arrange the following in increasing order of ionic radius: Na+, F, O2-, Al3+, N3-.
Answer: Al3+ < Na+ < F < O2- < N3-

Question 51. Why does nitrogen have a higher ionization enthalpy than that of Oxygen? Arrange the following in increasing order of acidity: NO2, Al2O3, SiO2, CIO2
Answer: Na < Al< Mg < Si

Question 52. What will be the order of, Mg, Al, and SI in terms of the first ionization enthalpy?
Answer: Mg2+ < Na+ < F < O2-

Question 53. Arrange the following ions in ascending order of radius: Na+, F, O2-, Mg2+.
Answer: Mg2+ < Na+ <F < O2-

Question 54. Arrange Mg, Al, Si, and Na in the increasing order of their ionization potentials.
Answer: Na < Al < Mg < Si

Question 55. How many periods and groups are there in the present form (i.e., long form) of the periodic table?
Answer: 7 periods and 18 groups

Question 56. Which group ofthe long form of the periodic table contains solid, liquid, and gaseous elements?
Answer: Group-17.

Question 57. Identify the following as acidic, basic, or amphoteric oxides: BeO, Al2O3
Answer:

Acidic oxide: SiO, basic Oxide: CaO, Amphoteric oxides: BeO, Al2O3.

Question 58. Between XaOH and CsOH, which one is more basic and why?
Answer:

CsOH is more basic than NaOH because the electronegativity of Cs is more electropositive than Na.

Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Class 11 Very Short Questions

Question 59. Write down the names ofthe coinage metals and indicate their positions in the long form ofthe periodic table.
Answer: Cu, Ag, Au (periods 4, 5, & 6 in group 11).

Question 60. Indicate the period that contains the first series of transition elements.
Answer: 4th period.

Question 61. Which block in the periodic table contains metals, nonmetals, and metalloids? Give three examples of metalloids.
Answer: p -block; Si, Ge, As

Question 62. Write the IUPAC name and symbol of the element with atomic number 135.
Answer:

IUPAC name: Untripentium; Symbol: Utp

Question 63. Arrange the following elements in decreasing order of their atomic radius: Na, H, Si, S, P, Cl
Answer: Na > Si > P > S > Cl > H

Question 64. Indicate the largest and smallest species among the following: Mg, Al, Mg2+, Al3++
Answer:

Largest: Mg

Smallest: Al3+

Question 65. Arrange the following compounds in increasing order of their reducing: NH3, PH3, and AsH3
Answer: NH3 < pH2< AsH3

Question 66. Classify as basic, amphoteric, or acidic: BeO, Al2O3, CaO, SiO2
Answer:

BeO, Al2O3: Amphoteric

CaO: Basic

SiO2: Acidic

Question 67. Write the names ofthe smallest cation and anion.
Answer: H+ and H

Question 68. Mention the names of two noble metals and indicate their positions in the periodic table.
Answer: Pt and Au. In the periodic table, they are present in the 6th period in the 10th and 11th groups respectively.

Question 69. Based on atomic number and position in the periodic table arrange the following elements in decreasing order of their metallic character: Si, Na, Mg, P, Be.
Answer: Na > Mg > Be > Si > P

Very Short Questions for Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 3

Question 70. Arrange in increasing order of oxidizing power: F, Br, Cl, I
Answer: I < Br < Cl < F

Question 71. The atom of an element has the electronic configuration ls22s22p63s23p5. Identify a metal or non-metal.
Answer: Non-metal

Question 72. Which is most acidic: S3, P2O5, ZnO, Na2O?
Answer: SO3 is the most acidic compound.

Question 73. Which is most basic: SiO2, MgO, Al2O3, Na2O?
Answer: Na2O is the most basic compound

Question 74. For which elements, Newlands’ law of octaves is not applicable?
Answer: Heavier elements beyond Ca

Question 75. Which periods in Mendeleev’s periodic table (modified form) do not contain subgroups?
Answer: Periods 1, 2 and 3

Question 76. How many periods and groups are there in the present form (i.e., long form) of the periodic table?
Answer: 7 periods and 18 groups

Question 77. Write down the names ofthe coinage metals and indicate their positions in the long form ofthe periodic table.
Answer: Cu, Ag, Au (periods 4, 5, & 6in group 11).

Question 78. Mention the names of the first member of each of the first, second, and third series of transition elements.
Answer: Scandium (Sc), Yttrium (Y), and Lanthanum (La)

Question 79. Mention the names of the first and last members of the actinide series.
Answer: Thorium (Th) and Lawrencium (Lr).

Question 80. What are pnictogens and chalcogens?
Answer: Gr-15 elements: pnictogens; Gr-16 elements: chalcogens

Question 81. Elements of the same group exhibit similar chemical properties—why?
Answer: Because they have similar outer electronic configurations.

Question 82. Why are sodium (Na) and potassium (K) placed in the same group of the periodic table? Give any two reasons.
Answer: (n- l)d1-10 ns1,(n-2)f1-14(n-l)d0-1ns2

Question 83. Give general electronic configurations of 1 transition elements and 2 inner-transition elements
Answer: Due to the presence of unpaired electrons in (n-l)d subshell

Question 84. Which group ofthe long form of the periodic table contains solid, liquid, and gaseous elements?
Answer: Group-17.

Question 85. Find the atomic number of an element that belongs to the third period and group 17 in the periodic table.
Answer: The atomic number ofthe given element = 17

Question 86. An element belongs to the third period of p -block. It has five valence electrons. Predict its group.
Answer:

Group ofthe element= 10 + no. of valence electrons = 10 + 5 = 15

NCERT Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 3 Classification of Elements Very Short Q&A

Question 87. What is the reason for the strong reducing character of s-block elements?
Answer: Since they have low ionization energy.

Question 88. Which one of the following exhibits paramagnetism? Sc3++, Cr3+, Cu+, Zn2.
Answer: Cr3+ : [Ar]3d3. Due to the presence of unpaired electrons, it exhibits paramagnetism.

Question 89. Name the elements with which even and odd series of 4th, 5th, and 6th periods begin.
Answer: Even series begins with K, Rb, and Cs. The odd series begins with Cu, Ag, and Au.

Question 90. How many periods and groups are there in the modem version of Mendeleev’s table?
Answer: There are 7 periods and 9 groups of a modern version of Mendeleev’s periodic table.

Question 91. Arrange the following elements in the increasing order of their first ionization enthalpy. Li, Be, Na, Mg
Answer:
Na < Li < Mg < Be

Question 92. Arrange the following elements in the decreasing order of their electro-negativity. Si, N, F, Cl
Answer:  F >Cl > N> Si

Question 93. What are the various factors due to which the ionization enthalpy of the main group elements tends to decrease down a group?
Answer: The two factors are Atomic size and screening effect.

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 3 Classification Of Elements And Periodicity In Properties Fill In The Blanks

Question 1. Mendeleev’s periodic law was similar to the law proposed by the scientist______________.
Answer: Lothar Meyer

Question 2. In Mendeleev’s periodic table, the______________incomplete period.
Answer: Seventh

Question 3. The starting elements of even series are K, Rb, and ______________period is an
Answer: Cs

Question 4. The starting elements of odd series are______________Au.
Answer: CU

Question 5. Meneleev’s triad elements are Ag and are the ______________ fundamental property of the element.
Answer: Transition elements

Question 6. ‘The elements from 58Ce to 71Lu are called ______________
Answer: lanthanides

Question 7. Be, Mg, Ca are called______________1L
Answer: Alkaline Earth

Question 8. Cu, Ag, Au are called______________metals.
Answer: Coinage

Question 9. S, Se, Te are called ______________
Answer: Chalcogens,

Periodicity in Properties Class 11 NCERT Short Questions and Answers

Question 10. The potential of s -s-block elements is. Except Be and______________ the s -block elements response to the flame test.
Answer: Low

Question 11. Except Be and______________the s -block elements response to the flame test.
Answer: Mg

Question 12. The s -s-block elements of the fourth, fifth, and sixth periods can form complex compounds by vacant d -orbital. in as they have ______________.
Answer: Coordinate Covalency

Question 13. Noble metals are chemically______________.
Answer: Insert

Question 14. F-block elements are _ the presence of odd electrons. block elements generally form colored in nature due to the omplex compounds.
Answer: Paramagnetic

Question 15. Block elements Generally from colored complex compounds ______________.
Answer: d

Question 16. Zn, Cd, and are not they are d-block elements.
Answer: Hg

Question 17. The element with electronic configuration ls22s22p4 is presentin group______________.
Answer: 16

Question 18. The general electronic configuration of transition
elements is______________
Answer: (n-1)d1- 10-10 ns1-2

Question 19. Effective nuclear charge = total nuclear change ______________.
Answer: Screening Constant,

NCERT Solutions for Classification of Elements Class 11 Very Short Questions

Question 20. The IUPAC name of the element having an atomic number 150 is______________
Answer: Unpentrilum

Question 21. For homonuclear diatomic molecule, covalent radius = ______________x intemuclear distance.
Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 22. The internuclear distance of the HCl molecule is 1.36 A and the covalent radius of the chlorine atom is 0.99 A. Thus, the covalent radius of the hydrogen atom will be______________.
Answer: 0.37

Question 23. The covalent radius of an element is ______________ der Waals radius.
Answer: Shorter

Question 24. Anionic radius is ______________ radius.
Answer: Greater

Question 25. On moving from left to right across a period, the acidic property of oxide of element______________.
Answer: Increases

Question 26. Hydrides of most of the non-metals are ______________nature.
Answer: Colvent and nonpolar

Question 27. The first ionization potential of carbon is. the second ionization potential is ______________.
Answer: Increases

Question 28. Among the halogens,______________ nature.
Answer: Idonine

Question 29. Electron affinity of Be and are ______________ almost same.
Answer: Mg

Question 30. In a particular energy Level(orbit), the Followers the orders s>p>f.
Answer: Screening effect,

Question 31. In the case of elements belonging to the same group, ionic radii with increases in atomic number ______________.
Answer: Increases

Question 32. F-,Ar,Mg2+,Rb+ are inons ______________
Answer: Isoelectronic

Chapter 3 Classification of Elements Very Short Q&A Class 11

Question 33. The ionization enthalpy of Cu and K can be explained based on______________.
Answer: Screening effect

Question 34. of the atom of any element and the first ionization enthalpy of its anion (unit -ve charge) are the same.
Answer: Electron affinity

Question 35. Atomic mass = Atomic volume x______________.
Answer: Density

Question 36. Low solubility of Li2CO3 and MgCO3 in water can be explained by______________.
Answer: Diagonal relationship.

NCERT Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Short Question And Answers

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Short Question And Answers 

Question 1. Which one of the following is associated with λ = A Broglie wave of longer wavelength a proton or an I electron moving with the same velocity?
Answer:

λ = \(\frac{h}{m v}\)

∴ \(\frac{\lambda_p}{\lambda_e}=\frac{m_e}{m_p}\)

⇒ \(m_p>m_e\)

∴ \(\lambda_e>\lambda_p\)

Question 2. Mention the difference in angular momentum of the electron belonging to 3p and 4p -subshell.
Answer:

In the case of p -p-orbitals, the value of the azimuthal quantum number Is 1. Hut the magnitude of angular momentum of an electron present in any subshell depends on the value of l. It is Independent ofthe value of the principal quantum number n.

Orbital angular momentum= \(\sqrt{l(l+1)} \times \frac{h}{2 \pi}\)

Thus, there is no difference in angular momentum of the electrons belonging to 3p and 4p -subshells.

Question 3. Are the differences in energy between successive energy levels of a hydrogen-like atom the same? Explain.
Answer:

No, the differences are not the same. The energy of an electron revolving in ‘ n ‘th orbit, En \(=-\frac{2 \pi^2 m z^2 e^4}{n^2 h^2}\)

Hence, the difference in energy between first (n = 1) and second (n = 2) shell

⇒  \(E_1-E_2=-\frac{2 \pi^2 m z^2 e^4}{h^2}\left(\frac{1}{1^2}-\frac{1}{2^2}\right)=-\frac{2 \pi^2 m z^2 e^4}{h^2} \times \frac{3}{4}\)

Similarly \(E_2-E_3=-\frac{2 \pi^2 m z^2 e^4}{h^2}\left(\frac{1}{2^2}-\frac{1}{3^2}\right)\)

= \(-\frac{2 \pi^2 m z^2 e^4}{h^2} \times \frac{5}{36}\)

Obviously, E1– E2±E2– E3

NCERT Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 2 Short Question and Answers

Question 4. Energy by associated the expression, with the \(E_n=-\frac{13.6}{n^2} \mathrm{eV}\) orbite V of. Show-atom \(E_{(n+I)}-E_n=\frac{13.6 \times 2}{n^3} \mathrm{eV},\)
Answer:

⇒ \(E_{(n+1)}-E_n=\left[-\frac{13.6}{(n+1)^2}-\left(-\frac{13.6}{n^2}\right)\right]\)

⇒  \(\left[\frac{13.6}{n^2}-\frac{13.6}{(n+1)^2}\right] \mathrm{eV}=\frac{13.6(2 n+1)}{n^2(n+1)^2}\)

If the value of n is very large, then (2n + 1)= 2n and

⇒ \((n+1) \approx n \quad\)

∴ \(E_{(n+1)}-E_n=\frac{13.6 \times 2 n}{n^2 \times n^2}=\frac{13.6 \times 2}{n^3} \mathrm{eV}\)

Question 5. de Broglie wavelength of the wave associated with a moving electron and a proton are equal. Show the velocity of the electron is greater than that of the proton.
Answer:

According to de-Broglie’s theory applicable to microscopic particles like electron-\(\lambda=\frac{h}{m v}\)[m =maSsofthe moving particle, v = velocity ofthe moving particle].

Now if the mass and velocity of the electron are me and ve and the mass and velocity of the proton are mp and vp respectively then according to the question

⇒  \(\frac{h}{m_e v_e}=\lambda=\frac{h}{m_p v_p}\)

∴ \(m_e v_e=m_p v_p \quad \text { or, } \frac{v_e}{v_p}=\frac{m_p}{m_e}\)

But, mp > me so, ve> vp (proved)

Question 6. Calculate the accelerating potential that must be applied on a proton beam to give it an effective wavelength of 0.005 nm.
Answer:

λ = \(\frac{h}{m v}=\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}{1.67 \times 10^{-27} \times v}\)

∴ v = 7.94 × 104m.s-1

If the accelerating potential is V volts, then energy acquired by the proton =eV. This becomes the kinetic energy ofthe proton.

Hence \(e V=\frac{1}{2} m v^2\)

e V = \(\frac{1}{2} m v^2\)

∴ v = 32.8v

Question 7. Arrange the following radiations in the order of their increasing frequencies
Answer:

  1. The amber light of traffic signals,
  2. FM radio waves
  3. X-rays
  4. Cosmic rays

Answer:

2 < 1 < 3 < 4

Question 8. In the case of a 15X-atom, five valence electrons are. If the spin quantum number of B and R is +1 then find the group(s) of electrons with three of the quantum numbers the same.
Answer:

The spin quantum number of ‘R’ is given as \(+\frac{1}{2}\) and hence that of ‘P’ and ‘Q’ will also be \(+\frac{1}{2}\).

Electrons P, Q, and R are in 3p -orbital, so their n and l values i.e., principal and azimuthal quantum numbers will also be the same.

Therefore, P, Q, and R form a group having three quantum numbers the same. Both A and B belong to 3s having the value of n = 3, l = 0 and m = 0. Hence they also have values of three quantum numbers the same.

Question 9. How are the following affected by the increase in intensity ofthe incident light?

  1. Threshold frequency,
  2. The kinetic energy of the emitted electrons,
  3. Strength photoelectric current.

Answer: No effect

  1. Remains the same
  2. Increases.

Question 10. Give examples of the production of Photons from electrons and electrons from photons.
Answer:

When high-velocity electrons (cathode rays) strike the surface of hard metals like tungsten, platinum, etc., X – rays are produced.

When a light of suitable frequency or any other electromagnetic radiation strikes a metal surface, electrons are ejected from it.

Question 11. Mention die factors affecting the kinetic energy of the photoelectrons. Does the maximum kinetic energy depend on the intensity of light?
Answer:

  1. The frequency of the incident radiation and
  2. Work function ofthe metal.
  3. Maximum kinetic energy does not depend on the intensity ofthe incident light.

Question 12. Why does the photoelectric work function differently for different metals?
Answer:

  1. Electrons in a metal are delocalized and move freely throughout the crystal lattice of the metal.
  2. Hence each electron has to do some work to overcome the force of attraction of the metal ions.
  3. The amount of energy required to eject the electrons (known as work function) depends on the metal. Hence, different metals have different work functions.

Question 13. Explain The role of threshold frequency in photoelectric effect is in agreement with the particle nature of light and in disagreement with the wave nature of light’
Answer:

According to the wave theory of light, the photoelectric effect can occur by increasing the intensity of the incident light. However, according to particle theory, there is a minimum frequency (threshold frequency), for each metal below which, the photoelectric effect is not possible (no matter how high the intensity of light).

It has been experimentally proved that the photoelectric effect depends on the frequency of the incident light but not on its intensity. The threshold frequency of each metal is unique.

Hence photoelectric effect can be successfully explained with the help of the particle nature of light.

Question 14. Mention the property of electromagnetic radiation (wave nature or particle nature or both) that can best explain the following phenomena—

  1. Photoelectric effect
  2. Interference
  3. Black body radiation
  4. Diffraction
  5. Einstein’sequation (e = hv)
  6. Planck’s equation{e – me2).

Answer:

  1. Particle nature
  2. Wave nature
  3. Particle nature
  4. Wave nature
  5. Both wave and particle nature
  6. Particle nature

Question 15. Indicate spectral regions corresponding to Lyman, Balmer, Paschen & Brackettseries in the line spectrum of hydrogen.
Answer:

  1. Lyman series →Ultraviolet
  2. Balmer series → Visible
  3. Paschen series → Infrared
  4. Brackett series → Far infrared

Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 2 NCERT Solutions Short Questions

Question 16. Give two examples of the particle nature of electromagnetic radiation.
Answer:

When light of a suitable frequency strikes a metal, photoelectrons are ejected from its surface. This phenomenon (of photoelectric effect) supports the particle nature of electromagnetic radiation.

The phenomenon of black body radiation also supports the particle nature of electromagnetic radiation.

Question 17. Give the Rydberg formula for the calculation of the wave number of various spectral lines ofthe spectrum. What is the value Rydberg constant?
Answer:

Rydberg’s formula: \(\bar{v}=R\left[\frac{1}{n_1^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right]\)

Where = 1, 2, 3, 4,…. etc;

n2 =n1+1. = n1 + 2, = n1 + 3, …………………… etc.

R = Rydberg’s constant = 109678cm-1 ; v =wave number

Question 18. Indicate all the possible pathways (involving one or more steps)for the transition of an excited electron from the 4th orbit to the ground state.
Answer:

  • n4→ n1
  • n4→ n1→ n1
  • n4→ n3→ n1 and
  • n4→ n3 → n2→ n1

Question 19. What are the ground state and excited state of an electron?
Answer:

When the electrons in an atom are in their lowest (normal) energy state, they revolve in their respective orbits without losing energy. This state of the atom is called its ground state.

When energy is supplied to an atom by subjecting it to electric dischdt&eior high temperature, an electron in the atom may jump from its normal energy level (ground state) to some higher energy level, by absorbing a definite amount of energy. This state of the atom is called the excited state

Question 20. What do you understand by stationary states?
Answer:

According to Bohr’s theory of the hydrogen atom, electrons revolve around the nucleus in some fixed orbits, and during its motion, the electron does not lose energy. For this reason, these orbits are known as electronic orbits at stationary states.

When an electron stays in such an orbit, it does not remain stationary at all. Had it been so, the electron, being attracted by the nucleus would have fallen onto the nucleus. The electron always remains in motion to overcome the influence of nuclear attractive force

Question 21. Differentiate Itetween Rydbergformula & Balmerformula.
Answer:

The Rydberg formula is used to calculate the wave number of different series of lines of the spectrum of hydrogen or Hlike atoms. It is given by

⇒ \(\bar{v}=R\left[\frac{1}{n_1^2}-\frac{1}{n_2^2}\right] Z^2(Z=1 \text { for hydrogen })\)

Where R = Rynx = 1, 2, 3, etc, n2 = n1 + 1 , n1 + 2, n1 + 3 , etc.

When n1 = 2 in the Rydberg formula, it is called the Balmer formula.

Balmer formula is given by \(\bar{v}=R\left[\frac{1}{2^2}-\frac{1}{n^2}\right], \text { where } n=3,4,5 \cdots \text { etc. }\)

Question 22. Prove that, the velocity of an electron revolving in the first orbit is twice that revolving in the second orbit of the H-atom.
Answer:

The velocity of the electron in the nth orbit

v = \(\frac{2 \pi e^2}{n h}\)

∴  \(m v r=\frac{n h}{2 \pi} \text { and } r=\frac{n^2 h^2}{4 \pi^2 m e^2}\)

The velocity of electron in second orbit \(v_2=\frac{2 \pi e^2}{2 \times h}\)

Therefore \(\frac{v_1}{v_2}=\frac{2 \pi e^2}{h} \times \frac{2 h}{2 \pi e^2}=2\)

therefore \(\frac{v_1}{v_2}=\frac{2 \pi e^2}{h} \times \frac{2 h}{2 \pi e^2}=2 \quad \text { or, } v_1=2 v_2\)

Question 23. Derive a relation between kinetic energy and de Broglie wavelength associated with a moving electron.
Answer:

We know, the kinetic energy (E) of the particle moving with velocity v, is given by, \(E=\frac{1}{2} m v^2\) or, 2E = mv2

or, 2mE = m2v2

⇒ \(m v=\sqrt{2 m E}\)

Question 24. What happens to the de Broglie wavelength associated with a moving particle if its velocity is doubled?
Answer:

The de Broglie wavelength reduces to half its initial value

⇒ \(\text { [as } \left.\lambda=\frac{h}{m v} \text {, or } \lambda \propto \frac{1}{v}\right]\)

Question 25. A hard-struck cricket ball does not produce waves. Why?
Answer:

Due to the large size of the cricket ball, its mass is large and hence its wavelength is negligible.

Therefore \(\lambda \propto \frac{1}{m}\)

Structure of Atom Class 11 Short Q&A

Question 26. Two particles P and Q are moving with the same velocity, but the de Broglie wavelength of P is thrice that of Q. What do you conclude?
Answer:

Since \(\lambda^{\circ} \frac{1}{m}, \lambda_P \propto \frac{1}{m_P} \text { and } \lambda_Q \propto \frac{1}{m_Q}\)

⇒\(\frac{\lambda_P}{\lambda_Q}=\frac{m_Q}{m_P}, \text { or } \frac{m_Q}{m_P}=\frac{\lambda_P}{\lambda_Q}=\frac{3}{1} \text { or, } m_Q=3 \times m_P\)

∴ Mass of Q is Thrice that of P.

Question 27. Compare the wavelengths of a molecule of each 02 and C02, travelling with the same velocity.
Answer:

Since \( \lambda \propto \frac{1}{m} ; \quad \lambda_{\mathrm{O}_2} \propto \frac{1}{32 \mathrm{u}} \text { and } \lambda_{\mathrm{CO}_2} \propto \frac{1}{44 \mathrm{u}}\)

[ V Molar mass of O2 & CO2 are 32u & 44u respectively]

Thus, the wavelengths of a molecule of each O2 and CO2 traveling with the same velocity is in the ratio 11:

Question 28. Is there any significance of Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle in our daily life?
Answer:

In our daily life, we deal with objects of ordinary size. So the uncertainties in their position and momentum are very small as compared to the size and momentum of the n- n-object respectively. So, such uncertainties may be neglected. Thus, the uncertainty principle has no significance in our daily life.

Question 29. Why does Bohr’s model contradict Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle?
Answer:

According to Bohr’s theory, negatively charged particles (electrons) inside an atom revolve around the nucleus in well-defined orbits having a fixed radius.

To balance the nuclear attractive force, electrons must move with a definite velocity. However, according to the uncertainty principle, it is impossible to determine simultaneously the exact position and the momentum (or velocity) of a microscopic particle like an electron. Thus, Bohr’s model contradicts Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle.

Question 30. Explain why the uncertainty principle is significant only for subatomic particles, but not for macroscopic objects.
Answer:

The position of a subatomic particle can be located accurately by illuminating it with some electromagnetic radiation.

The energy of the photon associated with such radiation is sufficient to disturb a subatomic particle so that there is uncertainty in the measurement of the position and momentum of the subatomic particles. However, this energy is insufficient to disturb a macroscopic object.

Question 31. Why is it not possible to overcome the uncertainty of Heisenberg’s principle using devices having high precision?
Answer:

Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle has no relation with the precisions of measuring devices.

AVe knows that the subatomic particles are very tiny and thus cannot be seen measured even under a powerful microscope; To velocity or to locate the position of the subatomic particles, they are illuminated (struck, protons) with suitable electromagnetic radiation.

Hence, the precision of measuring devices is not possible in overcoming Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle.

Question 32. How many radial nodes are present in

  1. 3s -orbital and 
  2. 2p -orbital?

Answer:

Radial nodes of 3s -orbital =n – l -1 = 3 – 0 – 1 = 2

Radial nodes of 2p -orbital = n- l -1 = 2 – 1 – 1 = 0

Question 33. How many radial nodes and planar nodes are present in 3p -orbital?
Answer:

No. of radial nodes = n-l-1

= 3-1-1

= 2-1

= 1

No. of planar nodes =l=1

Total no. of nodes = n- 1 = 3- 1 = 2

Question 34. What do you mean by the Acceptable values of e and Corresponding wave functions that are obtained by solving the Schrodinger wave equation for h-atom?
Answer:

No, atomic orbitals do not possess a sharp boundary. This is because the electron clouds are scattered to a large distance from the nucleus. The density of electron clouds decreases with increasing distance from the nucleus but theoretically, it never becomes zero

Question 35. In which direction the value of

  1. ψ2px
  2. ψ2py
  3. ψ2pz , is the highest? Px

Answer:

  • At the negative and positive direction of the x -x-axis.
  • At the negative and positive direction of y -y-axis.
  • At the negative and positive direction of the z-axis.

Question 36. Why s -orbital does not possess directional properties?
Answer:

The angular part of the wave function of s-orbital does not depend on θ and ∅

As a result, a symmetrical distribution of electron density occurs with increasing distance from the nucleus. Thus, s -the orbital is spherically symmetrical and does not possess directional properties.

Question 37. Indicate the subshells present in the M -M-shell. How many orbitals are present in this shell?
Answer

In the case of M-shell, the principal quantum number, n = 3. The values of azimuthal quantum no. Z are’ 0 ‘, ‘ 1’, and ‘2’.

This means that the M-shell contains three subshells, namely, ‘p’ and ‘ d’. For each value of‘ Z ’, the magnetic quantum number ‘ m ’ can have 2Z + 1 values. Therefore M-shell contains 2Z+ 1 orbital.

Question 38. Write the values of the azimuthal quantum number ‘l’ in the third energy level and(it) 3d -subshell of an atom.
Answer:

In the third energy level, the principal quantum number n = 3

Values of azimuthal quantum no., ‘ Z ’ are 0, 1, and 2.

For any d -subshell, 1 = 2.

Question 39. What is the maximum number of electrons that can be accommodated in the subshell with 1 = 3?
Answer:

For every value of’ Z ‘, ‘ m ’ can have 2Z + 1 values.

Since For Z = 3, m can have 2Z+ 1 values, i.e., 2 × 3 + 1 = 7 values. Therefore, the number of orbitals in the given shell = 7.

The maximum number of electrons that can be accommodated in these orbitals = 2×7 = 14 [v each orbital can accommodate a maximum of 2 electrons].

Question 40. What is the maximum number of electrons that can be accommodated in an orbital with m = +3?
Answer:

Each value of the magnetic quantum number ‘m’ indicates only one orbital and each orbital can accommodate a maximum of 2 electrons.

This means that the orbital Indicated by m = +3 can accommodate a maximum of 2 electrons.

Question 41. When Be is bombarded with a -particles, a new element viz carbon Is formed whereas, when gold is bombarded with a -particles, no new elements are formed. Explain.
Answer:

There are 79 protons in the nucleus of a gold (7gAu) atom, while α -particles are helium nuclei with 2 unit positive charges.

The approaching α -particles are repelled strongly due to high positive charges of Au nuclei and thus suffer deflection.

On the other hand, there are only 4 protons in the nucleus of the beryllium (4Be) atom are very weak compared to those between the gold nuclei and o – particles, due to the low positive charge of the Be nucleus. Thus, the fast-moving a -particles collide with Be nuclei and cause splitting

⇒  \({ }_4^9 \mathrm{Be}+{ }_2^4 \mathrm{He} \longrightarrow{ }_6^{12} \mathrm{C}+{ }_0^1 n\)

NCERT Solutions Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 2 Short Questions

Question 42. Why are atomic spectra not continuous?
Answer:

Each electron in an atom is associated with a definite energy corresponding to different energy levels. These electrons absorb energy from various external sources (like heat, light, etc.) and are promoted to higher energy levels. These excited electrons radiate different amounts of energy and return to the ground state.

Since the difference between any two energy levels is fixed, the atomic spectra obtained are discontinuous line spectra having fixed wavelengths. The spectrum so obtained consists of a few bright lines but does not contain all the possible spectral lines corresponding to a range of given wavelengths. Thus, atomic spectra are not continuous.

Question 43. With the help of Bohr’s theory, how will you determine the kinetic energy of hydrogen or hydrogen-like atoms?
Answer:

Let the no. of positive charges in the nucleus of a given atom or ion be Z.e (Z = atomic no., e = charge of a proton). According to Bohr’s theory, the electron present in that atom or ion revolves around the nucleus only in stationary orbits.

Let the radius ofthe stationary orbit be ‘r’ For the stability of the atom, the coulombic force must be equal to the centrifugal force of the electron moving with a velocity

⇒  \(\frac{Z e^2}{r^2}=\frac{m v^2}{r} \text { or } \frac{1}{2} m v^2=\frac{Z e^2}{2 r}\)

Question 44. What is the precessional motion of the orbit?
Answer:

According to Sommerfeld’s relativistic correction of the atomic model, an electron revolves in an elliptical orbit around the nucleus, which is located at the focus of the ellipse.

  • This results in a continual change in the mass and velocity of the electron. The mass of the moving electron increases with its velocity.
  • The velocity of this electron is maximum when closest to the focus of the ellipse (perihelion) and minimum when farthest from the focus (aphelion). Because of its increased mass at the perihelion, the electron experiences a stronger force of attraction from the nucleus.
  • This compels the electron to deviate from its original orbit to a new and identical orbit, which lies in the same plane. The perihelion moves each time the electron completes a revolution.
  • Thus the entire electron orbit moves about an axis passing through the nucleus. This phenomenon is known as Sommerfeld’s precession or precessional motion of the orbit.

Question 45. Name the noble gas and give its atomic number if the number of d -d-electrons present in this atom is equal to the difference in the no. of electrons present in the p and s- s-subshells
Answer:

The noble gas is krypton (Kr). Its atomic number = 36

Electronic configuration: ls22s22p63s23p63d104s24p6

  • Number of s -electrons = 2 + 2 + 2 + 2 = 8
  • Number of p -electrons = 6 + 6 + 6 = 18
  • Number of d -electrons = 10

∴ Number of p -electrons number of s -electrons =18-8 = 10= number of d -electrons

Question 46. There is a wavelength limit beyond which the spectrum of any given series of the H-atom becomes continuous. Why?
Answer:

The energy difference between the first and second orbits is maximum. With the increase in the value of the principal quantum number (n), the energy difference between two successive orbits decreases. Consequently, after a particular value of n, the energy levels become very closely spaced and as a result, they seem to be continuous.

Question 47. How will you prove that electrons are negatively charged particles with a definite mass?
Answer:

Under the influence of an electric field the cathode rays as well as the electron beam, are deflected towards the positive plate of the electric field. Cathode rays also neutralize the gold leaf ‘ electroscope, charged with positive electricity.

Thus it can be proved that electrons are negatively charged. A light paddle wheel placed in the path of cathode rays, begins to rotate, showing that cathode rays are made of matter particles.

Question 48. Calculate the number of particles present in 0.1 g electron.
Answer:

Number of electrons = \(\frac{\text { Total mass of electrons }}{\text { Mass of Celestron }}\)

= \(\frac{0.1 \mathrm{~g}}{9.11 \times 10^{-28} \mathrm{~g}}\)

=\(1.0977 \times 10^{26}\)

Question 49. The charge-to-mass ratio of an electron is 1836 times greater than that ofa proton. Establish a mathematical relation to compare their masses.
Answer:

Given \(\frac{e}{m_e}=1836 \times \frac{e}{m_p}\) However the charge on 1 electron Is the same as that of 1 proton

⇒ \(\frac{1}{m_e}=\frac{1836}{m_p}\)

or, mp = 1836 x me

Question 50. Two discharge tubes containing H2 and O2 gas respectively are subjected to electrical discharge at low pressure. Will there be any difference like cathode rays and anode formed inside the tube?
Answer:

In both cases, cathode rays with identical properties are produced, because these rays are independent of the nature of the material of the cathode and the gas used in the discharge tube. However, in these two cases, anode rays with different properties are produced since these rays depend on the nature of the gas used in the discharge tube.

Question 51. Explain the generation ofthe positively charged particles in the discharge tube when hydrogen gas is used.
Answer:

Due to the high voltage in the discharge tube, H2 and D2 are dissociated into H and D atoms.

Due to the knockout of electrons from atoms or molecules present in the discharge tube by cathode rays, H+2, D+2, H+, and D+ ions are produced.

Similarly, HD+ ions are also produced by the knockout of electrons from a few HD molecules (produced by a combination of H and D atoms)

Question 52. How many protons will be needed to fill a spherical vessel of volume 10cm3? Also, calculate the mass of these protons.
Answer:

Volume of proton \(=\frac{4}{3} \pi r^3=\frac{4}{3} \times 3.14 \times\left(1.2 \times 10^{-13}\right)^3 \mathrm{~cm}^3\)

⇒ \(\frac{\text { Volume of a sphere }}{\text { Volume of a proton }}\)

= \(\frac{10}{\frac{4}{3} \times 3.14 \times\left(1.2 \times 10^{-13}\right)^3}\)

Mass of protons = No. of protons × Mass of a proton

= (1.382 × 1039)× (1.6725× 10-24)g =2.311 × 1015g.

Question 53. An element has an isotope with a mass number of 14. It contains 8 neutrons. Identify the element.
Answer:

Mass number = No. of protons+ No. of neutrons.

Number of protons =14 – 8 =6

The atomic number ofthe element = 6, which means, the element is ‘Carbon’.

Question 54. Why was it necessary to consider the existence of neutrons in the nucleus of an atom?
Answer:

The actual mass of an atom of an element, except hydrogen, Is greater than the sum of the masses of protons and electrons present in that atom. Hence, Rutherford in 1920, proposed the existence of an uncharged particle in an atom having unit mass. This particle was called the neutron.

Question 55. Identify the subshells denoted by the following:

n = 4,l = 2

n = 5, l = 3

 n = 6, l = 4

Answer:

  1. 4d
  2. 5f
  3. 6g
  4. 4s

Question 56. Which quantum number is to be mentioned to distinguish between the electrons present in the -K-shell? 
Answer:

For k-shell (n = 1), l = 0 and m = 0. This indicates that K-shell has only one orbital and this orbital can accommodate a maximum of 2 electrons having spin quantum no., ‘s’ with values +1/2 and -1/2.

So, to distinguish between the two electrons in the K-shell, it is important to indicate their spin quantum numbers.

Question 57. Write the values of n, l, and m for 3p -subshell.
Answer:

For 3p -orbitals, n = 3 , l = 1 and m = +1 , 0, -1 . Hence, 3p -subshell has 3 orbitals.

The values of and ‘ m ‘ for these orbitals are as follows:

  1. n = 3, l = 1 , m = +1
  2. n = 3,  l = l, m = 0
  3. n = 3, l = 1 , m =-1

Question 58. Which of the following two orbitals is associated with a higher energy?

  1. n = 3, l = 2, m = +1
  2. n = 4, l = 0, m = 0

Answer: The algebraic sum of n and / determines the energy of a given subshell. The higher the value of (n + l), of an orbital, the higher its energy. Thus, the orbital with n = 3, l= 2 is associated with a higher energy.

Short Questions and Answers for Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 2

Question 59. Is there any difference between the angular momentum of 3p and 4p -electrons?
Answer:

For any p -subshell, 1=1. The angular momentum of an electron depends on the values of all and is independent of the values of Angular momentum, \(L=\sqrt{l(l+1)} \frac{h}{2 \pi}.\).

Since 1=1 for both the p -subshells (3p and 4p), there is no difference in the angular momentum ofthe electrons occupying those subshells

Question 60. Mention the sequence in which the following orbitals are filled up by electrons: 3d and 4p.
Answer:

The energy of a given subshell is determined by the algebraic sum of’ and ‘Vue., n + 1.

11 the ‘n +l’ values of any two subshells are equal, then the electron enters the one with lower’ n ’. In the 3d -subshell, n = 3 , l = 2 n + l = 3 + 2 = 5 In the 4p -subshell, n = 4, 1=1

B +1 =4 +1 = 5 Since for the 3d -subshell, n = 3 which is lower than that of 4p where n = 4, the electron first enters the 3d -subshell.

Question 61. What is the maximum number of Ad -electrons with spin quantum number s =?
Answer:

For a 4d -subshell, n = 4, 1 = 2 and m = +2, +1,0, -1,-2. This implies that 5 orbitals in this sub-shell can accommodate a maximum of 10 electrons.

5 of these electrons have s = +| and the remaining 5 have -i . Hence maximum number of 4d -electrons with 2 i spin quantum no., s = -1/2 is 5.

Question 62. Is it possible for atoms with even atomic numbers to contain unpaired electrons?
Answer:

Atoms with even atomic numbers can have unpaired electrons. This is by Hund’s rule which states that the orbitals within the same subshell are at first filled up singly with electrons having parallel spin before pairing takes place.

For instance, in the case of a carbon atom (atomic number 6 and electronic configuration: ls22s22px12py12pz0 ), there are two unpaired electrons

Question 63. Write the electronic configurations of Cu and Cr -atoms.
Answer:

Electronic configuration of 29Cu

ls22s22p63s23p23d104s1

Electronic configuration of 24Cr :

ls22s22p263s23p63d54s1

Question 64. Write the electronic configurations of Fe2+ and Cu+ ions.
Answer:

Electronic configuration of Fe2+ (atomic number =26):

ls22s22p63s23p63d26

Electronic configuration of Cu+ (atomic number = 29 ):

1s22s22p63s23p63d10

Question 65. Which of the following has a maximum number of unpaired electrons? (1) Mn2+Fe2+Cu2+ Cr
Answer:

The following are the electronic configurations of the given ions and atoms:

Mn2+: ls22s22p63s23p63d5

Fe2+: ls22s22p63s23p63d9

Cu2-: ls22s22p63s23p63d9

Cr: ls22s22p63s23p63d54s1

Question 66. Calculate the number of unpaired electrons in the N -atom.
Answer:

Electronic configuration of (atomic no. =7): ls22s22p3

According to Hund’s rule, the 3 electrons in the 2psubshell occupy the three p -p-orbitals (px, py, pz) singly.

Hence, the no. of unpaired electrons present in N = 3.

Question 67. How many electrons of the Ne -atom have clockwise spin?
Answer:

Electronic configuration of Ne (atomic number = 10)

Each of the pair of electrons present in each ofthe Is, 2s, 2px, 2py, and 2pz orbitals have a clockwise spin and the other, an anti-clockwise spin. Therefore no. of electrons of Ne-atom having clockwise spin = 5.

Question 68. Write the names and symbols of an atom, a cation, and an anion with the electronic configuration Is2.
Answer:

Atom: Helium (He);

Cation: Lithium-ion (Li+),

Anion: Hydride ion (H ).

Question 69. How many nodes are there in 3s -orbital?
Answer:

The node is the spherical shell (or region) inside the s -s-orbital where electron density is zero. In the case of 3s orbital, there are two such spherical shells where the electron density is zero.

So 3s -orbital has two radial nodes but no angular node (1 = 0). So the total no. of nodes is 2. [No. of nodal surfaces =n- 1, where n is the principal quantum number]

Question 70. How many nodal points are there in 3p -orbital?
Answer:

In a p -orbital the electron density, at the point where the two lobes meet is zero.

This point is called the nodal point of the p-orbital. So each of the three 3p -orbitals (viz., px, py, and pz ) has only one nodal point.

Question 71. Indicate principal and azimuthal quantum numbers for the subshells:

  1. 4s
  2. 5d
  3. 2p
  4. 6

Answer:

  1. n = 4, 1 = 0
  2. n = 5,1 =2
  3. n = 2, 1=1
  4. n = 6, 1 = 3

Question 72. An element (symbol M) has 26 protons in the nucleus. Write the electronic configuration of M2+ and M3+.
Answer:

26M: ls22s22p63s23p63d64s2

26M2+: ls22s22p63s23p63d6

26M3+ : ls22s22p63s23p63d5

Question 73. There are 8 electrons in the 3d -subshell of an atom. Among these, what will be the maximum number of electrons with similar spin? What is the number of odd electrons?
Answer:

  1. Electronic configuration of 3d -subshell
  2. Maximum number of electrons with the same spin = 5.
  3. Number of odd electrons in that atom = 2.

Question 74. Among the following pairs of orbitals which orbital will experience the larger effective nuclear charge?

  1. 2s and
  2. 3s,
  3. 4d and
  4. 4f,
  5. 3d and
  6. 3p

Answer:

  1. 2s
  2. 4d
  3. 3p

Question 75. Indicate the number of impaired electrons in:

  1. P
  2. Si
  3. Cr
  4. Fe and
  5. kr

Answer:

  1. 15P = ls22s22p63s23px13py13pz1 ; number of unpaired electrons = 3.
  2. 14Si = ls22s22p63s23px13py1 number of unpaired electrons = 2.
  3. 24Cr = ls22s22p63s23p63d54s1; number of paired electrons = 6 (5 in d-subshell &1 in s-subshell).
  4. 26Fe = ls22s22p63s23p63d64s2; number of unpaired electrons in d-subshell = 4.
  5. 36Kr = ls22s22p63s23p63d104s24p6; number of unpaired electrons = 0.

Question 76. How many subshells are associated with n =4? How many electrons will be present in the subshells having ms value of \(-\frac{1}{2}\) for n = 4?
Answer:

For n = 4, l = 0, 1, 2, 3. Thus, the energy level with n = 4 contains four subshell (4s, 4p, 4d and 4f).

For n = 4, the number of orbitals (n)2 = (4)2 = 16.

Each orbital will have only one electron with ms = Hence, for n = 4, 16 electrons will be present in the subshells with the value of ms \(=-\frac{1}{2}.\)

Question 77. Write the complete symbol for the atom with the h = 6.626 × 10-34J.s, c = 3.0× 108m-s-1 ] given atomic number (Z) and atomic mass (A)

  1. Z = 17, A = 35
  2. Z= 92, A=233
  3. Z = 4, A = 9

Answer:

⇒ \({ }_{17}^{35} \mathrm{Cl}\)

⇒  \({ }_{92}^{233} \mathrm{U}\)

⇒  \({ }_4^9 \mathrm{Be}\)

Question 78. Yellow light emitted from a sodium lamp has a wavelength (A) of 580 nm. Calculate the frequency (v) and wave number (v) of the yellow light.
Answer:

Wavelength, A =580nm =580 × 10-9m =5.80 ×10-7m.

Frequency of yellow light.

v = \(\frac{c}{\lambda}=\frac{3 \times 10^8 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}}{5.80 \times 10^{-7} \mathrm{~m}}=5.17 \times 10^{14} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}\)

Speed of light, c = 3 × 108 m.s-1  and wave number,

⇒ \(\bar{v}=\frac{1}{\lambda}=\frac{1}{5.80 \times 10^{-7} \mathrm{~m}}\)

= 1.72 × 108 m.s-1

Structure of Atom Chapter 2 Short Answer Solutions Class 11

Question 79. Find the energy of each of the photons which corresponds to light of frequency 3 × × 1015 Hz. Have a wavelength of 0.50A
Answer:

⇒ \(=h v=\left(6.626 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{~J} \cdot \mathrm{s}\right) \times\left(3 \times 10^{15} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}\right)\)

=1.988× 10-18J

E =  \(h v=\frac{h c}{\lambda}\)

= \(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{~J} \cdot \mathrm{s} \times 3 \times 10^8 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}}{0.50 \times 10^{-10} \mathrm{~m}}\)

= 3.978 × 10-15J

Question 80. Calculate the wavelength, frequency, and wavenumber of a light wave whose period is 2.0 × 10-10s.
Answer:

⇒ \(\text { Frequency }(v)=\frac{1}{\text { period }}=\frac{1}{2.0 \times 10^{-10} \mathrm{~s}}=5 \times 10^9 \mathrm{~s}^{-1}\)

⇒ \(\text { Wavelength }(\lambda)=\frac{c}{\lambda}=\frac{3 \times 10^8 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}}{5 \times 10^9 \mathrm{~s}^{-1}}=6 \times 10^{-2} \mathrm{~m}\)

And wavelength \((\bar{v})=\frac{1}{\lambda}=\frac{1}{6 \times 10^{-2} \mathrm{~m}}=16.66 \mathrm{~m}^{-1}\)

Question 81. Electromagnetic radiation of wavelength 242 is just sufficient to ionize the sodium atom. Calculate the ionization energy of sodium in kJ.mol-1
Answer:

Ionisation energy ofsodium (E) = Nhv \(=N h \frac{c}{\lambda}\)

E = \(\frac{\left(6.022 \times 10^{23}\right) \times\left(6.626 \times 10^{-34}\right) \times\left(3 \times 10^8\right)}{242 \times 10^{-9}}\)

= 4.946  ×  105 J.mol-1

= 494.6 kJ-mol-1

Question 82. Electrons are emitted with zero velocity from a metal surface when it is exposed to radiation of wavelength 6800 A. Calculate threshold frequency (vQ) and work function (W0) of the meta
Answer:

Threshold frequency \(v_0=\frac{c}{\lambda_0}=\frac{3 \times 10^8 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}}{6800 \times 10^{-10} \mathrm{~m}}\)

= 4.41 ×  1014 s-1

And the work function of the metal ( wQ) = hv0

= (6.626 × 1034 J.s) ×  (4.41 × 10-14.s-1) =2.92 ×10-19J

Question 83. Which of the following are isoelectronic species i.e., those having the same number of electrons? Na+,K+,Mg2+, Ca2+, S2-,Ar
Answer:

The number of electrons present in

Na+=(11 – 1) =10

K+=( 19 – 1) =18

Mg2+ =(12 – 2) = 10

Ca2+ =(20 – 2)=18

S2- =(1 6+ 2) =18

Ar = 18.

Elance, Na+, and Mg2+ are isoelectronic because they contain 10 electrons each. K+, Ca2+, S2-, and Ar are isoelectronic because they contain 18 electrons each.

Question 84.

  1. What is the orbital angular momentum of a p -electron in \(\frac{h}{2 \pi}\) unit?
  2. The atomic numbers of two elements X and Y are 15 and 27 respectively. Write down the electronic configuration of X3- and Y3+ ions.

Answer:

1. The orbital angular momentum in \(\frac{h}{2 \pi}\) unit is given by \(\sqrt{l(l+1)}\) where l = azimuthal quantum number.

For p -orbital , l = 1.

∴ The orbital angular momentum of p -orbital in \(\frac{h}{2 \pi}\) unit

= \( \sqrt{l(l+1)}=\sqrt{1(1+1)}=\sqrt{2} .\)

2. 15X3- : ls22s22p63s23p6

27Y3+ : ls22s22p63s23p63d6

Question 85.

  1. The electronic configuration of an atom is \([Z](n-2) f^{14}(n-1) d^1 n s^2\). What is the minimum position of the atom in the periodic table and correspondingly what is the atomic number of Z?
  2. Find the number of impaired electrons in the atom of the element having atomic number 16
  3. Which of the following ions does not obey Bohr’s atomic theory? He2++,Li2+,B3+,Be3+

Answer:

Electronic configuration of the given atom:

1. (n-2)f1-14-14(n-1)d0-1 ns2. So, it can be stated that the given atom belongs f-block. Hence, the element is of group IIIB and its electronic configuration is identical to 71Lu of the lanthanoids and Lu of the actinoids. The lowest position available to the atom ofthe element is the 6th period and group-IIlB(3). Thus, it belongs to the lanthanoids and has atomic number 71.

2. The electronic configuration of an atom ofthe element with atomic number 16 is 1s22s22p63s23px23py1 3pz1. Thus, number of unpaired electrons is two.

3.  Be3+does not obey Bohr’s atomic theory because it is 2- an electron system

Question 86. Using s, p, and d notations, describe the orbital with the following quantum numbers.

  • n- 1,
  • 1=0;
  • n = 3;
  • 1 = 1
  • n = 4;
  • 1 = 2;
  • n = 4;
  • l = 3

Answer:

  • 1s
  • 2s
  • 4d
  • 4f

Question 87. Explain, giving reasons, which of the following sets of quantum numbers are not possible

  • n = 0, l = 0, m1 = 0, ms = \(+\frac{1}{2}\)
  • n = 1, l = 0, m1 = 0, ms = \(-\frac{1}{2}\)
  • n = 1, l =1, m1 = 0, ms = \(+\frac{1}{2}\)
  • n = 2, l = 1, m1 = 0, ms = \(-\frac{1}{2}\)
  • n = 3, l = 3, m1 = -3, ms = \(+\frac{1}{2}\)
  • n = 3, l = 1, m1 = 0, ms = \(+\frac{1}{2}\)

Answer: This is not possible because n cannot be zero. and are not possible because the value of n cannot be equal to 1.

Question 88. How many electrons in an atom may have the following quantum numbers?

  1. n = 4,
  2. ms = \(+\frac{1}{2}\)
  3. n = 3, l = 0

Answer: For n = 4, the total number of electron

= 2n² = 2 × 4² = 32 . Among these 32 electrons, half,16 electrons will have s or ms = \(+\frac{1}{2}\) and the other 16 electrons will have ms = \(-\frac{1}{2}\)

n = 3 , l = 0 means 3s -subshell. The maximum number of electrons in this subshell is two.

NCERT Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 2 Structure of Atom Short Q&A

Question 89. Show that the circumference of the Bohr orbit for the hydrogen atom is an integral multiple of the de Broglie wavelength associated with the electron revolving around the orbit.
Answer:

According to Bohr’s postulate, angular momentum \(m v r=\frac{n h}{2 \pi}\) [n = principle quantum number = 1, 2, 3, 4 …………..

Again, according to the de Broglie equation, for a revolving electron, wavelength \((\lambda)=\frac{h}{m v}\)

Substituting the value of A from (2) in (1) we have, 2pi r = n lambda (n = 1,2, 3, 4….)

Thus, the circumference of the Bohr orbit is an integral multiple ofthe de Broglie wavelength ofthe revolving electron.

Question 90. An ion with mass number 37 possesses one unit of negative charge. If the ion contains 11.1% more neutrons than electrons, find the symbol of the ion
Answer:

As the ion contains one unit of negative charge, the ion has one electron more than the number of protons. Total number of electrons and neutrons =37 + 1 = 38. Let the number of electrons in the ion = x.

Hence, number of neutron \(=x+\frac{11.1}{100} \times x=1.111 x\)

Again, x+ 1. 111 x = 38 or, x = 18

Thus, the number of electrons present in the ion = 18.

Thus, the number of protons present in the ion =18-1 = 17

So, the element’s atomic number is 17 i.e., the atom is chlorine. its symbol ,\({ }_{17}^{37} \mathrm{Cl}^{-}\)

Question 91. An ion with mass number 56 contains 3 units of positive charge and 30.4% more neutrons than electrons. Assign the symbol to this ion.
Answer:

The ion contains three units of positive charge. Thus, the number of electrons in the ion is three less than that of the number of protons. Number of protons + number of neutrons mass number =56. let, the number of electrons in the ion be x.

Number of neutrons present in the ion \(=x+\frac{30.4}{100} \times x=1.304 x\)

Again, the total number of electrons and neutrons = 53. x + 1.304x = 53 or, 2.304x = 53 Thus, number of electrons present in the ion = 23 and the number of protons =  23 + 3 = 26 .

The element with atomic number 26 is Fe and their symbol will be \({ }_{26}^{56} \mathrm{Fe}^{3+}\).

Question 92. Nitrogen laser produces radiation at a ‘wavelength of 337.1 nm. If the die number of photons emitted is 5.6 × 1024, calculate the power of this laser.
Answer:

⇒ \(E=N h v=N h \frac{c}{\lambda}\)

= \(\frac{\left(5.6 \times 10^{24}\right) \times\left(6.626 \times 10^{-34}\right) \times\left(3.0 \times 10^8\right)}{\left(337.1 \times 10^{-9}\right)}\)

= 33 × 106J

Question 93. The dual behavior of matter proposed by de Broglie led to = 1.52 × 10-38, the discovery of an electron microscope often used for the highly magnified images of biological molecules and another type of material. If the velocity of the electron in this microscope is 1.6 × 106m.s-1, calculate the de Broglie wavelength associated with this electron.
Answer:

Velocity of an electron (y) = 1.6 ×106m.s-1 and mass of an electron (m) = 9.108 × 10-31 kg

∴ de Broglie wavelength \((\lambda)=\frac{h}{m v}\)

= \(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}{9.108 \times 10^{-31} \times 1.6 \times 10^6}\)

= \(4.55 \times 10^{-10} \mathrm{~m}=455 \mathrm{pm}\)

Question 94. Similar to electron diffraction, a neutron diffraction microscope is also used for the determination of the structure of molecules. If the wavelength used here is 800 pm, calculate the characteristic velocity associated with the neutron.
Answer:

Mass of neutron (m) = 1.675 × 1027kg

According to de Broglie equation, wavelength \((\lambda)=\frac{h}{m v}\)

∴ Velocity ofa neutron \(v=\frac{h}{m \lambda}\)

Or, \(v=\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}{1.675 \times 10^{-27} \times 800 \times 10^{-12}}\)

or, v = 494m.s-1

Question 95. The bromine atom possesses 35 electrons. It contains 6 electrons in a 2p orbital. 6 electrons in 3p orbital and 5 electron in 4p orbital. Which of these electrons experiences the lowest effective nuclear charge?
Answer:

The value of n for the 4p electrons is highest and hence they are the furthest from the nucleus and thus experience the lowest effective nuclear charge.

In a given orbit, for the same type of subshells, the higher the value of n, the lower the value of effective nuclear charge.

Short Questions for Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 2 NCERT

Question 96. In Rutherford’s experiment, generally, the thin foil of heavy atoms, like gold, platinum, etc. have been used to be bombarded by the a -particles. What difference would be observed from the above results if the thin foil of light atoms like aluminum etc. is used?
Answer:

The nucleus of heavy atoms contains a large amount of chlorine. positive charge. Thus, the a -particles that move towards the nucleus are deflected back due to strong repulsion by the nucleus. Those particles which pass through the region closer to the nucleus are deflected in different directions. On the other hand, the nucleus of light atoms contains a small amount of positive charge. Hence, a negligible number of particles are deflected back or are deflected by small angles.

Question 97. Symbol \({ }_{35}^{79} \mathrm{Br}\) and \({ }^{79} \mathrm{Br}\) symbol \({ }_{35}^{79} \mathrm{Br}\) and \({ }^{35} \mathrm{Br}\) are not acceptable. Answer briefly.
Answer:

⇒ \({ }_{35}^{79} \mathrm{Br}\) is not acceptable because mass number should be written as superscript and atomic number as subscript. 35Br is not acceptable because the atomic number of an element is fixed but the mass number is not fixed. It depends on the isotopes. Thus, an indication of mass number is essential.

Question 98. Why is the line spectrum of an element known as the fingerprint of its atoms?
Answer:

The line spectrum of any element consists of several lines having different wavelengths. It is observed that each element has its characteristic spectrum, different from those of all other elements.

The spectra of any two elements can never be identical. Hence, the line spectrum of an element is known as the fingerprint of its atoms

Question 99. Does atomic orbitals possess a sharp boundary? Explain.
Answer:

No, atomic orbitals do not possess a sharp boundary. This is because the electron clouds are scattered to a large distance from the nucleus.

The density of electron clouds decreases with increasing distance from the nucleus but theoretically, it never becomes zero

Question 100. Why do we consider each stationary state as an energy level with a definite value?
Answer:

Electrons in a particular orbit do not lose or gain energy. In other words, the energy of an electron in a particular orbit remains constant. Hence, these orbits or stationary states are known as energy levels having definite values.

Question 101. There are nine electrons in the 5f-orbital of an atom of an element Mention the maximum number of electrons that have the same spin and number of impaired electrons.
Answer:

Element Mention the maximum number of electrons that have the same spin and number of impaired electrons-

Thus, the maximum number of electrons with the same spin will be 7, and several unpaired electrons will be 5.

Question 102. Explain whether 3f-orbital is present in P-atom. State the rule
Answer:

Electronic configuration: 1s22s22p63s23p1x3py13z1

Pliosphorous atom does not contain 3f- subshell.

For 3f-subshell, n = 3 . Hence, the maximum value of f = (n- l) = 2 i.e., d -subshell.

Question 103.

  1. What are the quantum numbers by which an electron In an atom can be designated?
  2. What Is the maximum number of quantum numbers that may be the same or two electrons of an atom?

Answer:

  1. Principal quantum number (n), azimuthal quantum number (Z), magnetic quantum number (m), and spin quantum number (s) are required to designate an electron in an atom.
  2. The maximum number of quantum numbers that may be the same for two electrons of an atom is 3.

NCERT Class 11 Structure of Atom Short Answer Questions

NCERT Solutions For Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 2 Structure Of Atom Warm-Up Exercise Question And Answers

Question 1.  If the energy of the first Bohr’s orbit is -13.58 eV of a hydrogen atom, calculate the energy of the third Bohr’s orbit of that atom.
Answer:

According to Bohr’s theory

⇒ \(E_n=-13.58 \times \frac{Z^2}{n^2} \mathrm{eV}=-13.58 \times \frac{1^2}{3^2} \mathrm{eV}=-1.5089 \mathrm{eV}\)

Question 2. Which quantum numbers specify the size and the shape of electronic orbital?
Answer:

The size of an electronic orbital is determined by the principal quantum number (n) and the azimuthal quantum number (f) determines the shape of an electronic orbital.

Question 3. Write down the values of the quantum numbers of the electron in the outermost shell of sodium.
Answer:

The electron present in the outermost shell of sodium is identified as 3s. Its principal quantum number n = 3, azimuthal quantum number 1 = 0, magnetic quantum number, m = 0 and spin quantum number, s = +1/2.

Question 4. Which is the lowest principal energy level that permits the existence of off-subshell?
Answer:

For f-subshell, the value of the azimuthal quantum number Z is 3. So the lowest principal energy level that permits the existence of an f -subshell is the fourth shell (i.e, N -N-shell)

Question 5. The unpaired electrons in A1 and Si are present in the 3p orbital. Which electrons will experience a more effective nuclear charge from the nucleus?
Answer:

The nuclear charge of silicon (+14) is greater than that of aluminum (+13). Hence the impaired 3p -electron of silicon will experience a more effective nuclear charge.

Question 6. Mention the most important application of the de Broglie concept.
Answer:

The de-Broglie concept is utilized in the construction of an electron microscope used for the measurement of the size of very small objects.

Question 7. What is the physical significance of Ψ and Ψ²?
Answer:

The wave function has no physical significance, while Ψ² gives the probability density i.e., the probability of finding the electron at any point around the nucleus.

Question 8. Write Schrodinger’s wave equation in the briefest possible form.
Answer:

The briefest form of Schrodinger’s wave equation is, \(\widehat{\mathrm{H}} \psi=E \psi\), where H is known as the Hamiltonian operator.

Question 9. What do you mean by ‘doughnut’?
Answer:

The two lobes of d -the orbital are distributed along the z-axis and a sphere is situated with the nucleus at its center. This sphere is called a ‘doughnut’

Question 10. How many angular nodes are present in dÿ Identify them.
Answer:

Two angular nodes are present (they pass through the origin and lie at an angle of 45° with the xz and zipline and themselves lie perpendicular to each other)

Question 11. Why do p-orbitals possess directional properties?
Answer:

The angular part of the wave function of p -p-orbital depends on the value of 6 and <p. Thus, p -p-orbitals possess directional properties.

Question 12. Why is the de Broglie wave termed a matter wave?
Answer:

Since the de Broglie wave is associated with fast-moving tiny material particles, it is also known as matter wave. The wavelength of such waves depends on the mass and velocity of the particles.

Question 13. Write the mathematical expression for Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle-
Answer:

⇒ \(\Delta x \cdot \Delta p \frac{h}{4 \pi},\) where Ax and Ap are uncertainties in the determination of exact position and momentum respectively.

Question 14. How many photons are emitted in the transition of the electron from the first to the first energy level of the H-atom?
Answer:

There is only one electron in the H-atom. Hence, during the transition of electrons from the fourth to the first energy level, only one photon is emitted.

Question 15. How is the radius of an electronic orbit related to the principal quantum number?
Answer:

The relation between the radius (r) ofthe electronic orbit and the principal quantum number (n) is given by, Therefore, the radius of the orbit is directly proportional to the square ofthe principal quantum number.

Question 16. How would you obtain the line spectrum of hydrogen?
Answer:

When hydrogen gas at low pressure is taken in the discharge tube and the light emitted on passing electric discharge is resolved in a spectroscope, the spectrum obtained is the line spectrum of hydrogen.

Question 17. Explain why Rutherford did not mention the presence of neutrons in the proposed nuclear model of the atom.
Answer:

In the year 1911, when Rutherford proposed the nuclear model of the atom, the existence of neutrons was still not known (In fact, neutrons were discovered in 1932). Hence, Rutherford did not mention the presence of neutrons.

Question 18. From this experiment, it was concluded that the entire mass and positive ‘charge is present at the center of an atom.
Answer:

From Rutherford’s -particle scattering experiment, it was concluded that the entire mass and positive charge are present at the center of an atom.

Question 19. What is the nuclear model of the atom?
Answer:

The atomic model which describes the rotation of electrons in different orbitals around the positively charged nucleus is called the nuclear model of the atom.

Question 20. Identify the isotopes and isobars from the following list of atoms with a given number of protons and neutrons.
Answer:

A and B have the same number of protons but different numbers of neutrons. Hence, A and B are isotopes. C and D have different numbers of protons, but the sum of the protons and neutrons, in both cases, are the same. Hence, C and D are isobars.

Question 21. Find the total number of electrons present in l mol methane.
Answer:

1 methane (CH4) molecules 1 C-atom + 4 H- atoms Number of electrons in CH4 molecule =1  6 + 4 × 1

= 10. Therefore, the total number of electrons in l mol of CH4 = 6.022 × 1023 × 10 = 6.022 × 1024

Chapter 2 Structure of Atom Short Questions and Answers Class 11

Question 22. What are electromagnetic radiations? What is their velocity in a vacuum?
Answer:

Electromagnetic waves with wavelength ranging between 0.003 and 0.3m are known as microwaves. As these waves collectively travel in the same direction over a long distance, they are used in radars.

Question 23. State the principle of the formation of electromagnetic radiation.
Answer:

Electromagnetic waves with wavelengths ranging between 0.003 and 0.3m are known as microwaves. As these waves collectively travel in the same direction over a long distance, they are used in radars.

Question 24. What are microwaves? Why are they used in radars?
Answer:

Electromagnetic waves with wavelength ranging between 0.003-0.3m is known as microwaves. As these waves collectively travel in the same direction over a long distance, they are used in radars.

Question 25. Arrange the various types of radiations constituting the electromagnetic spectrum, in the decreasing order of their frequencies.
Answer:

The various radiations in the electromagnetic spectrum in decreasing order of their frequencies are as follows:

Cosmic rays > γ-rays> X-rays> UV-rays > visible rays > microwaves > radio waves.

Question 26. What is black body radiation Out of red and blue light, which one is associated with photons possessing higher energy?
Answer:

Blue light has a higher frequency (v) than red light. The energy of each photon = hv. Consequently, the photons associated with blue light have higher energy.

Question 27. Energy associated with X-rays is higher than that of visible light— explain.
Answer:

The energy of electromagnetic radiation refers to the energy of its photons (hv).

Since, νx-ray > νvisible light -hence, hνx-ray > hνvisible light  Thus, the energy of X-rays is higher than that of visible light.

Question 28. State the Pauli exclusion principle. Write the electronic configurations of 24Cr3+ and 27CO3+
Answer:

24Cr3+: ls22s22p63s23p63d3

27CO3+: ls22s22p63s23p63d6

Question 29. What is the maximum number of emission lines when the excited electron of the H atom in n = 6 drops to the ground state?
Answer:

The number of lines produced in a spectrum when an electron returns from the nth energy state to the ground state

= ∑(n2-n1) =∑(6- 1)

= ∑(5) = 5 + 4 + 3 + 2+1

= 15.

Question 30. A certain particle carries 2.5 = 1.602 × 10-19 of static electric charge. Find the no. electrons present in It.
Answer:

Charge of electron = 1.602 × 10-19 C (excluding -ye sign

∴ No. electrons contained in \(=\frac{2.5 \times 10^{-16} \mathrm{C}}{1.602 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{C}}=1560\)

Question 31. Calculate the mass of 1 mol electron.
Answer:

Mass = Avogrado number x Mass of one electron

= (6.022 × 1023) x (9.11 × 10-28)

= 0.5486 mg

Question 32. A discharge tube containing H2 gas at low pressure is subjected to high voltage. Will there be er Ission of protons from the anode?
Answer:

In a discharge tube, anode rays are not emitted from the anode. Therefore protons are not emitted from the anode. However, they are produced from H2gas, by the knockout of the electrons by high-speed cathode rays.

Question 33. Write the nuclear reaction for the emission of neutrons. Indicate the e/m value of the neutron.
Answer:

When beryllium foil is bombarded with or -particles, it undergoes a nuclear reaction which primarily leads to the emission of chargeless particles called the neutron.

⇒ \({ }_4^9 \mathrm{Be}+{ }_2^4 \mathrm{He} \longrightarrow{ }_6^{12} \mathrm{C}+{ }_0^1 n\)

Question 34. Mention the symbol, charge, and names of the discoverers of positron, -meson, and neutrino.
Answer:

When beryllium foil is bombarded with or -particles, it undergoes a nuclear reaction which primarily leads to the emission of chargeless particles called neutrons.

Question 35. Write the symbols of two anions isoelectronic with K+ 
Answer:

K+ion: ls22s22p63s23p6.

Two anions that are isoelectronic with K+ -ion are S2- and Cl

Question 36.

  1. What is the stationary energy level of an electron? 
  2. Write the electronic configurations of CO2+ and As3+ ions. (Atomic number of Co is 27 and As is 33).

Answer:

According to Bohr’s theory, the energy level in which an electron emits no energy is known as the stationary energy level of that electron.

27CO2+ : ls22s22p63s23p63d7

33AS3+ : ls22s22p63s23p63d104s

Question 37. State the Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle. Calculate the de Broglie wavelength associated with an electron moving with a velocity of 1.0 × 107 m/s. (Mass of an electron: 9.1 x 10-31kg
Answer:

Wavelength \(\lambda=\frac{h}{m v}\) [h = Planck’s constant, m = mass of an electron, v = velocity of an electron]

λ = \(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}{9.1 \times 10^{-31} \times 1.0 \times 10^7}=7.281 \times 10^{-11} \mathrm{~m}\)

Question 38. Write down the electronic configuration of 14Si and 25Mn stating the underlying principle. Which of the following orbitals is not possible? 1 p, 2d, 3s, 3f
Answer:

First Part: The underlying principle is ‘The Aufbau principle! For electronic configuration see article no. 2.10.3.

Second Part: Ip, 2d, and 3f orbitals are not possible.

Question 39. When an electron jumps down from the 5th Bohr orbit to the 3rd Bohr orbit in the H atom, how many numbers of spectral lines will be formed?
Answer:

When an electron jumps down from the 5th Bohr orbit to the 3rd Bohr orbit in an H atom it can jump directly or it can jump to the 4th Bohr orbit first and from it, jump to the 3rd Bohr orbit. Thus, we get 3 spectral lines for these 3 transitions.

Question 40. Write the values of the four quantum numbers of the electron(s) in the outermost shell of the Cr-atom.
Answer:

According to the electronic configuration of b 24Cr(ls²2s²2p63s23p63d54s1), the outermost shell configuration of the Cr-atom is: 4s¹. therefore Quantum numbers for 4s¹: n = 4, l = 0, m = 0 , s= \(+\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 41. Which is most paramagnetic among Cu2+, and Fe2+, and why?
Answer:

From the electronic configurations it is observed that the number of unpaired electrons in Cu2+, Fe2+, and Cr3+, ions are 1, 4, and 3 respectively. So Fe2+, ion, containing the highest number of unpaired electrons, will be most paramagnetic.

NCERT Class 11 Chemistry Chapter 2 Short Question and Answers

Question 42. Why splitting of spectral lines is observed when the source producing the atomic spectrum is placed in a magnetic field?
Answer:

In the presence of a magnetic field, the orbitals present in a sub-shell (which were originally degenerate) take up different orientations and hence their degeneracy is lost.

Electronic configuration: ls22s22p63s23p63d104s1.

Question 43. Write two differences between orbit and orbital. Two sets of four quantum numbers of an electron are (n = 4, 1 = 3, m = 3, s = -) and n = 3, 1 = 2, 2 m = -2, s = 0). Which one of these sets is not correct and why?
Answer:

The second set is incorrect because the value of s can be either \(\frac{1}{2} \text { or }-\frac{1}{2}\) but can never be zero.

Question 44. Write the electronic configuration of Cu+ and Cr2+ ions (Atomic numbers of Cu and Cr are 29 and 24 respectively).
Answer:

Cu+: ls22s22p63s23p63d10

Cr2+: 1s22s22p63s23p63d4

Question 45. A cation M3+ has 23 electrons. What is the atomic number of M?
Answer:

Number of electrons present in the neutral M atom = 23 + 3 = 26. So, die number of protons in the nucleus = 26. Hence, the atomic number of M is 26.

Question 46. What is the unit of Planck’s constant in S.I.? What other physical quantity has the same unit?
Answer:

The SI unit of Planck’s constant ‘h’ =kg-m².s1

The SI unit of angular momentum (mvr) is also kg-m².s1

Question 47. Do atomic orbitals have sharp boundaries?
Answer:

No, atomic orbitals do not have sharp boundaries because the probability of finding an electron even at a large distance is never zero, although it may be very small.

NCERT Class 3 Maths Mela Chapter 14 Question Answer The Surajkund Fair

NCERT Class 3 Maths Solutions Chapter 14 The Surajkund Fair

Question 1. Mark the malas that are symmetrical with(✓)
Answer:

NCERT Class 3 Maths Solutions Chapter 14 The Surajkund Fair Malas Symmetrical

NCERT Class 3 Maths Mela Chapter 14 The Surajkund Fair

Question 2. Mark the malas that are symmetrical with(✓) and that are not symmetrical with (X)
Answer:

Read and Learn More Class 3 Maths Mela Question and Answers

NCERT Class 3 Maths Solutions Chapter 14 The Surajkund Fair Malas Symmetrical And They Are Not Symmetrical

Symmetrical-1,3,5

Not symmetrical- 2,4

Question 3. Mark the rangoli that are symmetrical with (✓)and that are not symmetrical with (X)
Answer:

NCERT Class 3 Maths Solutions Chapter 14 The Surajkund Fair Rangoli That Are Symmetrical Are Not Symmetrical

Symmetrical -1,4,6

Not symmetrical- 2,3,5

Question 4. Look at the pictures given below. Circle the pictures, which are divided into two mirror halves by the dotted line.

NCERT Class 3 Maths Solutions Chapter 14 The Surajkund Fair Look At The Picture Which Divided Into Two Mirror

Answer: 1,4,7,10

Question 5. Pick the odd one out.

NCERT Class 3 Maths Solutions Chapter 14 The Surajkund Fair Pick The Odd One Out

Answer: 1. 3

Class 3 Maths Chapter 14 The Surajkund Fair Explanation

Question 6. Make identical tiles to fill the gaps below

NCERT Class 3 Maths Solutions Chapter 14 The Surajkund Fair Based On The Given Map

Answer:

1. Which place does the sign   NCERT Class 3 Maths Solutions Chapter 14 The Surajkund Fair Pond show?
Answer: Pond

Maths Mela Class 3 Chapter 14 The Surajkund Fair

2. Find the total number of exit gates in the given map.
Answer:  2